TRACY FIRE STATION 92SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS TRACY FIRE STATION 92 00005 - 6 Certifications Pages...

TRACY FIRE STATION 92 1035 EAST GRANT LINE ROAD, TRACY, CA 95376

CIP NO: 71062

PROJECT MANUAL INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS

ISSUED FOR PERMIT

DECEMBER 15, 2010

ADDENDUM 1 – RESPONSE TO BUILDING PLAN REVIEW COMMENTS

MARCH 19, 2012

S H A H K A W A S A K I ARCHITECTS

1111 Broadway, Suite 1650 Oakland, California 94607

T: (510) 663-6090 F: (510) 663-6093

SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS TRACY FIRE STATION 92

00005 - 1 Certifications Pages

DOCUMENT 00005

CERTIFICATIONS PAGES

Drawings and Specifications for the Architectural work of this Project have been prepared by or under the direction of the following registered Architect. Manan Shah Shah Kawasaki Architects 1111 Broadway, Suite 1650 Oakland, CA 94607 (510) 663-6090



Drawings and Specifications for the Civil work of this Project have been prepared by or under the direction of the following registered Engineer. Chris Wood Luk and Associates 738 Alfred Nobel Drive Hercules, CA 94547 (510) 724-3388



Drawings and Specifications for the Structural work of this Project have been prepared by or under the direction of the following registered Engineer. Kevin Zucco ZFA Engineers 1212 Fourth Street, Suite Z Santa Rosa, CA 95404 (707) 526-0992



Drawings and Specifications for the Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing work of this Project have been prepared by or under the direction of the following registered Engineer. Max Saiidnia Fard Engineers 309 Lennon Lane, Suite 200 Walnut Creek, CA 94598 (925) 932-5505

Parviz Saiidnia Fard Engineers 309 Lennon Lane, Suite 200 Walnut Creek, CA 94598 (925) 932-5505



Drawings and Specifications for the Landscape work of this Project have been prepared by or under the direction of the following registered Landscape Architect. Jacque Keller Keller Mitchell & Co. 302 Fourth Street Oakland, CA 94607 (510) 451-9987



Drawings and Specifications for the Traffic Engineering work of this Project have been prepared by or under the direction of the following registered Civil Engineer. Brian Sowers Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc 6130 Stoneridge Mall Road, Suite 370 Pleasanton, CA 94588 (925) 398-4862

END OF DOCUMENT


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 00010 - 1 Table of Contents

DOCUMENT 00010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROJECT MANUAL INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

Document 00001 Project Title Page 00005 Certifications Pages 00010 Table of Contents

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

Document By Owner

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Document General and Supplementary Conditions By Owner

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01110 Summary of Work 01300 Administrative Requirements 01310 Project Management and Coordination 01352 Design-Build Procedures 01400 Quality Requirements 01455 Water Vapor Emission Control Testing 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01565 Site Waste Management Program 01560 Temporary Tree & Plant Protection 01600 Product Requirements 01630 Product Substitution Procedures 01700 Execution Requirements 01730 Cutting and Patching 01770 Closeout Procedures 01780 Warranties 01820 Systems Demonstration

DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION

Section 02065 Removal Work 02200 Earthwork 02430 Storm Drainage 02465 Auger Cast Displacement Piles 02513 Asphalt Concrete Paving 02515 Concrete Surface Improvements 02577 Pavement Marking 02700 Site Utilities 02705 Water Systems 02710 Sanitary Sewer Systems



DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION (Continued)

Section 02717 Site Fire Water Systems 02731 Decomposed Granite Paving 02810 Irrigation Systems 02821 Chain Link Fencing 02823 Metal Fencing and Gates 02824 Manual Gates 02825 Automatic Gates 02870 Site and Street Furnishings 02912 Import Topsoil 02930 Tree, Shrub, Vine and Groundcover Planting

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE

Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03365 Dye Stained Ground and Polished Concrete

DIVISION 4 MASONRY

Section 0420104200 Concrete Masonry Unit Construction (Essential Facilities) 04820 Textured Concrete Masonry Assemblies

DIVISION 5 METALS

Section 05110 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel 05500 Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS

Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06174 Fabricated Wood Trusses 06180 Glued Laminated Construction 06200 Finish Carpentry 06400 Architectural Woodwork

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07190 Water Repellents 07210 Building Insulation 07265 Building Envelope Underlayment 07310 Fiberglass Reinforced Shingles 07412 Metal Roofing 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07840 Firestopping 07900 Joint Sealers

DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08210 Wood Doors 08310 Access Doors and Panels 08360 Sectional Overhead Doors 08410 Aluminum Framed Storefronts 08555 Aluminum Clad Wood Windows and Doors 08625 Tube Skylights



08700 Hardware 08725 Low Energy Door Operators 08800 Glazing

DIVISION 9 FINISHES

Section 09220 Portland Cement Plaster 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09300 Tile 09620 Sports Flooring 09657 Resilient Base 09685 Carpet Tiles 09900 Paints and Coatings 09911 Site Painting 09960 High Performance Coating

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

Section 10115 White Boards 10210 Wall Louvers 10351 Fiberglass Flagpole 10440 Signage 10500 Metal Lockers and Work Benches 10520 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 10800 Traffic Signs 10810 Toilet Accessories 10811 Thermoplastic Traffic Markings 10825 Shower Enclosures

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT

Section 11452 Appliances and Miscellaneous Equipment

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS

Section 12494 Roll Down Shades

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Not used.

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS

Not used.

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL

Section 15050 General Requirements – Mechanical 15300 Automatic Fire Sprinkler System 15400 Plumbing 15650 Vehicle Exhaust System 15700 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning



DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL

Section 16000 General Requirements and basic materials and methods 16300 Networking- Telecommunications, CATV and Speaker Systems 16500 Lighting and Lighting Controls 16600 Standby Engine Generators – Automatic Transfer Switch 16700 Fire Alarm System 16800 Flashing Beacons

END OF DOCUMENT


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01110 - 1 Summary of Work

SECTION 01110

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Project consists of construction of the Tracy Fire Station 92, 18001035 West East Grant Line Road, Tracy, CA 9530495376, as indicated in Contract Documents.

1. Items noted "NIC" (Not In Contract) will be furnished and installed by Owner or under separate contract.

a. Hazardous Materials Removal: Known hazardous materials will be removed under separate contract (NIC); inform Owner immediately where materials suspected of being hazardous are encountered.

B. Division 1: Where provisions of General Conditions relate to Project administration or work-related requirements of the Contract, those paragraphs are expanded in Division 1 - General Requirements.

1. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements contain information necessary for completion of every part of Project.

2. Where items of Work are done under subcontracts, each item shall be subject to these conditions.

1.2 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. This section includes administrative provisions:

1. Work sequence. 2. Contractor use of premises. 3. Field engineering. 4. Regulatory requirements and reference standards. 5. Owner furnished, Contractor installed products. 6. Special definitions.

1.3 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner and Architect.

1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. Limit use of premises for Work and construction operations and to allow for work by other contractors.

B. Coordinate use of premises and access to site under direction of Owner.



1.5 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Provide field engineering services; establish lines and levels by use of recognized engineering survey practices.

B. Locate and protect control and reference points.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Architect has contacted governing authorities and reviewed design requirements of local, state and federal agencies for applicability to Project.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for contacting governing authorities directly for necessary information and decisions bearing upon performance of Work.

B. Reference Standards:

1. For Products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of referenced standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

2. Applicable date of each standard is that in effect as of date on proposal or date on Contract where no proposal is available, except when a specific date is specified.

1.7 OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Select products are to be furnished and paid for by Owner and installed by Contractor:

1. Refer to Drawings.

B. Owner's Responsibilities:

1. Arrange for and deliver shop drawings, product data, and samples to Contractor.

2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.

3. Inspect products jointly with Contractor on delivery.

4. Submit claims for transportation damage.

5. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items.

6. Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, inspections, and service.

C. Contractor's Responsibilities:

1. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples.

2. Receive and unload products at site.

3. Inspect jointly with Owner for completeness and damage.



4. Handle, store, and install products.

5. Finish products as required after installation.

6. Repair or replace items damaged by Work of this Contract.

1.8 SPECIAL DEFINITIONS

A. Approved: Approved, directed, selected, required, ordered, designated, accepted, acceptable, and satisfactory shall require written action by Architect.

B. Equal, or Approved Equal: Equal and approved equal shall require requests for substitutions for products or manufacturers not specified.

1. Requests for substitutions shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 01630 - Substitutions.

C. Furnish: Furnish means supply and deliver to Project, unless otherwise defined in greater detail.

D. Install: Install is used to describe operations at Project, from inspecting and unloading, to completion in place, ready for intended use.

E. Provide: Provide means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, unless otherwise defined in greater detail.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01300 - 1 Administrative Requirements

SECTION 01300

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section describes general procedural requirements for ongoing submittals.

1. Construction progress schedules. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Shop drawings. 4. Product data. 5. Samples. 6. Manufacturers' certificates.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01350: LEED submittal requirements. 2.1. Section 01400: Test reports, manufacturer's field reports, and mock-ups. 3.2. Section 01630: Product substitution request procedures. 4.3. Section 01700: Manufacturers’ instructions. 5.4. Section 01770: Closeout requirements including Project Record Documents. 6.5. Section 01780: Warranties.

1.2 PROCEDURES

A. Submittals: Transmit each item under form furnished by or acceptable to Architect; where Contractor proposes to use customized submittal transmittal form or no form is furnished, submit sample to Owner and Architect for approval prior to use.

1. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, major supplier.

a. Date and attach sequential identification number for each new submittal.

b. Identify each resubmittal using original submittal number and sequential identification clearly indicating item is resubmitted.

2. Identify pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number, and Specification section number as appropriate.

3. Identify deviations from Contract Documents.

4. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.

5. Contractor: Review and stamp submittals from subcontractors prior to submitting to Architect.

a. Review submittals and indicate where conflicts occur with Contract Documents and with work of other subcontractors.



b. Return submittals that vary significantly from Contract Documents for correction and resubmittal prior to submitting to Architect.

c. Submittals that vary significantly from Contract Documents and that fail to indicate thorough Contractor review prior to submission to Architect will be returned without review.

d. Cursory review and stamping of subcontractor submittal by Contractor shall not be acceptable.

e. Submittals will be required to be complete and grouped by each specification section. Entire section shall be submitted at one time. Partial submittals will not be reviewed.

d.f. Resubmittals shall not exceed 25% of all submittals and second resubmittals shall not exceed 5% of all submittals, based upon quantities listed in submittal schedule. For any additional required reviews, the Architect with request compensation.

B. Initial Schedules: Submit initial progress schedule and schedule of value in duplicate within 15 working days after award of Contract.

1. After review by Owner and Architect revise and resubmit where required.

C. Comply with progress schedule for submittals related to Work progress. Coordinate submittal of related items.

D. After Architect review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identify changes made since previous submittal.

1. Allow for not less than 15 working days for Architect review of submittals; do not include Architect review time in Construction Progress Schedule, submit information in time to allow additional time for revision and resubmittal.

E. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply.

F. The project is a single building design for both Fire Stations at different site locations. Tracy Fire Station 92 will be under construction at the same time as Tracy Fire Station 96. It is therefore assumed that 1 set of submittals for architectural materials (except exterior finishes), building structural framing (not including foundations), mechanical, building plumbing, and building electrical will be reviewed. 2 separate submittals one for each station will be reviewed for architectural exterior finishes, structural foundations, civil earthwork, utilities, paving, traffic signal and striping materials, and landscape materials. Also see owner requirements.

G. RFI’s: Submit all RFI’s as Adobe pdf’s via email. RFI’s for clarifications must apply to both buildings where systems are the same.

E.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit construction progress schedule with separate item for each major trade and operation, identifying first day of each week.



1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate stages and logically grouped activities.

2. Show projected percentage of completion for each item of Work as of time of each progress Application for Payment.

3. “Submittal Schedule”: Show Contractor submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, and samples, and product delivery dates; deliver to Architect per approved “Submittal Schedule.”

a. “Submittal Schedule” may be incorporated into construction progress schedule or may be separate, Contractor option.

b. Architect’s Review Period: Architect will be expedient in review, however, Contractor shall schedule submittals recognizing possibility Architect may reject and may require resubmittal.

c. Contract extension shall not be allowed for Contractor’s failure to properly schedule submittals to allow for Architect requiring resubmittal.

B. Progress Schedule Format: Submit both horizontal bar chart and network analysis system using critical path method as approved by Owner and Architect.

1. Submit revised progress schedules with each Application for Payment reflecting changes since previous submittal, not less than monthly.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 or another Owner and Architect pre-approved 8-1/2" by 11" paper format; Contractor's standard media-driven printout will be considered on request. Submit within 15 days after award of Contract.

B. Format: Table of Contents of this Project Manual, with modifications as pre-approved by Owner and Architect; identify each line item with number and title of major Specification sections.

C. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor overhead and profit.

D. Revise schedule to list change orders for each Application for Payment.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit six reproducible prints for submittals over 11” by 17”; 11” by 17” and smaller submit Adobe PDF for submittals via email.

B. All reviewed shop drawings will be returned as a PDF file. Contractor to print and distribute as required.

1.6 PRODUCT DATA/MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE

A. Mark each copy to identify applicable Products, models, options, and other data; supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to the Work.

B. Include manufacturers' installation instructions only when required by Specifications or specifically requested by Architect.



1. Maintain copy of manufacturer installation instructions and recommendations in Contractor's field office for review.

C. Submit number of copies Contractor requires, plus one copy to be retained by Architect.

1.7 SAMPLES

A. Submit full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect's selection when not specified or shown on Drawings or Schedules.

B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of Product, with integral parts and attachment devices.

C. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work.

D. Include identification on each sample, giving full information.

E. Submit number of samples required by Contractor plus one to be retained by Architect and one to be retained by Owner.

1. Maintain one set of approved samples at Project Field Office.

F. Sizes: Provide following sizes unless otherwise specified.

1. Flat or Sheet Products: Minimum 6" square, maximum 12" by 12". 2. Linear Products: Minimum 6", maximum 12" long. 3. Bulk Products: Minimum one pint, maximum one gallon.

1.8 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES

A. Submit certificates, in duplicate in accordance with requirements of each Specification section.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01310 - 1 Project Management and Coordination

SECTION 01310

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Description of Project management and coordination including but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. General Project coordination procedures. 2. Staff names. 3. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 4. Project meetings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01300: Administrative requirements. 2. Section 01820: Systems demonstration.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Specifications sections to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of Work.

1. Coordinate construction operations that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

2. Coordinate work to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements.

3. Make provisions for accommodating items installed by Owner or under separate contracts.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved as needed, outlining special procedures required for coordination.

1. Include required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings; include Architect and Owner in distribution.

C. Verify characteristics of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate work having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connection to, and placing such equipment in service.

D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work indicated diagrammatically on Drawings.

1. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as possible; make runs parallel with lines of building.

2. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01310 - 2 Project Management and Coordination

E. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated; coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Staff Names: Immediately after receipt of notice to proceed or immediately after signing of Contract by Owner and Contractor, submit list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone.

1.4 SUPERVISORY AND ADMINISTRATIVE PERSONNEL

A. Provide supervisory personnel, in addition to Project Superintendent, as required for proper and timely performance of Work and coordination of subcontracts.

B. Provide administrative staff as required to allow Project Superintendent and supervisory personnel to allocate maximum time to Project supervision and coordination.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Schedule and administer Project meetings throughout progress of Work:

1. Pre-construction meeting. 2. Progress meetings at monthly intervals. 3. Pre-installation conferences. 4. Coordination meetings. 5. Special meetings.

B. Make physical arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes and distribute copies within two days to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected.

C. Attendance: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers as appropriate to agenda; Architect, Owner, and Owner and Architect’s consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

D. Suggested Agenda: Review of Work progress, status of progress schedule and adjustments, delivery schedules, submittals, requests for information, maintenance of quality standards, pending changes and substitutions, and issues needing resolution.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01352 - 1 Design-Build Procedures

SECTION 01352

DESIGN-BUILD PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Section describes requirements of Contractor for design-build work as described in various sections.

1. Design-build procedures are specified to assist Contractor in coordinating design-build work.

1.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

A. Contractor acknowledges and accepts responsibility for design, method of construction, and coordination and integration with other trades to achieve architectural design intent of Contract Documents, of those portions of design-build work including sizing, sequence, placement, and details of construction.

B. Contractor guarantees following:

1. Design-build work shall be constructed in compliance with building codes and ordinances in effect and shall be fit and proper for intended use.

2. Where relevant, design and method of construction of design-build work shall not incorporate or employ use of product, process, or technique which may be protected by common law or statutory patent, copyright, or trade secret rights unless Contractor or subcontractor is lawful owner or licensee of same.

C. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, Owner’s Representative, and their agents and employees from and against claims, damages, and expenses resulting from breach or failure by Contractor to perform fully forgoing obligations and specifically agrees to indemnify and hold Owner harmless from claims of Contractor’s employees, agents, subcontractors, suppliers, and third parties and to make good damages to Work, along with attorneys’ fees and costs of additional work by Architect and Owner’s Representative resulting from inadequacies of design, techniques and methods of construction of design-build work.

D. Design, drawings, specifications, and calculations prepared, stamped, and signed by qualified, registered, or licensed engineers shall be by engineers licensed to practice their professions in the State of California as appropriate to design-build work.

1. Plans, specifications, and calculations shall be acceptable to Owner, Owner’s Representative, and applicable authorities.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01352 - 2 Design-Build Procedures

E. Contractor shall provide Owner with copies of current insurance policies covering errors and omissions of persons designing design-build work with maximum deductibles and limits per occurrence as mutually agreed by Owner and Contractor prior to commencement of design-build work at Project site.

1. Provide endorsement to insurance providing for 30 days’ notice to Owner prior to cancellation or material reduction in coverage.

F. Maintain insurance for not less than period equal to applicable statute of limitations for claims arising out of latent defects in works of improvement to real property, if such insurance is not written on an occurrence basis during time design-build work is designed and constructed.

1.3 COORDINATION WITH ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN INTENT

A. Coordinate work of all trades involved.

B. Review proposed layouts with Owner’s Representative and other trades in field prior to commencing work related to design-build work.

1. Layouts not reviewed will be subject to change at no additional expense to the Owner if layouts are found unsatisfactory.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01400 - 1 Quality Requirements

SECTION 01400

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section describes general quality control requirements.

1. General quality control. 2. Manufacturers' field services. 3. Mock-ups. 4. Independent testing laboratory services.


1. Refer to applicable codes and Specifications sections for test requirements.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL, GENERAL

A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.

1.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. When specified in respective Specification sections, require manufacturer or supplier to have qualified personnel provide on-site observations and recommendations.

1. Observe field conditions, including conditions of surfaces and installation. 2. Observe quality of workmanship. 3. Provide recommendations to assure acceptable installation and workmanship. 4. Where required, start, test, and adjust equipment as applicable.

B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect listing observations and recommendations.

1.4 MOCK-UPS

A. Erect field samples and field mock-ups at locations on site as approved in advance and in accordance with requirements where included in Specifications section.

1. Test mock-ups requiring special equipment may be erected at location having access to necessary equipment; coordinate with Architect.

B. Field samples and mock-ups not approved and not capable of being acceptably revised shall be removed from site.

C. Approved field samples and mock-ups may be used as part of Project.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01400 - 2 Quality Requirements

1.5 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

A. An independent testing laboratory shall perform inspections, tests, and other services required by applicable codes and various Specification sections.

1. Owner or Architect may also require independent testing of items where doubts exists that product or system does not conform to Contract Documents.

2. Owner will employ and pay for testing laboratory to provide Project specific testing under applicable codes and Specification sections except where indicated otherwise.

a. Owner employment of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of applicable codes and Contract Documents.

1) Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

b. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by Owner's testing laboratory.

1) Payment for retesting shall be charged to Contractor by deducting inspection and testing charges from Contract amount.

2) Contractor Option: Pay Owner's testing laboratory directly for costs of retesting where acceptable to Owner and testing laboratory.

c. Owner provided testing shall be limited to Project specific testing and shall not include general tests or approvals of materials, equipment or systems.

B. Services shall be performed in accordance with requirements of governing authorities and with specified standards.

C. Reports will be submitted to Architect in duplicate giving observations and results of tests, indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified standards and with Contract Documents.

1. Where required, testing laboratory will submit copy of test results directly to enforcing agency.

D. Contractor shall cooperate with testing laboratory personnel; furnish tools, samples of materials, design mix, equipment, storage and assistance as requested.

1. Notify Owner, Architect and testing laboratory sufficiently in advance of expected time for operations requiring testing services.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01455 - 1 Water Vapor Emission Control Testing

SECTION 01455

WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Section describes water vapor emission control testing requirements for new concrete slabs indicated to receive flooring materials susceptible to failure or damage due to excess moisture in substrate.

1. Apply vapor emission control system treatment to concrete when testing indicates vapor emission levels exceed flooring manufacturer specified maximum allowable vapor emission.

a. Nonporous Flooring Systems (Such As Resilient Flooring and Epoxy Based Systems): Water vapor emission levels greater than 3 pounds per 1000 square feet unless otherwise recommended by flooring manufacturer.

b. Porous Flooring Systems (Such As Carpet): 5 pounds per 1000 square feet unless otherwise recommended by flooring manufacturer.


1. Section 01400: General quality requirements. 2. Refer to flooring sections for additional preparation requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data on treatment materials proposed for use, test reports on vapor emission, and application information.

B. Test Diagram: Prepare moisture report of each test area.

1. Contractor shall pay for testing for water vapor emission levels.

2. Include name of company performing test, types of testing instruments used, floor plan with each test location identified, starting date, time, and beginning weight, estimated building temperature, stopping date, time and ending weight.

3. Compute pounds of emission, including equations.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Vapor Emission Testing:

1. Perform testing of concrete slab using calcium chloride test just prior to anticipated start of flooring installation.

2. Testing to be performed by qualified testing personnel and Independent Testing Laboratory acceptable to Owner and Architect.



3. Perform three tests for first 1000 square feet and one additional test for each additional 1000 square feet of flooring; conduct tests at areas most likely to have moisture present, at perimeters of room, and at columns.

4. Determine change in weight of moisture-absorbing anhydrous calcium chloride with results indicating amount of moisture transmitting out of concrete slab area.

5. Express value in pounds based on weight of water emitted from 1000 square feet of concrete slab area in 24-hour period.

6. Indicate areas where calcium chloride testing reveals water vapor emission levels greater than 3 pounds per 1000 square feet for nonporous flooring systems and 5 pounds per 1000 square feet for porous flooring.

B. Installer: Manufacturer’s trained personnel or factory-trained authorized installer, with minimum five years successful experience installing concrete vapor emission control system being provided.

C. Manufacturer: Firm with minimum five years successful experience producing moisture vapor control emission products.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply water vapor control system treatment materials within temperature range as recommended by manufacturer, but no higher than 100 degrees F and no lower than 65 degrees F.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide for correcting failure of finished flooring system caused by concrete water vapor emission. Include replacement of finish flooring material and reapplication of adhesive and of vapor emission control system.

B. Warranty Period: Ten years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Water Vapor Emission Control Material: Other materials are acceptable when recommended by flooring system manufacturer for specific applications.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Floor Seal Technology, Inc. (800.572.2344 or 800.925.0221)/System II Treatment.

b. Creteseal (800-278-4273)/CS2000.

c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

1.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine concrete slabs just prior to beginning flooring finish installation while allowing time for preparation and application of vapor emission control system within Project schedule for installation of flooring systems.

B. Concrete surfaces to be tested shall be clean and free of residue, debris, and sealing compounds.

1.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Prepare concrete in accordance with vapor emission control system manufacturer recommendations; prepare control joints and cold joints with manufacturer recommended joint membrane dispersion system.

B. Clean substrate surfaces to receive vapor emission control system treatment and treat irregularities with 100% Portland cement based patching compound and cementitious fill compatible with specified vapor emission control system.

1.3 APPLICATION OF VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Apply water vapor emission control system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions where vapor emissions exceed allowable limits and other manufacturer recommended remedies will not meet requirements within Project schedule.

B. Comply with vapor emission control system manufacturer recommended coverage rates.

C. Allow materials to penetrate and cure, then retest for vapor emission levels.

D. Do not apply flooring finish materials until vapor emission has been reduced to specified limits and to limits as directed by flooring finish manufacturers.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01500 - 1 Temporary Facilities and Controls

SECTION 01500

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section describes temporary construction facilities and temporary controls.

1. Electricity and lighting. 2. Heat and ventilation. 3. Water and sanitary facilities. 4. Construction aids. 5. Temporary enclosures. 6. Barriers. 7. Cleaning during construction. 8. Project identification. 9. Field offices, telephone service, and storage.


1. Section 01565: Site waste management program. 2. Section 01569: Tree protection. 3. Section 01700: Progress cleaning and final cleaning.

C. Provide temporary construction facilities and temporary controls as required to conform to applicable authorities and as required to complete Project in accordance with Contract Documents.

1. Authorities: Contact governing authorities to establish extent of temporary facilities and temporary controls required by authorities.

1.2 ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING

A. Provide electrical service required for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located to allow service and lighting by means of construction-type power cords.

1. Connection to existing on-site electrical service is permitted.

2. Owner will pay costs of energy used from existing on-site services.

B. Provide lighting for construction operations.

1. Permanent lighting may be used during construction; maintain lighting and make routine repairs.

1.3 HEAT AND VENTILATION

A. Provide heat and ventilation as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operation, to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature and humidity.



B. Owner will pay costs of energy used from existing on-site services.

1.4 WATER AND SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide water service required for construction operations; extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by use of hoses.

1. Connection to existing on-site water facilities is permitted.

2. Owner will pay for water used from existing on-site services.

B. Provide and maintain required sanitary facilities and enclosures.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION AIDS

A. Noise, Dust and Pollution Control: Provide materials and equipment necessary to comply with local requirements for noise, dust and pollution control.

B. Fire Protection: Maintain on-site fire protection facilities as required by applicable authorities and insurance requirements.

C. Dewatering: Provide and operate drainage and pumping equipment; maintain excavations and site free of standing water.

1.6 ENCLOSURES

A. Temporary Closures: Provide temporary weather-tight closures for exterior openings for acceptable working conditions, for protection for materials, to protect interior materials from dampness, for temporary heating, and to prevent unauthorized entry.

1. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

1.7 BARRIERS

A. Barriers: Provide barriers as required to prevent public entry to construction areas and to protect adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.

1. Fence: Provide minimum 8 foot high commercial grade chain link or painted solid wood fence around construction site; equip with gates with locks.

B. Barricades: Provide barricades as required by governing authorities.

1.8 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; recycle or dispose of off-site.

B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.

1.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

A. Project Sign: Provide minimum 32 square foot Project identification sign of wood frame and exterior grade plywood construction, painted, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter.



1. Design: As furnished by Architect.

2. Submit to Owner and Architect additional names or changes proposed to Project sign for prior written approval.

3. Erect on site at location established by Architect.

B. Other Signs: Subject to approval of Architect and Owner.

1.10 FIELD OFFICES, TELEPHONE SERVICE, AND STORAGE

A. Office: Provide weather-tight field office, with lighting, electrical outlets, data outlets, heating, and ventilating equipment, and equipped with furniture.

1. Meeting Space: In addition, provide space for Project meetings with table and chairs to accommodate minimum six persons.

2. Telephone Service: Provide telephone service to field office.

3. Facsimile Service: Provide separate FAX line to field office with plain paper facsimile machine.

4. Copier: Provide separate plain paper copier with enlargement and reduction capability.

5. Computer: Provide desktop computer system at Project field office with e-mail capacity and software compatible with Architect word processing system; include separate e-mail line; provide plain paper printer.

a. Digital Camera: Maintain operational digital camera on-site during construction along with software allowing transmission of digital pictures taken on-site via e-mail to Owner and Architect.

B. Storage for Tools, Materials, and Equipment: Limit on-site storage to Project area; provide weather-tight storage, with heat and ventilation for products requiring controlled conditions.

1. Maintain adequate space for organized storage and access.

2. Provide lighting for inspection of stored materials.

1.11 REMOVAL

A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to Substantial Completion Inspection.

B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.

C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01565 - 1 Site Waste Management Program

SECTION 01565

SITE WASTE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Site Waste Management: Comply with applicable authorities for site waste management requirements for diverting Project waste from landfill. Where not required by authorities divert not less than 50% of Project waste from landfill.

1. Effect optimum control of solid wastes. 2. Prevent environmental pollution and damage.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 01500: Temporary facilities and controls.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Inert Fill: A permitted facility that accepts inert waste such as asphalt and concrete exclusively.

B. Class III Landfill: A landfill that accepts non-hazardous waste such as household, commercial, and industrial waste, including construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.

C. Construction and Demolition Waste: Includes solid wastes, such as building materials, packaging, rubbish, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.

1. Rubbish: Includes both combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as paper, boxes, glass, crockery, metal and lumber scrap, tin cans, and bones.

2. Debris: Includes both combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves and tree trimmings that result from construction or maintenance and repair work.

D. Chemical Waste: Includes petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalis, herbicides, pesticides, organic chemicals and inorganic wastes.

E. Sanitary Wastes:

1. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, distribution, or consumption of food.

2. Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Site Waste Management Program: Prior to commencement of Work, schedule and conduct meeting with applicable authorities to discuss proposed Site Waste Management Program.

1. Develop mutual understanding relative to details of recycling, and rebate programs.

2. Prepare and submit a written and graphic Site Waste Management Program including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Indicate procedures to be implemented.

b. Estimate total Project waste to be generated, and estimated cost of disposing of Project waste in landfills.

c. Estimate total cubic yards of following waste categories to be diverted from landfill.

1) Clean dimensional wood, palette wood. 2) Plywood, oriented strand board, and medium density fiberboard. 3) Cardboard, paper, packaging. 4) Other items as directed by Owner and Architect.

d. Estimate amounts of following waste categories in appropriate units (weight, feet, square yards, gallons).

1) Metals. 2) Gypsum board. 3) Carpet. 4) Paint. 5) Other items as directed by Owner and Architect.

e. Revise and resubmit Site Waste Management Program as required by Owner and Architect.

1) Review of Contractor's Site Waste Management Program will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for control of pollutants and other environmental protection measures.

B. Submit summary of solid waste generated by Project with each application for progress payment, on form acceptable to Owner and Architect; include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices identifying Project and waste delivered to following locations.

1. Recycling Centers. 2. Class III landfills. 3. Inert fills.

C. Prepare 3-ring binder with rebate information and product documentation as required for Owner to qualify for rebate programs; submit binder with final closeout submittals.

1.4 RECYCLING PROGRAM

A. Recycling: Implement recycling program that includes separate collection of waste materials of types as applicable to Project; recycling program to be applied by Contractors and subcontractors.



B. Recycling: Implement recycling program that includes separate collection of waste materials of following types as applicable to Project; recycling program to be applied by Contractors and subcontractors.

1. Land clearing debris. 2. Asphaltic concrete. 3. Concrete. 4. Masonry materials. 5. Ferrous metal. 6. Non-ferrous metal. 7. Clean dimensional wood and palette wood. 8. Plywood, oriented strand board, and medium density fiberboard. 9. Paper - bond. 10. Paper - newsprint. 11. Cardboard and paper packaging materials. 12. Glass. 13. Plastics. 14. Gypsum board (unpainted). 15. Paint. 16. Rigid foam. 17. Carpet and pad. 18. Beverage containers. 19. Porcelain plumbing fixtures. 20. Insulation. 21. Others as appropriate.

C. Handling: Keep materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to recycling process.

1. Clean materials contaminated prior to placing in collection containers.

2. Arrange for collection by or delivery to appropriate recycling center or transfer station that accepts construction and demolition waste for purpose of recycling.

D. Participate in Re-Use Programs: Rebates, tax credits, and other savings obtained for recycled or re-used materials shall accrue to Contractor.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01600 - 1 Product Requirements

SECTION 01600

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section describes basic product requirements governing material and equipment.

1. General product requirements. 2. Product list. 3. Quality assurance. 4. Delivery, storage, and handling.


1. Section 01300: Submittal of manufacturers' certificates. 2. Section 01630: Product substitution procedures. 3. Section 01770: Operation and maintenance data.

1.2 GENERAL PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS

A. Products include material, equipment, and systems.

B. Comply with Specifications, referenced standards, and applicable codes and regulations as minimum requirements.

C. Provide new materials except as specifically allowed by Contract Documents.

D. Materials to be supplied in quantity within a Specification section shall be by one manufacturer, shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable.

E. Provide equipment and systems composed of materials from a single manufacturer except where otherwise recommended by equipment or systems manufacturer or where otherwise indicated in Contract Documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Within 35 days after award of Contract, submit to Owner and Architect a complete list of major products proposed for installation, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model.

1. Tabulate products by Specification number and title.

B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630 - Product Substitution Procedures.


A. Comply with industry standards and applicable codes except when more restrictive tolerances or requirements indicate more rigid standards or precise workmanship.

B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01600 - 2 Product Requirements

C. Install products straight, true-to-line, and in correct relationship to adjacent materials, with hairline joints, free of rough, sharp and potentially hazardous edges.

D. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.

1. Seismic Anchors: Conform to code requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Transport products by methods to avoid product damage, deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging.

B. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

C. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.

D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

E. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.

F. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection; periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.

G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling and prevent damage.

H. Promptly inspect shipments to assure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

I. Immediately remove from Project products damaged, wet, stained, and products with mold and products with mildew.

1. Take special care to prevent absorbent products such as gypsum board and acoustical ceiling units from becoming wet.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01630 - 1 Product Substitution Procedures

SECTION 01630

PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide products listed in Contract Documents, products by manufacturers listed in Contract Documents, and products meeting specified requirements.

1. Contract Amount: Base on materials and products included in Contract Documents.

a. Where listed in Contract Documents, materials and products by manufacturers not listed shall not be used without Owner’s and Architect’s approval of Contractor's written request for substitution.

2. Purpose: After bidding, substitutions will only be considered where Owner will receive benefit or because specified materials are no longer available due to no fault of Contractor.

a. Owner benefits either from a Contractor proposed reduction of the Contract amount or from a reduction in Contract time based on acceptance of proposed substitution.

b. List proposed cost or time reductions on request for substitution.

c. Requests not including a proposed cost or time reduction will not be considered unless Contractor submits supporting information indicating specified materials are not available.

B. Procedures are described for requesting substitution of unlisted materials in lieu of materials named in Specifications or approved for use in addenda.

1. Refer to Section 01350 for LEED special environmental requirements for substitutions.

1.2 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS

A. Products Identified by Reference Standards: Select product meeting referenced standard for products specified only by reference standard.

B. Named Manufacturers and Named Products: Select products of any named manufacturer meeting Specifications for products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers.

C. Substitutions for Named Manufacturers and Named Products: Submit request for substitution for products and for manufacturers not specifically named where products or manufacturers are named in Specifications.

D. “Or Equal” Clauses: Submit request for substitution for product or manufacturer not specifically named in Specifications where terms "or equal", "or approved equal", or similar references are made.



1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Within a period of 35 days after award of Contract, Owner and Architect will consider formal requests for substitutions only from Contractor as specified in 1.1 Summary.

1. Owner and Architect will consider only one request for substitution for each material; where requests are denied Contractor shall be required to provide specified materials.

2. After initial 35 day period, requests will be considered only when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of Contractor; more than one request for substitution will be considered if necessary.

B. Submit each request with sequentially numbered “Substitution Request Transmittal” acceptable to Owner and Architect; submit separate request for each product and support each request with:

1. Product identification with manufacturer's literature and samples where applicable.

2. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of installation.

C. Submit itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified and list significant variations.

D. Submit data relating to changes in construction schedule.

E. Note effect of substitution on other work, products, or separate contracts.

1. Note if acceptance of substitution could require revision of Contract Documents, Drawings, details or Specifications.

F. Include accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product and amount of net change in Contract price.

1. Include costs to other contractors and costs for revisions to Drawings, details or Specifications.

G. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when:

1. They are indicated or implied on submittals without a formal request from Contractor.

2. They are requested directly by a subcontractor or supplier.

3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.

H. Substitute products shall not be ordered without written acceptance of Owner and Architect.

I. Owner and Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions and reserves right to reject proposals due to insufficient information.



1.4 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION

A. Requests constitute a representation that Contractor:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined it meets or exceeds, in all respects, specified product.

2. Will provide same warranty or longer warranty for substitution as for specified product.

3. Will coordinate installation and make other changes that may be required for Work to be complete in all respects.

4. Waives claims for additional costs that subsequently become apparent.

5. Will pay costs of changes to Contract Documents, Drawings, details and Specifications required by accepted substitutions.

1.5 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES

A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.

1. Architect will recommend that Owner accept or reject substitution request.

2. Upon request, Architect will provide cost for changes to Contract Documents, Drawings, details and Specifications required for substitutions.

B. Notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.

END OF SECTION

ATTACHMENT: REFER TO ATTACHED PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS FORM.



MATERIAL/PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

To: Shah Kawasaki Architects

Project Name: Tracy Fire Station 92

Request Number: __________________________________________________________

A. We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item:

1. Section ______________ Sub-article _________________________________

2. Specified Item ____________________________________________________

3. Proposed Substitution (Manuf., Type, Model, etc.)________________________

________________________________________________________________

B. Complete following:

1. We propose to provide Owner cost credit (including costs for changes by other trades) of

________________________________________________________________

2. Does this substitution offer earlier delivery or less construction time? Yes No

a. If yes, how much and why? ______________________ (hours/days/weeks)

3. How does this substitution affect any dimensions, layout, or details of other trades as shown on Drawings?

4. Has this substitution been coordinated with remainder of Project?

5. What are the specific differences between this substitution and specified item?

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

C. Attach following items as applicable. Check if attached.

1. Manufacturers’ technical data. ___ 2. Laboratory test or performance results. ___ 3. Drawings and wiring diagrams of proposed product. ___ 4. Drawings and description of changes required by other trades. ___ 5. Samples. ___ 6. Manufacturer’s guarantee and maintenance instructions. ___

D. The undersigned agrees to pay for all design, testing, changes in Contract Documents, and construction as result of acceptance of this substitution, at no additional cost to Owner.

E. Submitted by (Firm) ___________________________________________________

Signature ________________________________________ Date _______________


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01700 - 1 Execution Requirements

SECTION 01700

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section describes execution requirements.

1. Installer qualifications. 2. Examination. 3. Manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Installation. 5. Cleaning. 6. Protection.


1. Section 01500: Temporary Facilities & Control 2. Section 01770: Closeout procedures. 3. Section 01820: Systems demonstration.

1.2 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Experienced Installers: Installers to have minimum five years successful experience installing items similar to those required for Project, except for individuals in training under direct supervision of experienced installer.

1.3 EXAMINATION

A. Acceptance of Conditions: Beginning installation of a product signifies installer has examined substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with manufacturer requirements for tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit Work properly; recheck measurements prior to installing each product.

1. Where portions of Work are to fit to other construction verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication; allow for cutting and patching in order to avoid delaying Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.



1.4 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS

A. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: When work is specified to comply with manufacturers' recommendations or instructions, distribute copies to persons involved and maintain one set in field office.

1. Conform to requirements specified in Section 01300 for submittal of recommendations or instructions to Architect; submit to Architect only where specified or where specifically requested.

B. Perform work in accordance with details of recommendations and instructions and specified requirements.

1. Should a conflict exist between Specifications and recommendations or instructions consult with Architect.

C. Where manufacturer's information notes special recommendations in addition to installation instructions, comply with both recommendations and instructions.

1.5 INSTALLATION

A. Pre-Installation Meetings: Installers and suppliers are to attend pre-installation meetings scheduled by Contractor.

B. Comply with manufacturers written recommendations and installation instructions unless more restrictive requirements are specified.

C. Locate Work and components accurately, in correct alignment and elevation.

1. Make vertical work plumb and horizontal work level.

2. Install components to allow space for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.

D. Install products at time and under conditions to ensure best possible results; maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

E. Conduct operations so no part of Work is subject to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions.

F. Securely anchor permanent construction in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of Work.

G. Allow for building movement including thermal expansion and contraction.

H. Make joints of uniform width; arrange joints as indicated, for best visual effect where not otherwise indicated; fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints except where otherwise indicated.



1.6 CLEANING

A. Cleaning During Construction: Specified in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

B. Progress Cleaning: Keep installed areas clean using cleaning materials specifically recommended by manufacturers of product being cleaned; where not otherwise recommended use nontoxic materials that will not damage surfaces.

1. Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing space.

2. Supervise construction operations to assure no part of construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during construction period.

C. Final Cleaning: Execute final cleaning at Substantial Completion.

1. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

a. Vacuuming Equipment: Type with high efficiency particulate arrestor (HEPA) type filters; properly maintained.

2. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean filters of mechanical equipment, replace filters where cleaning is impractical.

a. Clean ducts.

3. Clean site; sweep paved areas.

4. Remove waste, surplus materials and rubbish from Project and site; recycle to maximum extent feasible.

1.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect products subject to deterioration with impervious cover. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation and trapping water.

B. Take care to use protective covering and blocking materials that do not soil, stain, or damage materials being protected.

C. After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage from traffic and construction operations, remove when no longer needed.

D. Protect interior materials from water damage; immediately remove wet materials from site to prevent growth of mold and mildew on site.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01730 - 1 Cutting and Patching

SECTION 01730

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting and patching required to complete Work and to:

1. Make its parts fit together properly.

2. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.

3. Remove and replace defective work.

4. Remove and replace work not conforming to Contract Documents.

5. Remove samples of installed work as required for testing.

6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit.


1. Section 01500: Temporary facilities and controls. 2. Section 01565: Site waste management program.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a written request to Architect well in advance of executing cutting or alteration which affects:

1. Work of Owner or separate contractor.

2. Structural value or integrity of any element of Project.

3. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements.

5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

B. Request shall include:

1. Identification of Project and description of affected work.

2. Necessity for cutting or alteration.

3. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor.

4. Effect on structural integrity, or weatherproof integrity of Project.



5. Alternatives to cutting and patching.

6. Cost proposal, when applicable.

7. Written permission of separate contractor whose work will be affected.

8. Description of proposed work including:

a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Products proposed to be used. c. Extent of refinishing to be included.

C. Should conditions of Work or schedule indicate a change of products from original installation, Contractor shall submit request for substitution as specified in Section 01630 - Product Substitution Procedures.

D. Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time work will be uncovered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with Specifications and standards for each specific product involved.

B. Where Specifications and standards have not been provided, provide materials and fabrication consistent with quality of Project and intended for commercial construction.

C. Provide new materials for cutting and patching unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of products, or performance of work.

C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do not proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of Work.

1. Provide services of licensed engineer for designing temporary support where required by applicable authorities for temporary supports and for shoring; submit engineering calculations directly to applicable authorities upon request.

B. Protect other portions of Project from damage.



3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. Execute cutting by methods that provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and finishes.

1. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement and which will prevent damage to other work.

B. Employ same installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching work as employed for new construction for:

1. Weather-exposed or moisture resistant elements.

2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.

C. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.

D. Restore work that has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and penetrations through surfaces.

F. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent finishes:

1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.

2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01770 - 1 Closeout Procedures

SECTION 01770

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section describes Contract closeout procedures.

1. Substantial completion. 2. Final completion. 3. Project record documents. 4. Material and finish data. 5. Operation and maintenance data.


1. Section 01780: Warranties. 2. Section 01820: Systems demonstration.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, schedule agency reviews as required for “temporary certificate of occupancy” or for “certificate of occupancy”.

B. When Contractor considers the Work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, submit written notice, with list of items to be completed or corrected.

1. List (“Punch List”): Format pre-approved by Owner and Architect; tabular form with each space listed required.

C. Within a reasonable time, Owner and Architect will inspect status of completion and may add to “Punch List”.

D. Should Owner and Architect determine Work is not substantially complete, Contractor will be promptly notified in writing, giving reasons.

E. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial completion; Architect will reinspect Work.

1. Contractor shall pay for Architect's time and direct expenses where more than one Substantial Completion inspection is required.

F. When Architect determines Work is substantially complete, a Certificate of Substantial Completion will be prepared in accordance with General Conditions.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. When Work is complete, submit written certification indicating:

1. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.



2. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies listed (in ‘Punch List”) with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.

3. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's representative and are operational.

4. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.

B. Special Submittals: In addition to submittals required by Contract, submit following.

1. Provide submittals required by governing authorities to governing authorities with copies included in Project Record Documents.

2. Submit final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.

1. Owner will provide Contractor with a separate set of Drawings to maintain for Project Record Documents.

2. Store reproducible Drawings, one set of Project Manual, and one copy of each Change Order separate from documents used for construction, for use as Project Record Documents.

2.3. As-Built Documents: Addenda and bulletins will be incorporated by Architect into a “conformed set” and issued to the Contractor approximately 2-3 weeks prior to Substantial Completion. The Contractor will be responsible for incorporating all of the contractors field changes into the conformed set and for issuing As-Built Documents.

3.4. Indicate actual work on Drawings; indicate actual products used in Project Manual, including manufacturer, model number and options.

4.5. Update Project Record Documents daily and allow for Architect inspection at least once a month.

B. At Contract close-out submit documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor.

1.5 MATERIAL AND FINISH DATA

A. Provide data for primary materials and finishes.

B. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2" by 11" three-ring binders with durable plastic covers, clearly identified regarding extent of contents.

1. Electronic Format: Provide C-Disk with PDF files of material and finish data.



C. Arrange by Specification division and give names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers. List:

1. Trade names, model or type numbers. 2. Cleaning instructions. 3. Product data.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Provide data for:

1. Electrically operated items. 2. Mechanical equipment and controls. 3. Electrical equipment and controls.

B. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2" by 11" three-ring binders with durable plastic covers, clearly identified regarding extent of contents.

C. Provide a separate volume for each system, with a table of contents and index tabs for each volume.

D. Arrange by Specification division and gives names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers. List:

1. Appropriate design criteria. 2. List of equipment and parts lists. 3. Operating and maintenance instructions. 4. Shop drawings and product data.

E. Electronic Format: Provide C-Disk with PDF files of operation and maintenance data.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01780 - 1 Warranties

SECTION 01780

WARRANTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Compile required and incidental warranties required by Contract Documents.

B. These warranties shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights Owner may have against Contractor under Contract Documents and which may be prescribed by law, regardless of wording of warranty.

1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTAL

A. Provide duplicate copies, notarized or on Contractor and Manufacturer's letterhead.

1. Assemble documents executed by subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and manufacturers.

2. Provide table of contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover, clearly identified regarding extent of contents.

3. Electronic Format: Submit computerized compact disk (CD’s) of warranties, in Adobe PDF format.

B. Warranty Form: Use form acceptable to Owner; completed form shall not detract from or confuse interpretations of Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer shall countersign warranty.

2. Subcontractor and installer shall countersign warranty where specified.

a. Provide required warranties for waterproofing and roofing systems countersigned by subcontractor and installer.

C. Submit final warranties prior to final application for payment.

1. For equipment put into use with Owner's permission during construction, submit within ten days after first operation.

2. For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

D. Provide information for Owner's personnel regarding proper procedure in case of failure and instances that might affect validity of warranty.

E. Size: 8-1/2" by 11" for three-ring binder; fold larger sheets to fit.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01780 - 2 Warranties

1.3 WARRANTIES

A. Warranties are intended to protect Owner against failure of work and against deficient, defective and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources.

B. Limitations: Warranties are not intended to cover failures that result from:

1. Unusual or abnormal phenomena of the elements.

2. Owner's misuse, maltreatment or improper maintenance of work.

3. Vandalism after substantial completion.

4. Insurrection or acts of aggression including war.

C. Related Damages and Losses: Remove and replace work which is damaged as result of failure, or which must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work.

D. Warranty Reinstatement: After correction of warranted work, reinstate warranty for corrected work to date of original warranty expiration, but not less than half original warranty period.

E. Replacement Cost: Replace or restore failing warranted items without regard to anticipated useful service lives.

F. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves right to reject unsolicited and coincidental product warranties that detract from or confuse interpretations of Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 01820 - 1 Systems Demonstration

SECTION 01820

SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide equipment and systems demonstration and instruction in accordance with Contract Documents.

1. Video record seminars and system demonstrations.


1. Section 01310: Project management and coordination. 2. Section 01770: Contract closeout procedures. 3. Division 15: Mechanical. 4. Division 16: Electrical.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Seminar Agenda and Outline:

1. Prepare a seminar agenda and outline in consultation and cooperation with Owner. Include following:

a. Equipment and systems that will be included in seminars. b. Name of companies and representatives presenting at seminars. c. Outline of each seminar's content. d. Time and date allocated to each system and item of equipment.

2. Submit preliminary seminar agenda and outline for review and comment by Owner.

a. Revise and resubmit agenda and outline until all seminar requirements have been satisfied and seminar dates and presenters have been finalized.

3. Submit final seminar agenda and outline no later than eight weeks before date of Acceptance of Work.

B. Seminar Organization:

1. Contractor’s presentation leaders shall chair seminars.

a. Coordinate qualification of training personnel, seminar contents, and presentations with Owner.

2. Coordinate individual presentations and ensure manufacturer’s representatives scheduled to be at training seminars are present.



3. Arrange for presentation leaders familiar with design operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of equipment and systems.

a. Where one person is not familiar with all aspects of equipment or system; arrange for specialists familiar with each aspect.

4. Coordinate proposed seminar dates with Owner and select mutually agreeable dates.

5. Video Recording: Arrange for video recording (audio and video) of training seminars and system demonstrations, including seminar and demonstration questions and answers.

C. Seminar Content:

1. Architect’s Consultants will explain design philosophy of primary systems.

2. Include following information in presentations dealing with specific systems.

a. An overview of how system is intended to operate. b. Describe design parameters, constrains and operational requirements. c. Describe system operation strategies. d. Provide information to help in identifying and troubleshooting problems.

3. Include following information in presentations dealing with equipment.

a. Explanation of how equipment operates. b. Recommended preventative and routine maintenance.

D. System Demonstration:

1. Demonstrate operation of equipment and systems when specified in individual technical sections. Include following in demonstration.

a. Start-up and shut down. b. Operation. c. Scheduled and preventative maintenance. d. Troubleshooting.

2. Demonstration may be conducted at time of original starting with Owner's prior approval.

E. Seminar and Demonstration Questions:

1. Be prepared to answer questions raised by Owner’s personnel at demonstrations and seminars.

2. If unable to satisfactorily answer questions immediately, provide written response within three days.

F. Use manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data as basis of instruction.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Video Recording: Submit ten copies of each video recording in DVD format acceptable to Owner; include label on each DVD and on each container identifying Project and Seminar content.

END OF SECTION

LUK AND ASSOCIATES TRACY FIRE STATION 92

Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 REMOVAL WORK Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02065 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 02065 REMOVAL WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The requirements of the "General Conditions of the Contract", "Supplementary General Conditions", and of Division 1, "General Requirements", shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide removal work complete including the following principal items.

1. Remove debris which is not indicated to remain in the areas of new construction and which is obviously not part of new construction.

B. Related requirements specified elsewhere include:

1. Clearing and excavating - Section 02200, EARTHWORK.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Work to be demolished may contain hazardous materials. The Owner shall retain and pay for the services of a Testing Agency to perform and report on tests for such suspected materials. If hazardous materials are encountered, the Owner will provide for subsequent testing and abatement under separate contract.

B. The work shall be conducted in an orderly manner and not so as to create nuisances. Removed material shall not be permitted to accumulate on streets or sidewalks nor to be washed into sewers.

C. Asphalt concrete to be removed shall be disposed of in an acceptable manner. Plan for disposal shall be submitted to the City Engineer and approved by the City Engineer prior to disposal.

D. Remove buried pipes, debris piles and any other deleterious materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials which are to be salvaged for reuse in the work shall become the property of the Contractor until reinstalled and accepted.

B. Materials which are to be removed and not reused shall become the property of the Contractor.


Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 REMOVAL WORK Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02065 Page 2 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Inspect existing conditions of work, including elements subject to damaging movement during removal operations.

B. Protect the safety of persons; protect improvements to remain, materials to be salvaged, adjacent properties, existing utilities, streets, and the like from damage.

C. Perform installation of proposed utilities essential for continuous normal operation of existing facilities as determined by the owner.

3.02 REMOVAL OPERATIONS

A. Remove all the buried pipes and debris piles. Underground structures expected to extend below proposed finished grades and slated for abandonment shall be removed from the project site and shall be disposed off site.

B. Remove all portions of improvements not to remain.

C. Removed materials, which are not to be reused, shall be disposed of outside the site as they accumulate. Do not store, or otherwise dispose of such materials on the site.

“END OF SECTION”


Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 EARTHWORK Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02200 Page 1 of 14

SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Related requirements specified elsewhere include.

1. Removal work Section 02065.

2. Project Soils Report.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Clearing, grubbing and stripping

B. Cutting slopes for the construction of site improvements.

C. Grading, excavating, filling and backfilling, including trenching and backfilling for utilities as necessary to complete the Project as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Building pad, street, sidewalk, driveway, parking area, utility trenches, and landscaping area.

E. Dust alleviation and control.

F. Cleanup and disposal of excess material.

G. The work shall include the provision of all materials, equipment and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the plans, but which are obviously necessary to complete the work specified.

H. Provide all documents and implement all aspects of the state’s Construction General Permit (CGP) including but not limited to preparation of a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), submittal of a Notice of Intent (NOI), submittal of Permit Registration Documents (PRD), submittal of all Reporting and Monitoring Documents, file Notice of Termination, oversee construction Site Erosion Controls, and implement Best Management Practices.

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Civil Engineering Work including site utilities as shown on the Drawings.

B. Landscape Work including area drains as shown on the Drawings.



1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Excavating, trenching, filling, backfilling, and grading work shall meet the applicable requirements of the Uniform Building Code and the standards and ordinances of state and local governing authorities.

1.05 SUBSURFACE SOIL CONDITIONS

A. The Owner’s Geotechnical Exploration report is available for inspection by bidder or Contractor upon request.


A. All work shall be done to the satisfaction of the designated representative of the Geotechnical Engineer. The contractor shall notify the Geotechnical Engineer at least 48 hours prior to performance of any site earthwork.

B. Finish surface of the site shall not vary more than 0.10 feet from that called for on the plans or detail drawings.

C. Percentage of compaction specified shall be the minimum acceptable. The percentage represents the ratio of the dry density of the compacted material to the maximum dry density of the material as determined by the procedure set forth in ASTM Designation D1557.

D. Perform the work of this Section in compliance with applicable requirements of all governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the requirements and recommendations of the Soils Report.

E. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the specified work.

F. Use equipment in adequate size, capacity and numbers to accomplish the specified work in a timely manner.

G. Except as modified by the requirements herein or indicated on the Drawings, earthwork shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following codes and standards. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.

H. Soils Report: Entitled “Geotechnical Investigation, Fire Station 92 (portion of APN 213-070-68), 1035 East Grant Line Road, Tracy, CA” Job#083-001, dated November 23, 2011 prepared by GEC Consulting, hereinafter referred to as the Soils Report.


A. General

1. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the soil conditions at the site, whether covered in the soils report or not, and shall thoroughly understand all recommendations



associated with the site soils, excavation, and grading covered in the report.

2. Subsurface information was obtained primarily for use in preparing the foundation design, but the Contractor may draw his own conclusion therefrom or conduct his own investigation. No responsibility is assumed by the Owner, Architect or Soils Engineer for subsoil quality or conditions other than the locations, and at the time the exploration was made. No claim for extra compensation, or for extension of time, will be allowed on account of subsurface conditions inconsistent with the data shown, except as provided elsewhere herein.

3. Existing grade conditions as shown on the plans by contours and spot elevations are accurate as could be obtained. The Contractor shall accept the site as it exists and complete the site work.

B. Utilities:

1. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being constructed under this Contract, immediately notify the Architect and secure his instructions.

C. Contractor shall accurately grade and prepare the site to the lines and grades called for on the plans and detail drawings with due provision for future surface improvements.

D. Material for site embankments, where required, shall consist of suitable excavated material if available, or such imported borrow material as may be required for the work conforming to the requirements of the specifications herein and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Contractor shall provide dust alleviation and control measures satisfactory to the Engineer at all times during the course of the work at no additional expense to the Owner.

F. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the maintenance of graded areas until final acceptance thereof, and shall take such actions of whatever nature as may be necessary or required to protect the graded surface from erosion during installation and until final acceptance thereof by the owner.

1.08 DEFINITION OF TERMS

A. Fill – All soil, rock, or soil-rock materials placed to raise the grades of the site or to backfill excavations.

B. Backfill – All soil, rock or soil-rock material used to fill excavations and trenches.

C. On-Site Material – Soil and/or rock material which is obtained from the site.

D. Imported Material – Soil and/or rock material which is brought to the site from off-site areas.

E. Select Material – On-site and/or imported material which is approved by the Soils Engineer as a specific-purpose fill.



F. Engineered Fill – Fill upon which the Soils Engineer has made sufficient observations and tests to confirm that the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with specifications and requirements.

G. Degree of Compaction or Relative Compaction – The ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the in-place dry density of the fill and backfill material as compacted in the field to the maximum dry density of the same material as determined by ASTM D-1557 or California 216 compaction test method.

H. Optimum Moisture – Water content, percentage by dry weight, corresponding to the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-1557.

I. Soils Engineer (or Geotechnical Engineer) – Shall be defined as the project’s “Geotechnical Engineer of Record”, their consulting firm, its employees, or its designated representatives.

J. Drawings – All documents, approved for construction, which describe the Work.

1.09 OBSERVATION AND TESTING

A. All site preparation, cutting and shaping, excavating, filling, and backfilling shall be carried out under the observation of the Soils Engineer, employed and paid for by the Owners. The Soils Engineer will perform appropriate field and laboratory tests to evaluate the suitability of fill material, the proper moisture content for compaction, and the degree of compaction achieved. Any fill that does not meet the specification requirements shall be removed and/or reworked until the requirements are satisfied.

B. Cutting and shaping, excavating, conditioning, filling, and compacting procedures require approval of the Soils Engineer as they are performed. Any work found unsatisfactory or any work disturbed by subsequent operations before approval is granted shall be corrected in an approved manner as recommended by the Soils Engineer.

C. Tests for compaction will be made in accordance with the test procedures outlined in ASTM D-1557, as applicable. Field testing of soils or compacted fill shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM D-2922.

D. All authorized observation and testing will be paid for by the Owners.

E. Soils Materials:

1. The Soils Engineer will observe, test, and approve for use, all soils materials.

2. The Contractors shall provide sample of all proposed on-site and imported fill material for suitability tests by the Soils Engineer prior to acquisition.

3. The Contractor shall provide specifications from quarry for all rock under slabs on ground for review by the Soils Engineer.

F. Engineered Fill Tests and Inspections:



1. The Soils Engineer will observe the grading operations during both the preparation of the site and during compaction of any backfill to insure conformance with the Specifications.

2. The Soils Engineer will make observations and field tests to enable him to approve the site prior to placement of engineered fill.

3. The Soils Engineer will observe, test, and approve the engineered fill material and its field placement; and backfill in trenches will also be observed, tested and approved.

4. Recycled paving materials may be utilized in engineering fills as long as it adheres to the specifications and meets the approval of the supervising Soils Engineer.

G. Excavation Inspection: The Soils Engineer will observe, test as required, and approve all foundation excavations for conformance with the criteria contained in the Specifications.

H. Compaction Control Test: Degree of compaction is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the dry density of the fill material as compacted in the field, to the maximum dry density of the same material as determined by ASTM D1557 test method.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment, facilities, and services as required for performing the required excavating, filling, backfilling, and grading work, and trenching and backfilling for utilities.

2.02 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Fill 1. Material to be used for engineered fill and backfill shall be free from organic matter

and other deleterious substances, and of such quality that it will compact thoroughly without excessive voids when watered and rolled. Excavated on-site material will be considered suitable for backfill if it contains no more than 3 percent organic matter, is free of debris and other deleterious substances and conforms to the requirements specified above. Fill placed at the site should not contain rocks or lumps greater than 4 inches in greatest dimension with not more than 15 percent larger than 2.5 inches. In addition, imported selected fill material used at the site should be a non-expansive material.

2. Excavated earth material which is suitable backfill, as determined by the Soils Engineer, shall be conditioned for reuse and properly stockpiled as required for later filling and backfilling operations. Conditioning shall consist of spreading material in layers not to exceed 8 inches and raking free of debris and rubble. Rocks and aggregate exceeding the allowed largest dimension, and deleterious material shall be removed from the site and disposed off site in a legal manner.



3. Soils Engineer shall be notified at least 48 hours prior to the start of filling and backfilling operations so that it may evaluate samples of the material intended for use as fill and backfill. All materials to be used for filling and backfilling require the approval of the Soils Engineer.

B. Import Material – Where conditions require the importation of fill material, the material shall be an inert, nonexpansive soil or soil-rock material free of organic matter and meeting the following requirements unless otherwise approved by the Soils Engineer.

Gradation Test Procedures Sieve Size Percent Passing ASTM Caltrans 2 inch 100 C 136 202 No. 200 15-70 C 136 202 Plasticity (ASTM D-4318) Liquid Limit Plasticity Index <30 <12 D-4318 204 Expansion Potential (ASTM D-4546B) (at optimum moisture)

Percent Heave Swell Pressure ---- ---- <2 percent <300 psf Organic Content (ASTM D-2974) Less than 2 percent D-2974

Resistance Value (ASTM D-2844) Minimum 25 A sample of the proposed import material shall be submitted to the Soils Engineer for evaluation prior to delivery at the site.

All imported fill materials used onsite (within the property line limits) to be used for engineered fill shall meet or exceed the requirements outlined above.

All imported fill materials used offsite (outside the property line limits) to be used for engineered fill shall meet or exceed the current City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

C. Engineered Fill – All fill soils, native or imported, required to be compacted as engineered fill.

D. Onsite Trench Backfill – Trench backfill and bedding placed shall meet or exceed the requirements outlined in the execution portion of this specification section.

E. Offsite Trench Backfill – Trench backfill and bedding placed shall meet or exceed the requirements outlined in the current City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

2.03 SAND

A. Sand for sand cushion under slabs and for bedding of pipe in utility trenches shall be a clean and graded, washed sand, free from clay or organic materials, suitable for the intended purposes with 90 to 100 percent passing a No. 4 U.S. Standard Sieve, not more than 5 percent passing a No. 200 U.S. Standard Sieve, and generally conforming to ASTM C33 for



fine aggregate.

2.04 AGGREGATE DRAINAGE FILL

A. Aggregate drainage fill under concrete slabs and paving shall consist of broken stone, crushed or uncrushed gravel, clean quarry waste, or a combination thereof. The aggregate shall be free from fines, vegetable matter, loam, volcanic tuff, and other deleterious substances. It shall be of such quality that the absorption of water in a saturated surface dry condition does not exceed 3 percent of the oven dry weight of the samples.

B. Aggregate drainage fill shall be of such size that the percentage composition by dry weight as determined by laboratory sieves (U.S. Series) will conform to the following grading:

C. Sieve Size Percentage Passing Sieve

1 ½ inches 100 1 inch 90-100 #4 0-5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARE CONSTRUCTION GENERAL PERMIT DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare all required State construction general permit (CGP) documents prior to start of grading operations including but not limited to preparation of a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), submittal of a Notice of Intent (NOI), submittal of Permit Registration Documents (PRD), submittal of all Reporting and Monitoring Documents, file Notice of Termination, oversee construction Site Erosion Controls, and implement Best Management Practices.

3.02 STAKING AND GRADING

A. Contractor shall lay out all his work, establish all necessary markers, bench marks, grading stakes, and other stakes as required to achieve design grades.

3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Contractor shall verify the location and depth (elevation) of all existing utilities and services before performing any excavation work.

3.04 EXCAVATION

A. Contractor shall perform excavating as indicated and required for concrete footings, drilled piers, foundations, floor slabs, concrete walks, and site leveling and grading, and provide shoring, bracing, underpinning, cribbing, pumping, and planking as required. The bottoms of excavations shall be firm undisturbed earth, clean and free from loose material, debris, and foreign matter.



B. Excavations shall be kept free from water at all times. Adequate dewatering equipment shall be maintained at the site to handle emergency situations until concrete or backfill is placed.

C. Unauthorized excavations for footings shall be filled with concrete to required elevations, unless other methods of filling are authorized by the Soils Engineer.

D. Excavated earth material which is suitable for engineered fill or backfill, as determined by the Soils Engineer, shall be conditioned for reuse and properly stockpiled for later filling and backfilling operations as specified under Section 2.02, “Soil Materials”.

E. Abandoned storm sewers, piping and other utilities encountered during excavating shall be removed and the resulting excavations shall be backfilled with engineered fill as required by the Soils Engineer.

F. Any active utility lines encountered shall be reported immediately to the Owner’s Representative and authorities involved. The Owner and proper authorities shall be permitted free access to take the measures deemed necessary to repair, relocate, or remove the obstruction as determined by the responsible authority or Owner’s Representative.

3.05 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. All surface vegetation, weeds, brush and other rubbish, as well as trees and root systems not marked for saving, shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of. Tree stumps and roots should be grubbed. Strip top 6” of soil prior to placing fill.

B. Any existing structures, foundations, existing pavement, or debris must be removed from the site prior to any building, grading, or fill operations. Underground obstructions which may interfere with the proposed construction shall be either re-routed or abandoned.

C. Holes resulting from the removal of underground obstructions, tree roots, or existing fill which extend below the proposed finish grade shall be cleared and backfilled with suitable material compacted to requirements specified herein. The Soils Engineer shall observe site clearing and backfilling of resulting excavations which extend below proposed finish grade.

D. The subgrade surface in those areas to receive structural fill or slabs-on-grade shall be observed by the Soils Engineer to confirm that the surface is firm and non-yielding before the fill placement operations begin. Soft or yielding subgrade soils shall be excavated to expose firm, non-yielding materials. The exposed subgrade soils shall then be scarified to a minimum depth of six inches or to the bottom of shrinkage cracks, whichever is deeper.

E. After the foundation for the fill has been cleared and scarified, it shall be made uniform and free from large clods. Following scarification, cohesive soils shall be moisture conditioned to at least 3 percent above optimum water content and compacted to at least 88 percent relative compaction by mechanical means only as determined by ASTM Test Designation D1557-02. Following scarification, non-cohesive soils shall be moisture-conditioned to within 2 percent of optimum water content and compacted to at least 90 percent relative compaction by mechanical means only as determined by ASTM Test Designation D1557-02.



F. Areas to receive interior or exterior slab-on-grade shall have at least 12 inches of compacted non-expansive fill below the slab.

G. Areas to receive pavement shall have the upper 6 inches compacted to at least 95% relative compaction.

H. Areas within utility trench backfill zones shall have the soils above the pipe shading zone compacted to at least 90% relative compaction for cohesive soils, and at least 95% relative compaction for non-cohesive soils.

3.06 ENGINEERED FILL

A. Select Material – Fill material shall be “Select” or “Imported Material” as previously specified.

B. Placing and Compacting – Engineered fill shall be constructed by approved and accepted methods. Fill material shall be spread in uniform lifts not exceeding 8 inches in uncompacted thickness. Each layer shall be spread evenly, and thoroughly blade-mixed to obtain uniformity of material. Fill material which does not contain sufficient moisture as specified by the Soils Engineer shall be sprinkled with water, if it contains excess moisture it shall be aerated or blended with drier material to achieve the proper water content. Select material and water shall then be thoroughly mixed before being compacted. Compaction shall be performed in accordance with requirements specified herein.

C. Testing and Observation of Fill – The work shall consist of field observation and testing to determine that each layer has been compacted to the required density and that the required moisture is being obtained. Any layer or portion of a layer that does not attain the compaction required shall be reworked until the required density is obtained.

D. Compaction – Compaction shall be by sheepsfoot rollers, multiple-wheel steel or pneumatic-tired rollers or other types of acceptable compaction equipment. Rollers shall be of such design that they will be able to compact the fill to the specified compaction. Rolling shall be accomplished while the fill material is within the specified moisture content range. Rolling of each layer must be continuous so that the required compaction may be obtained uniformly throughout each layer.

E. Fill slopes shall be constructed by overfilling the design slopes and later cutting back the slopes to the design grades. No loose soil will be permitted on the faces of the finished slopes.

F. Strippings and topsoil shall be stockpiled as approved by Owner, then placed in accordance with the Soil Engineer’s recommendations to a minimum thickness of 6 inches over exposed open space cut slopes which are 3:1 or flatter, and track walked to the satisfaction of the Soils Engineer.

G. Final Prepared Subgrade – Finish blading and smoothing shall be performed as necessary to produce the required density, with a uniform surface, smooth and true to grade.



3.07 SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Interior and exterior slabs-on-grade shall be supported on a minimum 12 inches of compacted, non-expansive select fill placed and compacted in accordance with requirements herein. In areas where vehicular traffic is anticipated, slabs-on-grade shall be underlain by imported select fill consisting of Caltrans Class 2 aggregate base.

B. Prior to final construction of the slab, the subgrade surface shall be proof-rolled to provide a smooth, firm surface for slab support.

C. The vapor retarder shall consist of impermeable sheeting that conforms with ASTM E-1745 Class A requirements for water vapor permeance, tensile strength, and puncture resistance. The vapor retarder shall be placed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations including overlapping and taping to prevent vapor transmission through the slab. A layer of free-draining crushed rock or gravel shall be placed beneath the vapor retarder in accordance with the structural design drawings. The gravel may be considered part of the recommended thickness of non-expansive select fill recommended under slabs.

D. Exterior flatwork – All flatwork shall be placed on at least 4-inch-thick of clean, crushed rock or gravel shall be placed under all concrete slabs. If the City of Tracy or other public agency requirements exceed these recommendations, then the more stringent specifications shall be used.

3.08 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill shall not be placed against footings, building walls, or other structures until approved by Soils Engineer.

B. Backfill material shall be Select Material as specified for engineered fill.

C. Backfill shall then be placed in 6-inch layers, leveled, rammed, and tamped in place. Each layer shall be compacted with suitable compaction equipment to specification requirements

3.09 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES

A. Trenching:

1. Trenching shall include the removal of material and obstructions, the installation and removal of sheeting and bracing and the control of water as necessary to provide the required utilities and services.

2. Trenches shall be excavated to the lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Maximum allowable trench width shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus 24 inches, inclusive of any trench bracing.

3. When the trench bottom is a soft or unstable material as determined by the Soils Engineer, it shall be made firm and solid by removing said unstable material to a sufficient depth and replacing it with on-site material compacted to 90 percent minimum relative compaction.



4. Where water is encountered in the trench, the contractor must provide materials necessary to drain the water and stabilize the bed.

B. Backfilling:

1. Trenches shall be backfilled with fill placed in lifts not exceeding 8 inches in un-compacted thickness. Tranches shall be filled by placing a granular shading layer beneath and around the pipe, and then 6 to 12 inches of shading shall be carefully placed and tamped above the pipe. The remaining portion of the trench shall be backfilled with onsite or import soil. The backfill above shading layers shall be placed and compacted to a minimum relative degree of compaction of 90 percent for cohesive soils and 95 percent for non-cohesive soils based on ASTM Test Designation D1557-02.

2. Trench backfill and bedding for pipes placed shall meet or exceed the requirements outlined in the current City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

3. Trenches must be backfilled within 2 days of excavation to minimize desiccation.

4. If granular soil is used, sufficient water shall be added during the trench backfilling operations to prevent the soil from “bulking” during compaction. All compaction operations shall be performed by mechanical means only. Jetting shall not be allowed. An impermeable plug or mastic sealant shall be used where utilities enter the building to minimize the potential for free water or moisture to enter below the building. Contractor shall carefully evaluate the stability of all trenches and use temporary shoring, where appropriate.

3.10 AGGREGATE DRAINAGE FILL

A. The Soils engineer shall approve finished subgrades before aggregate drainage fill is installed.

B. Pipes, drains, conduits, and any other mechanical or electrical installations shall be in place before any aggregate drainage fill is placed. Backfill at walls to elevation of drainage fill shall be in place and compacted.

C. Aggregate drainage fill under slabs and concrete paving shall be the minimum uniform thickness after compaction of dimensions indicated on Drawings. Where not indicated, minimum thickness after compaction shall be at least 4 inches.

D. Aggregate drainage fill shall be rolled to form a well-compacted bed.

E. The finished aggregate drainage fill must be observed and approved by the Soils Engineer before proceeding with any subsequent construction over the compacted base or fill.

3.11 VAPOR BARRIER CUSHION

A. A layer of free-draining crushed rock or gravel shall be placed under the vapor barrier membrane under concrete slabs on grade. This cushion shall be placed in uniform thickness



as indicated on the Drawings.

3.12 FINISH GRADING

A. All areas must be finish graded to elevations and grades indicated on the Drawings. In areas to receive topsoil and landscape planting, finish grading shall be performed to a uniform 6 inches below the grades and elevations indicated on the Drawings, and brought to final grade with topsoil.

3.13 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Excess earth materials and debris shall be removed from the site and disposed of in a legal manner. Location of dump site and length of haul are the Contractor’s responsibility.

3.14 SITE DRAINAGE / EROSION CONTROL

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for provision of adequate site drainage at all times during the course of the Work.

B. All site prepared areas and in-progress embankment within the Contract area detrimentally affected by surface runoff during the time of this Contract shall be reworked to the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Engineer at no additional expense to the Owner.

C. All dewatering required prior to the start of grading work shall be performed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Engineer at no additional expense to the Owner.

D. Storm water pollution prevention measures: Provide erosion control measures to prevent soil and debris from entering the storm drain system. Erosion control measures shall be in accordance with the State’s Construction General Permit (CGP) requirements.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all Sub-Contractors are aware of all storm water prevention measures and their implementation requirements. Failure to comply with the approved construction BMP’S may result in the issuance of correction notices, citations, or a stop work order.

2. Machinery, tools, brushes, containers, or any other construction materials or equipment shall not be cleaned or rinsed in the street, gutter, storm drains, or streams.

3. All dirt, gravel, rubbish, refuse and green waste shall be removed from the sidewalk, street pavement, and storm drains adjoining the project. During wet weather, avoid driving vehicles on paved areas.

4. Broom sweep the sidewalk and public street pavement adjoining the project on a daily basis. Caked mud or dirt shall be scraped from these areas before sweeping.

E. To convey surface water away from the buildings, the landscape areas should be sloped downward from the foundation wall a minimum of 5 percent for a distance of 7 feet from the foundations. For paved areas, the slope gradient can be reduced to 2 percent. All roofs



should be provided with gutters and solid pipe downspouts discharging into a solid pipe system that connects into the storm drainage system.

3.15 DUST ALLEVIATION AND CONTROL

A. Contractor shall be responsible for and shall provide pollution and dust abatement and control measure satisfactory to Owner continuously during the course of the work.

B. Use means necessary to control dust on and near the Work, and on and near off-site areas, if such dust is caused by the Contractor’s operations during performance of the Work or if resulting from the condition in which the Contractor leaves the site.

C. Thoroughly moisten surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and to personnel performing other work on the site.

3.16 TRAFFIC AND ACCESS

A. Maintain traffic on roads and streets adjacent to or leading to the site. The Contractor shall so conduct his operations as to offer the least possible obstruction and inconvenience to public traffic, and he shall have under construction no greater length or amount of work than he can prosecute properly with due regard to the rights of the public. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall submit to the agency exercising jurisdiction over the road or street a written traffic control plan, including proposed street or land closure times, for their approval and shall comply with the approved traffic control plan and all requirements of the encroachment permit.

B. Unless detours are permitted, all traffic shall be permitted to pass through the work with as little inconvenience and delay as possible. Street or land closures shall only be made within the hours provided in the approved traffic control plan. Spillage resulting from hauling operations along or across the traveled way shall be removed immediately at the Contractor’s expense.

3.17 PLACEMENT OF PLANTING SOIL

A. Subgrade planting areas to receive soil from the onsite stockpiles or imported topsoil shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Landscape Architect.

3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Soils Engineer shall be commissioned by the Owner to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction is performed thereon. The Soils Engineer will make a sufficient number of tests to enable the Soils Engineer to issue a written statement that, in his opinion, the fill has been placed and compacted within compliance of these specifications.

B. If excessive retesting for failing tests is required, Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with retesting.

C. Reconditioning compacted areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by



subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape and compact to the required density prior to further construction.

D. The Soils Engineer will provide a written summary report which includes field density testing data including the area of fill tested, the type of classifications of fill material tested, and a statement that states “In my opinion, the fill has been placed and compacted within compliance of these specifications”.

E. Upon completion, remove temporary protection; restore work areas to original condition; leave site clean and orderly.

3.19 TREATMENT AFTER COMPLETION OF EARTHWORK

A. After earthwork operations are completed and the Geotechnical Engineer has finished his observation of the work, no further excavation or filling shall be done except with the approval of and under observation of the Geotechnical Engineer.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prevent erosion of freshly graded areas during construction and until such time as permanent drainage and erosion control measures have been installed.



Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 STORM DRAINAGE Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02430 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 02430 STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The requirements of the "General Conditions of the Contract", Supplementary General Conditions", and of Division 1 "General Requirements", shall apply to all work of the Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Trenching.

B. Site Storm Drain Lines, and inlets.

C. Connect roof down drain to storm drain system.

D. Pipe protection for utilities where required.

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. See Building Plumbing Section Specifications for utilities beneath or within 5 feet of the building perimeter.

B. Utility specifications - Section 02700 - Site Utilities, Compaction Specifications -Section 02200 - Earthwork

1.04 MATERIALS APPROVALS:

A. Provide complete list of materials and equipment with names and addresses of manufacturers, catalog numbers and trade names. Submit to the Owner or Owner's representative for acceptance prior to construction.

B. Any items disapproved by the Owner as not conforming to the specifications shall be deleted and suitable substitutes shall be made in lieu thereof as designated by the Owner.

1.05 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS

A. CITY SPECIFICATIONS – The current City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

B. CITY STANDARD DETAILS – The current City of Tracy Standard Details.

C. CALTRANS SPECIFICATIONS - Standard Specifications of the State of California Department of Transportation, 2006.

D. ASTM SPECIFICATIONS - The latest edition of the American Society for Testing and Materials Standards.



1.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect materials and equipment from damage.

B. Provide adequate and proper storage facilities.

C. Replace damaged and defective work or material before filing application for final acceptance.

D. Plug and cap piping during installation and keep free from debris and other contamination.

E. Protect workmen and the public from harm and conform to all requirements of the Board of Fire Underwriters and Industrial Accident Commission of the State.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (18” Diameter RCP)

A. Reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation C76. The strength classification of the pipe shall be Class III unless otherwise designated on the plans. Cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type II. Pipe shall be bell and spigot having O-ring rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C 443 retained in a groove on the spigot end. All reinforcement shall be circular. Elliptical reinforcing will not be allowed.

B. Each section of pipe shall be clearly and legibly marked with waterproof paint to show the date of manufacture, the strength classification of the pipe, and the location of the minor axis if elliptical reinforcement has been used in the manufacture of the pipe.

C. Manufacturer’s certificates showing conformance with this specification and the results of external load crushing strength tests shall be delivered to the Owner or Owner’s Representative with each load of pipe delivered to the job site.

2.02 MORTAR FOR RCP JOINTS

A. Joint mortar shall conform to Caltrans Specifications Section 65-1.06, for cement mortar or grout. Cement mortar for structures or pipe connections shall consist of a mixture of Portland cement, sand, and water. Mortar shall be composed of one part of cement and 2 parts of clean, well-graded sand of such size that will pass a No. 8 sieve. Cement and sand shall first be combined in the proper proportions, and then thoroughly mixed with the required amount of water.

B. Mortar materials shall be mixed to a consistency suitable for making joints on concrete pipe and all mortar shall be used within thirty (30) minutes after the mixing water has been added.

C. Admixtures shall not be added to mortar without the prior approval of the Owner or Owner’s Representative.

2.03 RUBBER GASKET JOINTS



A. The rubber gasket joint shall be made by properly lubricating the rubber gasket with a suitable vegetable compound soap before it is placed in the groove at the spigot end. The gasket shall be stretched over the spigot end of the pipe and carefully seated in the groove, with care taken to equalize the stress in the gasket around the circumference of the joint. The gasket shall not be twisted, rolled, cut, crimped, or otherwise injured or forced out of position during the closure of the joint. A feeler gauge shall be used to check the position of the rubber gasket after the joint has been assembled. Where a joint placement is found to be improper, the tested pipe section shall be removed, the gasket checked for damage, a new gasket installed, if necessary, the pipe re-laid and the gasket placement rechecked.

2.04 PVC STORM DRAIN PIPES (12" and Smaller Diameter)

A. PVC storm drain pipe for minor storm drains equal to or less than (12) inches in diameter shall be used where indicated on the plans and the PVC pipe material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034 for SDR 35 pipe. Materials for PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1784 for class 12454-B or 12454-C as defined therein.

B. All fittings including wyes and cleanouts for PVC storm drain pipes shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2241. The ring groove and gasket ring shall be compatible with PVC pipe ends.

C. The strength class of fittings shall be not less than the strength class of any adjoining pipe.

D. Installation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2321.

E. Flexible couplings shall be rubber, full circle, clamp-on type conforming to ASTM C425 and provided with two stainless steel band screw clamps to secure the coupling tightly to entering and existing pipes. All screw-clamp hardware shall be type 304 or type 316 stainless steel.

F. Pipe bedding and backfill material for on-site utilities shall be subject to the acceptance of the Geotechnical Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TRENCHES

A. Preparation, trenching, examination, control of groundwater, bracing and shoring, bedding and backfilling, pipe laying, and pipe alignment shall be in accordance with Section 02200 and Section 02700.

3.02 PIPE BEDDING

A. Storm drains shall be laid on a firm bed of granular material.

B. Bedding material shall be accurately shaped to the line and grade called for on the plans, and carefully packed under the bottom quadrant of the pipe barrel.

C. Trenches shall be dry when trench bottom is prepared. A continuous trough shall be



prepared or excavated to receive the bottom quadrant of the pipe barrel. In addition, bell holes shall be excavated so that after placement, only the barrel of the pipe receives bearing pressure from the trench bottom.

3.03 PIPE LAYING

A. The pipe shall be installed in conformance with the requirements of ASTM D-2321, as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. The pipe sections shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow line. Immediately before placing each section of pipe in final position for connecting joints, the bedding for the pipe shall be checked for firmness and uniformity of surface.

B. Proper implements, tools and facilities as recommended by the pipe manufacturer’s printed instructions shall be provided and used by the Contractor for safe and efficient execution of the work. All pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of derrick, ropes, or other suitable equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and fittings. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench.

C. Cutting and machining of the pipe shall be accomplished in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s standard procedures for this operation. Pipe shall not be cut with a cold chisel, standard iron pipe cutter, nor any other method that may fracture the pipe or will produce ragged, uneven edges.

D. Installation of pipes in prepared trenches shall start at the lowest point, with the spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow.

E. The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering into the trench. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be repaired or replaced. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering into position in the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. All openings in the pipe line shall be closed with water tight expandable PVC test plugs at the end of each day’s operation or whenever the pipe openings are left unattended. The use of burlap, wood, or other similar temporary plugs will not be permitted.

3.04 PIPE HANDLING

A. Handling of all pipe shall be done with care to insure that the pipe is not damaged in any manner during storage, transit, loading, unloading, and installation.

B. Pipe shall be inspected both prior to and after installation in the trench and all defective lengths shall be rejected and immediately removed from the working area.

3.05 TESTING

A. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration or other defects, the contractor shall correct such defects to the satisfaction of the owner.



B. Final testing of storm drainage pipe shall be conducted after irrigation system is completed.

3.06 STORM DRAIN CONCRETE STRUCTURES:

A. Structures and appurtenances shall be installed at the location and to the lines and dimensions shown on the plans and detail drawings, and as established by the Engineer. The installation of structures and appurtenances shall immediately follow the completion of the pipe laying operation. Unless otherwise noted, structures shall be installed in conformance with the applicable requirements of the City Standard Specifications. Precast structures shall be accurately assembled with full mortar bed joints.

B. Frames for covers in paved areas shall be accurately placed flush with and in the plane of the finish pavement. Tops of structures in unpaved areas shall be constructed to the grades shown or called for on the plans and established by the Engineer. Cover frames in new roadway subgrade shall be brought to finish pavement plane and grade immediately prior to paving operations.

3.07 ROOF DOWN DRAINS

A. Install minimum 4” PVC pipe to connect to roof down drains unless otherwise specified on the plan. Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Plans for roof down drain exact locations. Discharge roof down drain into underground piping system or through 6” concrete curb discharging to pavement, roof down drain water discharged to native soils will not be permitted, unless otherwise specified on the plan.

3.08 UNDERDRAIN PIPELINE AND FILTER FABRICS

A. Perforated underdrain pipeline shall be 4” in diameter conforming to the State Standard Specifications Section 68-1.02K “Perforated Plastic Pipe”.

B. Filter fabrics for use with underdrains shall conform to the provisions in Section 88, “Engineering Fabrics” of the State Standard Specifications. Filter fabric shall be placed in underdrain trenches in accordance with the details shown on the plans and as specified in Section 68-1.03, “Installing Underdrains” of the State Standard Specifications.

C. Underdrain installation shall be in accordance with Section 68-1.03 and Section 68-1.025 of the State Standard Specifications.

END OF SECTION

ZFA STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS TRACY FIRE STATION NO. 92

Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 31 63 16 - 1 Auger Cast Displacement Piles

SECTION 02465

AUGER CAST DISPLACEMENT PILES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services related to the structural design and construction of auger cast-in-place displacement piles (displacement piles).

1. The design of the displacement piles shall conform to the requirements of the California Building Code (CBC), the geotechnical investigation and the information provided in the construction documents.

2. Coordination with other sections:

a. Make all preparations and do all work necessary to receive or adjoin other work.

b. Coordinate with other sections for the accurate location of embedded accessories.


1. Pertinent Sections of Division 01 specifying Quality Control and Testing Laboratory services.

2. Pertinent Sections of other Divisions specifying site concrete: Formwork for site concrete.

3. Section 31000 - Concrete Formwork.

4. Section 32000 - Concrete Reinforcement.

5. Section 33000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

6. Pertinent Sections of Division 03 specifying concrete construction.

7. Pertinent Sections of other Divisions specifying work to be embedded in concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International.

B. California Building Code, CBC, California Code of Regulations, Chapter 18, Soils and Chapter 19, Concrete, latest adopted edition.



C. ASTM – Standards of American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) apply where cited in this section. Use applicable year of adoption or revision.

D. The geotechnical investigation performed by GEC Consulting for Fire Station 92, Tracy CA, dated November 23, 2011.

1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Acceptable pile foundation types which can be demonstrated by the foundation installation contractor to meet the minimum design criteria may include:

1. Auger Cast-in-Place Displacement Piles

2. Tubex Piles

3. Fundex Piles

4. Torque Down Piles

B. Unacceptable pile foundation types are:

1. Driven Piles

2. Micro Piles

C. Performance Requirements:

1. Each pile shall achieve the design load indicated in the construction documents.

2. The maximum horizontal deflection at the top of the pile due to horizontal seismic lateral loads per plan shall not exceed 1/2”.

3. Pile diameter shall not be less than 14”.

4. A pile shall be installed at each location indicated on the plans.

5. Pile embedment depth shall be based on design loads given in the construction documents, pile capacity information provided in the geotechnical investigation and the results of pile load tests. and the required pile embedment depth provided in the geotechnical investigation.

6. For piles designed to gain support through a combination of skin friction and end bearing, the contractor exercise caution during installation to prevent punching through the dense sand layer. Piles which extend more than 3 feet into the dense sand layer shall be reviewed and shall be rejected if installation records show a marked drop in crowd pressure near the pile tip.

5.7. The contractor shall have the option to design piles as gaining support through skin friction only in which case Paragraph 1.3.C.6 shall not apply. Minimum embedment for friction piles shall be based upon calculated skin friction using the criteria provided in the geotechnical investigation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Submit in accordance with pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying submittal procedures. The General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will be returned for correction without review. Submit for review prior to pile installation.

B. Limitation of Review: Structural Engineer's review will be for general conformance with design intent as indicated in the Contract Documents and does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for conformance with the Contract Documents.

C. Pile Contractor to submit proof of experience as required per Section 1.5 Quality Assurance.

D. Product Data for proprietary items, including boring tips.

E. Layout Drawings: Show each pile identification number, installation sequence number, and planned pile tip elevation.

F. Production Pile Design Drawings: Show pile dimensions, size of temporary and permanent steel casing, reinforcing size and material, arrangement of reinforcing, embedment depth of reinforcing and location and types of centering devices. Indicate compressive strength of concrete grout and material specifications for all steel materials used in pile.

G. Design Calculations and Pile Specifications: Provide calculations for design of pile structural sections, in conformance with provisions of the CBC, the above reference geotechnical investigation, the construction documents and these specifications. Calculations shall include the following:

1. Calculations shall bear the seal and signature of a Civil Engineer registered in the state of California.

2. Pile diameter

3. Pile embedment

4. Pile reinforcing conforming the CBC section 1810.3.5

5. Theoretical Pile Volume

6. Design for 3” minimum eccentricity

7. Material specifications and properties for the required reinforcing and the concrete/grout per Part 2.

H. Material Certifications for the following:

1. Cements

2. Aggregates

3. Admixtures



4. Steel

5. Reinforcing Steel

I. Installation and Monitoring Procedures: Provide, as part of bid acceptance criteria, detailed written procedure to be followed for installing piles, including description of equipment and methods to be used. Describe procedures for monitoring installation. Include form proposed for preparation of standard daily log.

J. Production Pile Location and pile submittal: Furnish as-built drawing showing horizontal locations and elevations of pile butts prior to placing grade beams, including the installation sequence number and the pile information log as required per the geotechnical investigation and item I above.

K. Pile testing Procedures: Describe procedures to be employed for load testing.

1. Submit certification calibration charts for each test jack, pressure gauge, master gauge and load cell to be used.

L. The Pile Contactor shall prepare a Testing and Inspection Form per the building department’s requirements for the piles. The Structural Engineer shall review prior to submittal to the Building Department.


A. Pile Contractor Qualifications – The Pile Contractor shall have a minimum of three years of experience installing pile foundations for projects with similar conditions to the current project and they shall have completed a minimum of three project installing the proposed type of pile. Proof of such experience shall be submitted with the bid documents.

B. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318

C. Pile construction verification and inspection to conform to CBC 1704.8.

D. Production Pile Design Drawings shall be reviewed by Geotechnical Engineer and the Structural Engineer.

E. Installation procedures, testing procedures and pile installation logs shall be reviewed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

F. Services by the Independent Testing Agency (includes "Special" Inspections) as specified in this Section and the Construction Documents.

G. Contractor shall bear the entire cost of remediation, removal, and/or replacement of concrete determined defective or non-conforming, including Architect/Engineer fees for redesign.

1.6 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING

A. Organize the work and employ shop and field crew(s) of sufficient size to minimize inspections by the Testing Agency.



B. Provide schedule and sequence information to Testing Agency in writing upon request. Update information as work progresses.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK

Pile Contractor to provide formwork as required in conformance with requirements of Section 03 10 00.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

Pile Contractor to provide reinforcement in conformance with requirements of Section 03 20 00.

2.3 CONCRETE/GROUT

Pile Contractor to provide concrete/grout in conformance with requirements of Section 03 30 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform field engineering and layout work furnishing necessary centerlines, offsets and grade stakes.

B. Notify Geotechnical Engineer at least two working days in advance of the beginning of work or on resumption of work after stoppage. Any hole drilled or cast without continuous observation by a representative of the Geotechnical Engineer will be rejected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install piles in accordance with approved layout drawings, pile tip elevations, and installation and monitoring procedures.

B. Tolerances:

1. Plan Location: Plus or minus 3 inches.

2. Vertical alignment: Shaft out of plumb, or differing from prescribed angle, not more than 2.0 percent of length.

3. Where specified tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction to compensate for eccentricity as determined by Owner’s Representative.

3.3 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE PILES

A. All cost associated with correction of defective piles will be paid for by the Pile Contractor, including structural engineering services for evaluation and redesign.



B. Any pile installed without continuous observation by a representative of the Geotechnical Engineer will be deemed unsuitable.

C. Mislocation beyond specified tolerances will be cause for rejection of pile. Owner’s Representative will determine required corrective action at mislocated piles. Pile Contractor shall pay cost associated with evaluation and costs associated with modifications to pile cap and grade beam system necessitated by pile mislocation.

D. Leave all pile heads sound; repair or replace damaged heads at no cost to Owner. Pile Contactor shall propose repair method, subject to approval of Owner’s Representative.

3.4 LOAD TESTING PROCEDURES

A. The following procedures will be required for load testing of designated test piles. Load testing will be performed by Pile Contractor, at no additional cost to Owner, under observation of Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Prior to installation of production piles; Pile Contractor to install a minimum of one pile for compression and one pile for lateral capacity testing per pile diameter.

1. Piles installed for load testing shall be installed at locations where they will not interfere with installation of production piles.

2. Proposed location of test piles shall be based upon CPT data and shall be reviewed and approved by Structural Engineer and Geotechnical Engineer prior to installation. Test piles shall be installed not more than 3 feet from a CPT Probe. The contractor shall complete a minimum of four additional CPT probes as required for location of Test Piles at no additional cost to Owner.

3. The location of CPT probes and test piles shall be surveyed and overlain on foundation plan provided to Structural Engineer/Geotechnical Engineer.

4. Piles designed to gain support through a combination of skin friction and end bearing shall be tested in Ccompression pile testing shall be done per ASTM D1143 and the requirements of the geotechnical investigation. Piles designed to gain support through skin friction only shall be tested in tension in accordance with ASTM D3689. The pile shall be tested to a minimum of 2.0 times the axial compression design load (Dead Load + Live Loads + Vertical Seismic Load).

5. Lateral pile testing shall be done per ASTM D3966 and the requirements of the geotechnical investigation. The pile shall be tested to a minimum of 2.0 times the horizontal seismic design load.

6. A representative of the Geotechnical Engineer shall be on site during installation and testing of piles.

7. Geotechnical Engineer shall review the test results, the Production Pile Design Drawings, and the Pile Contractor’s methods of evaluating for adequate embedment length prior to installation of production piles.

C. Retests and test performed due to the Pile Contractor’s inability to achieve the required acceptance criteria shall be at the Pile Contractor’s expense.



D. Records: The Pile Contractor shall provide the Owner’s Representative two (2) copies of test records within five (5) working days of each test. Test records shall include the all required documentation for the production piles required in the geotechnical investigation.

E. The pile contractor shall allow a minimum of (5) working days from submittal of reports for review/approval of pile load test results before proceeding with installation of production piles. Production pile installation shall not proceed without written approval of Geotechnical Engineer.


A. Inspection and testing will be performed under the provisions of Division 01 Section Quality.

B. Geotechnical Engineer will:

1. Continuously observe pile installation. Notify Pile Contractor and Owner’s Representative when depth of material encountered varies from expected conditions. Notify Pile Contractor and Owner’s Representative when grout volume or pressure deviates from observations of testing program.

2. Monitor load testing and recording of results

3. Perform final evaluation of the acceptability of the installed piles.

4. Compile records of each pile fromor Pile Contractor’s log and Geotechnical Engineer’s Observation.

5. Prepare a final report.

C. The Testing Laboratory will:

1. Special inspection of reinforcing steel as required by the Testing and Inspection Form.

2. Special inspection of concrete placement as required by the Testing and Inspection Form.

3. Special Inspection of welding as required by the Testing and Inspection Form.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02513 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 02513 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This portion of the work shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary or incidental to the completion of the pavement shown on the plans and as herein specified.

B. Work Specified in This Section

1. Subgrade preparation.

2. Soil sterilization.

3. Prime and tack coats.

4. Base Course.

5. Asphalt surfacing.

6. Seal Coat.

7. Asphalt concrete overlay

8. Saw cut and match existing AC pavement grade.

C. Related Work Specified in Other Sections

1. Earthwork - Section 02200

2. Concrete Surface Improvement - Section 02515

3. Except as may be modified by these specifications, this work shall conform to Section 39 State of California Standard Specifications, latest edition.

4. This work shall conform to City of Tracy Standard Specifications and Standard Details.

1.03 UTILITIES

A. Do not commence work until underground pipes and utilities are placed, inspected and accepted, and backfill and compaction is completed. Cutting or patching of finished paving



shall not be permitted.

1.04 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Contractor shall provide Engineer with certified copies of test data and results to verify the acceptability of the materials to be used.

1.05 GUARANTEE

A. In addition to the guarantee specified in Division 1, Contractor shall repair or restore to first class conditions any portion of the asphaltic paving in which weed growth, creeping, shoving, revealing, cracking, softening, excessive or uneven settlement due to improper placing, or defective materials that appear or become apparent within one (1) year from date of acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WEED CONTROL

A. Responsibility of the effectiveness of the type of weed control used is the sole responsibility of Contractor.

B. Use of borates and sodium chlorate, or other non-poisonous chemicals only, will be permitted.

C. No weed control chemical shall be applied to areas designated for planting.

2.02 STRUCTURAL PAVEMENT SECTION

A. Aggregate Base

1. Shall be Class 2 aggregate base in conformance with Section 26 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

2. Crushed and recycled material may be used as aggregate base material as long as the grading of this mixture conforms to the specification requirements stated above.

B. Asphaltic Concrete:

1. Paving asphalt to be mixed with aggregate shall be steam refined asphalt conforming to the provisions of Section 92 of the Standard Specifications for viscosity grade PG 64-16.

2. Type B Aggregate as specified in the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39, 1/2 inch maximum size, medium grading.

2.03 PRIME COAT

A. SC-70 liquid asphalt conforming to Sections 39 and 93 of the Standard Specifications.



2.04 TACK COAT

A. SS-1 asphalt emulsion conforming to Sections 37 and 94 of the Standard Specifications.

2.05 SEAL COAT

A. Shall consist of an asphaltic emulsion, penetration type, conforming to ASTM D-401-40.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which asphalt concrete paving is to be installed. Notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Geotechnical Engineer and the Owner's Representative.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE

A. The underlying 6” of sub-grade shall be compacted to at least 95% relative compaction as determined by procedures set forth in ASTM Designation D1557.

B. Remove all soft and unstable material and other portions of the subgrade which will not compact readily, and replace with approved materials.

C. Subgrade preparation and compaction shall be performed under the observation of the Soils Engineer.

D. Subgrade preparation shall extend a minimum of 2 feet beyond concrete and asphalt pavement.

E. Finish subgrade shall be within 0.10 foot above or below theoretical grade shown or established.

3.03 AGGREGATE BASE

A. Aggregate base shall be spread and compacted in conformance with Standard Specifications Section 26 for class 2 Aggregate Base. Finished aggregate base shall have the minimum depth as shown in the pavement design chart on the plans and finished grade shall not vary more than 0.05 foot above or below the established grade. The aggregate base shall be moisture conditioned to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content and compacted to a minimum relative compaction of 95 percent by mechnical means only as determined by ASTM Test Designation D1557-02.

3.04 PRIME AND TACK COAT

A. Prime Coat



1. Prior to placement of asphalt concrete, apply prime coat to the aggregate base to all areas receiving asphalt concrete. Conform to Section 39 of Standard Specifications.

B. Tack Coat

1. Apply a "tack coat" to all vertical faces, against which asphalt concrete is to be placed. Conform to Section 39 of Standard Specifications.

3.05 PLACING ASPHALTIC CONCRETE

A. Asphalt concrete shall be spread and compacted on the prepared base in conformance with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the drawing and as specified in Section 39 of the Standard Specifications. Spreading by blading equipment consisting of motor graders will not be permitted.

3.06 SEAL COAT

A. Per Section 39-7.02 of the Caltrans Specification.

3.07 FLOOD TEST

A. The contractor shall test the paved areas for proper drainage by flooding with water in ample quantity to demonstrate the correct shaping of the paving.

B. Flood test to be made prior to the sealing and striping of the pavement. Owner to witness flood tests. Notify Owner three working days minimum prior to flood test.

C. Repair any areas in which excessive ponding occurs. Excessive ponding is defined as areas in which water stands more than 3/16" in depth. Any areas requiring remedial overlay shall be overlayed with a 3/8" fine mix placed over a tack coat. This corrective work shall be done prior to the sealing and paint striping of the lot.



Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 . CONCRETE SURFACE IMPROVEMENT Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02515 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 02515 CONCRETE SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Forming concrete surface improvements for the parking lot, driveway entry, curb, gutter and sidewalks, exterior walks and patio.

B. Placing and finishing concrete surface improvements.

C. Curing concrete surface improvements.

D. Protecting concrete surface improvements.

E. Construction of concrete slab for building, fuel tank, diesel generator, and trash enclosure shall utilize structural concrete specifications.

F. All handicap ramps shall be concrete surface improvements.

G. The Work shall include the provision of all materials, equipment and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the plans, but which are obviously necessary to complete the Work specified.

H. Install or replace concrete mow band(s) within city right of way.


A. All Work shall be done to the satisfaction of the Owner or Owner's representative and all subgrade shall meet the approval of the designated representative of the Geotechnical Engineer.

B. No concrete for concrete surface improvements shall be placed until the subgrade for same has been approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and the forms and reinforcement for same have been accepted by the Owner or Owner's representative.

C. Related work specified in other sections

1. Earthwork - Section 02200

2. Asphalt Concrete Paving - Section 02513

D. Codes and Standards:

1. Forming of Portland Cement Concrete roadway improvements shall conform to the applicable provisions of Section 73-1.04, 73-1.05A or 73-1.05B of the Caltrans Specifications.

2. Placing and finishing of Portland Cement Concrete roadway improvements shall



conform to the provisions of Section 73-1.05, 73-1.05A, 73-1.05B or 73-1.06, of the Caltrans Specifications.

3. Curing and protecting of Portland Cement Concrete roadway improvements shall conform to the applicable provisions of Section 90-7 and 90-8, respectively, of the Caltrans Specifications.

E. Submittals:

1. Mix Designs: Submit concrete mix designs for each required concrete type. Obtain the Architect's written approval before placing concrete.

2. Submit minimum 8" x 8" colored concrete samples utilizing cement and aggregate proposed for the work.

3. Sealants: Submit samples and test data demonstrating that the proposed sealants will adhere to the surfaces to which they will be applied.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Where a portion of existing concrete surface improvements is to be reconstructed, the section to be removed shall first be separated from that to remain by means of a cut with an approved concrete saw to a minimum depth of one and one-half (1-1/2) inches at the first score line beyond the area to be replaced.

B. All repairs to concrete surface improvements shall be made by completely removing and replacing the entire portion between the score lines or joints.

C. Hand mixing of Portland Cement Concrete for use in concrete surface improvements shall not be permitted.

D. Prior to forming for concrete surface improvements, the Contractor shall first secure acceptance of the subgrade from the Geotechnical Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

A. Portland Cement Concrete for fixed form concrete surface improvements shall be Class "A" conforming to the requirements of Section 90 of the Caltrans Specifications.

1. Concrete compressive strength for vehicular traffic pavement shall be a minimum of 3,000 psi.

2. Concrete compressive strength for other concrete surface improvements shall be a minimum of 2,500 psi.

3. Concrete used within public right of way shall conform to city standard specifications.

B. Aggregate gradation for concrete roadway improvements shall conform to the requirements



of Section 90-3 of the State Standard Specifications for one and one-half (1-1/2) inch maximum combined aggregates. Aggregate used within public right of way shall conform to city standard specifications.

C. Pervious concrete mixes shall adhere to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA 2004b) standard recommendations and specifications. Contractor shall submit a comprehensive pervious concrete mix design and a test panel from a certified concrete mix provider to the design engineer for review and approval prior to construction.

D. Supplier's certificates showing conformance with this specification shall be delivered to the Engineer with each shipment of materials delivered to the job site.

E. Integral concrete colorant: Light-fast, lime proof, finely divided mineral oxide terrazzo matrix coloring. Davis Colors; Conrad Sovig Company, L. M. Scofield Company or equal. Refer to Schedule of Landscape Construction Finishes on the drawings.

2.02 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL

A. Material for expansion joints in Portland Cement Concrete surface improvements shall be premolded expansion joint fillers of the thickness called for on the plans conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation D1751. Expansion joint material shall be shaped to fit the cross section of the concrete prior to being placed.

B. Joint Filler: ASTM D1752 Type I, premolded non-extruding neoprene sponge rubber, thickness indicated; with removable polystyrene or PVC strip mechanically attached to the top edge.

C. Joint Sealant: Two-component polysulfide or polyurethane elastomeric type complying with FS TT-S-00227, self-leveling, designed for foot traffic.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND DOWELS

A. Bar reinforcement for the concrete surface improvements shall be deformed billet-steel bars of the size or sizes called for on the plans and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation A615 for Grade 40 bars. Bar deformation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation A305. Size and shape of bar reinforcement shall conform to the details shown or called for on the plans.

B. Dowels, where noted or called for on the plans or detail drawings, shall be smooth billet-steel bars conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation A615 for Grade 40 bars. Dowels shall be No. 4 smooth steel dowels; cover one end with capping sleeve.

C. Mesh for reinforcement for concrete surface improvements shall be cold drawn steel wire mesh of the size and spacing called for on the plans and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation A82 for the material and ASTM Designation A185 for the mesh. Size and extent of mesh reinforcement shall conform to the details shown or called for on plans.

D. Tie wire for reinforcement shall be eighteen (18) gauge or heavier black annealed conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation A82.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. The underlying 12 inches of subgrade material shall be composed of compacted non-expansive fill. The upper 6” of sub-grade shall be compacted to at least 95% relative compaction as determined by procedures set forth in ASTM Designation D1557.

B. Subgrade preparation and compaction shall be performed under the observation of the Soils Engineer. Remove all soft and unstable material and other portions of the subgrade which will not compact readily, and replace with approved materials

C. Subgrade preparation shall extend a minimum of 2 feet beyond concrete and asphalt pavement in street area.

3.02 FORMS FOR CONCRETE

A. Forms for concrete surface improvements shall have a smooth and true upper edge and the side of the form to be placed next to concrete shall have a smooth finish. Forms shall be constructed rigid enough to withstand the pressure of the fresh concrete to be placed without any distortion.

B. All forms shall have been thoroughly cleaned prior to placement and shall be coated with approved form oil sufficient to prevent adherence of concrete prior to filling.

C. Forms shall be carefully set to the alignment and grade required by the plans. Forms shall be rigidly held in place by stakes set at intervals satisfactory to the Engineer. Sufficient clamps, spreaders and braces shall be installed to ensure the rigidity of the forms.

D. Forms for back and face of curbs, lip of gutters and edge of walks, valley gutters or other surface slabs shall be equal to the full depth of the concrete as shown, noted or called for on the plans or detail drawings. Composite forms made up from benders or thin planks of sufficient ply to ensure rigidity of the form in the shape required may be used on curves and curb returns.

E. Chamfer Strips: Where chamfered edges are indicated on the drawings, install wood chamfer strips in the forms; tooling of chamfers will not be allowed.

F. Install pipe sleeves for irrigation system furnished under Section 02810. Stake location of irrigation sleeves.

3.03 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Expansion joints incorporating premolded joint fillers for fixed form concrete surface improvements shall be constructed at twenty (20) foot intervals and at the ends of curb returns. At each expansion joint, two (2) smooth slip dowels shall be installed in the positions shown or noted on the detail drawings.

B. Expansion joints at vertical surfaces shall be installed without dowels at all building walls and other vertical structures.



C. Expansion joints incorporating joint fillers for slip-formed concrete roadway improvements shall be constructed at all curb returns. At each expansion joint, two (2) smooth slip dowels shall be installed in the positions shown or noted on the detail drawings.

D. Slip dowels shall be oriented at right angles to the expansion joint and shall be held firmly in place during the construction process.

E. Expansion joints and slip dowels shall be constructed in valley gutters and driveway approaches at all beginning and end points of curvature and in all positions indicated or called for on the detail drawings.

F. Hold joint filler straight, true to line and at proper level by stapling to 2X wood form; pour adjacent slabs separately.

G. Neatly tool edges of joint flush with removable strip.

H. Carefully remove the removable strip when concrete is sufficiently set.

I. Avoid spawling tooled joint edges; any damaged edges shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect.

J. Control Joints in retaining walls and seatwalls: install vertical V-joints formed with 3/4" beveled wood chamfer strips spaced at 10 feet on center minimum, and at changes in direction. Align joints with adjacent paving joints and markings.

3.04 WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS (SCORE MARKS)

A. Weakened plane joints shall be constructed in concrete curbs, gutters and walkways between expansion joints at ten (10) foot intervals throughout. Depth of joint score shall be one-eighth (1/8) inch.

B. Tool straight lines with neatly formed radius edges; conform with details shown on the Drawings.

C. Control Joints in retaining walls and seatwalls: install vertical V-joints formed with 3/4" beveled wood chamfer strips spaced at 10 feet on center minimum, and at changes in direction. Align joints with adjacent paving joints and markings.

3.05 CONCRETE SURFACE CONSTRUCTION

A. Concrete curb and gutter shall be formed, placed and finished in conformance with the applicable requirements of Section 73 of the State Standard Specifications as modified herein.

B. Install public concrete improvements such as sidewalk, curb, gutter, and mow band(s) per city standard specifications and details.

3.06 FINISHES

A. Perform concrete finishing using mechanical or hand methods as required. Finishes shall



match approved samples.

B. Integral Color Concrete:

1. Do not use magnesium floats or tools. 2. Do not use visquine for curing. 3. Do not allow excessive surface water.

C. Paving to Receive Light Sandblast Finish:

1. Screed and float paving to a smooth, even grade in accordance with the Drawings using overhead screeds where necessary to establish flow lines or grade breaks.

2. Steel trowel to a smooth, hard finish. 3. After a minimum two week curing period, lightly sandblast to remove surface laittence.

Do not expose coarse aggregate. 4. Finish shall be uniform throughout in color and texture.

D. Seatwalls:

1. Lightly sandblast all exposed surfaces to remove cement latence and expose minor voids. Do not expose coarse aggregate.

2. Finish shall be uniform in texture and color.

3.07 SEALANTS

A. Work under this Section includes furnishing and installation of all sealants, backing rods, primers and associated work and materials in expansion joints in concrete work.

B. Prime joints and install per manufacturers printed instructions.

C. Hold sealant flush with paving surface.

D. Sealant shall be smooth with no voids or irregularities.


A. Finish subgrade for concrete roadway improvements shall be subject to the acceptance of the Geotechnical Engineer. No forms shall be placed prior to Contractor obtaining such acceptance.

B. Variation of concrete roadway improvements from design grade and cross section as shown or called for on the plans shall not exceed the tolerances established in Section 73-1.05 and/or 73-1.07 of the State Standard Specifications, as applicable.



Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 PAVEMENT MARKING Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02577 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 02577 PAVEMENT MARKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Cleaning and sweeping of pavement before application of markings.

B. Application of stripes and pavement markings on new pavements in the parking areas.

C. The work shall include the provision of all materials, equipment and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the plans, but which are obviously necessary to complete the work specified.

D. All on-site traffic striping shall be white paint unless noted otherwise.


A. All work shall be done to the satisfaction of the Owner or Owner's representative.

B. Manufacturer's certificates showing conformance with this specification shall be delivered to Owner with each shipment of materials and equipment delivered to the job site.

C. Codes and Standards:

1. The standards, recommended methods and tests contained in the publications cited below shall determine the standards for the work to be done hereunder unless otherwise specifically designated on the plans:

a. The State of California Maintenance Manual, latest editions.

b. The State of California Traffic Manual, latest edition.

c. The regulations, standards, and tests of the State of California Materials and Research Division.

d. The State of California Standard Plans and Specifications.

2. Pavement striping and markings shall be placed in the locations shown on the plans and shall conform to the standards illustrated in the State of California Traffic Manual and Maintenance Manual.

3. Reference by manufacturers, brands or models is to establish type and quality of materials desired. Substitution of materials of equal quality will be permitted upon the prior written acceptance of the Engineer.


A. Asphalt concrete seal coat shall be thoroughly dry before application of striping or marking


Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 PAVEMENT MARKING Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02577 Page 2 of 2

thereon. No striping shall be applied until pavement surfaces have been accepted for marking by the Owner or Owner's representative.

B. Concrete shall be thoroughly cured before application of striping or marking thereon. No striping or marking shall be applied until concrete surfaces have been approved for marking by the Owner or Owner's representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PARKING SIGNS

A. Parking sign panels shall be of the type, size, shape and pattern designated or called for on the plans and detail drawings.

B. Posts for parking signs shall be two (2) inch I.D. steel pipe conforming to the requirements of Section 56-2.02A of the State Standard Specifications.

C. Mounting hardware for parking signs shall conform to the applicable requirements and specifications contained in the State of California Department of Transportation "Standard Plans" publication, latest edition.

D. Concrete bases for parking sign posts shall be Class "B" Portland cement concrete of the shape and dimensions shown or called for on the plans and detail drawings.

2.02 STRIPING

A. All offsite striping and markings shall be thermoplastic and conform to the City of Tracy standard specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PARKING SIGNS

A. Parking signs shall be installed in conformance with the applicable requirements of the State of California Maintenance Manual.

B. After erection, any damage to parking sign faces shall be touched up as required to the satisfaction of the City Engineer.



Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 SITE UTILITIES Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02700 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 02700 SITE UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Trenching and other excavation. (See Section 02200 – Earthwork)

B. Pipe bedding. (See Section 02200 – Earthwork)

C. Backfill and compaction of backfill. (See Section 02200 – Earthwork)

D. Dust alleviation and control.

E. Cleanup and restoration of surface in improved areas.

F. The work shall include the provision of all materials, equipment and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the plans, but which are obviously necessary to complete the work specified.

G. Related work in other sections - Section 02705 - Water Systems - Section 02710 - Sanitary Sewer Systems - Section 02717 - Site Fire Water Systems - Section 02200 – Earthwork – Section 02065 – Removal Work.


A. All work shall be done to the satisfaction of the designated representative of the Geotechnical Engineer, and shall meet with the acceptance of the Owner or Owner's representative.

B. Percentage of compaction specified shall be the minimum acceptable. The percentage represents the ratio of the dry density of the compacted backfill material to the maximum dry density of the material as determined by the procedure set forth in ASTM Designation D1557.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Locations of existing underground utilities and structures, insofar as they are known from information available from records and from the respective public utility companies, have been shown on the plans. The Engineer assumes no responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of said data, which is offered solely for the convenience of the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify the location of these obstructions and to locate any other underground utilities and structures which might necessitate a change in the location, line, or grade of the new work prior to commencement of the new work.

B. During trenching operations, the Contractor shall furnish, install, and operate adequate pumps or other devices as may be necessary to remove any seepage, storm water, or sewage that may be encountered during the progress of the work. All excavations shall be kept free from water during bedding, pipe laying, initial backfilling and when concrete is being



placed, and thereafter until such water will do no damage to the work.

C. Damage resulting from movement of the sides or bottom of trenches or other excavation which is attributable to the Contractor's acts or omissions, whether sides are braced or not, and any portions of the area and work affected by such movement, shall be repaired or restored by the Contractor at his expense to the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Engineer and the Owner or Owner's Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Material for pipe bedding and backfill shall be granular material, clean and free of clay, silt, or organic matter, shall be subject to the acceptance of the Geotechnical Engineer, and shall comply with City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION AND EXAMINATION OF TRENCHES

A. Trench excavation shall include the removal of all materials or obstructions of any nature, the installation and removal of all sheeting and bracing, and the control of water, necessary to construct the work as shown. Excavation shall be by open cut. Trenching machines may be used, except where their use will result in damage to existing facilities.

B. Trenches shall be dug to an even laying grade and to a depth sufficient to provide the indicated bedding and cover for the pipe.

C. The minimum clear width of trench at the bottom of the pipe shall be 12 inches greater than the outside diameter of the barrel of the pipe.

D. The maximum allowable width of trench at the bottom of the pipe shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus 24 inches inclusive of any trench bracing.

E. If trench widths at the top of the pipe as above specified are exceeded by any amount for any reason, the Contractor shall provide at his own expense, stronger pipe, improved bedding conditions, or concrete protection, as accepted to meet the load requirements of the condition.

F. When the trench is in an existing paved area, the pavement shall be sawed or scored on neat lines parallel with and equidistant from the trench centerlines. Pavement between the lines shall be broken and removed immediately ahead of the trenching operations. The width of pavement removed shall be sufficient that the trenching operation does not damage the edges of the pavement left in place.

G. To insure the safety of workmen and to protect and facilitate the work, sufficient bracing and shoring shall be installed in all excavations 5 feet deep or over. A bracing and shoring plan shall be prepared by a State of California registered civil or structural engineer employed by the contractor. The plan shall comply with the rules, orders and regulations of the California Division of Industrial Safety and OSHA. Failure to comply with any of the above mentioned



rules, orders and regulations shall be sufficient cause for the Owner or the Owner's representative to immediately suspend the work. No compensation for losses incurred by the Contractor for such a suspension will be allowed. Insofar as possible, sheeting shall not extend below the bottom of the trench. All sheeting, timbering, lagging and bracing shall be removed during backfilling, and in such a manner to prevent any movement of the ground or the piping or damage to other structures.

H. Excess excavated material, unsuitable materials, or that not required for backfill, shall be the property of the Contractor and deposited off the site.

3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION, ALIGNMENT, AND PIPE LAYING

A. All trenching, excavation, bedding and backfill shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein. Each section of pipe and each fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned out before it is installed. All pipe shall be carefully lowered into the trench by suitable tools or equipment in such a manner to prevent any damage, particularly to coating. Approved slings shall be used to lower the pipe. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped into the trench. Each section of pipe, before lowering into the trench, shall be examined for defects. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be rejected.

B. The pipe shall be laid true to line with no visible change in alignment at any joint unless curved alignment is shown on the plan, in which case the maximum deflection at any joint shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation for the type of pipe and joint being used.

C. All piping joints shall be in accordance with accepted best practice and as detailed in the manufacturer's installation manual. Both joint surfaces shall be clean before joints are made. Materials used in pipe joints shall only be that furnished with the pipe or recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Installation of all storm drain and sanitary sewer pipes in prepared trenches shall start at the lowest point with the spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow.

3.03 PIPE BEDDING AND BACKFILL

A. Pipe bedding and backfill material for on-site utilities shall be subject to the acceptance of the Geotechnical Engineer, and comply with City of Tracy requirements.

B. Prior to the installation of bedding and pipe, Contractor shall notify the Geotechnical Engineer for observation of trench conditions. Placement of bedding and pipe shall not commence until the Geotechnical Engineer has accepted the excavation.

3.04 BACKFILLING (SPECIAL PROVISIONS)

A. Backfilling for utility trenches and excavations shall be performed per the Earthwork specifications.

B. Backfill shall be placed and compacted as specified in the Earthwork specification section.



C. Utility backfill shall be inspected and tested by the Geotechnical Engineer during placement. Contractor shall cooperate with the Geotechnical Engineer and shall provide working space for such tests in operations. Backfill not compacted in accordance with these specifications shall be recompacted or removed as necessary and replaced to meet the specified requirements, to the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Engineer prior to proceeding with the work.

D. One year guarantee: If, at any time during a period of one year dating from the date of final acceptance of the project, there should be any settlement of the trenches requiring repairs to be made, the Owner may notify the Contractor to immediately make such repairs at the Contractor's expense.

3.05 TEMPORARY PAVING

A. All trenches shall be backfilled daily with a minimum of 2 inches of temporary asphalt unless final paving can be completed. Temporary asphalt shall be placed within 1/4 - inch of finished pavement grades. Steel plates may be used to cover open trenches in lieu of backfill and temporary asphalt as approved by City Engineer.



Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 . WATER SYSTEMS Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02705 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 02705 WATER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Installation of water lines and appurtenances.

B. Sterilization and testing.

C. The work shall include the provision of all materials, equipment and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the plans, but which are obviously necessary to complete the work specified.

D. Related work specified elsewhere: Section 02700- Site Utilities - Section 02717 - Site Fire Water Systems


A. General

1. All work shall be done to the satisfaction of the designated representative of the Geotechnical Engineer, and shall meet with the approval of the Owner or Owner's representative and City.

2. Specifications for water system installations shall be in accordance with City of Tracy Standard Specifications latest version at time of bid opening.

B. Testing

1. Water mains, services and appurtenances shall be subject to hydrostatic and leakage tests.

C. Sterilization

1. Water mains, services, and appurtenances shall be sterilized prior to connection to existing systems for domestic use.

D. Compaction

1. Percentage of compaction specified shall be the minimum acceptable. The percentage represents the ratio of the dry density of the compacted backfill material to the maximum dry density of the material as determined by the procedure set forth in ASTM Designation D1557.

E. Deflection

1. The maximum allowable deflection (out of roundness) of PVC pipe shall be 5% or the manufacturers recommended maximum, whichever is smaller.



1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D-1557 - Test Method for Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures using 10-lb. (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18-in. (457 mm) Drop.

B. California Labor Code Section 6707 – Excavation five (5) feet or more in depth.

C. California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (CAL/OSHA), State of California Code of Regulations, Title 8 – Industrial Relations, Chapter 4 – Division of Industrial Safety.

D. Contractor shall install the polyethylene encasement in strict conformance with the latest edition of the AWWA C105 Standard.

E. ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 – Cement Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water.

F. ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 – Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fitting, 3-in through 48-in, for Water and Other Liquids.

G. ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 – Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

H. ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 – Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron or Gray Iron Threaded Flanges.

I. ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 – Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.

J. ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 – Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.

K. ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 – Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.

L. AWWA C600 – Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. All ductile iron pipes, joints, shall conform to ductile iron pipe Special Thickness Class 53 as shown in Table 50.15 of ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50. All ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with and meet all requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.

B. All exterior surfaces for ductile iron pipe, joints, and fittings shall be polyethylene encased in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105 using method C.

C. All interior surfaces for ductile iron pipes, joints and fittings shall be cement mortar lined conforming to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104; provided that cement for mortar joining shall be Type V. A fly ash or Pozzolan shall not be used as cement replacement.

D. All pipe joints shall be push-on type and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 unless otherwise specified herein. Push-on joints shall be Fastile and available for use with Fast-Grip restrained joint gasket, as manufactured by American Ductile Iron Pipe or



ductile iron pipe shall have TYTON joint type bells and be designed to be joined and sealed with FIELD LOK 350 restrained joint gasket as manufactured by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, or approved equal.

E. All ductile iron push-on joint fittings furnished under these specifications shall conform to all applicable requirements and the latest revision of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C153/A21.53 or AWWA C606. Push-on fittings shall be rated for 350 psi working pressure.

F. Ductile ion flanged pipe thread-fabrication shall be Special Thickness Class 53 and shall be in accordance with AWWA C115/A21.15. Threaded companion flanges for ductile iron pipe shall be ductile iron in accordance with AWWA C115, not ANSI B16.1. Bolt circle and bolt holes shall match those of ANSI B16.1 class 125 and ANSI B16.5 class 150 flanges. The flanges shall be rated for at least 250 psi working pressure. The threaded flanges shall be individually fitted and machine tightened on the pipe ends. Flange facing shall be smooth or with shallow serrations per AWWA C115.

G. Gaskets:

1. FIELD LOK Gaskets, manufactured by U.S. Pipe or AMERICAN Fast-Grip Gaskets, manufactured by American Ductile Iron Pipe or approved equal.

2. Flange gaskets shall be 1/8 inch thick, full faced rubber with duck insert having a Duro hardness of 80, Garlock 19 by Garlock Packing Company, or approved equal. Each gasket shall be made from a single sheet of stock.

E. Fastener:

1. Bolts and nuts for flanged joints and manhole covers shall be stainless steel and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM 304 or 316.

F. Ductile Iron Pipe Manufacturers:

1. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, Inc. 2. American Ductile Iron Pipe Company. 3. Or equal.

G. Cement mortar lining with seal coat for pipe shall be furnished double thickness and shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. The pipe exterior shall be coated with standard asphaltic coating per ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.

H. Push-on fittings shall be fusion epoxy lined and coated in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 and ANSI/AWWA C116/A21.16.

2.02 COPPER TUBING

A. Copper tubing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 88 and shall be Type K, soft temper, joint free, for buried tubing; and hard-drawn joint free, for above-ground applications. All fittings connecting copper tubing shall be compression fittings.

2.03 PVC PRESSURE PIPE



A. PVC Pressure Pipe used for water lines shall conform to the following requirements:

1. 4" to 12” and greater - ASTM D1784 AWWA C900 Class 150.

2. 1 1/2" to 3" - ASTM D1785-76 AWWA Schedule 80 by IAMPO unless otherwise shown or specified in the plans and specifications.

B. Maximum length of each section of pipe between elastomeric rings shall be twenty (20) feet.

2.04 FITTINGS FOR PVC PIPE

A. Fittings for use on PVC pressure pipe shall be ductile iron conforming to the requirements of AWWA C110 Class 250.

2.05 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES

A. All valves and valve boxes shall conform to the requirements of City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

2.06 WATER SERVICE INSTALLATIONS

A. All water service lines shall be installed according to City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

B. Domestic or fire service lines four (4) inches in diameter and larger shall be PVC pressure pipe conforming to requirements of Paragraph 2.02 hereof. Fittings and appurtenances shall be as herein specified for PVC pressure water mains.

2.07 THRUST BLOCKS

A. Thrust blocks shall be concrete and conform to the requirements of the City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

B. Concrete for thrust blocking shall conform to requirements of City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TRENCHING AND EXCAVATING

A. Trenching and excavation shall be performed in accordance with section 2700 of these Specifications.

3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Installation: Water pipe, valves, fittings and appurtenances shall be installed according to City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

B. Thrust Blocking: Concrete thrust blocks shall be provided at all changes in horizontal or vertical alignment and as indicated in the City of Tracy Standard Specifications. Thrust blocks shall be installed in conformance with City of Tracy Standard Specifications.



C. Domestic water lines and fire service water lines shall have four foot minimum depth to the top of pipe.

D. All pipes shall be installed in 20 foot length minimum or as long as is available from supplier.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall make all required connections to existing facilities and improvements at no additional cost and compensation for such work shall be deemed as included in the various bid items.

3.04 TESTING AND STERILIZATION

A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and equipment, and shall perform all work required in connection with the testing and sterilization of the water distribution system, as specified herein. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be made only after the trenches have been backfilled sufficiently to hold the pipe firmly in position. The Contractor shall provide all water necessary for filling, flushing, sterilization, and any required tests.

B. Repairs and Retests: Any flaws disclosed by any of the above tests shall be repaired and retested to the satisfaction of the Owner or Owner's representative.

C. Hydrostatic Test: Hydrostatic pressure testing of water lines shall be in conformance with City of Tracy Standard Specifications.

D. Sterilization: Before being placed in service, all new water lines shall be chlorinated in accordance with the requirements of City of Tracy Standard Specifications.



Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02710 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 02710 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Installation of sanitary sewers and appurtenances.

B. Infiltration, leakage and televised testing for gravity sewers.

C. Connect new sanitary sewer line to existing sanitary sewer line.

D. The work shall include the provision of all materials, equipment and apparatus not specifically mentioned herewith or noted on the plans, but which are obviously necessary to complete the work specified.

E. Related work in other sections: Section 02700 - Site Utilities


A. General

1. All work shall be done to the satisfaction of the resident project representative. 2. Specifications for sanitary sewer installation shall be in accordance with City of Tracy

Standard Specifications and Drawings.

B. Sanitary sewer gravity mains shall be subject to infiltration and leakage tests.

C. The pipe shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2321 and as specified herein and shown. The sections shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow line immediately before placing each section of pipe in the final position for joints. The bedding for the pipe shall be checked for firmness and uniformity of surface.

D. All pipes shall be installed in twenty foot lengths minimum or as long as is available from the supplier.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PVC SANITARY SEWER GRAVITY PIPE

A. PVC sanitary sewer gravity pipe for gravity sewers shall conform to the requirements of Section 14-02F of the City of Tracy Standard Specifications and Drawings.

B. FITTINGS

1. All fittings including wyes and cleanouts for PVC pipe shall conform to the City of Tracy requirements. The ring groove and gasket ring shall be compatible with PVC pipe ends.



2. The strength class of the fittings shall be not less than the strength class of any adjoining pipe.

2.02 VITRIFIED CLAY SEWER PIPE (VCP)

A. Vitrified Clay pipe shall conform to ASTM C700 (extra strength), unperforated plain end joints.

B. Vitrified clay pipe joint device shall conform to ASTM C425 compression gasket joint.

1.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. All exterior surfaces for ductile iron pipe, joints, and fittings shall be polyethylene encased or otherwise protected from corrosion.

B. Ductile Iron Pipe Manufacturers: 1. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, Inc. 2. American Ductile Iron Pipe Company. 3. Or equal.

2.03 SANITARY SEWER CLEANOUTS

A. Materials for sanitary sewer cleanouts shall conform to the requirements stipulated in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and shall satisfy City of Tracy Standard Specifications and Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TRENCHING AND EXCAVATING

A. Trenching and excavation shall be performed in accordance with Section 02700 of these Specs.

3.02 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER

A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for dewatering trenches and excavations and subsequent control of ground water. Contractor shall provide and maintain such pumps or other equipment as may be necessary to control ground water and seepage to the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Engineer until backfilling is completed.

3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Installation: Pipe and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with City of Tracy Standard Specifications and Drawings.

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall make all required connections to existing facilities and improvements at no additional cost and compensation for such work shall be deemed as included in the various bid items.



B. LATERALS

C. Sanitary sewer laterals shall be installed according to the City of Tracy Standard Specifications and Drawings.

3.05 CLEANING, TESTING, AND TELEVISION INSPECTION OF SANITARY SEWERS

A. Cleaning, testing and television inspection of gravity sewer shall conform to the requirements of City of Tracy Standard Specifications and Drawings.



Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 SITE FIRE WATER SYSTEMS Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02717 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 02717 SITE FIRE WATER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Contractor shall provide shop drawing and submit to the Fire District for approval prior to order materials for their installation of fire water main, fire hydrants and fire water laterals.

B. Contractor is required to have proper license to install underground Fire Water System from the water main to the building including back flow preventer, as required by the City.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED

A. Installation of site fire water facilities and appurtenances which includes fire service vaults, detector check valves, post indicator valves, fire flow meters and fire department connections, as shown on the plans and as herein specified.

B. The work shall include the provision of all materials, equipment and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the plans, but which are obviously necessary to complete the work specified.


A. General

1. All work shall be done to the satisfaction of the designated representative of the Geotechnical Engineer, and shall meet with the acceptance of the Owner or Owner's representative.

2. Related work in other sections - Section 02705 Water Systems - Section 02700 Site Utilities - Section 02200 - Earthwork.

B. Contractor shall notify the Fire Department 48 hours prior to required inspections.

C. Contractor shall submit shop drawings to Fire Department for plan check and approval prior to any construction of fire system.

D. All work related to fire water system shall be inspected and accepted by the Fire Department prior to backfill.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BUILDING FIRE SERVICE UTILITIES

A. Post indicator valves shall meet the acceptance of the local fire department.

B. Fire department connections (sprinkler risers) shall meet the acceptance of the local fire department.


Revised – Addendum 1: 03/19/2012 SITE FIRE WATER SYSTEMS Issued for Permit: 12/15/2010 02717 Page 2 of 2

C. The industrial/commercial Class 2 fire service shall be inspected and accepted by the Fire Department.

D. All piping/fittings for Fire Department connection shall be galvanized, and shall be cold-wrapped in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C209. Coatings may be substituted upon the written approval of the Engineer.

E. Contractor shall be responsible for measuring and ordering the correct size and length of all fire water facilities and appurtenances. All nuts and bolts shall be coated with one of the following coatings:

1. Protector Wrap CA-1200 Mastic

2. Polyguard No. CA-14 Coating

F. The new fire line vaults shall have a checker plate cover, which shall support the 8-ton truck.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 BUILDING FIRE SERVICE UTILITIES

A. Post indicator valves and fire department connections shall be installed in accordance with Section 02705 of these specs and the completed installation shall meet the approval of the local fire department.

B. Hydrostatic pressure testing shall be performed by the local Fire Department.

C. All fire services shall be installed per NFPA 24, 1990 edition.

D. Minimum depth of cover for fire services shall be 48 inches.


KELLER MITCHELL TRACY FIRE STATION 92

Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 02731 - 1 Decomposed Granite Paving

SECTION 02731

DECOMPOSED GRANITE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Aggregate Base B. Redwood Headers C. Decomposed Granite Paving

1.2 RELATED WORK Section 02310 - Site Grading 1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. Standard Specifications: Where referred to in these Specifications, "State Specifications" shall mean the California CalTrans Specifications, latest edition.

B. Percent Compaction: As referred to in these Specifications, percent compaction or

relative compaction is required in- place dry density of material expressed as a percentage of the maximum dry density of the same material determined in accordance with the ASTM Test Method D-1557-78 (C). Optimum moisture content is the moisture content corresponding to the maximum dry density determined by the ASTM Test Method D-1557-78 (C).

C. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM).


A. Crushed gravel paving shall comply with these specifications and all applicable sections of the above named references and standards.

B. Installation: Performed only by skilled workmen with satisfactory record of

performance on completed projects of comparable size and quality. C. Sample Panel: Before starting crushed gravel paving, provide a sample panel

including redwood headers. Build panel at the site of full thickness and approximately 4 feet x 4 feet. Correct and rebuild sample panel until Architect's acceptance of the work. Retain panel during construction as a standard for completed paving work.

D. Do not change source of crushed gravel during the course of the work.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data and specifications.

B. Submit the following material samples for the Architect's written approval prior to delivery of materials to site, or preparation of sample panel. Provide suppliers sieve analysis with each sample.

1. Permeable Base Course: one-half cubic foot. 2. Surface Course: one-half cubic foot.

C. Submit material certificates for base materials.


A. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on a solid surface to prevent mixing with foreign materials.


A. Review installation procedures and coordinate paving work with other work affected by crushed gravel paving work.

B. Protect partially completed paving against weather damage when work is not in

progress. C. Provide temporary barricades and warning lights as required for protection of project

work and public safety. D. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling, or staining during paving operations.

1.8 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER

A. The Engineer will inspect subgrade and aggregate base prior to installation of paving.

1.9 LAYOUT OF THE WORK

A. A licensed surveyor or registered civil engineer shall lay out and establish all lines, levels, grades and positions of all parts of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CRUSHED GRAVEL

A. Permeable Base: 1-1/2 inch maximum size broken stone or crushed gravel conforming to requirement for Class 2 Permeable Base, Section 26-1 of the State Specifications.



Sieve Size Percent Passing

1” 100 3/4" 90-100 3/8" 40-100 #4 25-40 #8 18-33 #30 5-15 #50 0-7 #200 0-3

B. Base Course: 3/4" Class 2 granite aggregate base material per State Specifications; color: Gold/tan.

CB. Surface Course: decomposed granite; color: Gold/tanper City standard, see

Drawings. Maximum dry density: 130 pcf, optimum moisture: 8.8%.

Sieve Size Percent Passing #4 85-100 #8 55-80 #30 30-45 #200 10-20 2.2 STABILIZER

A. Non-toxic, premium organic soil additive; "Stabilizer" as manufactured by Stabilizer, Inc., Phoenix, Arizona, 1-800-336-2468.

2.3 MIX DESIGN

A. Base Course and Surface Coarse: 12 pounds Stabilizer per 1 ton of crushed and decomposed granite.

B. Thoroughly mix in a batch mixer.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Redwood Headers: C.R.A. Construction Heart California Redwood; rough.

B. Stakes may be Construction Heart Redwood or pressure treated Douglas Fir.

C. Nails: Galvanized.

D. Soil Sterilizer: Granular weed growth inhibiting type herbicide, labeled for use under pavement surfaces. Material shall not damage trees and plants adjacent to pavement surfaces.

E. Geotextile Material: Mirafi Filterweave 404 or equal



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the substrate under which paving is to be installed. Notify the Architect, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 LINES AND LEVELS:

A. Finish grades shown on Plans are given in feet and decimals of feet and are to be the top of all graded or paved surfaces. Slope uniformly between given spot eleva-tions unless otherwise indicated.

B. Surfaces shall be true to within 1/8 inch when tested in any direction with a 10-foot

straightedge. There shall be no pools of water standing on the pavement after a rain.

C. Transition between changes in vertical gradient of walks and paving shall be smooth

and gradual with no abrupt or sharp changes.

D. Horizontal layout shall not vary more than 1 inch from dimensions indicated on the Drawings.


A. Preparation of subgrade: specified in Section 02310 - Site Grading. 3.4 WEED CONTROL

A. Apply soil sterilizer over subgrade prior to installing paving in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Redwood Headers

1. Install headers true to line and grade as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Stakes shall be a minimum 14 inches long (increase length as necessary per

soil conditions for solid anchorage) at 4 feet on center. 3. Double stake corners and splices. 4. Securely nail stakes to headers with galvanized nails.

BA. Placement and Compaction

1. General: Uniformly spread approved material and compact to grades and

lines shown. Compaction shall be made by power rollers to 95%. Each lift shall be compacted separately immediately after placement. Apply water as required.

2. Permeable Base Course: Place over prepared subgrade and compact to



depth shown. Finish to a tolerance of +1". 3. Surface Course: Scarify base course immediately prior to placement of

surface course to provide a bond between the two lifts. Place surface material over base course and compact to depth shown.

4. When surface areas have been rolled and it becomes necessary to add thin layer of material to bring surface to grade, previously rolled or compacted area shall be scarified to provide bond with added material.

5. Finish surface of walks shall be uniform in appearance as to texture and color, and shall have a firm stable consistency, resistant to erosion.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Restrict traffic from paving surfaces during and until completion of installation. 3.7 CLEANING

A. Perform cleaning during installation of work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from crushed stone paving operations.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 02810 - 1 Irrigation Systems

SECTION 02810

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Furnish and install a complete irrigation system as shown on the Drawings

and herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 02930 - Tree, Shrub, Vine and Groundcover Planting 2. Section 02200 - Earthwork 1.2 REFERENCES A. Uniform Plumbing Code - Latest edition B. National Electrical Code - NEC, latest edition C. Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Department of Labor. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Irrigation System work in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code,

National Electrical Code, the Safety and Health Regulations for construction, Department of Labor and all other applicable State and local codes and regulations.

B. Nothing on the Plans or in the specifications shall take precedence over the

requirements of the above rules and regulations.

C. The Contractor shall furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and/or labor when required by the compliance with the above rules and regulations though the work be not mentioned in these particular Specifications or shown on the Drawings.

D. Wherever the term "as per manufacturer's specifications and/or instructions," is

used, it shall mean in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions. If these directions conflict with these Specifications, the matter shall be brought to the Architect's attention and his instructions obtained before proceeding with the work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List:



1. Within ten (10) days after the award of the Contract, submit three copies of

the complete lists of materials proposed for installation, and obtain the Architect's written approval thereof before proceeding.

2. List all materials by manufacturer's name and model number. 3. Only materials and items of equipment so approved shall be used. Any

proposed substitutions together with descriptive material shall be included with the list.

B. Manuals: 1. Prior to the final acceptance of the irrigation system, the Contractor shall

furnish three (3) individually bound Service Manuals to the Architect for use by the Owner. The manuals shall contain complete exploded drawings, diagrams, and spare parts lists of all equipment installed showing components and catalog numbers together with the manufacturer's name and address. In addition, each Service Manual shall contain the following: a. Index sheet indicating the Contractor's name, address, and phone

number. b. Copies of equipment warranties and certificates. c. List of equipment with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all

local manufacturer's representatives. d. Complete operating and maintenance instructions in sufficient detail to

permit operating personnel to understand, operate, and maintain all equipment.

C. Controller Charts: submit sample prior to installation consistent with City of

Richmond’s Tracy’s standard controller chart.

D. Certification of Backflow Preventor Inspection: Submit required copies of certification made by a certified technician to Water Company, City, and/or County in compliance with Title 17.

1.5 FEES AND PERMITS A. Work under this Section shall include all fees, permits, licenses, and required

inspections by concerned governing agencies. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in timely manner to insure uninterrupted progress of the work;

store in such a manner as will preclude damage thereto and permit ready access for inspection and identification of each shipment.

B. Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original containers with brand and

maker's names marked thereon. Materials in broken containers or showing evidence of damage will be rejected and must be immediately removed from the work.

C. Store plastic pipe on flat pallets and protect from sunlight.



1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Finished grades: Do not install irrigation lines until finished grades are established

and approved by the Architect.

B. Construction: Do not install sprinkler heads until walks, curbs, headers, and other structures that define plant areas are in place.

1.8 WARRANTY A. Repair of damage: All damage to paving, planting, structures, and other

improvements due to settlement of improperly contracted trench backfill shall be promptly repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect and without additional expense to the Owner.

B. All materials and workmanship shall be as specified and shall, for a minimum of one

year after completion and acceptance of the project, be and perform to the complete satisfaction of the Owner. At the end of this period, all required repairs and adjustments, including adjustments to grade, shall be made, including all repairs to other work made necessary thereby, without additional expense to the Owner.

C. Present to the Architect at time of final acceptance, all warranties for all materials

used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose

of establishing of quality, and general configuration desired only. Other manufacturers' equipment may be submitted for approval by the Architect. Only upon submittal and subsequent approval of the Material list shall these items be permitted.

B. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition.

2.2 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be as herein specified and as specified and/or indicated on the

Drawings.

B. Pipe:

1. Plastic Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Type 1120-1220, ASTM D 1785. a. Classes and/or Schedules as specified on the Drawings. b. All pipe shall be free of blisters, internal striations or any other defects

or imperfections. The pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the manufacturer's name, material type, size, schedule or class, and quality control identifications.



2. Pipe Sleeves: 1120-200 psi PVC plastic pipe. Extend 24" beyond back of curb or walk.

3. Copper Pipe: Type K C. Pipe Fittings: 1. Plastic: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) type 1; ASTM (D 2466). Solvent Weld as

specified on the Drawings. 2. Copper Pipe: Wrought Copper and Brass.

D. Remote Control Wire: 1. All wire shall be solid copper 600 volt AC, Type UF-AWG, UL approved for

direct burial. Wire shall be continuously and permanently marked with the manufacturer's name, wire size and identification.

2. Color of control wires shall be as follows: a. Pilot Wires - #14 Black

b. Common Wire - #12 White c. Spare Wire , #14, Blue.

E. Splice Packs: Epoxy filled splice packs, 3M Company DBY.Per City standard, see Drawings

F. Gate Valves: 1. Bronze, non-rising system.. 2. 200 psi working pressure. 3. All valves shall be line size.

G. Controller Charts:

1. Provide each controller with a diagrammatic chart, mounted inside the cover, showing the valves and sprinkler heads operated by the controller.

2. Chart: black on white photo copy, hermetically sealed between 20 mil. plastic sheets.

H. Emitter Head Accessories:

1. Strainer: provide strainer at inlet to each drip line. Provide stainless steel

screen having equivalent of 140-mesh filtration capacity. Incorporate flush valves within strainer to clean screen without disassembling unit.

2. Pressure Regulator: incorporate regulator into each drip system if supply pressure exceeds 50 psi.

3. Riser Adaptors: required with a rigid piping system. 4. Tubing Stakes: plastic coated steel, or other non-corrosive strong material to

secure tubing. 5. Emitter Outlet Check Valve (Bug Cap): Provide check valves at end of each

emitter outlet distribution line. Valves shall permit free flow of water with minimum restriction; prevent back siphoning, entry of insects, and contamination into outlet ports.

6. Access Sleeve: provide access sleeve to buried emitters placed in covered



boxes. Secure lids of access sleeve with removable lugs. Secure drip hose in both vertical and horizontal axis.

7. Closure Caps: provide in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

I. Other Equipment: Refer to the Drawings PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrate in which the work is to be performed. Do not proceed until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. All scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, carefully check and verify all dimensions on the site.

C. Do not willfully install the sprinkler system as shown on the drawings when it is

obvious in the field that obstructions, grade difference or differences in the area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in the engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Owner's authorized representative. In the event this notification is not performed, the irrigation Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary.

D. It is the responsibility of the irrigation contractor to familiarize himself with all grade

differences, location of walls, retaining walls, etc. He shall coordinate his work with the general contractor and other sub-contractors for the location and the installation of pipe sleeves through walls, under roadways, paving, structures, etc.

E. Locate all underground utility lines prior to excavating irrigation trenches and bring

any conflicts to the attention of the Architect. Do not proceed with the work until in-structions are received from the Architect.

3.2 COORDINATION A. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades and with Owner's separate

contractors.

B. Install pipe and control wire in separate sleeves under paving and through walls and footings.

C. Do not install sprinkler heads until walls, curbs, headers, and other related

structures are in place.

D. Do not install pipe until planting areas have been set to finish grade and scarified under Planting work.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Layout: 1. Design is diagrammatic. All piping, valves, etc. shown within paved areas is



for design clarification only and shall be installed in planting areas where possible. Install the work in a manner avoiding any conflicts between the irrigation system, planting, and architectural features.

2. Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed.

3. Where site conditions do not permit locating piping, valves, and heads where shown, notify Architect immediately and do not proceed until his instructions are obtained.

4. Run pipe lines and automatic control wiring in common trenches wherever practical.

5. Where piping and control wiring are shown under paving they shall be installed in separate PVC sleeves whether called for on the drawings or not

6. Notify Architect of any aspects of layout that will provide incomplete or insufficient water coverage of plant material and do not proceed until his instructions are obtained.

B. Protection: Protect existing and new work at all times. Any existing buildings,

equipment, piping, pipe coverings, sewers, sidewalks, landscaping, etc., damaged by the Contractor during the course of his work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor in a manner satisfactory to the Architect and at the Contractor's own expense and before the final payment is made. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by leaks in the piping system being installed or in having been installed by him. He shall repair all damage so caused at his own expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Architect.

C. Excavating and Trenching: 1. Excavation shall be in all cases ample in size to permit the pipes to be laid at

the elevation intended and to permit ample space for joining. 2. Make trenches for pipelines deep enough to provide minimum cover from

finish grade as follows: a. 18-inch minimum cover over main lines, except under paving where it

shall be 24 inches. b. 18-inch minimum cover over control wires from controller to valves,

except under paving where it shall be 24 inches. c. 12-inch minimum cover over lateral lines, except under paving where it

shall be 18 inches. 3. Trenches shall be straight with bottoms at uniform slopes.

4. Underground lines shall have a minimum horizontal clearance of 2 inches from each other. All lines shall have a minimum horizontal clearance of 12 inches from the lines of other trades. This requirement does not apply to any lines crossing at angles of from 45 to 90 degrees with each other. A minimum 1-inch vertical clearance shall be maintained between lines that cross between these angles.

5. No line shall be installed parallel to and directly over another line. 6. Restore surfaces, existing underground installations, etc., that are damaged

or cut as a result of excavations, to original conditions in manner approved by



Architect. 7. Where irrigation lines interfere with other utilities, irrigation trenching, pipe

work, adjust the trench depth as directed by the Architect. 8. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking or boring. All

cutting or breaking of pavement will require the Architect's approval prior to starting the work.

9. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, the Contractor shall use all possible care to avoid injury to trees, and tree roots. Excavation in areas where two (2) inch and larger roots occur shall be done by hand. Roots one (1) inch and larger in diameter shall be painted with two coats of tree seal, or equal. Trenches adjacent to tree should be closed within twenty-four (24) hours; and where this is not possible, the side of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be kept shaded with burlap or canvas.

D. Assembling Pipelines: 1. All pipe shall be assembled free from dirt and pipe scale. Field-cut ends shall

be reamed to remove rough edges and burrs. 2. Rubber Ring Seal Joint:

a. Use factory-made male end or prepared field-cut male end to specifications of factory made end.

b. Carefully clean bell or coupling and insert rubber ring without lubricant. Position ring carefully according to manufacturer's instructions.

c. Lubricate male end according to manufacturer's instructions and insert male end to specified depth. Use hands only when inserting PVC pipe

d. Thrust blocks shall be provided where necessary to resist system pressure on ring-tite pipe and fittings. Blocks shall be concrete, and the size shall be based on an average soil safe bearing load of 1000# per square foot.

e. Form thrust blocks in such a manner to prevent any concrete from coming in contact with the pipe. Thrust blocks shall be between solid soil and the fittings.

3. Solvent-Weld Joint: a. Prepare joint by first making sure the pipe end is square, then deburring the

pipe end and cleaning pipe and fitting of dirt, dust, and moisture. b. Dry-insert pipe into fitting to check for mis-sizing. Pipe should enter

fitting one-third to two-thirds the depth of socket. c. Solvent Cement and Primer: For solvent weld joints shall be of make

and type approved by manufacturer(s) of pipe and fittings. Cement shall be maintained at proper consistency throughout use.

d. Coat the inside socket surface of the fitting and the external surface of the male end of the pipe with primer. Then, without delay, apply cement liberally to the male end of the pipe and also apply cement lightly to the inside of the socket. At this time apply a second coat of cement to the pipe end.

e. Insert pipe immediately into fitting and turn one-quarter turn to distribute cement and remove air bubbles. The pipe must seat to the bottom of the socket and fitting. Check alignment of the fitting. Pipe and fittings shall be aligned properly without strain to either.

f. Hold joint still for approximately thirty (30) seconds and then wipe excess cement from the pipe.



g. Cure joint a minimum of thirty (30) minutes before handling and at least six (6) hours before allowing water in the pipe.

4. Threaded Joints for Plastic Pipe: a. Field threading of plastic pipe or fittings is not permitted.

Factory-formed threads only will be permitted. b. Where assembling to threaded plastic fitting, take up joint no more than

one full turn beyond hand tight. c. Use strap-type friction wrench only; do not use metal-jawed wrench.

5. Cap or plug openings as pipeline is assembled to prevent entrance of dirt or obstruction. Remove caps or plugs only when necessary to continue assembly.

6. Where pipes or control wires pass through sleeves, provide removable nondecaying plug at ends of sleeve to prevent entrance of earth.

E. Laying Pipe: 1. Pipe shall be bedded in at least 2 inches of sand or finely divided material with

no rocks or clods over 1 inch in diameter to provide a firm uniform bearing. 2. PVC pipe shall be snaked from side to side of trench bottom to allow for

expansion and contraction. One additional foot per 100 feet of PVC pipe is the minimum allowance for snaking.

3. Do not lay pipe when there is water in the trench or when the temperature is 32 degrees F or lower.

4. Cap or plug openings as pipeline is assembled to prevent entrance of dirt or obstruction. Remove caps or plugs only when necessary to continue assembly.

5. Where pipes or control wires pass through sleeves, provide removable nondecaying plug at ends of sleeve to prevent entrance of earth.

F. Remote-Control Valves: 1. Install where shown and group together where practicable. Limit one RCV per

valve box. 2. Install valves no farther than 12 inches from main line unless absolutely

necessary. 3. Locate valves no closer than 12 inches from walk edges, buildings, and walls. 4. Thoroughly flush main line before installing valve. 5. Place all control valves in valve boxes; use extensions as necessary to keep

soil away from valves and solenoids. No soil allowed around valve. 6. Attach a 2-inch diameter aluminum identification tag with valve numbers

stamped on it to each valve; secure with wire. 7. Install a gate valve ahead of each RCV. G. Gate Valves: 1. Install where shown on the Drawings. 2. Install a 9-inch diameter plastic valve box with twist lock cover. 3. Install a gate valve ahead of each RCV. H. Automatic Control Wiring:



1. Run lines along mains wherever practicable. Tie wires in bundles with pipe-wrapping tape at 10-foot intervals and allow slack for contraction between strapping.

2. Loop a minimum of two (2) feet of extra wire in each valve box; both control wire and ground wire.

3. Connections shall be made with splice sealing packs. 4. Splicing will be permitted only on runs exceeding 2500 feet. Locate all splices

at valve locations. 5. Where control lines pass under paving, they shall be enclosed in a separate

Schedule 40 PVC conduit. 6. Each control valve shall be connected to its respective controller with its own

individual control wire. Common ground wire shall be common to only those valves controlled by each individual controller.

I. Flushing Lines: 1. Flush all rock, sand, and debris from the lines. 2. Flush all main lines prior to installing valves and connecting lateral lines.

3. Flush long dead end runs prior to capping pipe. 4. Flush lateral lines prior to installing heads. Continue flushing process with

water running slowly as heads are installed starting closest to valve and working outward.

J. Testing Pipe: 1. Pipe shall be center loaded with sufficient backfill in accordance with the

paragraph on backfilling to anchor pipe before testing. No fittings shall be covered.

2. Install remote-control and gate valves prior to testing. 3. Notify the Owner at least three (3) days in advance of testing. Tests will be

observed and approved by the Owner. 4. Perform testing and furnish all equipment for testing as work of this Section.

5. Apply the following tests after solvent-weld plastic pipe joints have cured at least 24 hours: a. Test live (constant pressure and QCV lines hydrostatically at 125 PSI

minimum. Lines will be approved if test pressure is maintained for six (6) hours. The lines shall be restored to the original test pressure and the amount of water required to do so shall be measured. Approved tables of allowable loss will be consulted, and the line will be approved or not approved as such results may indicate. The Contractor shall make tests and repairs as necessary until test conditions are met.

b. Test lateral lines with water at line pressure and visually inspect for leaks. Retest after correcting defects.

c. The Contractor shall make tests and repairs as necessary until test conditions are met.

K. Backfilling Pipe: 1. Do not backfill until pipe has been tested and approved by the Architect.

2. Backfill material shall be the earth excavated from the trenches, free from rocks, concrete chunks, and other foreign or coarse materials.



a. Backfill to depth of 6 inches above the top of pipe shall be finely divided material free of rocks or clods over 1 inch in diameter.

b. Remaining backfill shall be free of rocks or clods over 2 inches in diameter.

3. Place backfill in 6-inch lifts and compact by tampings as follows: a. Under Paving: Percentage equal to that specified for the paving

subgrade and base subgrade and base material. b. Planting Areas: Percentage equal to adjacent soil.

L. Automatic Controller: 1. Locate controller in general location shown on the Drawings with exact

placement by the Architect. 2. Connect control lines to controller in sequential arrangement according to

assigned identification number of valve. Control lines shall be labeled at controller with permanent nonfading labels indicating identification number of valve controlled.

3. Provide a 120-volt water-proof, disconnect switch on the service line; mount inside the controller pedestal.

4. Set controllers plumb and true to line and grade; solidly in concrete bases in accordance with the manufacturer's printed specifications.

5. Provide telephone connection, conduit and flow sensor device.

M. Automatic Rain Shut-off Device

1. Install one rain shut-off device and flow sensor for each controller or group of controllers; where indicated on the drawings.

2. Use manufacturer's mounting hardware; modify as required for site conditions. 3. Provide all necessary wiring and connections to provide a complete, operable

system, to the satisfaction of the Architect. N. Backflow-Prevention Assembly: 1. Install backflow-prevention device as detailed. Exact location of assembly will

be determined on the site by the Architect. 2. Paint pipe and metal parts, except bronze, with primer and two coats exterior

metal paint; color grey green. O. Sprinkler Heads and Quick-Coupler Valves: 1. Thoroughly flush lines before installing heads or quick-coupler valves.

2. Locate as shown and detailed on the Drawings. P. Coverage Test: 1. When the irrigation system has been completed, a coverage test shall be

performed in the presence of the Architect to determine if coverage of water afforded planting areas is complete.

2. Change any heads, nozzles, orifices, or arcs as may be required to provide satisfactory coverage.

3. Make minor changes in sprinkler head location to provide adequate coverage



at no additional cost to the Owner.

Q. Emitters and Bubblers:

1. Install on uphill side of plant.

R. System Tests: Prior to final acceptance of irrigation system, the automatic sprinkler controllers shall be tested through all their cycles in the presence of the Architect, and any necessary adjustments shall be made.

S. Record Drawings:

1. Provide and keep up to date a complete "Record" set of (aka as-built) prints

which shall be corrected daily and show every change from the original Drawings and Specifications as well as dimensioned locations of pipe and equipment. This set of Drawings shall be kept on the site and shall be used only as a record set.

2. "Record" Drawings shall show dimensions of all main lines and gate valves from the nearest structure.

3. These Drawings shall also serve as work progress sheets, and neat and legible annotations shall be made daily as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually installed. These Drawings shall be available at all times for inspection by the Architect and shall be kept in a location designed by him.

4. Provide the Owner with a set of reproducibles with all corrections made and dimensions based on the above specified record prints. Drafting quality shall be equal to original drawings. This shall be presented and approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to start of the maintenance period.

T. Wrenches, Keys and Couplers: 1. Provide the Owner at completion of the planting maintenance period with

three (3) each of all operating and servicing keys and wrenches required for complete maintenance and operation of all valves. Include all wrenches necessary for complete disassembly of all valves.

2. Couplers: Provide two couplers complete with hose swivels, 1-inch male hose thread, and 1-inch throttling gate valve for use with quick-coupling valves.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 02823 - 1 Metal Fencing and Gates

SECTION 02823

METAL FENCING AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Metal fencing, 6’ High as shown on the drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 09911 – Site Painting 1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. Shop Detailing and Fabrication Practices: Conform to the standards of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) in the Architectural Metal Handbook, latest edition.

B. Welding: Comply with American Welding Society (AWS) Structural Welding D1.1

Qualify welding procedures, welders, and welding operations in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedure.

C. Structural Steel: Design, details, fabrication and erection shall comply with American

Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) standards.

1. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.

2. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

D. Aluminum Fabrications: comply with Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association (AAMA) Design Manual.

E. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM).

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal fencing and gate work shall comply with these specifications and all applicable

sections of the above named References and Standards. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for

factory fabricated items, including paint products.

B. Submit shop drawings. Include plans, elevations, details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.



C. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of the anchor bolts and other devices.

D. Submit samples of selected finishes.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle metal fencing items to prevent damage, deterioration, and

corrosion.

B. Store assembled items off the ground. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate metals fabrications work with trades furnishing items which will attach to members for proper positioning.

B. Provide sleeves, anchors, inserts, clips, and other items furnished under this Section

and built in with work of other trades.

C. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings for the work have been reviewed and approved by the Architect.

D. Installation of fencing shall not be started until final grading has been completed and

approved by the Architect. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND TEMPLATES A. Contractor shall secure all field measurements required for proper and adequate

fabrication and installation of the work covered by this Section. Exact measurements are the Contractor's responsibility. Furnish templates for exact location of items to be embedded in concrete and any setting instructions required for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide metal tubing, pipe, channels, bars and shapes in the sizes and wall thickness indicated on the drawings.

B. Metal surfaces: Provide metal exposed to view and touch, smooth and free of

pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 2.2 METAL

A. Steel material for fence panels and posts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi and a minimum zinc (hot-dip galvanized) coating weight of 0.90 oz/ft2. Coating Designation G-90.

B. Materials: Refer to City Standard Fence Details.



C. Masonry and concrete anchorage devices: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized

ferrous castings, malleable iron ASTM A27. D. Grout: CE CRD C588, non-shrink, non ferrous, Master Builder's "EMBECO" or

equal.

E. Concrete: ASTM C94 ready mixed concrete. 2.3 FINISHES

A. Prime Paint all steel gates:

1. Metal Primer: TNEMEC 69 Polyamidoamine epoxy Primer; reddish-grey color; 2.5-3.5 mils per coat.

2. Refer to Section 09911 - Site Painting.

B. The manufactured panels shall be subject to an inline electrodeposition coating (E-

Coat) process consisting a multi-stage pretreatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), followed by a duplex application of an epoxy primer and an acrylic topcoat. The minimum cumulative coating thickness of epoxy and acrylic shall be 2 mils (0.058 mm). The color shall be black.

C. The manufactured galvanized framework, gates and perforated metal shall be

Permacoated including as a minimum, a six-stage pretreatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), an electrostatic spray application of an epoxy base, and a separate electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The base coat shall be a thermosetting epoxy powder coating (gray in color) with a minimum thickness of 2 mild (0.0508 mm). The topcoat shall be a “no-mar” TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508 mm). The color shall be black.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Provide all miscellaneous steel angles, channels, plates and shapes and fasteners required to complete the work, whether shown on the drawings or not.

B. Fabricate work in accordance with approved shop drawings and referenced

standards. C. Gates shall be fabricated using welded ornamental panel material and gate ends having a 1 – ¾” square cross-sectional size. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All picket and rail intersections shall also be joined by welding.

D. Weld shop connections, except as otherwise indicated. Grind all welds smooth. E. Provide joints and intersections tight fitting and securely fastened.

F. Provide metal fencing square, plumb, straight, and within allowable tolerances.

G. Drill required holes; burned holes are not acceptable.



H. Where metal fencing is indicated on the plans to be curved, bend or form metal rails

in true radii.

I. Preassemble items in shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field fitting and assembly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrate under which fencing and gates are to be installed. Notify the

Architect, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide sleeves and anchorages that are built into concrete or masonry

construction. Furnish templates, setting drawings, and instructions for installation of sleeves and anchorages.

B. Set hardware that is shop installed. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform fitting required for installation. Set the work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Assembled metal fencing shall be firm, rigid, and free of rattle and shall provide maximum protection against tampering and vandalism.

B. Touch-up Finishing: Immediately after erection, clean and refinish field welds,

bolted connections, and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop finishing. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.5 mils.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 02824 - 1 Manual Gates

SECTION 02824

MANUAL GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide design-build custom steel gate systems not integral with metal fencing and including gates, gate hardware, and accessories as required for complete manually operated gate installation as indicated.

1. Excavate for post bases and provide concrete anchorage for freestanding posts, provide sleeves and grout posts embedded in concrete construction.


1. Section 01352: Design-Build Procedures 1.2. Section 01500: Temporary construction fence.Section 01500: Temporary

Facilities and Controls 2.3. Section 02823: Metal fencing and integral manually operated gates. 3.4. Section 02825: Automatic gates. 4.5. Section 05500: Miscellaneous metal fabrications.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1, Structural Welding Code.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Design gates to support loads as required by California Building Code.

1. In addition, design to support minimum lateral force of 50 lbs./lin. ft. uniform load and 200 lbs. at any single point without permanent set or damage.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product literature for gates, gate hardware, grout, and manufactured items.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate gate layout, posts, footings, connections, fabrication details, accessories, and anchorage.

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connections, and anchorage. 2. Provide templates as required for anchor installation by others.

C. Certificates: Submit certification signed by California registered civil or structural engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and applicable codes.




A. Fabricator: Firm with minimum five years successful experience fabricating custom steel manual gates similar to those required for Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36; shapes and sizes as indicated on Drawings; provide weights suitable for specified loads; galvanized.

B. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot rolled, ASTM A1011; or cold rolled, ASTM A1008, Class 1; of grade required for design loading; galvanized.

C. Steel Tubing: Cold formed ASTM A500; or hot rolled, ASTM A501; minimum Grade B; seamless where exposed; galvanized.

D. Grout: Non-shrink meeting ASTM C1107 non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Master Builders/Masterflow 713. b. U.S. Grout Corp./Five Star Grout. c. Bostik Construction Products/Upcon Grout. d. Protex Industries, Inc./Propak. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

E. Fasteners and Rough Hardware: Type required for specific usage; provide zinc-coated fasteners.

F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.

G. Primer: Provide primers as recommended by paint manufacturers for substrates and paints specified in Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel.

H. Concrete: ASTM C94, normal Portland cement, 2,500 psi at 28 days, 2" to 3" slump, 2 to 4 percent entrained air.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Gate Framework: Design and fabricate gates to withstand anticipated loads, including loads from people climbing on gates.

1. Configurations: As indicated, welded construction unless otherwise indicated.

2. Fittings: Provide fittings and accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Gates: Fabricate gates as indicated, welded construction.



C. Manual Gate Hardware: Provide commercial quality hardware suitable for exterior applications and as follows.

1. Trash Enclosure Swing Gates:

a. Pivots: Lift-off type, extra heavy duty ball bearing pivots, sized for anticipated gate loads plus additional live loads of up to 500 lbs per gate leaf, without damage to system.

1) Provide full surface offset pivots to permit 180 degree opening, minimum 1-1/2 pair per gate leaf.

2) Provide set screws to prevent accidental gate removal due to seismic activities or vehicular impact.

3) Weld pivot to gates and frames.

b. Cane Bolts (Both Gates): Custom fabrications as indicated; locking of trash enclosure is not required.

1) Provide spring closed floor strikes for both gates at trash enclosure, at fully closed position and at 90 degree open position; corrosion resistant nonmagnetic stainless steel.

c. Accessories: Keepers, stops, and accessories as required for complete, secure manually operated fence gate installation.

2. Fence Gate (Single Leaf Gate):

a. Pivots: Lift-off type, extra heavy duty ball bearing pivots, sized for anticipated gate loads plus additional live loads of up to 500 lbs, without damage to system.

1) Provide full surface offset pivots to permit 180 degree opening, minimum 1-1/2 pair.

2) Provide set screws to prevent accidental gate removal due to seismic activities or vehicular impact.

3) Weld pivot to gates and frames.

4) Spring Closer: Provide either spring closer pivots or separate spring closer capable of closing gate; fully adjustable to allow maximum pressure of 5 lbs. to close gate.

b. Lockset: Provide full mortise keyed lockset allowing locking from outside exiting from inside fence; provide security screen preventing reaching over or through gate to open lockset.

1) Cylinders: Provided in Section 08700.

c. Accessories: Keepers, stops, and accessories as required for complete, secure manually operated fence gate installation.



D. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.

E. Grind exposed welds continuous, smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces, and ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.

F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings (Slide Gate Hardware Only): Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure.

G. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery.

H. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened.

1. Fabricate joints exposed to weather in manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water could accumulate.

I. Supply components required for proper anchorage of custom steel gates; fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as custom steel manual gates.

J. Finishing: Galvanize and prime paint custom steel gates; comply with requirements of Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings for preparation and priming.

1. Preparation: Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to applying finishes.

2. Galvanizing: Provide minimum ASTM A123 or A924 and A653 G90 coating; iron and steel hardware galvanized conforming to ASTM A153.

3. Priming: Comply with requirements in Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings; do not shop prime surface areas requiring field welding; shop prime in one coat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install gates, gate hardware, framework, and accessories to provide rigid structure for configurations indicated as specified and in accordance with applicable code requirements.

1. Coordinate embedded post sleeves with concrete work. 2. Grout posts solid where indicated on Drawings.

B. Install gates for free, easy operation. Adjust fence gate to maximum 5 lbs. pressure to open and to close gate.

C. Obtain Architect's review prior to site cutting or making adjustments that are not part of scheduled work.



D. Install components square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

1. Supply items required to be cast into or embedded in other materials to appropriate trades.

2. Ensure alignment with adjacent construction; coordinate with related work to ensure no interruption in installation.

E. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing; keep work in alignment.

F. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding; hide bolts and screws whenever possible, where not hidden, use flush countersunk fastenings.

1. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 2. Bolting permitted for slide fence hardware only.

G. After installation, touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged surfaces; use same primer as used for shop coat.

H. Replace items damaged in course of installation and construction.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 02825 - 1 Automatic Gates

SECTION 02825

AUTOMATIC GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide custom design build steel automatic gate system including gates, automatic operators, keypads, and accessories as required for complete automatic gates installation as indicated.

1. Excavate for post bases and provide concrete anchorage for freestanding posts, provide sleeves and grout posts embedded in concrete construction.


1. Section 01500: Temporary construction fence.Facilities and Controls 1.2. Section 01352: Design-Build Procedures 2.3. Section 02823: Metal fencing and including integral manually operated gates. 3.4. Section 02824: Manually operated gates. 4.5. Section 05500: Miscellaneous metal fabrications.

1.2 REFERENCES



A. Performance Requirements: Design gates to support loads as required by California Building Code.

1. In addition, design to support minimum lateral force of 50 lbs./lin. ft. uniform load and 200 lbs. at any single point without permanent set or damage, ASTM E935, or comply with ASTM F1184 Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates.

2. Design to comply with ASTM F2200 Standard for Automatic Vehicular Gate Construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product literature for gates and operators, gate hardware, grout, and manufactured items.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate gate layout, posts, footings, location of operators, operator pad details, and keypads, layout and spacing of road loops and components, connections, fabrication details, accessories, and anchorage.

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connections, and anchorage. 2. Provide templates as required for anchor installation by others.

C. Certificates: Submit certification signed by California registered civil or structural engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and applicable codes.




A. Fabricator: Firm with minimum five years successful experience fabricating automatically operated custom steel gates similar to those required for Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36; shapes and sizes as indicated on Drawings; provide weights suitable for specified loads; galvanized.

B. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot rolled, ASTM A1011; or cold rolled, ASTM A1008, Class 1; of grade required for design loading; galvanized.

C. Steel Tubing: Cold formed ASTM A500; or hot rolled, ASTM A501; minimum Grade B; seamless where exposed; galvanized.

D. Grout: Non-shrink meeting ASTM C1107 non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Master Builders/Masterflow 713. b. U.S. Grout Corp./Five Star Grout. c. Bostik Construction Products/Upcon Grout. d. Protex Industries, Inc./Propak. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

E. Fasteners and Rough Hardware: Type required for specific usage; provide zinc-coated fasteners.

F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.

G. Primer: Provide primers as recommended by paint manufacturers for substrates and paints specified in Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings.


H. Concrete: ASTM C94, normal Portland cement, 2,500 psi at 28 days, 2" to 3" slump, 2 to 4 percent entrained air.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Sliding Cantilevered Gate Framework: Design and fabricate cantilevered gates to withstand anticipated loads.

1. Configurations: As indicated, welded construction unless otherwise indicated.

2. Fittings: Provide fittings and accessories as required for complete installation.



B. Gates: Fabricate gates as indicated, welded construction.

1. Sliding Gates: Provide industrial ornamental aluminum cantilever gate system complying with ASTM F1184, Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates.

a. Type: Match Ameristar Fence Products/Transport II Majestic Style Enclosed “Fast-Trak” Track Industrial Aluminum Cantilever Gate System with 26’-0” clear opening.

b. Gate Framing and Rails: ASTM B221 6063-T6 aluminum with mill finish.

c. Roller Truck Assembly: Internal assembly self-aligning ball-and-socket type running on four bearing wheels using manufacturer’s standard configuration for industrial gates.

d. Perforated Metal Panels: Not less than 0.125” aluminum with 3/16” round perforations on 1/4” staggered centers, 48” by 120”.

e. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard TGIC polyester powder coat finish with minimum 2 mil thickness, black color.

f. Sliding Gate Hardware: Design hardware to support gates plus additional 500 lbs. live load without exceeding limits of gate operator and to allow manual opening and closing of gates during power failures.

1) Manual Operation: Maximum 50 lbs. pressure to move gate.

2. Gate Operators and Access Control: Provide heavy duty commercial quality sliding gate operators sized as recommended by operator manufacturer for size of gate but not less than 1 H.P. motor with internal overload protection. Provide access control devices as recommended by access control manufacturer (products are available at Encon Electronics 800.782.5598).

a. Type: Match DoorKing/9150 Slide Gate Operator for gates weighting up to 1500 pounds.

b. Road Loops: Match BD Loops Preformed 3/16” Saw-cut Loop. Custom polyethylene outer jacket protects a micro-dusted nylon coated inner jacketed 16AWG stranded wire. Saw-cut loop to have built in backer-rod securely fitting 3/16” saw-cut groove eliminating need to apply backer-rod to hold loop to bottom of saw-cut groove.

1) Loop Sealant: Match Ruscoe Permanent Sealer 974 one part, elastomeric, nitrile rubber material that readily extrudes over wide temperature range and cures to produce tough, flexible rubber loop sealant unaffected by water, chemicals, fuels or incompressible.

c. Vehicular Detectors: Match DoorKing/9410 single channel type.

d. Keypad: Match DoorKing/1500 Series post mounted, mounting configuration as indicated on Drawings.



e. One Button Transmitter: Match Linear/3089 commercial gate receivers; provide three remote operators.

f. Commercial Gate Receiver: Match Linear/3028 light duty receiver.

g. Sensing Edge: Match Milleredge/ME120 with linear 3022 sensing edge transmitter as needed per entrapment zone in accordance with ASTM F2200.

h. Photo Cell: Match DoorKing/8080-030 polarized photo reflective photo cell.

i. Card Reader: Match DoorKing/1520 stand alone proximity reader.

j. Goose Neck Pedestals: Match DoorKing/1200-036 offset pad mount.

k. Operation: Wire operator to allow digital keypad operation; gates to "auto close" after adjustable preset time.

1) Safety Devices: Provide as required by applicable codes and as required by ASTM F2200, including photo electric non-contact reversing control and electric gate edge to bring system into compliance.

l. Accessories: Provide as required for complete, automatically operated secure fence gate installation in configuration indicated.

C. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.

D. Grind exposed welds continuous, smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces, and ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.

E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings (Slide Gate Hardware Only): Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure.

F. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery.

G. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened.


H. Supply components required for proper anchorage of custom steel automatic gates; fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as custom steel automatic gates.

I. Finishing: Galvanize and paint custom steel gates to match exterior fence; manufacturer’s standard materials and finishes for exterior applications for gate operators.

1. Comply with requirements of Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings for preparation, priming, and painting.

2. Preparation: Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to applying finishes.



3. Galvanizing: Provide minimum ASTM A123 or A924 and A653 G90 coating; iron and steel hardware galvanized conforming to ASTM A153.

4. Priming: Comply with requirements in Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings; do not shop prime surface areas requiring field welding; shop prime in one coat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install gates, operators, digital keypad, and accessories to provide rigid structure for configurations indicated as specified and in accordance with applicable code requirements.

1. Coordinate embedded post sleeves with concrete work. 2. Grout posts solid where indicated on Drawings.

B. Install gates for free, easy operation.

C. Obtain Architect's review prior to site cutting or making adjustments that are not part of scheduled work.

D. Install components square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.



E. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing; keep work in alignment.

F. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding; hide bolts and screws whenever possible, where not hidden, use flush countersunk fastenings.

1. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 2. Bolting permitted for slide fence hardware only.

G. After installation, touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged surfaces; use same materials as used for shop coat.

H. Replace items damaged in course of installation and construction.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 02870 - 1 Site and Street Furnishings

SECTION 02870

SITE AND STREET FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. All site and street furniture, equipment and accessories indicated on the drawings

and/or herein specified, including all footings, anchorages, frames and accessories required to provide complete, safe and usable furnishings to the satisfaction of the Architect. Furnishings include:

1. Bike racks 2. Monument sign

B. Shop prime coat, painting and galvanized finishes for all metal and wood not having factory finishes.

1.2 RELATED WORK:

A. Section 02515 – Concrete Surface Improvements

B. Section 09911 - Site Painting 1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. Section 05500 - Landscape Metal Fabrications

B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM).

C. Manufacturer's printed specifications, instructions and shop details for installation of the indicated and /or specified site and street furnishings.

D. Standard Specifications: where referred to in these specifications, "State

Specifications" shall mean the California CalTrans Specifications, latest edition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Site and Street Furnishings work shall comply with these specifications and all applicable sections of the above named References and Standards.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, and installation instructions and shop details for factory fabricated items.

1. Bike Rack



2. Monument Sign

B. Submit shop drawings. Include plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Submit samples of selected colors and finishes.


A. Deliver, store, and handle furnishings to prevent damage and deterioration.

B. Stack assembled items off the ground. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate work with trades furnishing adjacent work related to site and street furnishings installation.

B. Provide sleeves, anchors, inserts, bolts, clips, and other items furnished under this

Section and built in with work of other trades.

C. No work shall be installed until shop drawings for the work have been reviewed and approved in writing by the Architect, and final grading and surfacing is completed.


A. Refer to the drawings for Manufacturers and Site and Street Furnishings model numbers.

B. Concrete: ASTM C94 ready mixed concrete, minimum 28-day compressive strength

of 2,500 psi, air-entrained 2% to 4%.

C. Sleeves for embedded items: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.

D. Grout: CE CRD C588, non-shrink, non-ferrous type; Master Builder's "EMBECO" or equal.


A. Examine the substrate under which site and street furnishings are to be installed. Notify the Architect, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide footings, sleeves, frames and anchorages. Furnish templates, setting



drawings, and instructions for installation of sleeves and anchorages built into other work.

B. Locate and layout all furniture, accessories and equipment items. Obtain the

Architect's written approval of the layout prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble and install site and street furnishings in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Perform fitting required for installation. Set the work accurately in location,

alignment, and elevation free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Assembled furnishings shall be firm, rigid, free of rattle, and provide maximum protection against tampering and vandalism.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Perform cleaning during installation and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair any damage to adjacent work resulting from site and street furnishings work.

B. Upon completion of installation, clean factory-finished items in accordance with

manufacturer's cleaning instructions. Exercise care to avoid damage to the finish coating.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 02912 - 1 Import Topsoil

SECTION 02912

IMPORT TOPSOIL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Scarification of Subgrade

2. Installation of import topsoil 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200 – Earthwork

B. Section 02930 - Tree, Shrub, Vine and Groundcover Planting 1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. USDA Handbook No. 60 B. Geotechnical Investigation, Fire Station 96, Tracy, CA, September 30, 2009 by GEC Consulting. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide written laboratory tests on any required import topsoil, prepared by a

reputable firm experienced in the field of soils and plant nutrition.

B. All tests will be paid for by the Owner, but the cost of re-testing of topsoil required because of rejected topsoil submittals will be deducted from the amount due the Contractor under this Section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Source of supply of proposed import topsoil.

B. Three copies of laboratory tests on the proposed import topsoil. 1. Fertility determined by pH, salinity, nitrate, ammonium, phosphate, potassium,

calcium and magnesium analysis. 2. Agricultural Suitability as determined by pH, salinity, boron, sodium,

potassium, calcium and magnesium analyses using USDA saturation extract procedure.

3. Appraisal of the soil type and certain chemical properties provided as pH, salinity, organic matter and particle size distribution (USDA classification).




A. Do not do subgrade preparation, or topsoil installation until construction work is

completed in the area to be planted and the subgrade for topsoil is approved by the Architect.

B. Protect utilities, paving, and other structures from damage caused by topsoil

operations.

C. Do not purchase or deliver any required import topsoil to the site before use of the site stockpile and without the written approval of the proposed topsoil by the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 IMPORT TOPSOIL A. Furnish and install sufficient topsoil to complete the work as indicated on the

Drawings and herein specified.

B. Preselected Topsoil: San Juan Topsoil, TMT, 408/432.9040 or equal.

C. Agricultural Suitability: Salinity (ECe x 10(3)): 0-2 Sodium (SAR) 2: 0-8

(ESP) 1: 0-10 Boron (PPM in Saturated Extract): 0- 0.7 pH: 5.5 to 7.5

D. Soil Type: agricultural sandy loam; maximum 50% clay and silt fines. Meet USDA

specifications for the specified texture.

E. Quality: free of debris, rocks over 2" diameter, noxious weeds and parasitic nematodes.

F. Should the samples not meet all of the standards given above, the soil laboratory

may submit in the report what additives (in addition to those specified in Section 02930) should be added to the soil to correct deficiencies.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrate in which the work is to be performed. Do not proceed until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. All scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, carefully

check and verify all dimensions and quantities and immediately inform the Architect of any discrepancy between the Drawings and/or specifications and the actual



conditions. No work shall be done in any area where there is such a discrepancy until review for same has been given by the Architect.

B. Coordination: Coordinate work with other trades to insure proper sequencing fitting

of construction. 3.3 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Grades: 1. Subgrades have been established under work of another Section to within 1

inch, plus or minus, of required grades. Subgrades are 6-inches below finished grades, plus or minus 1-inch, allowing for 6-inches of topsoil and soil amendments.

2. Verify that subgrades are within 1" plus or minus, of required subgrades. 3. Notify the Architect prior to commencing soil preparation work if existing

grades are not satisfactory, or assume responsibility for conditions as they exist.

B. Weed and Debris Removal: All ground areas to receive topsoil shall be cleaned of

all weeds and debris prior to any subgrade preparation or topsoiling. Weeds and debris shall be disposed of off the site.

C. Do not perform any subgrade preparation work in areas where soil is contaminated

with cement, plaster, paint, or other construction debris. Bring such areas to the attention of the Architect and do not proceed until the contaminated soil is removed and replaced.

D. Moisture Content: Soil shall not be worked when moisture content is so great that

excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in the air or that clods will not break readily. Water shall be applied, if necessary, to bring soil to optimum moisture content for tilling and planting.

E. Soil Loosening: Soil subgrade in all areas to receive topsoil shall be ripped or

cultivated to the depths specified below. Water shall be added, and ripping or culti-vating shall be continued until the entire specified depth is loose and friable. All debris, pavement, concrete, and rocks over 2 inches in diameter shall be removed from the site.

1. All areas to be topsoiled: 10 inches deep. 2. Provide protected site for site stockpiled topsoil.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF TOPSOIL A. Do not install topsoil until preparation of subgrade has been approved by the

Architect.

B. Moisture Content: Do not work topsoil when moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form, nor when clods will not break readily. Water shall be applied, if necessary, to bring soil to an optimum moisture content for tilling and planting.



C. Remove noxious weeds, rocks over 2 inches in diameter, and debris from topsoil,

and dispose of off the site.

D. Thickness of topsoil, including soil conditioners to be added later under other Sections, shall be 6 inches and grades shall conform to those indicated on the site grading plans and specified herein.

E. Place topsoil and bring to a smooth even grade. Soil shall be thoroughly water

settled and high and low areas regarded until the grade of all planting areas conforms to finished grade indicated on the Site Grading Plans to within plus or minus 1".

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 02930 - 1 Tree, Shrub, Vine & Groundcover Planting

SECTION 02930

TREE, SHRUB, VINE AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Soil preparation and conditioning 2. Furnish and install plant materials

3. Maintenance 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02810 - Irrigation systems B. Section 02200 – Earthwork C. Section 02912 - Import Topsoil 1.3 REFERENCES American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANS1 z60.1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with sizing and grading standards of the latest edition of "American

Standards for Nursery Stock." ANS1 z60.1. A plant shall be dimensioned as it stands in its natural position.

B. All plant materials shall be nursery grown under climatic conditions similar to those

in the locality of the project. C. Plant materials may be inspected and approved at the place of growth, for

compliance with specification requirements for quality, size, and variety.

1. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection upon delivery at the site or during progress of the work.

2. Notify the Architect of the source of material no later than 30 days after award of the contract.

3. One inspection at the place of growth shall be made. All plants materials requiring inspection by the Owner shall be assembled and available for inspection.

4. If the Architect is required to make additional inspections at the place of growth due to failure of the Contractor to assemble the required plant materials, then the Architect's time and expenses shall be reimbursed by the Contractor.



5. Provide transportation for the Architect to the place of growth for all inspections of plant materials.

D. Furnish all certificates of inspection that are required by county or state authorities. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Soil analysis report of existing soil through Soil and Plant Laboratory, Inc., 352

Matthew Street (PO Box 153), Santa Clara, CA 95052, Tel. (408)727-0330 or approved equal. Analyses are to be obtained at Contractor’s cost and are to include:

1. Test for agricultural suitability, parasitic nematodes and herbicide

contamination. Report to include amendment recommendations based on an “organic” approach to soil and landscape management. a. Request Testing Agency to send one (1) copy of test results direct to the

Landscape Architect and one (1) copy to the Owner. Existing soil shall be amended per soils analysis report.

B. Submit the following material samples: Tree ties, soil conditioners and mulch. C. Submit the following materials certification from approved qualified testing

laboratories: 1. Soil conditioners and fertilizers 2. Import topsoil 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fertilizer materials in original, unopened, and undamaged containers

showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Store in manner to prevent wetting and deterioration.

B. Protect plants in transit and after delivery to the Project site. Plants in broken

containers and plants with broken branches or injured trunks will be rejected. Remove rejected material from the site immediately.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not do soil preparation, conditioning, and planting until construction work is

completed in the area to be planted. B. Protect utilities, paving, and other structures from damage caused by planting

operations. C. The irrigation system shall be installed and tested prior to planting. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warrant plant material to take root and grow, remain alive and, be in a healthy,

vigorous condition for a period of one year after completion and acceptance of entire



project. B. Replace, in accordance with the drawings and specifications, all plants that are dead

or, as determined by the Architect, are in an unhealthy or an unsightly condition, and have lost their natural shape due to dead branches, or other causes due to the Contractor's negligence. The cost of such replacements is at the Contractor's expense. Warrant all replacement plants for one year after installation.

C. Warranty shall not include damage or loss of trees, plants or groundcovers caused

by fires, floods, freezing rains, or winds over 75 miles per hour, winter kill caused by extreme cold, and severe winter conditions not typical of planting area; acts of vandalism or negligence on the part of the Owner.

D. Within 15 days of written notification by the Owner, remove and replace all

guaranteed plant materials that, for any reason, fail to meet requirements of guaranty. Replacements shall be made to same specifications required for original materials and shall carry the same guaranty from the time they are replaced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Quantities: Plant materials shall be furnished in quantities required to complete

work as indicated on the Drawings and shall be of species, kinds, sizes, etc., specified.

B. Nomenclatures: Plant names listed on Drawings conform to standardized plant

names established by American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature, except that for names not covered therein, the established custom of the nursery trade is followed.

C. Quality: 1. Plants shall be symmetrical and typical for variety and species. 2. Plants shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from plant disease and

insect pests or their eggs. 3. All trees and shrubs shall be container grown or established "boxed-out",

field-grown material unless otherwise specified. 4. Container stock shall be grown in containers, in which delivered, for at least

8 months, but shall not be root bound. Container plants with cracked or broken balls of earth when taken from containers may be planted only with specified approval of the Architect.

5. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery, except as authorized by the Architect.

D. Substitutions will be allowed only when specified material is proved unavailable and

only with the approval of the Architect. E. Furnish plant materials within the height and spread ranges indicated and/or

specified on the drawings. Larger stock is acceptable, at no additional cost. At least 75 percent of the stock shall be equal to the larger size in each range.



F. Groundcover Plants: 1. Groundcover plants, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, shall be

rooted plants grown in flats. 2. Plants shall be full and compact, not "leggy". 2.2 SOIL CONDITIONERS A. Organic Compost: ‘Super Humus’ as available from BFI Organics and Redi-Gro

Corp (408) 888-7632 or equal.

1. Gradation: A minimum of 90% of the material by weight shall pass a ½” screen. Material passing the ½” screen shall meet the following criteria:

Percent Passing Sieve Size 85-100 9.51 mm (3/8 inch) 50-80 2.38 mm (No. 8, 8 mesh) 0-40 500 micron (No. 35, 32 mesh) 2. Organic Content: Minimum 50% based on dry weight and determined by ash

method. Minimum 250 lbs organic matter per cubic yard of compost. 3. Carbon to Nitrogen Ratio: Maximum 25:1 if material is claimed to be nitrogen

stabilized. 4. pH: 5.5 – 8.0 as determined in saturated paste. 5. Moisture content: 35-60% 6. Contaminants: The compost shall be free of contaminants such as glass,

metal, and visible plastic. 7. Maturity: Physical characteristics suggestive of maturity include: a. Color: dark brown to black b. Odor: Acceptable= none, soil-like, musty or moldy Unacceptable= sour, ammonia or putrid c. Particle characterization: identifiable wood pieces are acceptable but

the balance of material should be soil-like without recognizable grass or leaves.

B. Available Nitrogen Fertilizer. C. Any other soil conditioner and/or fertilizer required by the Soil Analysis Report.

2.3 SOIL FOR PLANT BACKFILL MIX - IMPORT TOPSOIL A. Soil type: Agricultural Loam; Maximum 50% clay & silt fines B. Agricultural Suitability: Salinity (ECe x 10(3)): 0-2 Sodium (SAR) 2: 0-8 (ESP) 1: 0-10 Boron (PPM in Saturated Extract): 0-0.7 pH 5.5 - 7.5



C. Quality: Loose, friable, and at optimum moisture content for mixing. No soil in a

cloddy or muddy condition will be allowed. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Tree Stakes: 1. “Reddy Stake System”, screw in auger-type steel stake with adjustable height

“T”-bar, UV-resistant vinyl tubing, 3 cable ties, anti-rotational tab and pin, powder-coated dark green, by Screw Tight, a division of Decorations for Generations, Inc. (T: 888.333.3090, F: 209.634.0298).

2. Size: 9 foot, ¾” diameter, Schedule 40, for 15 gallon and 24 inch box trees. B. Vine Ties:

1. Green vinyl ribbon; no wire reinforcing. 2. Anchors for wood - 2-inch diameter, No. 10 galvanized eye screws.

3. Anchors for concrete or masonry walls - heavy duty plastic "eyes" with epoxy adhesive.

C. Drain Rock: Hard durable crushed rock; ¾ inch dia.

D. Geotextile Material: Woven Polypropylene monofilament cloth:

1. Mirafi 140NC; Mirafi Corporation, El Toro, CA or equal. E. Tree Well Irrigation Tubes:

1. Rigid perforated Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) drainpipe; ASTM 2729; 3-inch diameter x 0.075 inches.

2. Grate Cap: high strength UV stabilized polypropylene round grate; black; NDS-14 or ADP A-3103.

F. Mulch: chipped bark: green waste recycled yard, 510-908-2169, www.greenwasterecycleyard.com; BFI Organics, Redi-Gro Corp. (408) 888-7623 or equal: 1. Pine, cypress, cedar or redwood; 1-1/2" minus

40%-45% Wood Pieces 15%-20% Cambium 35%-45% Bark

2. Chemistry: Salinity, ECe x 10(3) @ 25c.: 0-1.5 Reaction, pH 3.5-5.0

H. Root Barrier: 24" deep, molded, UV inhibited polyethylene with self-locking joiners.

1. Tensile stress yield 3800 psi, ASTM D638. 2. UB24-2 Deep Root Universal Barrier; Deep Root Corporation, 714/898-0563. 3. Root Booster; Shawtown Industries 805/527-7720.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrate in which the work is to be performed. Do not proceed until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. All scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, carefully

check and verify all dimensions and quantities and immediately inform the Architect of any discrepancy between the Drawings and/or specifications and the actual conditions. No work shall be done in any area where there is such a discrepancy until review for same has been given by the Architect.

B. Coordination: Coordinate work with other trades to insure proper sequencing fitting

of construction. 3.3 SOIL PREPARATION A. Grades: 1. Grades have been established under work of another Section to within 1 inch,

plus or minus, of required finished grades. 2. Notify the Architect prior to commencing soil preparation work if existing

grades are not satisfactory, or assume responsibility for conditions as they exist.

B. Weed and Debris Removal: All ground areas to be planted shall be cleaned of all

weeds and debris prior to any soil preparation or grading work. Weeds and debris shall be disposed of off the site.

C. Do not perform any soil preparation work in areas where soil is contaminated with

cement, plaster, paint, or other construction debris. Bring such areas to the attention of the Architect and do not proceed until the contaminated soil is removed and replaced.

D. Moisture Content: Soil shall not be worked when moisture content is so great that

excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in the air or that clods will not break readily. Water shall be applied, if necessary, to bring soil to optimum moisture content for tilling and planting.

E. Soil Loosening:

1. Scope:

a. Loosening of subgrade is specified in the section on import topsoil, no additional loosening is required unless, as determined by the Architect, topsoil has become compacted by construction.

2. Loosening: Cultivate soil to depths specified below: a. Slopes steeper than 2:1: No loosening required.



b. All other areas to be planted: 8 inches deep. c. Add water as necessary and cultivate in two directions until the entire

depth is loose and friable. d. Remove all debris, base rock, paving and rocks over 2-inches in

diameter from the site.

F. Amend and fertilize existing soil as outlined in the Soil Analysis Report. 3.4 SOIL CONDITIONING A. General: After soil preparation has been completed and high and low spots graded,

add soil amendments as indicated below and rototil, making repeated passes with the cultivator to the depth specified until the amendments have been thoroughly mixed.

B. Groundcover Areas 1. Flat Grown: Rototil the following into the top 3 inches of soil at the following

specified rate per 1000 square feet of area: 6 cubic yards of yard waste compost (2" layer).

2. Container Grown: Excavate and backfill planting holes in accordance with the paragraph on Tree, Shrub, and Vine Planting Holes.

C. Tree, Shrub, and Vine Planting Holes: 1. Planting Holes: a. Locate planting holes per planting plans bringing any conflict with

underground utility lines to the attention of the Architect. Locations for holes shall be staked on the site and the Architect's approval thereof obtained prior to excavating planting holes.

b. Excavate square holes to the sizes and depths indicated on the Drawings.

c. Scarify the sides and bottoms of the holes. d. For all trees, excavate for rock sump to the size and depth indicated on

the Drawings. 2. Backfilling: a. Backfill the planting holes with the special backfill mix herein specified. b. Water-settle backfill thoroughly or compact by other approved method

prior to planting so plants do not settle. 3. Special Backfill Mix for Planting Holes: a. Materials for trees, shrubs and vines:

70 percent import topsoil 30 percent yard waste compost

a. Mixing: Prepare the mix in stockpiles on site; do not mix at each individual planting hole. Mix thoroughly, leaving no layers of soil amendments or clods of soil.

D. Rock sump for tree planting holes:



1. Install rock sump drainage in all tree-planting holes that do not drain within 24 hours.

3.5 FINISH GRADING A. When weeding, soil preparation, and soil conditioning have been completed and soil

has been thoroughly water settled, all planting areas shall be smooth-graded, ready for placement of plant materials.

B. Grading shall be done when soil is at optimum moisture content for working.

C. Grades: 1. The Contractor shall make himself familiar with site grading plans and do

finished grading in conformance with said plans and as herein specified. 2. Finished grades shown on site-grading plans are given in feet and decimal

fractions of feet. Slope uniformly between given spot elevations. Planting areas, including lawns, shall be true to grade with a 10-foot straight edge.

3. Grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are given or between points established by walks, paving, curbs, or catch basins. Finished grades shall be smooth, even, and on a uniform plane with no abrupt change of surface. Minor adjustments of finish grades shall be made at the direction of the Architect, if required.

4. All grades shall provide for natural runoff of water without low spots or pockets. Flow-line grades shall be accurately set and shall not be less than 2-percent gradient wherever possible.

5. Shrub and Groundcover Areas: Finish grades shall be 1½ inches below top of adjacent pavement, curbs, or walls, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

6. Tops and toes of all slopes shall be rounded to produce a gradual and natural-appearing transition between relatively level areas and slopes.

3.6 PLANTING A. General: 1. Do not install plant materials until all construction work has been completed

and sprinkler systems have been installed and tested. Planting areas shall have been graded and prepared as herein specified and shall have been approved by the Architect.

2. Do not plant during unfavorable weather. 3. Soil shall be at an optimum moisture content for planting. Do not plant in dry

soil or muddy soil. B. Weed Control: Apply preemergence herbicide to all groundcover and mulched areas

in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended rates. Any plant materials showing loss of vigor or health owing to improper application of the herbicide shall be replaced by the Contractor.

C. Container Plants:



1. Do not lift or handle container plants by tops, stems or trunks at any time. 2. All plants shall be set so that, when settled, the crown of rootball is 2” above

finish grade at trees and 1” above finish grade at shrubs, and the natural grade in the container tapers flush with finish grade of planting beds.

3. Taper finish grade away from root ball. 4. All plants shall be planted immediately after the containers are cut, and

containers shall be regularly removed from the site so as not to present a hazard to persons using the area.

5. Watering Basins: Form circular earth basin centered on the stem of each plant. The rim of basin shall be 4- inches above the grade at the stem. Do not form watering basins around trees in lawn areas.

D. Groundcover Plants:

1. Install plants at spacing indicated on the Drawings. 2. Plant in staggered rows, evenly spaced.

3. Dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots. Place plants so root system lies free without doubling.

4. Firm soil around roots to eliminate air pockets. 5. Broadcast organic fertilizer over the entire planting area at the rate

recommended by soil testing laboratory. 6. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover crowns of plants with

wet soil. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect all planted areas and plants against trespassing and damage at all times. If

any plants are damaged, treat or replace as directed by the Architect, without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Do not execute work in or over prepared plant areas or adjacent to planting without

proper safeguards and protection. 3.8 ACCESSORIES A. Mulching: 1. Install bark mulch over planting areas indicated on the Drawings. 2. Mulch shall be 3 inches deep; taper down flush with adjacent paving or curbs. 3. Where watering basins are required around container plants, fill basin with 3-

inch deep mulch.

B. Tree Staking: 1. Scope: Stake all 24” box trees. 2. Installation: a. Place the “Reddy Stake” 12 to 14 inches away on the prevailing wind

side of the tree. The tree should be one to three inches away from the end of the T-bar. Insert the pin through the hole in the top of the “Reddy Stake” and twist clockwise into the soil.

b. Twist the “Reddy Stake” until the tab is 1 to 2 inches below grade.



Drive the anti-rotation pin through the hole in the tab and into the soil. Use the handle of a shovel, rake, or two by two, and pack soil firmly around the stake.

c. Nursery stake must be removed. If trunk is too spindly to support itself, or has little or no taper then a flexible auxiliary stake of either ¼” spring steel or ½” bamboo should be used to provide needed support. Auxiliary stake should not extend past 2/3 of the tree. Wrap the ends of the auxiliary stake with tape to prevent rubbing and tie with nursery tape (no wire reinforcement) every 10 to 12 inches along the trunk.

d. Determine the correct height for the T-bar, keeping in mind it should be no higher than necessary but high enough to hold the tree upright. Slip the T-bar over the top of the “Reddy Stake” to the proper height and tighten the belt.

e. Place the UV-resistant, tubing strap around the tree, and slip the ends of the tubing over the ends of the T-bar. Fold both sides of tubing towards the tree trunk and against the T-bar and secure with two of the provided cable ties. Add third cable tie around strap between T-bar and tree trunk.

f. See drawings for further details. g. Provide custom length T-bar for trees in tree grate. h. Trees shall remain plumb and straight from installation through the

contractor warranty period.

C. Training of Vines:

1. Use as many vinyl ties as required to support the plant with branching structure spread in an artistic manner on fence.

D. Root Barrier:

1. Furnish and install linear root barriers at paving and curbs where Oak and

Olive trees are within 10 feet. 2. Linear root barriers are to be 8 feet long, centered on the tree. 3. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 4. Install flush with finished grade.

E. Tree Irrigation Tubes:

1. Install two tubes per tree well at opposite corners in all trees in paved areas. 2. Fill with drain rock. 3. Set grate cap 2 inch below sidewalk surface.

3.9 GENERAL CLEANUP A. Remove all cans, surplus materials, and other debris from site. Neatly dress and

finish all planting areas. Flush walks, paved areas, and the like, clean to the satisfaction of the Architect.

B. Rinse foliage of all plant materials within the construction area as often as

necessary to keep the foliage free from dust generated by construction and planting work.



3.10 MAINTENANCE A. Establishing Maintenance Period: 1. As soon as all planting is completed, a planting review and preliminary

inspection to determine the condition of the planting will be held by the Architect upon request of the Contractor.

2. Upon approval of the work by the Architect, the 60-day maintenance period shall begin.

B. Maintenance of Planting: Continuously maintain all plantings in areas included in

the Contract from the beginning of Contract work, during the progress of work, and for a period of 60 days after completion of all work until final acceptance of all Contract work by the Owner.

C. Scope: 1. New plantings. 2. Existing plantings within the construction area. 32. Continuous operations of watering, weeding, cultivating, trimming, fertilizing,

spraying, insect, pest, fungus, and rodent control, and any other operations to assure good normal growth.

D. Fertilizing: At the end of 45 days, in addition to fertilizing of trees, shrubs, and

groundcovers herein specified, furnish and apply 1 pound of available nitrogen fertilizer per 1000 square feet to maintain plantings in a healthy, green, vigorous growing condition during the maintenance period.

E. Weeding, Cultivating, and Cleanup: Planting areas shall be kept neat and free from

debris at all times and shall be cultivated and weeded at not more than 10-day intervals.

F. Insect, Pest, and Disease Control: 1. Insects and diseases shall be controlled by the use of approved insecticides

and fungicides. 2. Moles, gophers, and other rodents shall be controlled by traps, approved

pellets inserted by probe gun, or other approved means. G. Pruning:

1. Prune new trees and shrubs at the direction of the Architect. 2. Shape branch structure and thin out foliage.

3. Do not remove lower branches from low-branching or multi-trunk trees, unless directed to do so by the Architect.

H. Protection: Work under this Section shall include complete responsibility for

maintaining adequate protection for all areas. Any damaged areas shall be repaired at no additional expense to the Owner.



I. Replacements: Immediately replace any plant materials that die or are damaged. Replacements shall be made to the Specifications as required for original plantings.

J. Condition of Plantings at the End of the Maintenance Period:

1. All plant materials shall be live, healthy, undamaged, and free from

infestations. 2. Groundcover, shrub areas, and other planting areas shall be free of all weeds

(broadleaf and grass weeds). 3. Plantings that do not conform to Specifications shall be replaced and brought

to a satisfactory condition before final acceptance of the work can be made. END OF SECTION


03100 - 1 Concrete Forms and Accessories

SECTION 03100

CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: All labor, materials and equipment and all operations required to complete all formwork as indicated on the drawings; to produce shapes and configurations as shown, as required; and as specified herein, including:

1. Forms, shores, bracing, removal and other operations as necessary for all cast-in-place concrete and masonry placed.

2. Setting and securing anchor bolts and other metal items embedded in concrete into formwork, using materials and layouts furnished and delivered to jobsite as specified under other sections.



2. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.

3. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.


5. Pertinent Sections of other Divisions specifying work penetrating concrete foundations and formwork.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork."

B. American Plywood Association (APA).

C. West Coast Lumberman's Association (WCLA).

D. ACI SP-66 – ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International

E. ASTM A185 – Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete, 2005.

F. ASTM A 615 – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

G. ASTM A706 – Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, 2005.



H. AWS/ANSI/D1.4/D1.4M – American Welding Society (Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel).

I. California Building Code; California Code and Regulations, Latest Edition (CBC), Chapter 19

J. CRSI (DA4) – Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements, resist imposed loads; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Limitation of review: Structural Engineer's review will be required only where specifically requested for general architectural applications and features only. Contractor is responsible for structural stability, load-resisting characteristics and sufficiency of form work design.

B. Submit elevations for formwork at cambered slabs.


A. General: All form materials shall be new at start of work. Produce high quality concrete construction. Minimize defects due to joints, deflection of forms, roughness of forms, nonconforming materials, concrete or workmanship.

B. Reuse of Forms: Plywood forms may be reused, if thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, mortar, and foreign materials, and undamaged at edges and contact face. Reuse shall be subject to permission from the Architect without exception, and issued in writing. Reuse of any panel which will produce a blemish on exposed concrete, will not be permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Form Materials:

1. Non-Exposed Surface Formwork Facing: Forms for concrete which is not exposed to view, may be of plywood as specified for exposed surfaces, or square edge 1" x nominal Douglas Fir, Construction Grade, S4S.

2. Exposed Surface Formwork Facing:

a. Forms for all exterior and interior concrete flat surfaces unless otherwise specified as board formed shall be new Douglas Fir Plywood (APA) ply, 5/8-inch, B-B Plyform, Class 1, Exterior Type, oiled and edged and edge-sealed conforming to U.S. Product Standard PS 1-83 in large sheet sizes to achieve joint patterns shown.



b. All exposed concrete edges shall be chamfered 3/4" minimum or as noted on the drawings.

3. Exposed Surface Formwork - Special Pattern Form Liner:

a. Forms for all exterior and interior concrete flat surfaces indicated shall be as designated by Architect.

B. Earth Forms: Allowed, subject to soil standing in excavations without ravel or caving.

C. Form Release Agent: Spray-on compound, not affecting color, bond or subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces; "Formfilm" by W. R. Grace, www.grace.com, "Nox-Crete Form Coating", www.nox-crete.com, or approved equal.

D. Accessories: Types recommended by manufacturers or referenced standards to suit conditions indicated;

1. Anchors, spacers, void in-fill materials: sized to resist imposed loads.

2. Waterstops: Profiles and locations indicated, configured to provide continuous waterproof barrier.

a. Products by J. P. Specialties, "Earthshield® ", www.jpspecialties.com; Greenstreak, www.greenstreak.com; or approved equal.

3. Form Ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, or wire snap ties with 1" break-back or threaded internal disconnecting type with external holding devices of adequate bearing area. Ties shall permit tightening and spreading of forms and leave no metal closer than 1" to surface.

E. Corner Chamfers and Rustications: Filleted, wood strip or foam type; sizes and shapes as detailed, or 3/4 x 3/4 inch size minimum if not detailed; maximum possible lengths.

F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect the substrate and the conditions under which concrete formwork is to be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work indicates acceptance of substrates and conditions.

B. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings.

3.2 EARTH FORMS

A. If natural soil or compacted fill can be accurately cut and maintained, foundations and grade beams may be poured against earth without forming when requested by



Contractor and approved by Architect. Provide positive protection of trench top corners.

B. Maintain earth forms free of water and foreign materials.

3.3 ERECTION – FORMWORK

A. General: Construct formwork in accordance with calculations, and recommendations of Section 401 of ACI 347. Construct forms to the sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structure. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes.

1. Construct cambers specified in concrete members and slabs in the formwork.

2. Schedule the work and notify other trades in ample time so that provisions for their work in the formwork can be made without delaying progress of the project. Install all sleeves, pipes, etc. for building services systems, or other work. Secure information about and provide for all openings, offsets, recessed nailing blocks, channel chases, anchors, ties, inserts, etc. in the formwork before concrete placement.

3. Deflection: Formwork and concrete with excessive deflection after concrete placement will be rejected. Excessive deflection is that which will produce visible and noticeable waves in the finished concrete.

4. Measure formwork for elevated structural slabs, columns, wall elevations points of maximum camber and submit in writing to the Architect/Engineer prior to placing concrete.

B. Formwork Construction: Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. Uniform, substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of concrete paste, readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. Tie, brace, shore, and support to insure stability against pressures from any source, without failure of any component part and without excessive deflection. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins.

C. Provide all openings, offsets, inserts, anchorages, blocking, and other features of the work as shown or required. Refer to Article 3.5 titled INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS for detailed requirements.

D. Warped, checked or scuffed forms will be rejected.

E. Maintain membranes, reinforcing and other work free of damage; protect with plywood runway boards or other positive, durable means.

F. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.

G. Provide fillet and chamfer strips on external corners of exposed locations and as indicated to form patterns in finished work. Extend patterns around corners and into alcoves, on backs of columns and similar locations not otherwise shown.



1. Produce beveled, smooth, solid, unbroken lines, except as otherwise indicated to conform to patterns.

2. Form corners and chamfers with 3/4 inch x 3/4 inch strips, unless otherwise indicated, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and tight edge joints. Extend terminal edges to required limit and miter chamfer at changes in direction.

H. Unexposed corners may be formed either square or chamfered.

I. Ties and Spreaders: Arrange in a pattern acceptable to the Architect when exposed. Snap-ties may be used except at joints between pours where threaded internal disconnecting type shall be used.

J. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork.

K. Reglets and Rebates: Accurately locate, size, and form all reglets and rebates required to receive work of other trades, including flashing, frames, and equipment.

3.4 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.

C. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with reinforcement or surfaces which will be bonded to fresh concrete.

D. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork will be rejected.

E. Leave no residue or stain on the face of the concrete, nor affect bonding of subsequent finishes or work specified in other sections.

3.5 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS

A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work.

1. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other sections including those under separate contracts (if any). Size and location of openings, recesses and chases shall be in accordance with the section requiring such items. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into forms.

B. Construction Joints: Construct and locate generally as indicated on Drawings and only at locations approved by Structural Engineer, so as not to impair the strength of the structure. Form keys in all cold joints shown or required.

C. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.



D. Rough Hardware and Miscellaneous Metal: Set inserts, sleeves, bolts, anchor, angles, and other items to be embedded in concrete. Set embedded bolts and sleeves for equipment to template and approved shop drawings prepared by trades supplying equipment.

E. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.

F. Wood Inserts and Nailers: Provide approved preservative-treated lumber. Set all required nailing blocks, grounds, and other inserts as required to produce results shown. Wood plugs shall not be used.

G. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

H. Piping: Do not embed piping in structural concrete unless locations specifically approved by Structural Engineer.

I. Conduit: Place conduit below slabs-on-grade and only as specifically detailed on structural drawings. Minimum clear distance between conduits shall be 3 diameters. Location shall be subject to Engineer's written approval and shall not impair the strength of the structure.

J. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.

1. Provide openings for the introduction of vibrators at intervals necessary for proper placement.

2. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.

K. Install Form Liner inserts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, to produce patterns and textures indicated.

L. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide continuous waterproof barrier.

3.6 FORM CLEANING

A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, remove foreign matter within forms.

B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.

1. Remove all dirt, chips, sawdust, rubbish, water and foreign materials detrimental to concrete.

2. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.

3.7 FOOTINGS

A. Verify elevations and provide final excavation required for footings prior to placing of concrete.



3.8 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Form concrete bases for all mechanical and electrical equipment in accordance with approved shop details furnished by other sections.

B. Sizes and locations as indicated and as required to produce results shown.

C. Provide coved base for all equipment bases placed on concrete slabs.

3.9 FORMWORK TOLERANCES

A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.


A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.

B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 2 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork.

C. Clean and repair surfaces to be re-used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact surfaces as specified for new formwork.

D. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets.

3.11 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not loosen or remove forms before minimum curing period has elapsed without employment of appropriate alternate curing methods, approved by the Architect in writing.

B. Remove forms without damage to the concrete using means to insure complete safety of the structure and without damage to exposed beams, columns, wall edges, chamfers and inserts. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.

C. Do not remove forms until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit safe removal and the concrete has attained sufficient strength to safely support imposed loads. The minimum elapsed time for removal of forms after concrete has been placed shall be as follows:

1. Columns and Walls: 7 days, provided members are not subjected to overhead loads.

2. Retaining Walls: 21 days minimum.

3. Footings: 7 days minimum. If backfilled immediately, side forms may be removed 24 hours after concrete is placed.



4. Beams, elevated slab, and similar overhead conditions: 28 days unless adequate shoring is provided.

D. Durations listed above are minimums and are subject to extension at the sole judgment of the Architect/Engineer.

E. Reshoring: Reshore members where and if required by Formwork Design Engineer.

F. Elevated slabs with Camber: Submit measured elevations of completed work at the same locations as provided for formwork, within 7 days of removing forms.

G. Do not subject concrete to superimposed loads (structure or construction) until it has attained full specified design strength, nor for a period of at least 14 days after placing.

H. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Remove excess material and debris associated with this work from the job site.

END OF SECTION


03200 - 1 Concrete Reinforcement

SECTION 03200

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Reinforcing steel work for all concrete and masonry work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

2. Coordinate this work with the other work affected by these operations, such as forms, electrical work, mechanical work, structural steel, masonry and concrete.


1. Pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying Quality Control and Testing Laboratory services.

2. Pertinent sections of Division 02 (32) specifying site concrete paving requiring reinforcement.

3. Pertinent Sections of other Divisions specifying reinforcement, including, concrete, masonry, and rough carpentry.

4. Pertinent sections of other Divisions specifying work to be embedded in concrete.

5. Pertinent sections of other Divisions specifying work penetrating concrete work.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International.

B. ACI 315 - Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete.

C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International.

D. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International.

E. ASTM A185- Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete, 2005.

F. ASTM A 615- Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

G. ASTM A706- Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, 2005



H. AWS/ANSI/D1.4/D1.4M - American Welding Society, Structural welding code- for reinforcing steel.

I. California Building Code, latest edition, Chapter 19.

J. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying submittal procedures. Submit for review prior to fabrication.

B. Limitation of Review: Structural Engineer's review will be for general conformance with design intent as indicated in the Contract Documents and does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for conformance with the Contract Documents. The General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer.

C. Shop Drawings: Show complete fabrication and placing details of all reinforcing steel. Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include:

1. Bar sizes and schedules;

2. Shapes of bent bars, layout and spacing of bars, location of splices.

3. Stirrup spacing, arrangements and assemblies,

4. References to Contract Documents detail numbers and designations.

5. Wall elevations corresponding to elevations shown in Contract Documents.

D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, location and installation instructions for proprietary materials and reinforcement accessories. Provide samples of these items upon request.

E. Certificates: Submit all certifications of physical and chemical properties of steel for each heat number as manufactured, including location of material in structure as specified below in Article titled QUALITY ASSURANCE. All materials supplied shall be tagged with heat numbers matching submitted Mill Test Report analyses.

F. Samples: Provide to the Owner's Testing laboratory as specified in Article SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL.


A. Perform work of this Section in accordance with CRSI (DA4), CRSI (P1), ACI 301, and ACI 318.

B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies, refer to pertinent Sections of Division 01.

C. Certification and Identification of Materials and Uses: Provide Owner's Testing Agency with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforcement. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection and all material identification/test information listed below.



1. Provide manufacturer's Mill Test Reports for all materials. Include chemical and physical properties of the material for each heat number manufactured. Tag all fabricated materials with heat number.

2. Provide letter certifying all materials supplied are from heat numbers covered by supplied mill certificates. Include in letter the physical location of each grade of reinforcing and/or heat number in the project (i.e. foundations, walls, etc.).

3. Unidentified Material Tests: Where identification of materials by heat number to mill tests cannot be made, Owner's Testing Agency shall test unidentified materials as described below.

D. Testing and Inspection: Tests and Inspections required by Independent Testing Agency are specified below in Articles SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL and FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. Duties and limitations of Independent Testing Agency, test costs and test reports in conformance with pertinent Sections of Division 01.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent requirements of Division 01.

B. Deliver reinforcement to project site in bundles marked with durable tags indicating heat number, mill, bar size and length, proposed location in the structure and other information corresponding with markings shown on placement diagrams.

C. Handle and store materials above ground to prevent damage, contamination or accumulation of dirt or rust.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed billet steel bars, conform to ASTM A706; or to ASTM 615, Grade 60, except (1) the maximum yield strength shall be 78,000 psi, and (2) the tensile strength shall not be less than 1.25 times the actual yield strength.

1. Exception: Bars used as column ties, stirrups, and field bent dowels shall be Grade 40 minimum, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

2. All reinforcement to be welded shall be or shall meet the requirements for ASTM A706 reinforcement.

3. All reinforcement to be unfinished.

B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185.

C. Tie Wire: No. 16 AWG or heavier, black annealed.

D. Reinforcing Supports: Plastic or galvanized steel chairs, bolsters, bar supports, or spacers sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement and construction loads imposed during concrete placement, meeting ACI and CRSI standards.



1. For use over formwork: Galvanized wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations. Provide plastic tips where exposed to view or weather after removal of formwork. Do not use wood, brick, or other unacceptable materials.

2. For slabs on grade: Supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

E. Concrete blocks: Slab-on-grade conditions only, as required to support reinforcing bars in position.

F. Reinforcement Splice Couplers: Products recommended by manufacturer to suit conditions indicated. "Bar Lock" Reinforcement Splicing systems, ICC-ES ER-5064, July 2005, by Dayton-Superior Corporation, www.daytonsuperior.com.

G. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice, unless specifically shown otherwise. Details not specifically shown or indicated shall conform to ACI 315 and specified codes and standards.

1. Accurately shop-fabricate to shapes, bends, sizes, gauges and lengths indicated or otherwise required.

2. Bend bars once only. Discard bars improperly bent due to fabricating or other errors and provide new material; do not re-bend or straighten unless specifically indicated. Rebending of reinforcement in the field is not allowed.

3. Do not bend reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material or the embedding concrete.

4. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Heat-bent materials will be rejected.

H. Unacceptable materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the work.

1. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances.

2. Bends or kinks not indicated on Drawings or final shop drawings.

3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to rusting or other cause.

I. Tag reinforcement with durable identification to facilitate sorting and placing.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Testing Agency, as specified in the Article QUALITY ASSURANCE, will perform the following:

1. Material Testing:

a. Identified Steel: When samples are taken from bundled steel identified by heat number, matched with accompanying mill analyses as delivered from the mill, Owner's Testing Agency will perform one tensile test and one bend test per each ten tons or fraction thereof for each required size of reinforcing steel.



b. Unidentified Steel: When identification of materials by heat number matched to accompanying mill analyses cannot be made, perform one tensile test and one bend test per each two and one-half tons or fraction thereof for each required size of reinforcing steel. Tests of unidentified steel shall be performed by the Owner's Testing Agency and costs for these tests shall be paid by the Contractor by deductive change order.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect the conditions under which concrete reinforcement is to be placed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Coordinate with work of other sections to avoid conflicts or interference. Bring conflicts between reinforcement and other elements to Architect's attention. Resolve conflicts before concrete is placed.

C. Notify Architect and Structural Engineer for review of steel placement observation not less than 48 hours before placing concrete.

3.2 PLACEMENT

A. General: Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified.

B. Clean bars free of substances which are detrimental to bonding. Maintain reinforcement clean until embedded in concrete.

C. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Do not deviate from required position. Maintain required distance, spacing and clearance between bars, forms and ground.

D. Location and Support: Provide metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.

E. Provide additional steel reinforcement as necessary or as directed, to act as spreaders or separators to maintain proper positioning.

F. Tying and Attachment: Securely tie at all intersections and supports with wire. Prevent dislocation or movement during placement of concrete. Direct twisted ends of wire ties away from exposed concrete surfaces.

G. Separate reinforcing from pipes or conduits with approved non-metallic separators. Do not use wood or steel form stakes or reinforcement used as stakes as support for reinforcement.

H. Accommodate placement of formed openings required by other sections.

I. Obstructions:

1. Where obstructions, block-outs or penetrations (conduits, raceways, ductwork) prevent continuous placement of reinforcement as indicated, provide additional



reinforcing as detailed and as directed by the Structural Engineer to supplement the indicated reinforcement around the obstruction.

2. Place additional trim bars, ties, stirrups, or other elements as detailed and as directed at all opening, sleeves, pipes or other penetrations through structural elements.

J. Welded Wire Fabric: Reinforce slabs with 6"x 6"-W1.4 x W1.4 welded wire fabric reinforcing, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

1. Roll out, straighten, cut to required size, and lay out flat in place.

2. Securely wire-tie fabric to other reinforcement at frequent intervals.

K. Provide minimum 1-1/2 inch clearance between sets of splices. Stagger splices in horizontal bars so that adjacent splices will be 4 feet apart.

L. Laps of welded wire fabric shall be at least two times the spacing of the members in the direction lapped but not less than twelve inches.

M. Splices of reinforcement shall not be made at points of maximum stress. Provide splice lengths as noted on the structural drawings, with sufficient lap to transfer the stress between bars by bond and shear.

N. Spacing:

1. Space bars minimum distance specified and all lapped bars 2 bar diameters (minimum) clear of the next bar.

2. Stagger splices of adjacent bars where possible and where required to maintain bar clearance.

3. Beam or slab top bars shall be spliced mid-span of column support and bottom bars spliced at column supports.

4. Request Architect/Engineer review prior to placement for all splices not shown on the drawings.

O. Reinforcement Couplers: Install at all locations indicated and may be used as an alternate to lap splices in general. Install couplers in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.3 WELDING

A. No reinforcing shall be welded unless specifically indicated or without prior approval of the Structural Engineer.

B. Only when so approved for use as noted above, all welding shall conform to the AWS D1.4, and the following;

1. All welding performed by certified welders.

2. All reinforcement requires preheat prior to welding. All preheat and welding shall be continuously inspected by the Testing Agency.



3.4 MISPLACED REINFORCEMENT

A. Notify Architect/Engineer immediately if reinforcing bars are known to be misplaced after concrete has been placed.

B. Perform no correction or cutting without specific direction. Do not bend or kink misplaced bars.

C. Correct misplaced reinforcing only as directed in writing by the Architect/Engineer. Bear all costs of redesign, new, or additional reinforcing required because of misplaced bars at Contractor's expense.


A. The Testing Agency as specified in the Article QUALITY ASSURANCE, will inspect the work for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.

1. Inspection: Provide inspection and verifiable installed reinforcement.

2. All preheat and welding activities for steel reinforcement, when these occur. Confirm that the surface of the rebar is free of form release oil or other coatings.

3. Exception: Foundations and slabs for buildings less then 3 stories with specified concrete design strength of 2500 psi do not require reinforcement inspection.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove excess material and debris associated with this work from the job site

END OF SECTION


03300 - 1 Cast-In-Place Concrete

SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services to complete all concrete work required, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Foundations, slabs-on-grade, and retaining walls.

2. Installation of all bolts, inserts, sleeves, connections, etc. in the concrete.

3. Joint devices associated with concrete work.

4. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including, but not limited to: equipment pads, light pole bases, flagpole bases, thrust blocks, and manholes, foundation for monument sign and seat wall.

5. Concrete curing.

6. Coordination with other sections:

a. Make all preparations and do all work necessary to receive or adjoin other work. Install all bolts and anchors, including those furnished by other sections, into formwork and provide all required blocking.

b. Install all accessories embedded in the concrete and provide all holes, blockouts and similar provisions necessary for the work of other sections. Provide all patching or cutting made necessary by failure or delay in complying with this requirement at the Contractor's expense.

c. Coordinate with other sections for the accurate location of embedded accessories.


1. Pertinent Sections of Division 01 specifying Quality Control and Testing Laboratory services.


3. Section 03100 (03 1000) - Concrete Formwork.

4. Section 03200 (03 2000) - Concrete Reinforcement.

5. Section 03365 – Dye stained Ground Polished Concrete.

6. Pertinent Sections of Division 03 specifying concrete construction.




8. Pertinent Sections of other Divisions specifying work penetrating concrete foundations and formwork.

9. Pertinent sections of other Divisions specifying floor finishes and sealants applied to concrete substrates.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; ACI 211.2-Standard practice for selecting proportions for lightweight concrete; American Concrete Institute International.

B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International.

C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International.

D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International.

E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International.

F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International.

G. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International.

H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International.

I. California Building Code, CBC, California Code of Regulations, Chapter 19, Concrete, latest adopted edition.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying submittal procedures. The General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will be returned for correction without review. Submit for review prior to fabrication.


C. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products and other concrete related materials such as bond breakers, cure/sealer, admixtures, etc. Demonstrate compliance with specified characteristics. Provide samples of items upon request.



D. Mix Designs: Submit Mix Designs for each concrete type required for work per requirements of articles CONCRETE MIXES and QUALITY ASSURANCE. Resubmit revised designs review if original designs are adjusted or changed for any reason.

E. Shop Drawings: Proposed location of construction and cold joints when different or in addition to those shown on the drawings.

F. Shop Drawings: Proposed location of all slab construction joints, dowel joints and blockouts.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction for concrete accessories.

H. Batch Plant Certificates: Include with delivery of each load of concrete. Provide Certificates to the Testing Agency and the Architect/Engineer as separate submittals. Concrete delivered to the site without such certificate shall be rejected and returned to the plant. Each certificate shall include all information specified in Article SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL below.

I. Engineering Analysis: Prepared by a California-licensed Civil or Structural Engineer, justifying construction-imposed loads on slabs, beams, and walls which exceed those allowed by CBC for the specified use.

1. 2000 lbs maximum allowable construction load without analysis.

2. 10,000 lbs maximum allowable construction load with analysis.

J. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.


A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

B. Concrete construction verification and inspection to conform to CBC 1704.4.

C. Common Sourcing: Provide each of the following materials from a single source for entire project.

1. Cement.

2. Fly ash or Slag.

3. Aggregate.

D. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

E. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

F. Services by the Independent Testing Agency (includes "Special" Inspections) as specified in this Section and as follows:

1. Perform tests and inspections specified below in articles SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL and FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. Duties and limitations of



Independent Testing Agency, test costs and reports to be in conformance with pertinent Sections of Division 01.

2. Review mix designs and certifications. Provide letter authored by a Civil Engineer licensed in California recommending acceptance or rejection based upon conformance to specifications, and suitability of mix design for proposed use. Submit to Architect / Engineer for review and final distribution.

3. Review Contractor submittals specified in this section; batch plant certificates; admixtures, and similar information.

G. Contractor shall bear the entire cost of remediation, removal, and/or replacement of concrete determined defective or non-conforming, including Architect/Engineer fees for redesign.


A. Materials specified by brand name shall be delivered in unbroken packages bearing manufacturer's label and shall be brand specified or an approved equal.

B. Delivery, Handling and Storage of other materials shall conform to the applicable sections of the current editions of the various reference standards listed in this Section.

C. Protect materials from weather or other damage. Sort to prevent inclusion of foreign materials.

D. Specific Requirements:

1. Cement: Protect against dampness, contamination, and warehouse set. Store in weather tight enclosures.

2. Aggregates: Prevent excessive segregation, or contamination with other materials or other sizes of aggregates. Use only one supply source for each aggregate stock pile.

3. Admixtures:

a. Store to prevent contamination, evaporation, or damage.

b. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and extreme temperature ranges.

c. Agitate emulsions prior to use.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Cold Weather (Freezing or near-freezing temperatures) per ACI 306R:

1. Heat concrete materials before mixing, as necessary to deposit concrete at a temperature of at least fifty (50) degrees F but not more than ninety (90) degrees F.

2. Do not place concrete during freezing, near-freezing weather, snow, rain or sleet unless protection from moisture and/or cold is provided.



3. Protect from freezing and maintain at a temperature of at least fifty (50) degrees F for not less than seven days after placing. Take special precautions to protect transit-mixed concrete.

4. No salts, chemical protection or admixture are permitted without written approval of Architect/Engineer.

5. Contractor shall maintain an air temperature log for the first 7 days after placement with entry intervals not to exceed 8 hours.

B. Hot Weather per ACI 305R:

1. Cool concrete materials before mixing, or add ice in lieu of mix water as necessary to deposit concrete at a temperature below 85 degrees F.

2. Do not place concrete in hot/windy weather without Architect/ Engineer review of procedures.

3. Provide sunshades and/or wind breakers to protect flat work during finishing and immediate curing operations. Do not place flatwork concrete at air temperature exceeding 90 degrees F.

4. Provide modified mix designs, adding retarders to improve initial set times and adding evaporative retardants during hot/windy weather for review by Independent Testing Agency prior to use.

1.7 MOCK-UP

A. Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receive special treatment or finish, as result of formwork.

1. Panel Size: Sufficient to illustrate full range of treatment.

2. Number of Panels: 2.

3. Locate as indicated on drawings.

B. If requested by Architect / Engineer, cast concrete against mock-up panel. Obtain acceptance of resulting surface finish prior to erecting formwork.

C. Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep mock-up exposed to view for duration of concrete work.

D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 FORMWORK

A. Comply with requirements of Section 03100.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with requirements of Section 03200.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. General Requirements: All materials shall be new and best of their class or kind. All materials found defective, unsuitable, or not as specified, will be condemned and promptly removed from the premises.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali conforming to CBC 1903 A.2.

2. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): ASTM C618, Class F.

C. Concrete Aggregates:

1. Coarse and Fine Aggregates: ASTM C33; Stone aggregate and sand. Specific source aggregate and/or sand or shrinkage characteristics as required for class of concrete specified.

a. Use non-reactive aggregate.

2. Lightweight aggregate: ASTM C330 and C332.

3. Source shall remain constant throughout the duration of the job. The exact portions of the fine aggregates and coarse aggregates to be used in the mix shall be determined by the mix design.

D. Water: Potable, clean, from domestic source.

E. Admixtures: All admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Admixtures containing calcium chlorides or other accelerators shall not be used without the approval of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Testing Laboratory.

1. Mid Range Water Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C-494, Type A, "Polyheed 997" by Master Builders, "WRDA 79" by W.R. Grace or equal.

2. High Range Water-Reducing Admixtures(Super Plasticizer): "Rheobuild 1000" by Master Builders or equal.

3. Water Reducing Admixture and Retarder: ASTM C-494, Type D, "Pozzolith 300R", by Master Builders; "Plastiflow-R" by Nox-crete; or acceptable equivalent.

4. Air Entrainment - MBAE - 10 (Master Builders Air Entrainment).



F. Slurry: Same proportion of cement to fine aggregates used in the regular concrete mix (i.e. only coarse aggregate omitted); well mixed with water to produce a thick consistency.

G. Non-shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107 and CRD-C621, premixed compound consisting of aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,400 psi.

2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 days: 7000 psi, when placed in a “fluid” state.

3. Acceptable Grout Types for Base Plates:

a. Concealed Work: Provide metallic or non-metallic type.

b. Exposed Work: Provide non-metallic type only.

4. Manufacturer / Product: Meet or exceed properties of Master Builders "Master Flow 928" mixed to fluid consistency.

a. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: The Burke Company, and W.R. Meadows, Inc.

H. Dry Pack: Dry pack (used only for cosmetic concrete repairs) shall consist of:

1. One part cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate (screen out all materials retained on No.4 sieve), mixed with a minimum amount of water, added in small amounts.

2. Mix to consistency such that a ball of the mixture compressed in the hand will retain it's shape, showing finger marks, but without showing any surface water.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II acrylic non-redispersable type.

1. "Concresive" Liquid LPL, Masters Builders Inc. or equal;

2. "Top Bond #40", Nox-Chem, "Rezi-Weld 1000" by W.R. Meadows or equal.

B. Epoxy Bonding System: ASTM C 881, type as required by project conditions.

1. SET-XP Expoxy-Tie manufactured by Simpson.

2. Hilti HIT-RE-500 SD manufactured by Hilti.

C. Chemical Hardener: Fluosilicate solution designed for densification of cured concrete slabs. National Expansion Joint Co., "Techkote #1080", W.R. Meadows Co. "Pena-lith" or equal.

D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, type 1, one of the following;

1. Regular Curing Paper, Type I, reinforced waterproof: Fortifiber Corporation "Orange Label Sisalkraft", "Pabcotite" paper, or equal.



2. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 2103, 4 mil thick, clear or white color.

3. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd.

E. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, clear or translucent, 25% minimum solids, water base acrylic cure/sealer which will not discolor concrete and compatible with bonding of finishes specified in related sections. W.R. Meadows Co. “Vocomp 25”, “Vocomp 30" or equal.

F. Under Slab Water Vapor Retarder: Vapor retarder sheet to be ASTM E 1745, performance classification A; 15 mil, single ply extruded polyolefin; .03 U. S. perm water vapor permeance per ASTM E154, E96 procedure B or ASTM F1249.

1. Raven Industries, Inc. Sioux Falls SD, www.ravenind.com, 605-335-0174; Product: “Vapor Block 15”.

2. Stego Industries, LLC, San Juan Capistrano, CA www.stegoindustries.com, 1-877-GO-4-STEGO; Product: “Stego Wrap Class A Vapor Retarder (15mil).”

3. Approved Equal.

G. Evaporation Reducer: "Con-Film", by Master Builders.

H. Permeability Reducer: Use only where specifically referred to.

1. Admixture Type: Xypex Chemical Corporation "XYPEX Admix C-500".

Dosage: 2-3% of cement content by weight; 15 lb/cu. yd. max.

2. Surface-Applied Type: Xypex Chemical Corporation "XYPEX Concentrate.

Brush application: 1.25-1.50lb/sq. yd., 5 parts powder to 2 parts water.

3. Approved equal.

2.5 JOINT DEVICES AND MATERIALS

A. Waterstops: Resilient type, COE CRD-C 513. Provide W. R. Meadows Co."Seal Tight PVC Water Stop" or equal.

B. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751, Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 3/8 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile.

1. Products: "Servicised Products", W.R. Meadows, Inc., "National Expansion Joint Company", "Celotex Corporation", or equal.

C. Joint Filler: ASTM D 944, Compressible asphalt mastic with felt facers, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches deep.

D. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07900 (07-9105).

E. Slab Joint Sealant: Compatible with floor finishes specified in related sections.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXES



A. General Requirements for Mix Design and Submittal:

1. Provide Contractor submittals to Architect / Engineer and the Owners Testing Laboratory not less than fifteen (15) days before placing concrete.

2. Contractor shall review mix designs and proposed placing requirements prior to submittal for compatibility to insure that the concrete as designed can be placed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

3. Changes or Revisions require re-submittal: All variations to approved mix designs, including changing type and / or quantity of admixtures shall be resubmitted to the Architect/Engineer and the Testing Agency for review prior to use.

4. Mix design(s) for all structural classes of concrete to be prepared by qualified person experienced in mix design. Allow for time necessary to do trial batch testing when required.

5. Certification of Mix Design: Preparer to certify in writing that mix design meets:

a. Requirements of the specifications for concrete durability and quality;

b. Requirements of the California Building Code and ACI 318, Sections 5.2 to 5.5 including a historical background for designs based on field experience.

6. Clearly note on mix designs with specified maximum WCR if design permits addition of water on site, or clearly identify in the mix design, that no water is to be added on site.

7. Deviations: Clearly indicate proposed deviations, and provide written explanation explaining how the deviating mix design(s) will provide equivalent or better concrete product(s) than those specified.

8. Include adjustments to reviewed mix designs to account for weather conditions and similar factors.

B. Proportioning - General: The following provisions apply to all Mix Designs:

1. Proportion concrete mixes to produce concrete of required average strength (as defined by California Building Code Section 1905).

a. Select slump, aggregate sizes, shrinkage, and consistency that will allow thorough compaction without excessive puddling, spading, or vibration, and without permitting the materials to segregate, or allow free water to collect on the surface.

2. Select aggregate size and type to produce dense, uniform concrete with low to moderate shrinkage, free from rock pockets, honeycomb and other irregularities.

3. All concrete mixes shall have entrained air, four (4) percent maximum to improve workability.



4. Mix designs may include water reducing and retarding admixtures to meet or exceed minimum set times (time required to place and finish) and to minimize Water Cement Ratios (WCR). Minimum and maximum criteria presented in this section are guidelines and do not represent a specific mix design.

5. Cement Content: Minimum cement content indicates minimum sacks of cementitious material. Increasing cement content to increase early strengths or to achieve specified WCR while maintaining water content is discouraged in order to minimize effects of shrinkage.

a. Substitution of Fly Ash for Portland cement on an equivalent weight basis up to 15% replacement is permitted. Replacement in excess of 15% is not permitted unless part of a specified mix design that has been submitted for review.

b. Such substitution requests may be denied by the Engineer.

6. Water Content: Mix designs with a specified maximum Water Cement Ratio (WCR) may be designed with a lower WCR than specified in order to allow addition of water at the site.

7. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301 and this section.

a. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect / Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

8. Placement Options: Mix Designs may, at the Contractor's option, be designed for either pump or conventional placement with aggregate size, slumps, etc. to be maintained as specified in this section.

C. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations and this section.

D. Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations and this section.

E. Special mix design requirements for interior concrete floor slabs on grade to receive floor coverings:

1. Proportion concrete mixes per this specification, ACI 211.1, and the requirements below:

2. Minimum strength at 28 days to be 3000 psi; minimum strength at 56 days to be 4000 psi.

3. Fly Ash Type F, shall be substituted for cement on a 1 lb. per 1 lb. basis, with a minimum replacement of 10% and a maximum of 20%.

4. Total cementitious materials to exceed 6.1 sacks of cementitious material per 27 cubic feet (1 cubic yard).

5. Water Cement Ratio (WCR): Maximum on-site 0.45.



6. Coarse aggregates to be 1 in. x #4, per ACI 211.1, with the addition of 200 lbs. of 3/8(-) aggregate which shall be added to reduce total sand.

7. Reduce Total Sand and blend sand to minimum practical. Blend sand 100 lb. maximum.

8. Entrained and/or entrapped air: Four (4) percent maximum.

9. Water reducing, and high slump water reducing, admixtures are to be based on cement content only, not total cementitious materials. Dosage may be increased for workability as long as set times are not excessive for placement and finishing.



F. Mix Design Minimum Requirements:

Concrete Class Coarse Aggregate Size (Inches) & Fine Aggregate3

Maximum WCR or Maximum Nominal Slump & Tolerance (Inches)1,2

Minimum 28-Day Design Strength 4

Minimum Cement Sacks/per yd4

NON-STRUCTURAL

1) Lean Concrete for Backfill

1" x #4 --- --- 3.0

2) Slab on Grade Exterior (Walks & Patios)

1" x #4 4" + 1" 2,000 4.5

STRUCTURAL

3) Interior Slab on Grade w/floor coverings/coatings5

1” x #4 WCR = .45 __ __

4) Foundation 1" x #4 WCR = .53 3,000 5.0 1. The tolerance is the maximum deviation allowable without rejection. The mix

design shall be based on the nominal value specified and is without water reducing mixtures. Slump to be measured at the end of the hose.

2. The maximum water cement ratio (WCR) is limited at time of placement as noted. No water is to be added on site such that the specified WCR or maximum slump is exceeded without approval of the testing laboratory and the Architect/Engineer. Workability is to be achieved utilizing an acceptable mid range to high range water reducing admixture.

3. Gradation of aggregate is per California Building Code (CBC), Chapter 19A Section 1903 and ASTM C33.

4. Minimum cement content as defined by California Building Code (CBC) Section 1905A. See 56 day design strength and cementious material requirement at slabs.

5. Slabs on grade to receive floor covering or any coatings to be proportioned in accordance with detailed requirements in Article 2.6 titled CONCRETE MIXES.

2.7 MIXING CONCRETE

A. Batch final proportions in accordance with approved mix designs. All adjustments to approved proportions, for whatever reason, shall be reviewed by the Architect / Engineer prior to use.

B. Batch and mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C-94, at an established plant. Site mixed concrete will be rejected.

C. Provide batch and transit equipment adequate for the work. Operate as necessary to provide concrete complying with specified requirements.

D. Place mixed concrete in forms within 1-1/2 hours from the time of introduction of cement and water into mixer. Use of, re-mixing and/or tempering mixed concrete older than 1 hour will not be permitted.

E. Do not add water at the site to concrete mixes with a maximum specified WCR unless the water content at batch time provides for a WCR less than specified and this



provision, including the quantity of water which may be added at the site, is specifically noted on the Mix Design and Certification by the mix preparer.


A. Services by independent Testing Agency:

1. Batch Plant Certificates: Obtain the weighmaster's Batch Plant Certificate at arrival of truck at the site. If no batch plant certificate is provided, recommend to the General Contractor that the truckload of concrete be rejected. So note in daily log, along with the location of the load of concrete in the structure if the load is not rejected. See requirements of CBC 1903A.4.4.

a. Laboratory's inspector shall obtain for each transit mixer Batch Plant Certificates to verify mix design quantities and condition upon delivery to the site.

b. Certificates to include: Date, time, ingredient quantities, water added at plant and on job, total mixer revolutions at time of placement, and time of departure.

c. Concrete with specified water cement ratio: Add no water on site unless mix design and batch records each show additional water may be added.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.

B. Verify work of other sections is complete and tested as required before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Observation, Inspection and Testing:

1. Architect/Engineer: Notify not less than 48 hours (2 working days) before each concrete placement, for observation and review of reinforcing, forms, and other work prior to placement of concrete.

2. Testing Agency: Notify not less than 24 hours before each placement for inspection and testing.

B. Placement Records: Contractor shall maintain records of time, temperature and date of concrete placement including mix design and location in the structure. Retain records until completion of the contract. Make available for review by Testing Agency and Architect/Engineer.

C. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.

D. Verify location, position and inclusion of all embedded and concealed items.



E. Verify that installation of vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade as specified in related section, is complete.

F. Cleaning and Preparation:

1. Remove loose dirt, mud, standing water, and foreign matter from excavations and cavities.

2. Close cleanout and inspection ports securely.

3. Thoroughly clean reinforcement and other embedded items free from loose rust and foreign matter. Maintain reinforcing securely in place. Do not place concrete on hot reinforcing.

4. Dampen form materials and substrates on which concrete is to be placed at least 1 hour in advance of placing concrete; repeat wetting as necessary to keep surfaces damp. Do not saturate. Do not place concrete on saturated material.

a. Thoroughly wet wood forms (except coated plywood), bottom and sides of trenches, adjacent concrete or masonry and reinforcement.

b. Concrete slabs on base rock, dampen rock.

c. Concrete slabs on vapor barrier, do not wet vapor barrier.

5. Verify that metal forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.

6. Thoroughly clean metal decking. Do not place concrete on wet deck surface.

7. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Drill holes in existing concrete at locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work. Insert steel dowels and prepare connections as detailed.

3.3 PIPES AND CONDUITS IN CONCRETE

A. Slabs-On-Grade:

1. No pipe or conduit exceeding 1 inch outside diameter shall be embedded within the specified slab thickness except as specifically detailed.

2. Do not stack or abut pipes, maintain 3 inches minimum clearance.

B. Sleeving and Wrapping:

1. Foundations: Sleeve or wrap all individual pipe penetrations, minimum1-1/2 inches clear to reinforcing all around.

a. Sleeves: Provide 1 inch minimum clear all around to reinforcing.

b. Wrapped pipes Provide 1/8 inch nominal sheet foam with three wraps minimum.



2. Slabs or Curbs: Wrap pipes as described above.

C. Space groups of pipes/conduits at least 3 sleeve diameters apart, do not interrupt specified concrete and reinforcement.

1. Provide block-outs as detailed when grouping of pipes/conduits in foundation or other structural member prevents spacing as described,. Notify Architect/Engineer for review of any conditions not conforming to details.

2. Center pipe/conduit penetrations in the depth and/or thickness of foundations.

3. Maximum size of pipe/conduit penetrations shall not exceed the least dimension of concrete divided by 3.

D. Do not embed pipes/conduits in concrete slabs on metal deck.

E. Provide the following at pipes/conduits detailed to be embedded in a concrete beam, wall or column:

1. Place as near as possible to center of member with reinforcing as specified on each side.

2. Where reinforcing is located near or at center of member, place pipe or conduit 1 inch minimum clear from reinforcing and provide #3 at 12 inches on center perpendicular to the pipe/conduit. Reinforcing to extend 1’-0” minimum past pipe/conduit each side.

3. Maintain ¾ inch clear minimum from added reinforcing to face of concrete where not exposed to weather, and 1-1/2 inches clear where exposed to weather.

4. Space embedded items,(groups of pipe/conduit, junction boxes or other elements) minimum 3 inches apart.

5. Provide reinforcing in walls, beams, columns as detailed for groups of pipe/conduit. Provide minimum replacement reinforcement of same size and number for interrupted or displaced reinforcement for the full height, length, width of the wall, beam, column on each side of the “effective opening.”

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Transporting:

1. Provide clean, well-maintained equipment of sufficient quantity and capacity to execute the work and produce concrete of quality specified.

2. Handle and transport concrete from mixer to final deposit location as rapidly as practicable. Prevent separation or loss of ingredients.

B. Perform concrete placement by methods which will not puncture, damage or disturb vapor retarder membrane. Repair all damage to vapor retarder membrane before covering.

C. Placement - General: Placement, once started, shall be carried on as a continuous operation until section of approved size and shape is completed. Provide



construction joints as detailed on the drawings. Engineer's written approval required for all deviations.

1. Deposition:

a. Deposit concrete to maintain an approximately horizontal plastic surface until the completion of the unit placement.

b. Deposit as neatly as practicable in final position, minimize re-handling or flow.

c. Do not drop concrete freely where reinforcing bars will cause segregation, or for more than four vertical feet. Provide spouts, elephant trunks or other means to prevent segregation during placement.

2. Depth: Layered placement in columns and walls, shall not exceed ten feet vertical depth.

a. Place concrete in minimum 32 inch horizontal lifts.

b. Schedule placement to ensure that concrete will not take initial set before placement of next lift.

c. No horizontal cold joints are allowed in columns or walls.

3. Progress Cleaning: Remove all concrete spilled on forms or reinforcing steel in portions of structure not immediately concreted. Remove completely before concrete sets.

4. Interruptions: Shut down placement operations and dispose of all remaining mixed concrete and concrete in hoppers or mixers following all interruption in placement longer than 60 minutes.

a. If such interruption occurs, provide new or relocate existing construction joints as directed by Engineer.

b. Cut concrete back to the designated line, cleaning forms and reinforcing as herein specified.

c. Prepare for resumption of placement as for new unit when reason for interruption is resolved.

D. Placement - Elevated Structural Systems: Place as noted for "General" above and as follows:

1. Metal Decking and Structural Steel Beam Systems that are not to be shored: Locate screed lines on primary structural members. Review proposed screed line locations and expected structural deflections with the Architect/Engineer prior to placement of concrete.

2. Place screed lines to match camber of primary girders made of material other than concrete. Locate screeds to provide the minimum specified thickness of concrete at all locations.



3. Compensate for deflection of intermediate structural members and decking by placement of additional concrete.

4. Adjust embedded items to compensate for camber and deflection. Maintain locations within specified tolerances.

E. Consolidation:

1. Consolidate all concrete thoroughly during placement with high-speed mechanical vibrators and other suitable tools. Perform manual spading and tamping to work around reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into corners of formwork as required to obtain thorough compaction.

a. Provide vibrators with sufficient amplitude for adequate consolidation.

b. Use mechanical vibrators at each point of concrete placement.

c. Keep additional spare vibrators, in addition to those required for use, at the site for standby service in case of equipment failure.

2. Consolidate each layer of concrete as placed.

a. Insert vibrators vertically at points 18 to 30" inches apart; work into top area of previously placed layer to reconsolidate, slowly withdraw vibrator to surface.

b. Avoid contact of vibrator heads with formwork surfaces.

c. Systematically double back and reconsolidate wherever possible. Consolidate as required to provide concrete of maximum density with minimized honeycomb.

F. Unacceptable Materials:

1. Do not place concrete that has started to set or stiffen. Dispose of these materials.

2. Do not add water on site to concrete except as specified in the approved Mix Design, see PART 2 above.

G. Protection of installed work:

1. Do not introduce any foreign material into any specified drainage, piping or duct systems.

2. Contractor shall bear all costs of work required to repair or clean this affected work as a result of failure to comply with this requirement.

3.5 CONCRETE JOINTS

A. Structural Joints (Construction/Cold Joints):

1. Locate joints only where shown, or as approved.



2. Review Required: Joints not indicated on the plans shall be located to meet the minimum requirements below, shall not impair the strength of the structure and shall be submitted to Architect/Engineer for review prior to placement of concrete.

a. Indicate proposed location(s) of construction/cold/expansion joints on shop drawing submittals for review prior to placing concrete.

3. Clean and roughen all surfaces of previously placed concrete at construction joints by washing and sandblasting to expose aggregate to 1/4 inch amplitude.

4. Slabs-On-Grade: Maximum Length of continuous placement shall not exceed 60’ without special review by the Architect/Engineer. Alternate or stagger placement sections.

5. Foundations, Beams, Elevated Slabs and Joists: Maximum Length of continuous placement shall not exceed 200 foot increments. Provide “keyed” shut-off locations made up with form boards. Extend reinforcing one lap length or more through shut-off.

a. All reinforcement shall be continuous through construction/cold joint, lapping to adjacent reinforcing in future placement.

b. Construction Joints in Elevated Slabs: Review all proposed locations with Architect/Engineer.

c. Construction Joints in Slabs on Metal Decking: Review all proposed locations with Architect/Engineer. Do not locate closer than 24 inches to faces of girder or beam.

6. Horizontal Construction Joints: Place 2 inch slurry (specified concrete mix less coarse aggregate) at beginning of pour at at the bottom of walls unless a prior review of a mock-up section demonstrates that segregation of aggregate will not occur.

B. Expansion/Construction Joints (Dowel Joints and Control Joints):

1. Exterior Concrete Paving (walkways, patios) and other non-structural concrete flatwork at grade:

a. Expansion/ construction joints: Provide a 2 inch deep troweled groove or asphalt impregnated joint material embedded 50 percent of the slab depth at 12 feet on center, maximum.

b. Proportions: Place no section with a length larger than two times width. Additionally, place joints at all inside corners and at all intersections with other work.

2. Interior and Exterior Floor Slabs at Grade: Provide dowel joints or control joints at a maximum dimension (in feet) of three times the slab thickness (in inches) in each direction unless noted otherwise. Install joints to match slab level and in straight lines. Locate joints at all reentrant corners including blockouts, and maintain maximum slab ratio of 2 to 1 length to width between slab joints.



3. Elevated Structural Slabs: Locate construction joints as specifically indicated on the drawings. All additional proposed locations shall be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer prior to placement.

C. Joint Types:

1. Dowel Joint: A keyed joint with smooth dowels passing through to allow unrestricted movement due to contraction and expansion. Joints are as shown on the drawings.

2. Control Joint(s): Shrinkage crack control joints may be of the following types when shown on the drawings. Install joints in a straight line between end points with edges finished appropriate to type. Fill joints with sealant as shown on the drawings or as required by related sections.

a. Two (2) inch deep x 1/4 inch wide troweled joint.

b. Keyed joint: Only at locations where concealed by other finishes.

c. Masonite Strip, 1/8 inch x 2 inch: Only at locations where concealed by other finishes.

d. Saw Cut, 1/8 inch x 2 inch deep: Must be performed within eight hours of completion of finishing. Do not make saw cuts if aggregate separates from cement paste during cutting operation. Prevent marring of surface finish. Fill with flexible sealant.

3.6 VAPOR BARRIER

A. Vapor Barrier Installation: Install as specified in Article 2.4, ASTM E 1643 and per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.7 FLATWORK

A. General Requirements for All Concrete Formed & Finished Flat:

1. Edge Forms and Screeds: Set accurately to produce indicated design elevations and contours in the finished surface, edge forms sufficiently strong to support screed type proposed.

2. Jointing: Located and detailed as indicated.

3. Consolidation: Concrete in slabs shall be thoroughly consolidated.

B. Flatwork Schedule:

1. Exterior Slabs-On-Grade: Place concrete directly over sub-base as indicated.

a. Sub-Base: Clean free-draining, crushed base rock, 6 inch minimum thickness, thoroughly compacted.

2. Interior Slabs-On-Grade without floor covering:



a. Sub-Base: Clean free-draining, crushed base rock, 6 inch minimum thickness, thoroughly compacted.

3. Concrete Slabs-On-Grade with floor coverings specified in related sections:

a. Sub-Base: Clean free-draining, rounded or crushed base rock, 6 inch minimum thickness, thoroughly compacted.

b. Vapor Barrier: Install over sub-base.

c. Mix Design: Meet the specific requirements of CONCRETE MIXES Article 2.6 for concrete placed in this location.

3.8 FORMED SURFACES

A. Form all concrete members level and plumb, except as specifically indicated.

1. Comply with tolerances specified in ACI 301 Chapter 4 and this specification, except that maximum permissible deviation is 1/4 inch end-to-end for any single member.

B. Cambers: Provide all cambers indicated in the formwork construction. Set screeds to produce specified cambers in the finished concrete.

3.9 CONCRETE FINISHES

A. Flatwork Finishing:

1. Perform with experienced operators.

2. Finish surfaces monolithically. Establish uniform slopes or level grades as indicated. Maintain full design thickness.

3. In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings.

4. Flatwork Finish Types:

a. Wood Float Finish: Surfaces to receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, or cementitious terrazzo with full bed setting system, or wood frame for raised finished floors.

b. Steel Trowel Finish: Surfaces to receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set terrazzo, thin set tile or similar finishes specified in related sections. Trowel twice, minimum.

c. Broom Texture Finish: Exterior surfaces as indicated or for which no other finish is indicated. Finish as for steel trowel finish, except immediately following first troweling, (depending on conditions of concrete and nature of finish required) provide uniform surfaces texture using a medium or coarse fiber broom.

B. Other Concrete: Provide as required to achieve appearance indicated on structural and architectural drawings and related sections.



1. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.

2. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height.

3. Exposed Form Finish: Finish concrete to match forms. Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows:

a. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal.

b. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or spray; scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap, and keep moist for 36 hours.

c. Cork Floated Finish: Immediately after form removal, apply grout with trowel or firm rubber float; compress grout with low-speed grinder, and apply final texture with cork float.

4. Intermediate joint and score marks and edges: Tool smooth and flush unless otherwise indicated or as directed by the Architect.

5. Use steel tools of standard patterns and as required to achieve details shown or specified. All exposed corners not specified to be chamfered shall have radiused edges.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Minimum Flatwork Tolerances: Measure flatness of slabs with in 48 hours after slab installation in accordance with ACI 302.1R and ASTM E1155 and to achieve the following FF and FL tolerances:

1. Exterior surfaces: 1/8 inch minimum per foot where sloped to drain. Level otherwise. FF 20 and FL15.

2. Interior surfaces not otherwise shown or required: Level throughout. FF25 and FL20

3. Interior surfaces required to be sloped for drainage: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.

4. Finish concrete to achieve the following tolerances:

a. Typical: FF 50 and FL 25.

c. Flooring manufactureer and pertainent section of Division 9.

B. Formed Surface Tolerances:

1. Permanently Exposed Joints and Surfaces: Provide maximum differential height within two feet of, and across construction joints of 1/16 inch.

2. Vertical Elevations: Elevation of surfaces shall be as shown or approved.



C. Concrete floor griding tolerances:

1. Maximum grind depth is a ½”.

2. Maintain floor slopes per drawings and spefications after grinding.

3.11 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS

A. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove deleterious material. Broom and vacuum clean.

B. Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other items to be cast in.

C. Apply bonding agent to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Apply sand and cement slurry coat on base course, immediately prior to placing toppings.

E. Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels.

1. Place topping in checkerboard panels not to exceed 20 ft in either direction.

F. Screed toppings level, maintaining surface tolerances per above.

3.12 CONCRETE CURING

A. Curing - General: Cure in accordance with ACI 308. Maintain concrete water content for proper hydration and minimize temperature variations. Begin curing immediately following finishing.

B. Protection During Curing: Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. The General Contractor is responsible for the protection of the finished slab from damage.

1. Avoid foot traffic on concrete for minimum of 24-hours after placement.

2. Protect concrete from sun and rain.

3. Maintain concrete temperature at or above 50 degrees F. during the first seven (7) days after placement. See Article ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS.

4. Do not subject concrete to design loads until concrete is completely cured, and until concrete has attained its full specified twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength or until twenty-one (21) days after placement, whichever is longer.

5. Protect concrete during and after curing from damage during subsequent building construction operations. See Article PROTECTION.

C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days.

2. High early strength concrete: Not less than 4 days.



D. Begin curing immediately following finishing.

E. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.

F. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:

1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap.

2. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry.

a. Moisture-retaining cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive.

b. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer.

G. Flatwork on Grade: Cure by one of the following methods:

1. Water Cure (Ponding): Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas, continuously for minimum seven (7) calendar days.

2. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days.

3. Moisture-Retaining Film or Paper: Lap strips not less than 6 inches and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive; extend beyond slab or paving perimeters minimum 6 inches and secure at edges; maintain in place for minimum seven (7) days.

4. Absorptive Moisture-Retaining Covering: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides and extend beyond slab or paving perimeters 6 inches minimum; maintain in place for minimum seven (7) days.

5. Liquid Membrane-forming Curing Compound: Provide only when subsequent concrete treatments or finish flooring specified in related sections will not be affected by cure/sealer. Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at the maximum recommended application rate in two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first.

H. Elevated Flatwork: Cure by one of the following methods.

1. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: As specified for Flatwork on Grade above.

2 Water Cure: As specified above for minimum fourteen (14) days.

3. Apply Membrane Curing Compound as specified above after initial curing period.

I. Flatwork on Metal Decking: Moisture-Retaining Sheet method as specified above.

J. Formed Concrete Members: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.

1. Protect free-standing elements from temperature extremes.



2. Maintain forms tight for minimum seven (7) days. Maintain exposed surfaces continuously damp and completely covered by sheet materials thereafter.

3. Maintain all shoring in place. Refer to related sections specifying formwork.

4. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in one coat.

K. Foundations: Apply curing compound immediately after floating.

3.13 CONCRETE HARDENER

A. Apply hardener to all floor slabs not receiving other finishes after 30 days minimum curing. Clean slabs of non-compatible cure/sealers or other foreign material(s) and apply in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions.

3.14 GROUTING AND DRY PACK

A. Set steel plates on concrete or masonry with grout bed, completely fill all voids; thoroughly compact in place.

B. Bolts or inserts dry packed or grouted in place shall cure for minimum seven (7) days before tensioning.


A. Testing and Inspections by Independent Testing Agency: Provided verification and inspection if concrete per CBC Table 1704.4. Provide written reports for to Engineer, Architect, Contractor and Building Official for the following tests and inspections:

a. Inspection: Provide periodic inspection of reinforcing steel. Provide periodic inspection during placement of structural class concrete, 3000 psi or more, on a 150 cubic yard basis as required to assure conformance.

a. Provide continuous inspection of bolts in concrete prior to and during placement where so noted on the construction documents.

2. Structural Concrete Cylinder Tests: Perform in accordance with ASTM C-31.

a. Take four standard 6 inch x 12 inch cylinder specimens on the site, of each class of concrete as specified in PART 2, not less then a day or for each 50 cubic yards or 2000 sq ft or fraction thereof placed each day.

b. Record the location of each concrete batch in the building in a log and also note on each specimen.

c. Perform standard compression test of cylinders in accordance with ASTM C-39, one at 7 days and two at 28 days.

d. Hold fourth cylinder untested until specified concrete strengths are attained.

3. Structural Concrete Slump Test and Air Tests: Perform in accordance with ASTM D 143 at the time of taking test cylinders, and/or at one-hour intervals during concrete placing.



4. Measure and record concrete temperature upon arrival of transit mixers and when taking specimens. Note weather conditions and temperature.

5. Propose adjustments to reviewed mix designs for Architect / Engineer review to account for variations in site or weather conditions, or other factors as appropriate.

6. Water Vapor Transmission Tests: Floors receiving floor finishes specified in related sections will be tested prior to installation of flooring systems. Refer to sections specifying floor finishes for related requirements.

B. Services by Contractor:

1. Rejection of Concrete Materials: Do not use the following without prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer;

a. Materials without batch plant certificates.

b. Materials not conforming to the requirements of these specifications.

3.16 ADJUSTING

A. Inspect all concrete surfaces immediately upon formwork removal. Notify Architect/Engineer of identified minor defects. Repair all minor defects as directed.

B. Surface and Finish Defects: Repair as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at no added expense to the Owner. Repairs include all necessary materials; reinforcement grouts, dry pack, admixtures, epoxy and aggregates to perform required repair.

1. Repair minor defective surface defects by use of drypack and surface grinding. Specific written approval of Architect/Engineer is required. Submit proposed patching mixture and methods for approval prior to commencing work.

2. Slabs On Grade, Elevated Slabs and on Slabs On Metal Deck: Review for "curled" slab edges and shrinkage cracks prior to installation of other floor finishes. Grind curled edges flush, fill cracks of 1/16 inch and greater with cementitious grout.

3. Grind high spots, fins or protrusions caused by formwork; Fill-in pour joints, voids, rock pockets, tie holes and other void not impairing structural strength. Provide surfaces flush with surrounding concrete.

3.17 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required compressive strength, lines, details, dimensions, tolerances, finishes or specified requirements; as determined by the Architect/Engineer.

B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Engineer who may order additional testing and inspection at his option. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.

C. Specific Defects:



1. "Low-Strength"; Concrete Not Meeting Specified Compressive Strength after 28 days:

a. Concrete with less than 25% Fly Ash as cementitious material: Test remaining cylinder(s) at 56 days. If strength requirements are met, concrete strength is acceptable.

b. Concrete with 25% or more Fly Ash as cementitious material: Test remaining cylinder(s) at 70 days. If strength requirements are met, concrete strength is acceptable.

2. Excessive Shrinkage, Cracking, Crazing or Curling; Defective Finish: Remove and replace if repair to acceptable condition is not feasible.

3. Lines, Details, Dimensions, Tolerances: Remove and replace if repair to acceptable condition is not feasible.

4. Slab sections not meeting specified tolerances for trueness/flatness or lines/levels: Remove and replace unless otherwise directed by the Architect/Engineer.

a. Minimum area for removal: Fifteen square feet area unless directed otherwise by the Architect/Engineer.

5. Defective work affecting the strength of the structure or the appearance: Complete removal and replacement of defective concrete, as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

3.18 CLEANING

A. Maintain site free of debris and rubbish. Remove all materials and apparatus from the premises and streets at completion of work. Remove all drippings, leave the entire work clean and free of debris.

B. Slabs to Receive Floor Finishes Specified in other sections: Remove non-compatible cure/sealers or other foreign material(s) which may affect bonding of subsequent finishes. Leave in condition to receive work of related sections.

3.19 PROTECTION

A. Protect completed work from damage until project is complete and accepted by Owner.

B. Construction Loads: Submit engineering analysis for equipment, where wheel point loads (including all carried loads) are in excess of the following:

1. Slabs on grade and structural slabs above grade: 4,000 lbs.

2. Slabs above grade on metal deck: 2,000 lbs.

C. Keep finished areas free from all equipment traffic for a minimum of 4 additional days following attainment of design strength and completion of curing.

D. Protection of Drainage Systems:



1. Care shall be taken not to introduce any foreign material into any specified drainage, piping or duct system.

2. Cost of work to repair or clean drainage system as a result of failure to comply with this requirement will be back charged to the contractor.

E. Cover traffic areas with plywood sheets or other protective devices; maintain protection in place and in good repair for as long as necessary to protect against damage by subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 03365 - 1 Dye Stained Ground & Polished Concrete

SECTION 03365

DYE STAINED GROUND AND POLISHED CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide dye stained color with ground and polished finish for cast-in-place concrete; non-slip finish.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for concrete dye stain materials; provide cleaning instructions, including clearly indicated listing of potentially detrimental cleaning materials.

B. Samples: Submit samples with one surface representative of each required color with each component including dye stain and finish.

C. Certificates: Manufacturer's representative's certification work has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


A. Qualification of Installer: Company with minimum five years successful experience in stained and sand blasted cast-in-place concrete finishes similar to finish required for Project and acceptable to dye stain manufacturer.

B. Materials: Materials for stained concrete finishes shall each come from a single source and shall not be changed throughout Project.

C. Coordination: Coordinate manufacturer requirements for preparation of concrete for chemical stain finish with installer of concrete; inform of limitations of materials that might be detrimental to finish.

D. Mock-Up: Provide at least 100 square foot mock-up of stained and light sandblasted finish. Location to be approved by Architect. Accepted mock-up establishes minimum standard of quality and workmanship for colored concrete finish.

1. Do not remove mock-up until staining and finishing of Project concrete is complete and approved.

E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Comply with dye stain manufacturer recommendations and instructions for substrate, temperature, moisture content, ambient temperature, humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting dye stain materials.

B. Concrete to cure not less than 28 days unless otherwise approved by dye stain manufacturer representative.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. L.M. Scofield Co.

B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Dye Stain System: Provide dye type staining system designed specifically for interior concrete floor slabs.

1. Type: Match L.M. Scofield/Formula One Color Liquid Dye Concentrate with Formula One Lithium Densifier and Formula One Finish Coat.

2. Colors: Specific colors and color mixes as required to match Architect’s samples; as directed by Architect where no samples are available.As indicated on Finish Schedule.

3. Curing Compound for Dye Stained Concrete: Match L.M. Scofield/Litochrome Colorwax.

4. Chemical Hardener and Densifiers: Match L.M. Scofield/Formula One LD and Finish Coat.

5. Non-Slip Finish: Floor finish to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and California Code of Regulations for non-slip floor finish.

a. Smooth floor finish required, use of textures not acceptable.

B. Grout: Non-metallic, pre-mixed, shrinkage resistant, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents.

1. Grout: Same base materials, cement, aggregates and pigments, as concrete with coloring as required to match colored concrete.

2. Pigments: Pure, non-fading, non-staining, mineral oxides color conforming to ASTM C979 and designed and mixed to provide uniform color finish.

2.3 MIXES

A. Comply with dye stain manufacturer recommendations for mixes as required to match approved samples and mock-up.

B. Concrete slump to be consistent throughout Project at 4” or less.

C. Do not add calcium chloride or other admixtures not approved by dye stain manufacturer to mix.

D. Do not add water to mix in the field.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Inspect existing substrates and conditions; beginning application of color materials to concrete signifies acceptance of substrates and conditions.

1. Ensure concrete finishing is done in manner to allow for application of specified chemical color finish.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply dye stain coloring and hardening materials in process conforming to coloring material manufacturer recommendations and instructions as required to match approved samples and mock-up.

1. Touch-up non-uniform and weak toned areas as necessary to match approved mock-up.

B. Do not disturb or damage concrete.

C. Apply dye stain materials under near identical conditions to minimize appearance blemishes and irregularities beyond those described in manufacturer's literature and approved in mock-up.

D. Conduct special inspections with Architect and make repairs or replace unsatisfactory work.

E. Comply with dye stain material manufacturer recommendations to ensure uniform finish from staining, grinding and polishing, including providing a more uniform tone, without damage to concrete or to stain.

1. Protect adjacent materials and finishes from dust, dirt and other surface or physical damage during finishing operations; provide protection as required and remove at completion of work.

a. Repair or replace other work damaged by grinding and polishing operations.

2. Comply with applicable codes and requirements of applicable authorities for operations.

F. Perform finishing in as continuous an operation as possible, utilizing same work crew to maintain continuity of finish.

G. Grind concrete floor with grinding equipment to match approved samples and mock-up, to remove construction debris, floor slab imperfections, and to proved uniform scratch pattern and aggregate exposure.

1. Depth of cut to be Grade 2, light exposure of course aggregate as approved by Architect and matching approved samples and mock-up.



H. Apply materials for color in accordance with dye stain manufacturer recommendations and application instructions and as required to match approved samples and mock-up.

I. Apply densifying impregnator using broom to work densifier into substrate; keep substrate wet with densifier until full cure is achieved or as recommended by manufacturer representative.

J. Grind floor with metal bonded diamond grits of 150 and 300 as required to remove scratches from previous grit; vacuum floor thoroughly after each grind using squeegee type vacuum attachment.

K. Polish floor to Class 2, 800 grit polish shine level as approved by Architect and matching approved samples and mock-up.

L. Polish floor to reflect images from side lighting at distance of 100 feet; apply two applications of finish coat as recommended by system manufacturer.

M. Apply dye to surface in accordance with dye manufacturer recommendations and application instructions. After dye has dried apply densifier and allow to cure.

N. Polish and apply finish coat in accordance with dye manufacturer recommendations and instructions.

O. Burnish floor using high speed burnishing machine to achieve high shine.

P. Cure concrete using curing compounds recommended by dye manufacturer and of same color as colored concrete. Do not cover concrete with plastic sheeting.

1. Take necessary precautions to prevent cracking from excessively rapid drying at surface.


A. Field Inspection: Dye stain manufacturer's representative shall inspect work of Project on regular basis and provide certification materials have been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Provide unobstructed access to stained concrete work.

2. Correct defects and irregularities as advised by manufacturer's representative.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Exclude traffic for at least 14 days after finishing; when construction traffic is permitted, maintain surfaces as clean by removing stains and materials spillage as they occur.

END OF SECTION

ZFA STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS TRACY FIRE STATION 92 ____________________________________________________________________________________

04200 - 1 Concrete Masonry Unit Construction

SECTION 04200

CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CONSTRUCTION

____________________________________________________________________________

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: All labor, material and equipment and perform all operations required to complete all masonry work as indicated on the drawings and specified.

B. Additional work included in this section: Provision of concrete grout and

installation of items provided by other trades that are embedded in and/or attached to masonry work; providing forms at block-outs and formed concrete grout.

C. Related Sections:

1. Pertinent Sections of Division 01 specifying Quality Control and Testing

Laboratory services. 2. Section 03100 – Concrete Forms and Accessories. 3. Section 03200 – Concrete Reinforcement. 4. Pertinent Sections of other Divisions specifying work to be embedded in

concrete. 5. Pertinent Sections of other Divisions specifying work penetrating concrete

work. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. California Building Code (CBC), latest edition (noted herein as CBC) Chapter 19,

Chapter 21 Masonry. B. American Concrete Institute ACI 530, Building Code Requirements and

Specifications for Masonry Structures. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 01300 specifying submittal procedures. The

General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will be returned for correction without review.



B. Limitation of Review: Structural Engineer’s review will be for general

conformance with design intent as indicated in the Contract Documents and does not relive Contractor of full responsibility for conformance with the Contract Documents.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacture’s product data, specifications, location and

installation instructions for propriety materials and reinforcement accessories. Provide samples of these items upon request.

D. Contractor Submittals:

1. Mix design for all grout prepared by a qualified testing laboratory. Mix

shall conform to all requirements herein. 2. Submit Shop Drawings for all shapes and sizes of Unit Masonry shown

and scheduled on the drawings. 3. Certifications of Compliance and test data by concrete masonry unit

supplier showing conformance to specified material strengths and properties.

4. Samples: Laid up sections of masonry walls for the Architect's approval of

size, texture and color of block, mortar and joint pattern. 5. Layout of vertical control joints in masonry walls coordinated with

structural and architectural drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies refer to pertinent sections of Division 01

and CBC Chapter 17. B. All tests shall be performed by a recognized testing agency as specified in

pertinent sections of Division 01. C. Testing and Inspection: Tests and Inspections performed by Independent

Testing Agency are specified below in Articles SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL and FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. Duties and limitations of Independent Testing Agency, test costs and test reports in conformance with pertinent sections of Division 01.

D. General: Review and approve contractor submittals related to design strengths

of concreting masonry construction. Provide reports to Architect/Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ) indicating results of reviews, tests and inspections.

E. Concrete Unit Masonry

1. All testing of concrete unit masonry by the Owner's Testing Laboratory

shall comply with the requirements of CBC Chapters 17 and 21.



2. Owner's testing laboratory shall provide Level 1 Special Inspection Program per CBC Chapter 17 by a specially approved inspector of masonry construction.

F. Contractor shall provide adequate materials for sampling and shall patch core

holes made by the testing laboratory using non-shrink, high- strength grout. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store packaged material in original containers with seals unbroken

and labels intact until time of use. B. Unload masonry units carefully and store on raised platform protected from

weather. C. Protect cementitious materials against exposure to moisture. Use of cementitious

or other materials that have become caked and hardened from absorption of moisture will not be permitted.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not place unit masonry when temperature is below

50 degrees Fahrenheit or above 90 degrees Fahrenheit unless the Architect approves and the Contractor provides means for preventing damage from freezing before and after placement. See Section 3.04 C and D.

B. Protection: Protect surrounding work as required against damage from masonry

work. Clean satisfactorily or otherwise correct damage to surrounding work resulting from masonry work. See Section 3.04 E.



B. Provide schedule and sequence information to Testing Agency in writing upon

request. Update information as work progresses. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units:

1. General: All concrete masonry units shall be made with expanded shale

aggregates, shall be double open end wherever possible, (single open end otherwise) and shall conform to CBC Section 2102.2.5.2. Units to be tested in conformance with CBC Section 2105.

2. Concrete masonry units to be used in concrete masonry shall be medium

or light weight and shall conform to ASTM C90, latest version.



3. Concrete masonry shall have an assumed 28 day prism strength of

1500psi. 4. Concrete masonry units exposed to view shall be 8x8x16. Concrete

masonry caps shall be 1 1/2x8x16 standard grey. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali C. Aggregates

1. For Mortar: ASTM C144. 2. For Grout: ASTM C404.

D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S E. Quick Lime: ASTM C5, high calcium F. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, Grade 40 for #4 and smaller. Grade 60 for #5

and larger. G. Water: Clean and potable, free from impurities detrimental to mortar and grout. H. Sika Grout Aid: Sikacorporation.com (800) 933-7453. I. Preformed expansion joint filler (bituminous), ASTM D4. J. High-Strength Grout: Conform to CRD-C621 and CRD-C588, non-ferrous. K. Flexible sealant to conform to Federal Specification TT-S-002 30C, Type II, Class

A. L. Mortar Color: Submit to Architect for approval.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Reinforcement: Conform to requirements of Section 03200, Concrete

Reinforcement. 2.3 MIXES AND MIXING

A. Mortar

1. Mix Design for mortar shall be Type S, compressive strength: 1800 psi

minimum at 28 days, otherwise conform to CBC Section 2103, with proportions per Tables 2103.A.8 (1) and (2). Admixtures not allowed.

2. Use and place mortar in final position within 2-1/2 hours after mixing.

Mortars that have stiffened due to evaporation of water may be retempered with water as frequently as required to restore required consistency during this time period.



3. Provide integrally colored mortar to match block. Colors to be submitted to

Architect for approval. Add mortar colors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure uniformity of mix and coloration.

4. Field test specimens per CBC 2105.5.

B. Concrete Grout

1. General:

a. Six (6) sacks of cement per yard minimum. Concrete masonry

grout compressive strength to attain 2000 psi after 28 days minimum. Admixture not allowed unless specified herein.

b. One lb. Sika Grout Aid per sack of cement (6 lbs. maximum per

cubic yard). c. Slump: 8 to 10 inches.

2. Otherwise conform to CBC Section 2103.12. 3. Field test specimens per CBC 2105.5.

C. General Mixing Requirements:

1. Measure materials accurately. Shovel measurements will not be

permitted. 2. Use mechanical mixer of at least one sack capacity. 3. Mix for minimum of three minutes and in no case less than time required

for securing uniform mass. 4. Completely empty drum before charging succeeding batch of materials. 5. Exercise extreme care in measuring ingredients for partial batches.


A. An independent Testing Agency will perform source quality control tests and submit reports, as specified in pertinent section of Division 01 and CBC Chapter 17 and 21.

B. Test materials per CBC 2105 unit strength method or prism test method.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION BY CONTRACTOR

A. Examine areas to receive masonry and verify following:



1. That foundation surface is level to permit bed joint within range of 1/4-to

3/4-inch. 2. That edge is true to line to permit projection of masonry too less than 1/4-

inch. 3. That projecting dowels are free from loose scale, dirt, concrete or other

bond-inhibiting substances and properly located. B. Do not begin work before unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean concrete surfaces to receive masonry. Remove laitance or other foreign

material lodged in surface by sandblasting or other means as required. Roughen foundation bed to expose aggregate; remove loose particles and saturate before laying units.

B. Ensure masonry units are clean and free from dust, dirt or other foreign materials

before laying. 3.3 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place bars where noted in accordance with drawings and ACI 315. Do not

disturb after start of masonry placement. B. Splice bars with dowels cast in concrete; lap bars per drawings. Bars shall not be

"stabbed" after grout placement. All reinforcing shall be tied in place with wire prior to grout placement. The use of approved bar spacers is acceptable.

3.4 PLACEMENT

A. General Requirements

1. Ensure masonry units are sound, clean and free of cracking at time of

placement. 2. Accurately cut and fit units as required to accommodate work of other

sections using masonry saws. 3. Lay masonry units plumb, true to line with level courses accurately placed.

Maximum tolerance 1/4" in 8'-0". 4. Adjust unit to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 5. Align vertical cells accurately. 6. Remove units disturbed after stiffening of mortar, clean joints and relay

unit with fresh mortar. 7. Do not attach construction supports to walls.



8. Install anchor bolts and other embedded items accurately as work

progresses. Use templates as necessary to meet required tolerance of other's work.

9. Brace walls adequately until supporting structure is complete. 10. Do not place conduit, pipes, wire, etc. in cells containing reinforcing steel.

B. Joints:

1. Fill joints; ensure full coverage of face shells in both horizontal and vertical joints and on webs.

2. Tool (concave) and finish joints as specified to achieve solid, smooth,

watertight compacted joint. 3. Immediately fill holes made by line pin with mortar when pin is withdrawn. 4. Remove surplus mortar from joints. 5. Provide vertical control joints at 25' o.c. maximum and as detailed on the

structural drawings. C. Cold Weather Requirements

1. When daily temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit, ensure

reinforcing, masonry units, etc. contacting mortar and grout are free of frost.

2. Submit cold weather protection plan per ACI 530.1 and CBC 2104.3.

D. Hot Weather Requirements

1. When daily temperatures are at 90 degrees or above, submit hot weather placement procedures for review.

2. Submit hot weather protection plan per ACI 530.1 and CBC 2104.4.

E. Protection

1. Protect face materials against staining. 2. Remove misplaced grout or mortar immediately. 3. Protect sills, ledges, off-sets and similar items from mortar drippings or

other damage during construction.

F. Concrete Masonry Units 1. Bond: Running bond unless specifically noted otherwise.



2. Joint Thickness: 3/8-inch both vertically and horizontally. 3. Joint Treatment:

a. Typical exterior and interior walls; tool joint for weather tightness. b. Construction joints to be sealed with joint sealant or high strength

grout as noted on the drawings. 4. Use proper units to provide for doors, bond beams lintels, etc. in order to

minimize cutting. 5. Do not wet units. 6. Align vertical cells to provide continuous, unobstructed opening for

grouting. 7. Corners: Provide standard masonry bond by overlapping units. 8. Provide inverted bond units at beginning of each lift to aid in cleaning and

flushing. 3.5 GROUTING

A. General Requirements

1. Conform to requirements of ACI 530. 2. Grout void between wythes and cells of concrete block. 3. Ensure grout flows into voids and completely surrounds reinforcing steel. 4. Stop grout approximately one inch below top of last course except at top

course without a concrete cap. 5. Grout from inside face of masonry wherever possible. 6. Where necessary to stop longitudinal run, provide suitable dam to retain

grout in place. 7. Clean all cells at bottom of lift space prior to grouting. Remove all loose

mortar, etc. 8. Consolidate grout with a mechanical vibrator with a 3/4" head. 9. Slushing with mortar will not be permitted. 10. Use grout pump, hopper or bucket to place grout. 11. Do not wet down grout spaces prior to grouting.



12. Locate cleanouts to minimize visual impact. Verify with Architect/Engineer.


A. The Independent Testing Agency will perform field quality control tests, as

specified in pertinent sections of Division 01 and CBC Chapters 17 and 21. B. The independent Testing Agency will provide continuous and periodic inspections

per the requirements of CBC Table 1704.5.3 Level 1 Special Inspection. 3.7 POINTING AND CLEANING

A. Point holes or defective mortar joints upon completion of work; where necessary,

cut out and repoint defective joints. B. At end of workday, fiber brush new surfaces to remove mortar splotches, clean

with mild detergent or enzymes, and rinse with clean water. C. When ordinary methods are not adequate, employ sandblasting, chipping or other

special methods. D. Do not use acid solution to remove green stain or efflorescence resulting from

vanadium salts. Follow recommendations of manufacturer for removal of such stains.

E. Clean all surfaces upon completion of erection, leave free of grime and dirt.

Remove unused materials, tools, equipment and debris from the premises and leave surfaces broomed clean.

F. Protect work from damage by subsequent operations.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Replace all defective work at Contractor’s expense. B. Replace defective or damaged work with conforming work. C. Architect/Engineer shall review all proposals for the repair or replacement of

damaged, defective, or missing work. D. Pay expenses incurred by Owner for Architect/Engineer’s costs for (re-)design

and obtaining approvals of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work, as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

E. Pay expenses due to re-testing and re-inspection necessitated by incomplete,

inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work, as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 04820 - 1 Textured Concrete Masonry Assemblies

SECTION 04820

TEXTURED CONCRETE MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide textured (split face and ground face cut), integral color concrete masonry unit construction, with mortar, reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Cut and fit concrete masonry for work of other trades.

B. Work Installed not Furnished: Build in items supplied by other trades and suppliers.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 0420104200: Standard concrete masonry unit construction.

1.2. Section 07190: Water Repellents

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's certificate concrete masonry units conform to specified standards.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish drawings for reinforcing; show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, ties and arrangements and assemblies.

C. Samples: Furnish each type of textured concrete masonry unit and colored mortar.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Perform concrete unit masonry work in accordance with requirements of California Building Code except where more restrictive requirements are specified.

B. Mock-Up: Provide minimum 4'-0" by 6'-0" sample panel of concrete masonry construction, clearly indicating joints and methods of reinforcing. Erect mock-up at Project Site, in location as approved by Architect.

1. Approved mock-up will be used for quality control as minimum standard of work acceptable for Project.

2. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

C. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.



1.4 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Temperature: Maintain materials to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

1. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.

a. During colder weather, work may continue where equipment is used to maintain constant temperature above 40 degrees F and masonry work completed and in progress is kept covered.

2. Protect masonry construction from direct wind and sun exposure when temperatures exceed 99 degrees F and relative humidity is less than 50 percent.

B. Bracing: Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work, maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Concrete Masonry Units: Hollow loadbearing units conforming to ASTM C90.

1. Weight: Provide normal, medium or light weight units unless specific weight classification is indicated.

a. Normal Weight, 125 pcf or more. b. Medium Weight, 105 to 125 pcf. c. Light Weight, less than 105 pcf.

2. Compressive Strength: Comply with ASTM C90, with minimum 1500 psi average for three units, when tested in accordance with ASTM C140.

3. Size: Nominal 8" by 16" face measurement with thickness as indicated on Drawings.

4. Exposed Face Surfaces: Dense with finish as approved by Architect prior to manufacturing; uniform texture and color throughout Project.

a. Textures: Split Face and Ground Face as indicated on Drawings. b. Color: Match Basalite/D225 integral color to match Architect samples.

5. Special Shapes: Provide proper specially shaped units for bond beams, lintels, corners and jambs.

a. Exposed Special Shapes: Design bond beams, lintels, corners and jambs and fillers to match and compliment block units; where required perform cutting with masonry saw.



B. Mortar: Conform to ASTM C270, Type S.

1. Masonry Cement/Premix Mortar: Acceptable only if manufacturer certifies product is made of cement and lime, with no limestone or pulverized material used in lieu of hydrated lime.

C. Grout: Conform to ASTM C476; minimum compressive strength 2,000 psi.

D. Mortar and Grout Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.

2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

3. Aggregates: Standard masonry mortar and grout type; clean, dry and protected against dampness, freezing and foreign matter.

a. Mortar Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C144. b. Grout Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C404.

4. Water: Clean, drinkable, free of injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or other harmful materials.

E. Reinforcement and Anchorages: Provide reinforcing and anchorages as indicated on Drawings.

1. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Plain Bars: ASTM A675, Grade 80 for No. 2 bars, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A82, free from mill scale and excess or loose rust deposits.

F. Color Admixture: Pure mineral oxide colors conforming to ASTM C979 as required for approved color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Supply metal anchors required for concrete masonry to appropriate trades for placement; provide in sufficient quantity and direct placement.

1. Ensure items built in by other trades are properly located and sized.

B. Establish lines, levels and coursing, protect from disturbance.

C. Clean surfaces to receive masonry free from dirt, debris, and laitance.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not wet concrete masonry units; lay units in mortar with full bed and head joints, properly jointed with other work.

1. Fully bond corners and intersections.

2. Align cells of units to maintain clear, unobstructed space for reinforcing and grout, keep cells free of mortar and debris.

B. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set, where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

C. Buttering corners of joints and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not acceptable.

D. Perform job site cutting with proper power tools to provide straight, true, unchipped edges.

E. Provide structural anchorage or retention in accordance with applicable code requirements.

F. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height, make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness.

1. Lay concrete unit masonry in running bond.

2. Course one block unit and one mortar joint to equal 8".

G. Remove excess mortar and projections, take care to prevent breaking block corners.

H. Tolerances:

1. Maximum allowable variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit is 1/32" where masonry units are exposed in finished construction and where waterproofing is applied over masonry units.

2. Maximum allowable variation from plane of wall is 1/4" in 10 feet, and maximum 1/2" in 20 feet or more.

3. Maximum allowable variation from plumb is 1/4" per story, non-cumulative, and maximum 1/2" in two or more stories.

4. Maximum allowable variation of level coursing is 1/8" in 3 feet, 1/4" in 10 feet and 1/2" in 30 feet.

I. Mortar Joints: Compress joints with a round or curved metal tool.

1. Compress mortar joints with jointing tool with minimum diameter three times width of mortar joint, to provide a flush surface where resilient base or waterproofing is to be applied over masonry.



J. Reinforcement and Anchorage: Fully reinforce corners and intersections. Lap splices minimum 6". Extend splices minimum 16" each side of openings.

1. Support and secure reinforcing bars to maintain within 1/2" of dimensioned position.

2. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not to exceed 192 bar diameters.

K. Lintels: Provide reinforced concrete masonry unit lintels over openings where steel lintels are not scheduled.

1. Use full length reinforcing bars.

L. Grouting: Place grout when concrete masonry units are surface dry; consolidate and reconsolidate by mechanical vibration.

1. Fine Grout: Use for spaces less than 2" in width using low lift grouting techniques.

2. Coarse Grout: Use for spaces 2" or more in width.

3. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout approximately 2" below top of upper masonry unit to form positive key for subsequent grout placement.

4. Low-Lift Grouting: Place first lift of grout at 16" and place subsequent lifts at 8" increments.

5. Hi-Lift Grouting: Use only where specifically approved by Architect and only where grout spaces are 3" or greater in width.

a. Provide minimum 4" high cleanouts at bottom of each cell to be grouted, clean out cells and inspect prior to grouting.

b. Pump grout into cells with maximum 48" lifts.

M. Built-In Work: As work progresses, build in frames, lintels, nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items supplied by other trades.

1. Build in items plumb and true.

2. Do not build in organic materials which will be subject to rot or deterioration.

3. Bed anchors of frames in mortar joints; fill frame voids solid with mortar; fill masonry cores with grout minimum 12" from framed openings.

N. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds; coordinate with work of other Specification sections to ensure correct size, shape and location.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work.

B. Point or replace defective mortar, match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials, consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.



D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities; protect without damaging completed work.

END OF SECTION


05110 - 1 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel

SECTION 05110

STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: All labor, materials, equipment and operations required to complete structural and miscellaneous metals in shapes and configurations indicated; including:

1. Structural steel columns, beams, bracing, base plates, bolts, joist hangers, and stud bolts welded to structural steel.

2. Miscellaneous structural steel and connections; fabricated connectors and hangers installed by related sections.

3. Anchor bolts and steel inserts embedded in concrete or masonry, installed by related sections.

4. Fabricated steel items embedded in concrete or masonry installed by related sections.

5. Supervision of anchor bolt setting, leveling and elevations to insure required fit of steel work.

6. Shop priming and field touch-up, galvanizing.

7. Bracing, Shoring, Fabrication and Erection.


1. Pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying Quality Control and Testing Agency services.

2. Pertinent Sections of other Divisions specifying concrete reinforcement, formwork, concrete, and rough carpentry.

3. Pertinent Sections of other Divisions specifying structural and miscellaneous metal fabrications, steel joists, metal decking, cold-formed metal framing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AISC 360- Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.

B. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; AISC, Inc.

C. ANSI/AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.

D. California Building Code, CBC, California Code of Regulations, Chapter 22, latest edition.



E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying submittal procedures. The General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will be returned for correction without review.


C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, location and installation instructions for proprietary materials and reinforcement accessories. Provide samples of these items upon request.

D. Shop drawings: Submit each building as a complete unit. Do not mix components from multiple buildings or units of work in a submittal. Include all of the following;

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners.

2. Indicate fabrication tolerances for all steel.

3. Connections: All, including type and location of shop and field connections

4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths, type, size, and sequence.

5. Cross-reference all shop drawing detail references to contract document detail references.

6. Secure all field measurements as necessary to complete this work.

7. Provide holes, welded studs, etc. as necessary to secure work of other sections.

8. Provide the following as separate submittals for each building or unit of work:

a. Bolt and Anchor setting plans.

b. Layout, Fabrication and Erection Drawings.

E. Certifications:

1. Steel Materials: Submit the following for identified materials.

a. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

b. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test analysis.



c. Contractor's affidavit certifying that all identified steel materials provided are of the grades specified and match the certificates supplied.

2. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

F. Samples: Provide samples to the Testing Agency as specified in Article SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL, at no additional costs.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies, refer to pertinent sections of Division 01 and CBC Chapter 19.

B. All tests shall be performed by a recognized testing agency as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

C. Certification and Identification of Materials and Uses: Provide Testing Agency with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of steel. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection and all material identification/test information listed below.

1. Test all steel as required by ASTM A6.

2. Provide manufacturer's Mill Test Reports for all materials. Include chemical and physical properties of the material for each heat number manufactured. Tag all fabricated materials with heat number.

3. Provide letter certifying all materials supplied are from heat numbers covered by supplied mill certificates. Include in letter the physical location of each material type and/or heat number in the project (i.e. walls, braced frames etc.).

4. Unidentified Material Tests: Where identification of materials by heat number to mill tests cannot be made, Owner's Testing Agency shall test unidentified materials as described below.

5. Provide all certification, verifications, and other test data required to substantiate specified material properties at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Testing and Inspection: Tests and Inspections performed by Independent Testing Agency are specified below in Articles SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL and FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. Duties and limitations of Independent Testing Agency, test costs and test reports in conformance with pertinent sections of Division 01.

E. The following standards are the minimum level of quality required. Provide higher quality work as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents.

1. Workmanship and details of structural steel work, shall conform to the California Building Code, and the AISC Specification for Structural Steel Building.

2. The quality of materials and the fabrication of all welded connections shall conform to the American Welding Society, AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.



3. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed structural steel.

F. The Testing Agency will review all submittals and testing of materials.

G. All re-inspections made necessary by non-conforming work shall be at the Contractor's expense.


A. Deliver materials to project site in bundles marked with durable tags indicating heat number, mill, member size and length, proposed location in the structure and other information corresponding with markings shown on placement diagrams.

B. Handle and store materials above ground to prevent damage, contamination or accumulation of dirt or rust.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel W Shapes: ASTM A 572 Grade 50 or ASTM A 992 Grade 50.

B. Structural Steel Plates and Channels ASTM A 572 Grade 50.

C. HSS (Hollow Structural Sections – formerly SSP & TS):

1. Round: ASTM A-53, Grade B;

2. Rectangular or Square: ASTM A-500, Grade B.

D. Machine Bolts and Washers: Bearing and Shear connections (denoted as “MB”); ASTM A-307. Provide hot-dipped galvanized finish at all connection where steel is required to be galvanized.

E. Anchor Bolts/Rods: ASTM A307 or ASTM A36. No upset thread allowed.

F. Arc-Welding Electrodes: AWS Standards E70 or equivalent, except no E70T-4 allowed.

G. Other Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. Provide



"Masterflow 928" manufactured by Master Builders.

B. Building Structural Steel Primers: Comply with local VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction and compatible with finish coats specified in other sections. Follow manufacturers printed instructions. Apply one coat unless otherwise directed.

1. Type A: Modified Alkyd type, Tnemec Series V10 Primer (2.0 to 3.5 mils DFT).

2. Type B: Organic Zinc-rich Urethane, Tenemec 90-97 Tnemec-Zinc Primer (2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT).

3. Type C: MIO-Zinc Filled Primer, Tnemec 394 PerimePrime (2.5 to 2.5 mils DFT).

C. Galvanizing: ASTM A153, and A123.

D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Type B primer.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.

B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.

C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.

D. Protect all materials, before and after fabrication, from rust, corrosion, dirt, grease and other foreign matter.

E. Fabricate framing members free from twists or bends. Form holes, cut and sheared edges neatly without kinks, burrs, or warped edges.

F. Exposed Steel: Straight, smooth, free of nicks, scars or dents.

G. Gas Cutting: Gas cutting of holes in a member shall not be permitted.

H. Splicing of members: Members requiring splicing due to length requirements may be spliced using full penetration butt welds when such welds and procedures are inspected and certified by the Testing Agency, in conformance with AWS and AISC standards. The location of splices shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer in writing prior to fabrication.

I. Welding: Welding of structural steel connections shall be performed by qualified welders in accordance with AWS Standards. All weld sizes shall match those shown on the drawings.

1. Preparation: Clean all surfaces free of rust, paint and all foreign matter. Remove paint or scale by brushing, chipping or hammering as required. Chip clean and wire brush burned or flame cut edges before welding. Space and alternate welds, clamping as necessary to prevent warp or misalignment.

2. Sequence Welding: When welds enclose, or partially enclose, the perimeter or portion of the surface of a member, make weld bead in sequence, or staggered. Minimize internal stresses. Weld groups of members occurring in a single line in



staggered sequence to minimize distortion of the structural frame.

3. Faulty and Defective Welding: Welds failing to meet AWS standards and the Contract Documents shall be rejected and remade at Contractor expense. All welds showing cracks, slag inclusion, lack of fusion, bad undercut or other defects, ascertained by visual or other means of inspection shall be removed and replaced with conforming work.

4. Minimum Weld Strengths: All welds shall match the minimum weld sizes recommended by AISC. Details of fabrication not specifically shown shall match similar details which are specifically shown. All bevel and groove welds shall be full penetration unless size is noted otherwise.

J. Camber: Fabricate all beams cambered as indicated on the drawings.

1. Fabricate beams without camber for installation with any "natural" crown up.

2. Exception: Fabricate cantilever beams with "crown" down.

K. Grinding: Grind smooth the following structural steel and connections;

1. Exposed cut ends of structural and fabricated shapes.

2. All welds exposed to view.

3. Mitered and fit-up corners and intersections.

L. Back-Up Bars: Required for all complete penetration welds.

M. Bolt Holes: Edge, end distances and spacing shall conform to dimensions shown on the drawings, and as follows;

1. Round: Size indicated and 1/16 inch maximum oversize

2. Slotted: At locations specifically noted on the drawings, provide size indicated and 1/16 inch by 1/4 inch oversize slotted in direction perpendicular to applied loads.

3. Holes in base plates for anchor bolts may be 1/8" oversize.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Prepare and finish structural component surfaces as follows:

1. Structural and miscellaneous Steel for interior dry exposure (finish painted or unpainted):

a. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP2 hand tool or SP3 Power Tool Cleaning. Where jobsite exposure is expected to exceed 6 months, SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning is required.

b. Apply Primer Type A.

2. Structural and miscellaneous exterior steel or interior steel subjected to wet



conditions or fumes (finish painted):

a. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. For severe (immersion) exposure, SSPS-SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning is required.

b. Apply Primer Type B.

3. Structural steel to be fire proofed, all interior perimeter steel, steel that will be inaccessible after erection, steel to receive high performance finish coatings and slip critical bolted connection surfaces (finish painted or unpainted):

a. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning.

b. Apply Primer Type C.

B. Do not prime the following surfaces unless otherwise indicated:

1. Connections to be field welded.

2. Steel in contact with concrete.

3. Surfaces to receive welded metal decking.

C. Galvanize structural steel members exposed to weather and not finish painted, or as otherwise indicated to receive galvanizing, to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide minimum 1.3 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. Passivation agents are not permitted on galvanized metal that is to be painted. Galvanize all bolts and washers.

D. Field prime with Type B after connections are complete.

E. Do not finish work until inspection is complete and work approved by Testing Agency.


A. An independent Testing Agency will perform source quality control tests and submit reports, as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

B. Steel Materials Testing:

1. Unidentified steel- General: Test all structural shapes. In addition, test to verify Fy and Fu values when engineering requirements exceed Fy = 25 ksi for design.

2. No testing is required for Materials identified in accordance with CBC 2203 (heat number, grade stencil, etc.).

C. Shop Welding Inspection:

1. Testing Agency shall inspect and certify all structural welds, unless the fabricating shop has been accredited in conformance with CBC requirements. Submit certification to the Architect/Engineer for review and the Building Official for approval.

2. Welder Qualifications: Welding inspector shall verify that all the welders are properly qualified prior to steel fabrication and state the qualifications of each



welder in the welding inspection report.

3. Welding Inspection: Continuous inspection required unless otherwise noted below. Comply with requirements of AWS D1.1

a. Welding Inspector shall check all welds, materials, equipment and procedures.

b. Welding Inspector shall provide reports certifying the welding is as required and has been done in conformity with the plans, specifications and codes.

c. Welding Inspector shall use radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or any other necessary aid to visual inspection to assure adequacy of welds.

4. Periodic Inspection Acceptable:

a. Single pass fillet welds not exceeding 5/16

b. Welding of studs to beams.

D. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Provide samples to Testing Agency for required testing, at no additional cost.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".

B. Framing:

1. Erect all structural steel true and plumb.

2. Verify proper final alignment prior to making final connections.

C. Field Connections:

1. Workmanship of field bolted and welded connections shall conform in all respects to methods and tolerances specified for fabrication.

2. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. Sequence field welds to minimize built-up stress and distortion of the structural frame. Verify sequence with Engineer. Coordinate field welding schedule with Testing Laboratory.

3. Welded Studs: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and structural welding code AWS D1.1.

D. Templates: Provide bolt setting templates for all anchor bolts. Provide instructions



for the setting of anchors and bearing plates, verify these items are set correctly as work progresses.

E. Column base plates: Set level to correct elevations, support temporarily on steel wedges, shims, or leveling nuts where shown, until the supported members are plumbed and grouted.

1. Grout solid the full bearing area under base plates prior to installation of floor and/or roof decks. See Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.

F. Bolting - General:

1. Inspect mating surfaces to insure that bolt head and nut will have full bearing and that metal plies will mate flush between bolts.

2. Install bolts in matching holes; Do not distort metal or enlarge holes by drifting during assembly. Remake mismatched components to achieve tolerances indicated.

3. Holes mismatched in excess of 1/8 inch will be rejected.

4. Ream holes mismatched in excess of 3/32 inch to the next larger size bolt.

5. Do not enlarge holes by flame cutting or air/arc (“plasma“) cutting.

6. Provide flat washer(s) at over-size holes.

7. Provide ASTM F-436 beveled washers when the slope of the surfaces of parts in contact with the bolt head or nut is greater than 1:20.

8. Do not install bolts with damaged threads.

9. Threads shall commence outside of the shear plane.

G. Bolting - Specific:

1. Machine Bolts (MB): Install and tighten to a snug condition (ST) such that laminated surfaces bear fully on one another, using an impact wrench or “full effort“ of an installer using a standard spud wrench.

H. Supports, Shoring and Bracing: Allow for erection loads and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. Conform to requirements of all applicable laws and governing safety regulations. Resist imposed loads, including those of stored materials and equipment.

1. Provide all temporary supports, shoring and bracing necessary to achieve work of tolerances indicated.

2. Provide all necessary temporary flooring, planking and scaffolding required for erection of steel, and support of erection machinery.



3. Construction Loading: Do not overload the structure or temporary supports with stored materials, equipment or other loads.

4. Maintain temporary bracing and shoring until work is complete, and longer as required to ensure stability and safety of structure.

I. Do not make final connections until structure is aligned to meet specified tolerances.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.


A. The independent Testing Agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

B. Field Welding Inspection: Conform to all requirements of section SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Touch-up damaged finishes with compatible specified primer.

B. Replace all defective work at Contractor's expense.

C. Replace defective or damaged work with conforming work.

D. Straighten materials by means that will not injure the materials.

E. Replace defective or damaged work which cannot be corrected in the field with new work, or return defective items to the shop for repair.

F. Architect/Engineer shall review all proposals for the repair or replacement of damaged, defective, or missing work.

G. Pay expenses incurred by Owner for Architect/Engineer's costs for (re-)design and obtaining approvals of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work, as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

H. Pay expenses due to re-testing and re-inspection necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work, as specified in pertinent sections of Division 01.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean all surfaces upon completion of erection, leave free of grime and dirt. Remove unused materials, tools, equipment and debris from the premises and leave surfaces broomed clean.

B. Protect work from damage by subsequent operations.



END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 05500 - 1 Metal Fabrications

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide stock and custom fabricated metal items scheduled at end of this Section, complete in respect to function as intended.

1. Metal fabrications includes items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or metal systems specified elsewhere.


1. Section 02823: Metal fencing and gates. 2. Section 02824: Manual gates. 3. Section 05110: Structural and miscellaneous steel. 4. Section 12620: Furniture including stainless steel shop work bench.

1.2 REFERENCES


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for products used in metal fabrications, including paint, grout and manufactured items.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and erection of metal fabrications. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection, reinforcing and anchorage.

1. Provide templates for anchorage installation by others. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36.

B. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot rolled, ASTM A1011; or cold rolled, ASTM A1008, Class 1; of grade required for design loading.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S seamless, grade as selected by fabricator and as required for design loading; minimum standard weight, STD or Schedule 40.

D. Steel Tubing: Cold formed ASTM A500; or hot rolled, ASTM A501; minimum Grade B; seamless where exposed.

E. Castings: Gray iron, ASTM A48, Class 30; malleable iron, ASTM A47.



F. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron ASTM A47, or cast steel ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153.

G. Grout: Non-shrink meeting ASTM C1107, non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Master Builders/Masterflow 713. b. Five Star Products, Inc./Five Star Grout. c. Bostik Construction Products/Upcon Grout. d. Protex Industries, Inc./Propak. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

H. Fasteners and Rough Hardware: Type required for specific usage; provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.

I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.

J. Paint: Provide primers as recommended by paint manufacturers for substrates and paints specified in Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings for interior metal and Section 09960 – High Performance Coating for exterior metal.


2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.

B. Grind exposed welds continuous, smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces, and ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.

C. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure.

D. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery.

E. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened.


F. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications; fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication.

G. Steel Bollards: Minimum Schedule 80 seamless steel piping, filled with minimum 2000 psi concrete.



H. Pre-Engineered Support Systems: Provide manufactured pre-engineered support system consisting of minimum 12 gage ”C” channel supports with anchors, attachments, and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Unistrut Inc./Unistrut. b. Grinnell Corp./PowerStrut. c. Thomas & Betts, Inc./Superstrut. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard prime paint finish for channel supports; galvanized or similar plated anchors and fasteners; hot dip galvanized where at exterior and exterior exposed applications.

I. Finishes: Galvanize and prime paint exterior work and prime paint interior work unless otherwise noted in Schedule.

1. Comply with requirements of Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings for preparation and priming of interior metal and Section 09960 – High Performance Coating for exterior metal.

2. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to applying finish.

3. Do not shop prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding; shop prime in one coat.

4. Galvanized Coating: Provide coating comparable to ASTM A924 and A653, minimum G90 hot dip galvanized coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible; do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where necessary.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Obtain Architect's review prior to site cutting or making adjustments which are not part of scheduled work.

1. Perform necessary cutting and altering for installation and coordination with other work.

B. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.





C. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing; keep work in alignment.

D. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding; hide bolts and screws whenever possible, where not hidden, use flush countersunk fastenings.

1. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. After installation, touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged surfaces; use primer consistent with shop coat or recommended for galvanized surfaces, as applicable.

F. Replace items damaged in course of installation and construction.

3.3 SCHEDULE

A. Supply and install metal fabrications listed in Schedule, complete with anchorage and attachments necessary for installation.

1. Schedule lists principal items only, refer to Drawings for items not listed.

B. Schedule:

1. Miscellaneous angles, plates and attachments to be set in concrete or masonry for anchorage of other items.

2. Iron and steel shapes, sleeves, anchors, connectors and fastenings required to complete construction work, and which are not provided in other Specification sections.

a. Rough hardware, including bolts, fabricated plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and miscellaneous metals.

b. Ledge and shelf angles, channels and plates not attached to structural steel, and for support of metal decking.

c. Angle and channel frames for doors and wall openings.

d. Beams of structural shapes, not supported by structural steel.

e. Steel angle corner guards.

3. Steel bollards.

4. Pre-engineered support systems.

END OF SECTION


06100 - 1 Rough Carpentry

SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: All labor, materials and equipment and all operations required to complete all rough carpentry and structural framing as indicated on the drawings; to produce shapes and configurations as shown, as required; and as specified herein, including:

1. Structural floor, wall, and roof framing.

2. Floor, wall, and roof sheathing.

3. Rough hardware, framing connectors and fasteners.

4. Treatment of wood.

5. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, wood trim, and other work requiring supporting blocking.

6. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips, including roof applications, other wood framing, furring, shims or blocking as required to complete the work.



2. Pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying Structural Product Requirements: Structural Product Options, Substitution procedures and limitations, transportation, handling and storage.

3. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Wood formwork construction.

4. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Setting anchors in concrete.

5. Pertinent sections of other divisions specifying steel or concrete construction.

6. Pertinent section of Division 06 specifying wood construction and materials.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/AF & PA National Design Specification for Wood Construction.

B. California Building Code, CBC, Part 2, latest edition.

C. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce).



D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce).

E. RIS (GR) - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber; Redwood Inspection Service.

F. WCLIB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17, September 1991, rev. January 2004; West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.

G. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules, October 2004; Western Wood Products Association.

H. AWPA- American Wood- Preservers Association.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying submittal procedures. Submit for review prior to fabrication. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will be returned for correction without review.

1. Substitutions for products specified require conformance to substitution requirements in Division 1.

2. Review of materials and hardware for substitution to products specified is at the additional expense of the Contractor.

B. Limitation of Review: Structural Engineer's review will be for general conformance with design intent as indicated in the Contract Documents and does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for conformance with the Contract Documents. The General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer.

C. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications, location and installation instructions for framing connectors, wood preservative materials, application instructions, and fasteners. Include complete, accurate equivalence data when submitting alternate products to those specified. Provide samples of these items upon request.

2. Submit product data and current ICC-ES report for machine-driven nails, fasteners and equipment, including dimensions of all fasteners, including nails, head, shank diameter and nail length.

3. Submit samples of each and every type and size of proposed machine placed nails and fasteners.

D. Shop drawings: For manufactured wood products, submit each building as a complete unit. Do not mix components from multiple buildings or units or work in a submittal. Include all of the following;

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, and spacing locations of structural members.





E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit all certifications of physical and chemical properties of materials as specified below in Article titled QUALITY ASSURANCE.

1. Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements, including specified moisture content.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies, refer to pertinent sections of Division 01 and CBC Chapter 19.


C. Inspection of fabricators is required per CBC 1704.2 unless fabricator is registered and approved by the building official. Wood product quality standards:

1. All wood products to comply with article REFERENCES.

2. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish.

D. End-Jointed lumber shall not be used.

E. Hardware and engineered wood products shall have current ICC ES Evaluation/research reports that are equivalent to products specified.

F. Employ competent workmen experienced in work of the types specified and required.


A. Comply with pertinent requirements of Division 01.

B. Delivery: Time delivery and installation of carpentry products to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by this section and to comply with moisture content, protection and storage requirements.

C. Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood to prevent deformation and provide air circulation within stacks.

1. Store materials for which a maximum moisture content is specified only in areas where relative humidity has been reduced to a level where specified moisture content can be maintained.



2. Handle and store materials above ground to prevent damage, contamination or accumulation of dirt or foreign materials.

3. Provide special protection for horizontal plywood and OSB. Deformation of panels due to moisture is not acceptable.

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Verify all condition at project site affecting the work; work to field dimensions as required. Coordinate carpentry installation with size, location and installation of service utilities.

B. Sequence rough carpentry installation activities to allow sufficient time for:

1. Review of all submittals, including Nailing Sample Submittals.

2. Indicate submittal review, procurement, mock-up and testing activities in the project schedule prior to the start of installation. Installation durations shall be based on hand-nailed installation methods specified.

3. Attainment of specified maximum lumber moisture content. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIMENSIONED LUMBER

A. Size per industry standards for nominal sizes shown; S4S.

B. Moisture content of framing: Lumber should be at a maximum 19% when fasteners installed and must be at 15% maximum at time of close in. The Owner’s Testing Laboratory may test for moisture content prior to commencement of close-in. The Contractor shall recognize that excessive shrinkage of lumber results from excess moisture content at the time of installation and will compensate for use of such lumber by waiting for acceptable moisture content before close in and/or by replacing/repairing lumber that has sagged, twisted, or warped prior to close in.

C. Sills on concrete or masonry: Redwood foundation grade, or No. 2 pressure treated Douglas Fir and as called for on the drawings.

D. Interior structural framing shall be Douglas Fir with grades as noted below, unless otherwise specified on the drawings. All grades are per WCLIB standard grading rules.

1. All permanently exposed (interior or protected from weather) framing shall be select structural grade with no box heart.

2. Except per 1 above, U.N.O., minimum grades are: Floor and roof joists and rafters (2x) and 2x8 studs D.F. No. 1 2x4 and 2x6 studs and plates D.F, No. 2 4x and larger D.F. No. 1, blocking D.F. No. 2.



6x8 and larger posts and beams shall be per 3 below when so noted on the drawings.

E. Exterior structural framing (exposed to weather) shall be redwood select structural grade or pressure treated D.F. No. 1, U.N.O.

F. Structural decking shall be D.F. select decking or White Pine select where not exposed to moisture and Alaskan Cedar where directly exposed to moisture or high humidity for prolonged periods of time. Moisture content at time of installation to be less than 12%.

G. Framing not otherwise shown or specified: Douglas Fir, construction grade per WCLIB paragraphs applicable to uses and sizes required.

H. Splits and checks are to be limited to 1x the depth of the member.

I. Warped/twisted and excessively checked members shall not be used regardless of grade marks.

2.2 MANUFACTURED LUMBER

A. Structural Glued Lumber (SGL) or Certified Glued Lumber (CGL): When so noted on the drawings, beams and posts 6x8 and larger (not specified as glu-laminated post or beams) are to be SGL/CGL conforming to WCLIB grading rules and ICC AC 47 for D.F. #1 Grade. All SGL/CGL lumber shall be graded and stamped accordingly. Glu-laminated Timber of equal size and grade meeting the requirements of section 06180 may be substituted for SGL/CGL Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Rosboro Manufactured Timber; RMT Timber.

B. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL); when so noted on the drawings, for use as joist, beams, blocking or studs. Conform to ICC AC 47. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. iLevel; Micro=Lam LVL.

2. Pacific Woodtech LVL.

C. Laminated Strand Lumber (LSL); for use as blocking (flat or vertical) or rim joist when used with IJ or LVL. Conform to ICC AC 124. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. iLevel; Timberstrand LSL.

D. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL); for use as beams and posts when so noted on the drawings. Conform to ICC AC 47.

1. iLevel; Parallam PSL.

2.3 MANUFACTURED STRUCTURAL PANELS



A. Plywood: All structural plywood shall be grade marked for conformance with DOC PS 1 and shall be fabricated with exterior glue. Grades shall be as required on the drawings.

B. Oriented Strand Board (OSB): APA grade stamped and manufactured with exterior glue, may be substituted for structural plywood when grade stamps and thickness are equivalent in strength, stiffness and quality to the plywood specified.

2.4 TREATED WOOD:

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA V1- use category systems for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions and specific applications.

B. Preservative Treated Lumber

1. General

a. Lumber in contact with concrete or masonry, and at other locations required by Code shall be pressure treated in accordance with CBC 2303, using waterborne preservatives. Lumber shall be Douglas Fir No. 2 (or better). Cut faces of treated wood shall be brush treated (two complete applications) prior to installation.

b. Kiln dry to 15% moisture content after treatment, and stamp "DRY".

c. Each piece of wood shall be stamped by the wood preservative applicator to indicate and identify its treatment. Markings shall include minimum retention of preservative treatment as required in applicable UBC Standards for lumber and plywood.

2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. Penetration of preservative shall conform to AWPA guidelines.

a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

b. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.

c. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.

d. Treat wood less than 12 inches above grade or 6 inches above adjacent concrete paving or mowstrip.

3. Treated Lumber, Poles, Posts and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications.

4. Preservative Types: Either of the following;

a. Copper Azole (CA-B) per ICC-ES AC143.



b. Alkaline/Copper/Quaternary (ACQ).

C. Fire Retardant Treatment: Product and application process must be recommended by manufacturer of treatment as being suitable for painting. Application shall be by a California State Fire Marshal approved licensed contractor.

1. Exterior Type: AWPA Use Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D 2898.

a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood.

b. Treat exposed exterior rough carpentry items, including stairways, balconies, and covered walkways

c. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground.

2. Interior Type A: AWPA Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes.

a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood.

b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated.

c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet.

2.5 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General requirements for fasteners:

1. Fasteners shall be of adequate size, spacing and number to resist design loads under intended use, and types shall be appropriate for the materials or conditions for which used.

2. Provide washers, pre-drilling, etc. required for proper installation.

3. Fasteners shall be hot-dip galvanized (ASTM 153), stainless steel, or silicon bronze or copper by approved methods for the following applications:

a. Exterior, exposed use.

b. In contact with preservative or fire-retarded treated wood.



4. Fasteners in moist corrosive atmosphere to be of stainless steel.

5. All fasteners specified by manufacturer shall be installed in framing hardware.

B. Nails and nailing not otherwise shown or specified:

1. Comply with requirements of governing building code.

2. For securing materials to hardened concrete or masonry: hardened steel masonry nails or Titen screws.

3. For framing and general woodwork: Common bright wire nails (not box nails) per ASTM F 1667. 16d cement coated sinker nails may be used in lieu of common nails for framing, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

4. Nails for plywood shall be of common wire with full round heads and shall be of sufficient length to fully develop the nails.

5. Pneumatically driven nails of all types must comply with the requirements of this section. All proposed nails shall match diameter and penetration of specified nails.

6. Staples shall conform to length and gauges specified and shall be installed to match specified patterns and spacing.

7. Powder-actuated Fastenings: Use only as approved by the Architect/Engineer; operators shall be qualified.

C. Bolts: ASTM A-307 and ANSI B18.2.1, standard semi-finished machine bolts as shown or required. Malleable iron washers or steel plate washers, unless otherwise shown, shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts.

1. Bolts in Concrete: Wedge or expansion anchors set after casting shall be Hilti KB TZ 3, or Simpson Strong Bolt or Titan Screws.

2. Anchor bolts are to be formed from ASTM A36 Steel, or to be ASTM A307 Machine Bolts with standard head or plate washer in concrete. No upset threads allowed. No L or J bolts allowed. Other grades of steel materials as noted on the drawings. All bolts and washers in treated lumber to be galvanized.

3. For contact with preservative or fire-retardant or exterior exposed use provide zinc coating in accordance with ASTM B695, Class 55 minimum.

D. Lag screws: Standard hex lag screws per ANSI B 18.2.1.

E. Wood screws: Standard wood screws per ANSI B 18.6.1.

F. Framing hardware: Fabricated sheet metal timber framing connectors shall be manufactured from painted or galvanized G90 steel by "Simpson Company", Dublin, CA; (Simpson Co. per catalogue C-2008 are identified on the drawings), “USP Lumber Connectors“, Livermore, CA, or approved equivalent. Connectors shall be at least 16 gauge material, (1/8" plate materials where welded), unless otherwise noted, punched for nailing. All heavy hardware to be fabricated from A-36 steel per Division



5, Metals. All hardware intended for exterior exposed use shall be galvanized per G185 ASTM 653.

1. For contact with preservative or fire-retardant treated wood, provide minimum G185 galvanizing per ASTM A 653/A 653M.

2. Nails and nailing shall conform to the manufacturer’s instructions with a nail provided for each punched hole. Nails to be used with framing accessories, subject to the requirements specified in this section for fasteners and anchors.

G. Subfloor Glue: Water proof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed AFG-01.


A. The Testing Agency, as specified in the Article QUALITY ASSURANCE, will perform the following tests:

1. Moisture content of all lumber at time of delivery.

B. The Testing Agency will submit reports as specified in Division 01. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. General

1. Refer to drawings for layouts, notes and details, provide framing as required; comply with governing building code requirements.

2. Provide framing to achieve true alignments as surfaces receiving finish materials.

3. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and install all wood blocking, furring strips, or grounds detailed or required to provide anchorage for all finishes, accessories, fixtures, etc. as required to complete all work. All blocking and/or backing shall be securely bolted or otherwise anchored in place.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for layout of anchor bolts, and other hardware embedded in concrete when placed by other trades.

5. Provide and install all structural framing, blocking, fasteners, brackets, clips, etc. as required to complete work specified in the Construction Documents.

B. Framing

1. Sill Plates and Ledgers:

a. Sill plates and ledgers on concrete shall be anchored with bolts, shall have full bearing on concrete, and shall be placed for plywood nailing as indicated. All bolt nuts shall be provided with a cut plate steel washer for bearing on wood.



b. Provide a minimum of two sill anchor bolts per sill piece with a bolt no less than 4 1/2 "and no more than 9" from the end of the sill. Bolts to be 5/8" diameter x 10" long at 4' on centers, with unless otherwise shown or noted. Provide additional anchorage bolts where sill plates are cut, notched, or drilled in excess of 50% of the sill width each side of the notch or hole as per end of the sill at shear walls, provide a plate washer 3” x 3” x 0.229” between the sill and nut at anchor bolts..

c. Anchor bolt holes in sill plates or ledgers shall be 1/16" maximum larger than anchor bolt.

2. Stud Walls and Framing:

a. Cut studs and posts with square ends, unless otherwise shown or noted. All posts and beams shall be "cut to bear" unless otherwise detailed.

b. All studs in walls shall be placed with the shortest dimension parallel to the run of the wall. Bearing studs shall extend full height to be the supporting framing as shown; non-bearing studs shall extend to the supporting framing.

c. Provide double studs on each side of all openings, unless shown or noted otherwise.

d. All openings in stud walls and partitions shall be framed with headers across the top, as shown, with a minimum size (6" deep x stud width) resting on short cripple studs, and as shown on the drawings.

e. All stud partitions and walls shall have horizontal solid blocking not less than 2 x and of the same width as the stud, fitted and nailed into the studs at mid-height of stud, for studs over 8 feet in height, except as otherwise shown or specified. This blocking shall be so spaced that there shall be no concealed air spaces greater than eight feet in any dimension.

f. Stud partitions containing plumbing, heating or other pipes shall be so framed as to give proper clearance for piping. Plumbing, heating and vent pipes exceeding 1-1/2" in inside diameter shall not be placed in partitions used as bearing or shear walls unless completely furred clear of the wall. No notching shall be allowed. Pipes shall be placed in the center of the plate using a neat bored hole and the plates shall be strapped on each side with 3" x 36" x 14 gauge steel punched for 10d nails 3" on center, staggered, or as shown on the drawings.

3. Top Plates

a. Top plates shall be double, set single. Corners where stud wall or partitions meet shall be framed with studs on all surfaces and blocking to form a "rigid" corner with nailing for all corners. Double top plates shall be lapped at corners. Lap splices and nailing per the drawings.

4. Floor, Roof and Ceiling Framing



a. Joists and beams shall be accurately aligned and the position and spacing of all joists and beams shall be as shown and be coordinated with other framing and to other trades prior to actual construction.

b. Place all joists and beams with crown up. Cantilevered joists and beams shall be placed with the crown down.

c. Cutting of wood girders, beams or joists for electrical and mechanical lines shall be limited to cuts and bored holes not deeper than 1/5 of the beam depth from the top and located not farther from the support than three times the beam depth and not less than the beam depth. Cuts in excess of this, or single bored holes with a diameter of more than 1" are not permitted without special provisions for framing the beams. Location of all cuts in framing shall receive the prior review of the Architect/Engineer.

d. Provide vent holes in rafters and/or blocking as shown and/or directed by the Architect.

3.2 PLYWOOD STRUCTURAL SHEATHING

A. General

1. Plywood nailing shall be as required on the drawings. Do not overdrive (Do not break skin of plywood face sheet). Over driving will be cause for rejection.

2. Form plywood may be re-used for concealed sheathing provided the lumber at the time of re-use is approved by the Architect, meets with the framing grade requirements specified herein, is in good condition, and is thoroughly cleaned with all nails removed.

3. Pneumatic nailing devices shall be adjustable so that nail heads do not penetrate skin of plywood. Contractor shall submit equipment and nails for review prior to use.

B. Roof and Floor Sheathing: Except "Panelized Roofs", lay with face grain perpendicular to roof rafters, roof trusses or floor joists. Stagger plywood sheets. Block all unsupported sheet edges with 2x material unless noted otherwise.

C. Wall Sheathing: Lay with face grain either parallel or perpendicular to studs. Exposed bottom edges shall be sealed as recommended by manufacturer. Block all unsupported sheet edges with 2x materials unless noted otherwise.

D. Panelized Roofs: Where plywood is set @ 8'-0 1/8" spacing, cut every fourth sheet short by 1/2" to re-align structural framing that has been specified to be spaced at even units of 2, 4 or 8 feet.

3.3 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. General: Nails, spikes, screws, fabricated sheet metal anchors, ties, hangers and any other materials shown or required for the attachment of wood to concrete and wood to steel and wood to wood shall be furnished and installed as part of this work.



B. Framing Nailing: All framing nailing shall conform to minimum requirements of the Building Code, and with details shown on the drawing.

C. Bolts, Lag Screws and Washers:

1. Bolts in wood shall be machine bolts unless otherwise noted and shall be of such length that the bearing length of the threads does not exceed ¼ of the full bearing length in the member holding the threads. Bolt holes in wood shall be 1/32" oversized. Bolt holes for sill plates may be 1/16" maximum oversize. Holes in steel shall be 1/16" oversize. See Section 3.1 B.1.b for anchor bolts at sill plates and ledgers.

2. Provide square plate or malleable iron washer and nut at head where bearing is against wood; cut washer under nut where it is against steel. Washer will not be required under head of carriage bolts. Provide malleable iron washers where exposed.

3. All nuts shall be tightened when placed and retightened at completion of the job or immediately before closing with final construction.

4. Lag screws shall be screwed (not driven) into place. Drill holes same diameter and depth as shank, then drill pilot holes same diameter as at base of thread for the threaded portion.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD

A. Coordinate installation of wood decking, wood chord metal joists, glue laminated structural units, prefabricated wood trusses, and plywood web joists.

B. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. Fasten curbs corner-to-corner and to rafters with framing connectors configured for this application.

C. Blocking:

1. Provide fire blocking at locations and spacings as required by CBC Chapter 7. Locate other blocking, supplementary framing, backing plates and bracing to facilitate installation of finish materials, fixtures, equipment, services, accessories and trim requiring attachment and support.

2. Solid block joists and rafters over all supports with blocking of the same size and material as the joist or rafter.

D. Furring:

1. Nominal 1 inch x 3 inch minimum, continuous and spaced at 16 inches on center, maximum.

2. Install plumb, rigid, and level. Shim where necessary to provide a true, even plane suitable to receive the finish required.

3. Attach to concrete and masonry as shown in the contract drawings.



E. Bridging: Use 2 inch solid cross bridging. Nail bottom ends of bridging only after sheathing has been nailed.

F. Stair Framing: Provide with 3 stair stringers for each set of stairs, unless otherwise shown. Cut notches to receive exact size of treads and risers (if any) shown, with no change in dimensions between landings. Provide stringers of size shown, or if not shown, of a size to allow not less than 3-1/2 inch of effective depth, measured perpendicular to the rake of the stringer, after notching.

G. Install miscellaneous metal angles, bolts and other items; secure into formwork where embedded in concrete.

H. Install accessory items not otherwise set under other sections; after completion of painting and other finishing work; in locations shown or directed by the Architect. Set items plumb, level and secure using appropriate fastening as applicable.

3.5 FIELD APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Field treat all end cuts and holes in preservative treated materials per section 2.4.

B. Apply two brush coats; or fill-immersion dip not less than 15 minutes; or as required to thoroughly saturate all surfaces after cutting.

C. Air dry 2-hours minimum before installation.

3.6 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.

B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.

C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. Provide framed substrates meeting requirements for application of finishes specified in other sections.

D. Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents and tool marks, unsanded rough or torn faces and corners, and other defects.


A. The Testing Agency, as specified in the Article QUALITY ASSURANCE, will perform the following tests and submit reports as specified in Division 01:

1. Moisture content of all lumber at time of close-in.

2. Periodic special inspection of nailing, bolting, and other fastening within the seismic-force-resisting system including shear walls, wood diaphragms etc per CBC 1707.3.

3. Special inspection of high load diaphragms per CBC 1704.6.1 where designated on documents.



3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Replace all defective work at Contractor's expense.

B. Replace defective or damaged work with conforming work.

C. Correct defects using means that will not injure the materials.

D. Replace defective or damaged work which cannot be corrected in the field with new work, or return defective items to the shop for repair.

E. Repair or replace framing lumber sagged, twisted or warped due to shrinkage from excessive moisture content at time of installation, or from other causes.

F. Adjust to meet specified tolerances.

G. Architect/Engineer shall review all proposals for the repair or replacement of damaged, defective, or missing work.

H. Pay expenses incurred by Owner for Architect/Engineer's costs for (re-)design and obtaining approvals of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work.

I. Pay expenses due to re-testing and re-inspection necessitated by incomplete, inefficiently scheduled, improperly performed, defective or nonconforming work.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean all surfaces upon completion of erection, leave free of grime and dirt. Remove unused materials, tools, equipment and debris from the premises and leave surfaces broomed clean.

B. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying cleaning and disposal.

1. Comply with applicable regulations.

2. Do not burn scrap on project site.

3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.

4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.

C. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

D. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

E. Protect work from damage by subsequent operations.

END OF SECTION


061753 - 1 Fabricated Wood Trusses

SECTION 061753

FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Work Specified

1. Perform all work necessary and required for the completion of roof truss framing as indicated on drawings and specified herein. (Manufactured Carpenter's trusses only).

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The work generally consists of, but not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and installing of all wood trusses, blocking and bridging work as shown and noted.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry

2. Section 05110: Structural and Miscellaneous Steel

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The following trade and industry standards, and specifications apply to all work herein:

1. "Timber Construction Standards", latest edition by American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC).

2. "National Design Specifications", latest edition, published by the National Forest Products Association.

3. "Design Specifications for Light Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses" by Truss Plate Institute, latest edition.

B. Grading Standards: Per Section 06100 Rough Carpentry

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing all critical details and dimensions shall be submitted for review prior to fabrication. General Contractor shall review shop drawings prior to submittal.

B. Calculations: Complete calculations for all components of the wood truss assembly shall be submitted for the Architect's review. Calculations shall include a drawn profile for each truss type with components and required hangers called out and the location of each truss type clearly defined (location plan). Calculations shall be



prepared and certified by a registered Civil Engineer, State of California. Reviewed calculations shall be submitted to the building official for approval prior to erection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All lumber used for truss members shall conform to the published stress ratings for the species and grades as designed. All members shall be cut from stock which bears the proper grade-mark stamp of a recognized grading association, or licensed lumber inspection laboratory.

B. Moisture content shall not exceed 19% nor be less than 7% at time of truss fabrication, and shall conform to reference specifications.

C. Connectors shall be manufactured from prime commercial quality galvanized sheet metal of not less than 20 gauge thickness with minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi and minimum ultimate tensile strength of 48,000 psi.

2.3 DESIGN

A. The trusses shall be custom designed to fit the dimensions and loads and deflection requirements indicated on the drawings. All designs shall be in accordance with the requirements of California Building Code, latest adopted edition, Section 2303.5.2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The work and miscellaneous items for the trusses and their related components which are to be furnished and/or installed under this Section are not necessarily individually described. The most important features and those requiring a detail description are mentioned. Truss work and miscellaneous items not mentioned or described shall be furnished and/or installed in accordance with the intent of reviewed drawings and specifications and as required to complete the work.

B. Product Handling: Carefully store materials in a vertical position off the ground and in a manner to insure proper drainage, ventilation, and protection from weather.

3.2 FABRICATION

A. All trusses and other roof structural components shall be manufactured by experienced workmen using precision cutting and truss fabricating equipment under the direction of a qualified foremen. All trusses shall be fabricated under strict rules of inspection and quality control as required herein and by the Uniform Building Code.

B. All truss members shall be accurately cut to length, angle and be true to line to assure tight joints for finished trusses.

C. Camber shall be built into the trusses as required by the engineered truss designs.

D. Each truss shall be stamped with the name and address of the fabricator.



3.3 ERECTION

A. Trusses shall be placed in positions shown in accordance with the details on the drawings and the shop drawings.

B. All trusses shall be plumb and shall be held in a straight line between support points until the sheathing is applied.

C. End blocking shall be attached to the supports immediately after setting. Permanent bracing and bridging shall be installed as erection proceeds. Temporary bracing shall be installed to maintain alignment and prevent lateral movement. Bracing shown on both the drawings and the shop drawings shall be installed.

END OF SECTION


06180 - 1 Glued Laminated Construction

SECTION 06180

GLUED LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: All labor, materials and equipment for glued laminated timber necessary to complete work shown, implied, specified and required.



2. 06100 Rough Carpentry.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. California Building Code, CBC, Chapter 23.

B. ANSI/AITC A190.1 American National Standard, Structural Steel Laminated Timber.

C. AITC 117 Standard Specification for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with pertinent sections of Division 01 specifying submittal procedures. The General Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will be returned for correction without review.

B. Limitation of Review: Structural Engineer’s review will be for general conformance with design intent as indicated in the Contract Documents and does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for conformance with the Contract Documents.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit each building as a complete unit. Do not mix components from multiple buildings or units of work in a submittal. Include all of the following:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, and locations of structural members.



D. Certifications:

1. AITC Certificate of Conformance.



2. Special Inspection Certification.

E. Warranty:

1. Two copies of a five-year warranty, signed by an officer of the manufacturer, shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer stating that the workmanship shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer at no cost to the Owner.


A. Each glued laminated member shall bear the AITC Quality Mark to indicate conformance to ANSI/AITC 1901.1.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lumber: Conform to AITC 117. 16% maximum moisture content at time of manufacture.

1. Each piece shall be Douglas Fir for interior use and entirely Alaskan Cedar for members with any exterior exposure. For High Strength Composite (HSC) beams, only Douglas Fir is to be used in composite with Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL).

B. Adhesive: Shall be exterior for wet surface condition above 16% and shall meet requirements of ASTM D2559.

C. Interior use glue laminated beams and posts shall be manufactured from Douglas Fir.

1. Simple span beams shall be stress grade 24F-V4.

2. Posts, continuous and cantilever beams and truss members shall be stress grade 24F-V8.

D. Glue laminated members with any exterior exposure shall be fabricated from Alaskan Yellow Cedar.

1. Simple span beams shall be stress grade 20F-V12.

2. Posts, continuous and cantilevers beams, and truss members shall be stress grade 20F-V13.

E. High Strength Composite (HSC) glued laminated members shall be fabricated from a composite of Douglas Fir and Laminated Veneer Lumber by Standard Structures Inc (DSA PA-138 and ICC ES PFC-5579).

1. Beams shall have a stress grade of 32F-2.1E/DF.

2. LVL material used for the tension laminations shall be manufactured by Pacific



Woodtech, Burlington, Washington, and comply with the requirements of ANSI/ AITC A190.1-2002, section 4.3.4.

F. Radial Tension Reinforcement: AITC 404.

2.2 CAMBER

A. All beams shall be cambered as noted on the drawing. No camber noted indicates no camber to be provided.

B. Cambers specified shall be provided within a tolerance of +1/4 inch. Beams with cambers exceeding this tolerance may be rejected. The Contractor shall verify all beam cambers prior to the erection and report his findings in writing to the engineer for review and comment.

2.3 APPEARANCE

A. Glue laminated members shall be Industrial Appearance Grade when not exposed to permanent view and Architectural Appearance Grade otherwise. Appearance to meet the requirements of AITC 110.

2.4 PROTECTION

A. Protection during shipping and field handling to meet requirements of AITC 111.

B. Ends shall be sealed after end trimming and entire surface of members shall be factory sealed with a penetrating sealer that has been approved by the Architect.

C. Field cuts, notches, and daps shall receive one coat of the same sealer prior to erection.

D. Beams shall be bundle wrapped prior to, during and after transit and shall be protected from moisture, weather, and shall be kept well ventilated at all times during construction. Beams specified to have architectural appearance shall be individually wrapped.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

A. Members shall be seat cut to bear, dapped, etc. as detailed on the drawings prior to erection.

B. Members shall be erected with suitable equipment and secured in place as detailed on the drawings.

C. Glue-laminated members shall be aligned and braced until all secondary members or other framing is secured. Contractor shall verify all beam cambers in the field prior to erection.

3.2 CLEANING

A. All debris resulting from this portion of the work shall be removed from the site upon



completion.

B. Protect work from damage by subsequent operations.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 06200 - 1 Finish Carpentry

SECTION 06200

FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide finish carpentry with accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Provide exterior wood trim. 2. Provide exterior wood soffits. 3. Provide solid polymer shower walls including soap shelves.


1. Section 06400: Architectural woodwork, including casework and countertops.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit literature for manufactured items.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and wood species, component profiles, fastening, joining details, finishes, and accessories.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each of the following.

1. Wood trim. 2. Wood for soffit. 3. Solid polymer material for shower walls.

D. Certificates:

1. Quality Standards Certification: Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) certifications will not be required however Owner reserves right to retain Woodwork Institute if quality of work is questionable.


A. Standards: Perform finish carpentry in accordance with Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), Edition 1, 2009.


A. Do not deliver materials until site conditions are adequate to receive work; protect items from weather while in transit.

B. Store materials indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 25% to 55%.



C. Do not begin installation of finish carpentry until space is fully enclosed and mechanical systems are fully operational.

1. Maintain interior installation areas at 70 degrees F and 50% to 55% relative humidity.

D. Immediately remove from site materials with visible mold and materials with mildew. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Exterior Wood Trim:

1. Quality: AWS/Custom Grade. 2. Wood: Clear Western Red Cedar. 3. Cut: Mixed Grain. 4. Texture: Surfaced.

B. Exterior Wood Soffits: 4” by 3/4” tongue and groove edged boards unless otherwise indicated.

1. Quality: AWS/Custom Grade. 2. Wood: Clear Western Red Cedar. 3. Cut: Mixed Grain. 4. Texture: Surfaced. 5. Edge: Tongue and groove edges.

C. Solid Polymer Shower Wall Systems: Polymer system with color throughout thickness; provide manufacturer recommended joint adhesive; exposed surfaces finished to match face of system.

1. Manufacturers:

a. DuPont Co./Corian. b. Avonite, Inc./Avonite. c. Formica Corp./Surell. d. Chemcore Industries/Dovae. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Type: Match DuPont/Corian Solid Surfacing at showers, three wall shower surround kit with soap and shampoo shelf, and thermal formed corners, custom built to dimensions indicated.

3. Quality: Comparable to AWS/Premium Grade.

4. Type: Nominal 1/2" thick sheet.

5. Color: Match DuPont/Corian White Jasmine.

D. Anchors, Nails and Screws: Select the material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage; provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt screws for drilled-in-place anchors.

E. Wood Filler: Color to match wood being filled.



2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with specified quality standard.

B. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when approved and unavoidable; arrange neatly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible; do not delay job progress, allow for trimming and fitting.

B. Verify surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.

1. Beginning installation signifies acceptance of conditions.

C. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting work are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by applicable authorities prior to commencement of installation.

D. Inspect each piece of finish carpentry and discard damaged and defective pieces.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install work consistent with specified AWS quality grade, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions; shim as required, using concealed shims.

1. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials prior to installation; comply with requirements of Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings.

B. Secure work to blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

C. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work.

D. Install trim in single, unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than 10'-0".

1. For longer runs, use only one piece less than 10'-0" in any straight run; provide scarf joints between members.

2. Stagger joints in adjacent members.

3. Cope at returns and miter at corners.

E. Accessories: Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in locations indicated or as directed by Architect.

F. Acceptable Tolerances:

1. Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/16" at any position and maximum 1/8" in any 10'-0" length.



2. Adjoining Surfaces of Same Material: No variation permitted.

3. Offset with Abutting Materials: Maximum 1/32".

G. Preparation for Field Finishing:

1. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

2. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive site-applied finishes.

3. Seal concealed and semi-concealed surfaces; brush apply only, using primer consistent with finish coats specified under Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings.

END OF SECTION


Revised - Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 06400 - 1 Architectural Woodwork

SECTION 06400

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide mill fabricated architectural woodwork with accessories as required for complete finished installation including cabinetwork hardware.

1. Provide plastic laminate cabinetwork. 2. Provide plastic laminate countertops. 3. Provide solid polymer quartz surfacing based countertops. 4. Provide wood closet poles for casework closets.


1. Section 06200: Finish carpentry including trim, soffits, and shower wall panels. 2. Section 10500: Metal lockers and work benches.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature for manufactured items.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and wood species, component profiles, fastening, joining details, finishes, and accessories.

1. Certification: Provide AWS Certified Compliance Label on shop drawings.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each type of plastic laminate, exposed cabinet hardware, and solid polymer quartz countertop.

D. Certificates: AWS certification is required.

1. General: Before delivery to jobsite, provide AWS Certified Compliance Certificate indicating grade of millwork products to be furnished and certify AWS requirements for specified grades shall be met.

2. Casework: Each unit to bear AWS Certified Compliance Label.

3. Plastic Laminate Countertop: Each unit to bear AWS Certified Compliance Label.

4. Installation: Provide AWS Certified Compliance Certificate for Installation.

4.5. Provide letter ensuring compatibility with the selected wood core substrate and the plastic laminates.


A. Standards: Perform architectural woodwork in accordance with recommendations Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), Edition 1, 2009.

1. Monitored Compliance Program (MCP): Comply with Woodwork Institute “Monitored Compliance Program (MCP) as defined in AWS.



B. Seismic Anchorage: Provide seismic anchorage for wall cabinets; comply with load requirements in California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 2.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: Member of Woodwork Institute (formerly Woodwork Institute of California) with minimum five years successful experience fabricating architectural woodwork similar to that required for Project.


A. Do not deliver architectural woodwork until site conditions are adequate to receive work; protect items from weather while in transit.

1. Allow architectural woodwork shop finish to completely dry prior to delivery to site; allow materials to off-gas volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions off site.

B. Store materials indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 25% to 55%.

C. Do not begin installation of architectural woodwork until space is fully enclosed and mechanical systems are fully operational.

1. Maintain interior installation areas at 70 degrees F and 50% to 55% relative humidity.

D. Immediately remove from site materials with visible mold and materials with mildew. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Plastic Laminate Finished Casework and Countertops:

1. Quality: AWS/Custom Grade, Type II, Style A, flush overlay type.

2. Plastic Laminates:

a. Types: NEMA LD-3.1 high pressure laminates.

1) Horizontal Surfaces: General Purpose Type, nominal 0.050". 2) Vertical Surfaces: Vertical Surface Type, nominal 0.032". 3) Unexposed Surfaces: Balanced with 0.030" melamine backing sheet.

b. Manufacturers:

1) Formica Corp. 2) Micarta Div., Westinghouse Electric Co. 3) Nevamar Corp. 4) Pioneer Plastics Corp./Pionite. 5) Wilsonart, Ralph Wilson Plastics. 6) Abet Laminati, Co. 7) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

c. Colors: As scheduled on Drawings.

3. Wood Core: Plywood or medium density fiberboard (MDF) Columbus Forest Products/Purebond Classic Core, with no added formaldehyde and free of toxic materials.



3.a. Provide letter certifying that the product is an acceptable substrate for plastic laminate finish.

B. Solid Polymer Systems: Manufacturer's standard polymer system with color throughout thickness; provide manufacturer recommended joint adhesive; exposed surfaces finished to match top.

1. Manufacturers:

a. DuPont Co./Corian. b. Avonite, Inc./Avonite. c. Formica Corp./Surell. d. Chemcore Industries/Dovae. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Quality: Comparable to AWS/Premium Grade.

3. Type: Not less than 1/2" thick sheet designed to accept bowls as indicated and as specified in Division 15.

4. Color: Manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect.

B. Quartz Surfacing Based Countertop Systems: Manufacturer's standard quartz surfacing based polymer system with color throughout thickness; provide manufacturer recommended joint adhesive; exposed surfaces finished to match top.

1. Manufacturers:

a. CaesarStone USA/CaesarStone. b. DuPont Co./Zodiaq. c. Cambria USA/Cambria Countertops. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Quality: Comparable to WI MoM/Premium Grade.

3. Type: Standard countertop system designed to accept bowls as indicated and as specified in Division 15; not less than 3/4” thick, 1-1/4” thick where required for sizes indicated or for edge conditions indicated.

4. Color: As indicated on Finish Schedule.

C. Casework Hardware: Provide casework hardware items as required for complete installation as indicated; provide types as listed in AWS "Manual" but no less than following types.



1. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: Flush mounted in cabinet.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Futura/No. AS 662 with AS 563/663 support. 2) Knape & Vogt/No. 255 with No. 256 support. 3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Cabinet Hinges: European concealed type, minimum 160 degree opening, with spring closer.

3. Cabinet Pulls: Wire type, 4" center to center, satin stainless steel.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Hafele/116.07.427. 2) Baldwin Hardware Manuf. Corp./No. 4674. 3) Stanley Hardware/No. 4483-1/2. 4) The Engineered Products Co./No. MC-4024. 5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

4. Drawer Slides: Full extension, rail mounted type, minimum 100 lb. capacity with ball-bearing rollers.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Accuride. 2) Knape & Vogt. 3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

5. Cabinet Locks: Pin and tumbler slide bolt lock, two keys each.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Schlage Lock Co./46-002 Cabinet Locks. 2) Best Access Systems/5L Series. 3) CompX International/Timberline Locks. 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

D. Wood Closet Poles Integral with Plastic Laminate Cabinets: Standard 1-3/8" wood closet poles with end brackets; provide intermediate brackets where over 4'-0" long.

E. Anchors, Nails and Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage; provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt screws for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate architectural woodwork in accordance with specified quality standards.

B. Plastic Laminate:

1. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes.



2. Make corners and joints hairline; slightly bevel arises.

3. Locate butt joints at least 2'-0" from cutouts.

4. Cap exposed edges with plastic laminate of same finish and pattern.

5. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of laminate surfaces.

6. Provide cutouts for inserts, fixtures and fittings; verify locations from on-site dimensions.

7. Prime paint contact surfaces of cutouts.

8. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Square butt joints and self edging; applied plastic or metal edging not permitted.

C. Solid Polymer Countertops: Provide maximum sizes available. Locate butt joints at least 2'-0" from cutouts where more than one piece countertops are required.

1. Make corners and joints hairline; slightly bevel arises.

2. Provide cutouts for inserts, fixtures and fittings; verify locations from on-site dimensions.

D. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when approved and unavoidable; arrange neatly.

E. Assemble woodwork in shop in sizes easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible; do not delay job progress, allow for trimming and fitting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install work consistent with specified quality grade, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

1. Shim as required, using concealed shims.

B. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting architectural woodwork are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by Architect prior to commencement of installation.

C. Secure work to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

D. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work.

E. Install architectural woodwork under supervision of factory-trained mechanics.



F. Attach architectural woodwork securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements.

G. Acceptable Tolerances:

1. Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/16" at any position and maximum 1/8" in any 10'-0" length.

2. Adjoining Surfaces of Same Material: No variation permitted.

3. Offset with Abutting Materials: Maximum 1/32".

END OF SECTION


Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 07190 - 1 Water Repellents

SECTION 07190

WATER REPELLENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide clear liquid water repellent coating which does not affect appearance of concrete masonry assembly.


1. Section 04820: Concrete masonry assemblies.


A. Performance Requirements: Provide products which are recommended by manufacturer to be fully compatible with indicated substrates and joint sealers which are in contact with water repellent coating.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Samples: Submit sample units with water repellent coating applied to half of each sample face; indicate which half has coating.


A. Qualification of Installers: Firm with minimum five years successful experience in projects of similar scope.

B. Mock-Up: Prior to commencing work, including bulk purchase and delivery of material, prepare small application in unobtrusive location of typical substrate in manner acceptable to Architect.

1. Proceed only after Architect's acceptance of test application or as otherwise directed.


A. Do not apply coating during inclement weather, when air temperature is below 50 degrees F, or when rain or temperatures below 40 degrees F are predicted for a period of 24 hours.

B. Do not apply coating earlier than 3 days after surfaces became wet.

C. Do not apply coating to damp, dirty, dusty, or otherwise unsuitable surfaces.

1. Allow concrete surfaces to cure minimum 28 days unless otherwise approved in writing by coating manufacturer.

D. Protect glass, glazed products, and landscaping from contact with water repellent coating; replace materials damaged by water repellent coating.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for correcting failure of water repellent coating to resist penetration of water.

1. Special Warranty Period: Two years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Degussa Building Systems, Chemrex Industrial Division/Aqua-Trete.

B. Harris Specialties Chemicals, Inc./Enviroseal System.

C. Chemprobe Technologies, Inc./Prime A Pell Plus.

D. ProSoCo/Sure Klean SL 100.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Water Repellent Coating: Manufacturer's standard penetrating type sealers specified conforming to applicable limitations on volatile organic compounds.

1. Provide specific systems as recommended by manufacturer for concrete masonry substrates.

2. Finish: Water repellent coating shall not alter appearance, color, or texture of substrate under any lighting conditions.

3. Volatile Organic Compounds: Provide materials with maximum volatile organic compounds (VOC) as required by applicable air quality management authority.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates and apply coating in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Clean surfaces of dust, dirt and foreign matter detrimental to proper installation of water repellent coating.

C. Assure coating compatibility with each type of joint sealer within or adjacent to surfaces receiving waterproof coating.

1. Mask surfaces indicated to receive joint sealers which would be adversely affected by coating.



3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions including maximum allowable coverage.

B. Take special care to prevent damage to adjacent materials from application of coating; repair or replace materials damaged due to application of coating.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 07210 - 1 Building Insulation

SECTION 07210

BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide thermal batt insulation with accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 07840: Firestopping. 2. Section 09260: Acoustical insulation concealed in gypsum board systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of insulation.

1. Submit Underwriter's Laboratory approval numbers for required fire ratings; approvals of other laboratories contingent upon acceptance of applicable authorities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Thermal Batt Insulation: Preformed slag mineral or glass fiber with thermosetting resin binders, conforming to ASTM C665; formaldehyde-free; provide materials with maximum available recycled content to meet green building requirements.

1. Manufacturers:

a. USG Interiors, Inc./Thermafiber Insulation. b. Johns Manville/Thermal-Shield Insulation. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp./Fiberglas Insulation. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. R-Value: Minimum R-19 at 6” stud walls, R-30 at 10” stud walls, and R-38 at horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Vapor Retarder (Typical): Type I, no vapor retarder.

a. Flame Spread/Smoke Density Rating: Maximum 25/450, ASTM E84.

4. Vapor Retarder (Ceilings, Concealed): Type II, kraft vapor retarder.

5. Vapor Retarder (Ceilings, Exposed): Type III, foil faced kraft vapor retarder.

a. Flame Spread/Smoke Density Rating: Maximum California Building Code Class C, 200/450, ASTM E84.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 07210 - 2 Building Insulation

B. Penetration Type Insulation Supports: Galvanized or electroplated steel penetration supports with adhesive attachment to substrate and support disc.

C. Accessories: Furnish as recommended by insulation manufacturer for insulation types, substrates, and conditions involved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation; beginning installation signifies acceptance of conditions.

B. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting work are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by Architect prior to commencement of installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with vapor retarder toward inside of building.

B. Cut and trim insulation neatly, to fit spaces.

C. Fit insulation tight within spaces and tight to and behind mechanical and electrical services within insulation plane; leave no gaps or voids; maintain integrity of thermal barrier.

D. Friction fit in place; penetration supports as necessary to assure permanent installation.

1. Penetration Supports: Cut or bend pins in locations accessible to maintenance personnel, to eliminate potential hazards from exposed pin points.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 07265 - 1 Building Envelope Underlayment

SECTION 07265

BUILDING ENVELOPE UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Stucco Underlayment: Provide Grade D building paper underlayment and flashing for lath and plaster applications, with related concealed metal flashings and accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

2. Steep Sloped Roofing Underlayment: Provide self-adhering sheet membrane underlayment at steep sloped roofing, with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

3. Flashings and Sheet Metal Underlayment: Provide self-adhering sheet membrane underlayment at flashings and sheet metal, with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

4. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane (SASM) Flashing at Penetrations: Provide SASM flashing for around penetrations through building paper including windows and doors, with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.

5. Sheet Membrane at Walls: Limit self-adhering sheet membrane at walls to areas around penetrations through building paper (including doors and window penetrations) and at metal flashings.

a. Do not apply vapor retardant type self-adhering sheet membranes at areas indicated to receive foil faced insulation; application of vapor retarder on both interior and exterior surface results in vapor lock which is detrimental to building.


1. Section 07600: Exposed metal flashing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer’s literature for each type of underlayment.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for metal flashings, as related to underlayment.

1. Clearly indicate general construction, configurations, jointing methods and locations, fastening methods and locations and installation details.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each material.




A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work; require attendance of parties directly affecting underlayment.

1. Review procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for correcting failure of underlayment to resist penetration of water. Repair underlayment and pay for or replace damaged materials or surfaces.


2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stucco Underlayment: Provide Grade D water-vapor permeable kraft building paper matching Fortifiber/Super Jumbo Tex, Grade D, 60 minute water resistance (based on Fed Spec UU-B-790a).

B. Steep Sloped Roofing Underlayment: Match Grace/Ice & Water Shield self-adhering rubberized sheet membrane with primers and seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products. b. Carlisle Corp. c. GAF-Elk. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

C. Sheet Metal and Flashing Underlayment: Match Grace/Permabarrier self-adhering rubberized sheet membrane with primers and seam sealers for complete watertight installation.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products. b. Carlisle Corp. c. Protecto Wrap Company. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

D. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane (SASM) Flashing at Penetrations: SASM with primers and seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation; type as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and for applications indicated.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products/Permabarrier. b. Carlisle Corp. c. Protecto Wrap Company. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.



E. Concealed Metal Flashings Integral with Underlayment: Minimum 26 gage thick steel with minimum 0.90 oz/sq.ft. galvanized coating; ASTM A653.

1. Fasteners: Standard round wire type of hot dipped galvanized steel; minimum 19/64" head diameter and 0.104" shank diameter; minimum 7/8" long.

F. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.

G. Accessories: Provide as recommended by underlayment manufacturers for specific applications.

1. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type with mineral fiber components, for sealing and coating flashings; free of toxic solvents and free of asbestos. Capable of setting within 24 hours at temperatures of approximately 75 degrees F and 50% R.H.

H. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Provide materials conforming to applicable air quality management district limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

2.2 FLASHING FABRICATION

A. Fabricate metal flashings as recommended by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) "Sheet Metal Manual".

B. Form flashings to drain water to exterior at roofing and siding construction for penetrations, sill and header flashings.

C. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, in maximum possible lengths and free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

D. Hem exposed edges of metal flashings minimum 1/4" on underside.

E. Apply bituminous paint on concealed surfaces of metal flashings. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Install underlayment over surfaces that are dry, free of ridges, warps and voids that could damage paper.

B. Coordinate installation with installation of components and items projecting through underlayment.

3.2 FLASHINGS INSTALLATION

A. Install flashings as recommended by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) "Sheet Metal Manual".

B. Weatherlap joints minimum 2" and seal with plastic cement; secure in place.

C. Fastenings: Concealed in completed installation.



3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install underlayment in accordance with recommendations of underlayment manufacturer and of manufacturer's of products to cover underlayment; comply with applicable code requirements.

1. Layers: Weatherlap joints as recommended by system manufacturer, not less than 2” at building paper.

a. Stucco: Provide two layers building paper underlayment. b. Other Areas: Provide one layer self-adhering sheet membrane underlayment.

2. Secure underlayment in place, stagger joints between layers; lap ends minimum 6"; stagger end joints.

3. Apply layer of self-adhering sheet membrane extending minimum 18" from penetrations, including windows and doors; start at bottom of penetration and weatherlap joints; apply top layer over metal flashing to direct water to exterior.

B. Apply plastic cement to substrate prior to application of underlayment starter strips to prevent capillary movement of water back up beneath underlayment.

C. Weatherlap items projecting through underlayment and seal with plastic cement at building paper underlayment, with sealer recommended by sheet membrane underlayment manufacturer at sheet membrane underlayment.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1. 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 07310 - 1 Fiberglass Reinforced Shingles

SECTION 07310

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide laminated type asphalt/fiber glass composition shingle roofing system with accessories as required for complete, weathertight installation.


1. Section 07265: Building envelope underlayment. 2. Section 07600: Flashing and sheet metal.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for roofing and accessories.

B. Samples: Submit samples of composition shingles.


A. Qualification of Installer: Approved by manufacturer and with minimum five years successful experience with similar size and type projects.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Fire Resistance: Class A listed by Underwriters Laboratories for roof materials covering.

2. Wind Resistance: Provide system capable of resisting anticipated wind uplift based on slopes indicated.

a. Provide system with UL "Wind Resistant" label.

C. Cool Roof System: Comply with California Title24 requirements for “Cool Roof” system. System to have Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC) label.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for correcting failure of roofing system to resist penetration of water and damage from wind.

1. Special Warranty Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide system with manufacturer's Lifetime warranty, including any special manufacturer services as required.

1. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of two year warranty nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. GAF-Elk Corporation.

B. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.

C. CertainTeed.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2.2 ROOFING MATERIALS

A. Shingles: Laminated fiberglass and asphalt composition roofing shingles; conforming to ASTM D3462, and ASTM D3018, Type 1; shingles bearing UL Class A fire and "Wind Resistant" labels.

1. Type: Match GAF-Elk/Timberline Cool Series shingle system laminated shingles offered with manufacturer’s lifetime warranty.

2. Color: Match GAF-Elk/Cool Barkwood Antique Slate, with minimum 29 SRI value as approved by Architect.

3. 10” Hip and Ridge Cap: Match GAF-Elk/10” Ridglass.

B. Underlayment: Provided in Section 07265.

C. Nails: Standard barbed shank round wire shingle type of hot dipped zinc coated steel; minimum 3/8" head diameter, 11 or 12 gage; minimum 1-1/4" long.

D. Accessories: Provide as indicated and as required for complete weathertight installation.

1. Ridge Vents: Match Cobra/Rigid Vent 3, 9” for 10” width ridge caps for application indicated; type covered with roof shingles; type as approved by Architect.

2. Roof Louvers (Exhaust): Match Masterflor/RT-65 square top resin construction; color to be gray.

E. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type with no asbestos content, for sealing and coating flashings in buildings; free of toxic solvents and free of asbestos.

1. Provide material capable of setting within 24 hours at temperatures of approximately 75 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect underlayment application; install composition roofing over dry surfaces free of ridges, warps and voids.

1. Take special care not to damage underlayment beyond that required to secure roofing to substrate.



B. Coordinate installation of roofing with installation of roof-mounted components, flashings and items projecting through roofing.

C. Ensure roof openings are properly sized and located prior to roofing installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation: Install roofing shingles in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions, as required to meet specified fire and wind requirements.

1. Valleys: Closed cut valley. 2. Conform to requirements of applicable codes.

B. Ridge Vents and Roof Louvers (Exhaust): Comply with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

C. Conceal fastenings in completed installation of roofing.

D. Flash and seal items projecting through or mounted on roofing with plastic cement.

E. Provide complete weathertight roof installation.

END OF SECTION


Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 07412 - 1 Metal Roofing

SECTION 07412

METAL ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide factory finished manufactured metal roofing including subgirt supports, integral metal flashings and sealants, and accessories as required for complete weather-tight installation.


1. Section 07600: Flashing and sheet metal not integral with metal roofing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Fifth Edition.


A. Design Criteria: Design metal roofing system to withstand loads as required by California Building Code, maximum deflection L/180.

1. Design system to provide movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to 100 year seasonal temperature ranges.

2. Design system to accommodate tolerances of structure, provided irregularities do not exceed industry recognized standards and clearances are maintained.

3. Provide for positive drainage of water entering or occurring within preformed metal roofing system.

B. Cool Roof System: Comply with California Title24 requirements for “Cool Roof” system. System to have Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC) label.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for prefabricated components, and recommendations for cleaning and protection.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioning, panel layout, general construction details including closures, flashings, locations of and types of sealants, and anchorage.

C. Samples: Furnish finished preformed metal roofing.




A. Provide protective covering on finished flashing materials to protect them through installation.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for correcting failure of metal roofing system to resist penetration of water and damage from wind.


2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. AEP Span.

B. Berridge Manufacturing Co.

C. Firestone Metal Building Products, Una-Clad.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. System: Preformed metal roofing system complete with subgirt framing, integral flashing and sheet metal, and anchoring assembly, and accessory components.

1. Type: Match AEP Span/Mini-V-Beam system.

2. Metal: Minimum 18 gage galvanized steel, minimum G90 galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653.

3. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000.

4. Color: AEP Span/Cool Regal White Old Town Gray with minimum SRI 78 37 value.

B. Sealants and Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use in conjunction with installation of metal roofing.

1. Non-staining; non-corrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior applications.

2. Color of exposed sealants and gaskets to match roofing.

C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard hot dip galvanized fasteners with not less than G90 galvanized coating.

1. Finish exposed fasteners to match roofing.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Internal and External Corners: Same materials, material thickness and finish as roofing, profile to suit system, brake formed, shop cut and factory mitered to required angles.



B. Mitered internal corners shall be backed with minimum 22 gage galvanized steel sheet stock to maintain continuity of profile.

C. Expansion Joints: Provide concealed metal expansion control throughout roofing system.

D. Integral Sheet Metal Flashings, Closures and Other Components: Brake formed to required profiles; conform to SMACNA Manual.

1. Conform to requirements specified in Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal . PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install preformed metal roofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation instructions, and approved shop drawings.

1. Underlayment: Take special care not to damage underlayment beyond that required to secure roofing to structure.

B. Install metal flashing and sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1. Conform to installation requirements specified in Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

C. Exercise care when cutting materials on site, to ensure cuttings do not remain on finished surfaces.

D. Protect metal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint; allow protective coating to dry prior to installing members.

E. Permanently fasten roofing system to structural supports, properly aligned, leveled and plumb.

1. Maximum 1/16" offset from true alignment between adjacent members butting or in line.

2. Maximum 1/4" variation from plane or location indicated on Drawings.

F. Locate end laps over supports; end lap panels minimum 2"; ensure sidelaps are over firm bearing.

G. Provide expansion joints at regular basis, concealed within system.

H. Use concealed fasteners except where specifically approved by Architect.

I. Install sealants and gaskets where required to prevent direct weather penetration.

J. Completed installation shall be free of rattles, noise due to thermal and air movement, and wind whistles.



K. Remove protective coating when no longer required to protect roofing and flashing from construction.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 07600 - 1 Flashing and Sheet Metal

SECTION 07600

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide galvanized steel flashing and sheet metal including accessories as required for complete weathertight installation.

1. Flashing and sheet metal includes gutters, downspouts, rainwater leaders, reglets, roof vents, and similar fabricated components.

2. Provide concealed sealants used in conjunction with installation of metal flashing and sheet metal.

3. Provide miscellaneous sheet metal flashing and reglets not provided by other trades or suppliers.

a. Where reglets are to be installed in conjunction with other work, provide in adequate time for installation.


1. Section 07265: Concealed flashing integral with building envelope underlayment. 2. Section 10210: Metal wall louvers.


A. Design Requirements: Allow for movement of components without causing buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to 100 year seasonal temperature ranges.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Fifth Edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish literature for manufactured products.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate dimensioning, layout, general construction details including closures, flashings, locations and types of sealants, anchorages, and method of anchorage.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of typical metal flashing fabrication indicating standard soldered joints and edge conditions.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for correcting failure of metal flashing system to resist penetration of water and damage from wind.


2.1 MATERIALS

A. Flashing and Sheet Metal: ASTM A924 and A653 G90 galvanized steel; minimum 24 gage.

1. Accessories: Provide strainers, outlet tubes, screens, baffles, hangers and gutter ends as required for a complete system and complying with SMACNA Manual.

2. Provide heavier gage metal where recommended by SMACNA Manual for size of component.

3. Mill phosphatized where indicated to be field painted.

B. Manufactured Reglets: Snap-on type, for two piece flashing; metal to match flashing and sheet metal.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Fry Reglet Corp./Springlok System. b. MM Systems Corp./Snap-Tite System. c. W.P. Heckman Co./The Leading Edge Drive Lock System. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

C. Roof Vents: Match Master Flow/NS B50A roof vents.

D. Solder and Fasteners: As recommended by SMACNA and complying with applicable codes and regulations; hot dipped galvanized minimum coating comparable to G90.

E. Concealed Sealant: Butyl type for use in conjunction with sheet metal; non-staining; non-corrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior concealed applications.

F. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color; asbestos free.

G. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type; asbestos free.

H. Sealing Compound: Type recommended by roofing manufacturer; asbestos free.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

B. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

1. Fabricate corners and intersections in shop with solder joints; watertight fabrication.

C. Form sections in maximum 10'-0" lengths; make allowance for expansion at joints.



D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2".

E. Backpaint flashings with heavy bodied bituminous paint where in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install metal flashing and sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1. Install tight in place, with corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles as indicated on Drawings.

2. Lap joints in direction of water flow.

3. Hold downspouts in position, clear of wall, by hangers spaced not more than 10'-0" on center; securely fasten hangers to wall without exposed damage to wall surface.

4. Comply with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions for manufactured products.

B. Exercise care when cutting materials on site, to ensure cuttings do not remain on finished surfaces.

C. Provide expansion joints concealed within system.

D. Use concealed fasteners, continuous cleat type, except where specifically approved by Architect.

1. Exposed fasteners may be used, where clearly indicated on shop drawings and approved by Architect, at areas not exposed at exterior walls nor in sight of interior spaces.

E. Apply sealing compound at junction of metal flashing and felt flashing.

F. Lock seams and end joints; fit flashing tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

G. Counter-flash mechanical and electrical items projecting through roof membrane.

H. Install sealants where required to prevent direct weather penetration.

I. Completed installation shall be free of rattles, noise due to thermal and air movement, and wind whistles.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 07840 - 1 Firestopping

SECTION 07840

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide firestopping as required to maintain effective barrier against spread of flame, smoke and gases, and to retain integrity of time-rated construction as indicated and at following types of locations.

1. Provide at fire rated system perimeters, and at duct, conduit, piping penetrations through time-rated construction, and as required by applicable codes.

2. Coordinate requirements for firestopping with work involving penetrations through fire rated assemblies.

a. Review Project and Contract Documents to ascertain extent of penetrations in fire rated assemblies and methods included in other sections for maintaining fire ratings.


A. Design Requirements: Provide materials tested in accordance with following standards, unless otherwise specified.

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

a. ASTM E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. b. ASTM E119, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. c. ASTM E814, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature including data for materials and prefabricated devices, including descriptions sufficient to identify materials and devices on job.

1. Submit Underwriter's Laboratory approval numbers for required fire ratings; approval of other laboratories contingent upon acceptance of applicable authorities.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's installation details.

C. Certificates of Compliance: Submit certificates, accompanied by classifications, indicating material or combination of materials used meets requirements specified for flame spread and fire resistance.

1. Certificates to be by nationally recognized testing authority or otherwise satisfactory to authorities.

D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Maintain copy of manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations at each work area.




A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Building Code, Chapter 7 requirements for firestopping, including both F Ratings and T Ratings as applicable.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDING

A. Deliver materials in their original unopened packages and store in location providing protection from damage and exposure to elements.

B. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. 3M Fire Protection Products Div./3M Fire Barrier Products.

B. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI)/SpecSeal and Pensil Firestopping.

C. Hilti, Corp./Hilti Firestop Systems.

D. W.R. Grace & Co./Flamesafe Products.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Choose products and methods meeting applicable codes and Specification requirements for each firestopping application, subject to Architect's acceptance.

B. Firestopping Materials: Furnish materials for penetrations in time-rated floor, wall, and partition assemblies capable of preventing passage of flame, smoke, and hot gases.

1. Penetration Test: Furnish materials passing ASTM E814 for penetration fire stopping indicating maintenance of time-rated adjacent assemblies.

a. Additional Tests: Where required by applicable authorities, provide materials passing ASTM E119 time-temperature fire conditions for fire ratings indicated for assemblies.

2. Flame Spread: ASTM E84 flame spread rating of 25 or less.

3. Smoke Density: ASTM E84 smoke density rating of 450 or less.

C. Firestopping: Maintain fire rating of assembly in which firestopping is installed, such as floor, partition, or wall, in accordance with ASTM E119 tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and conditions receiving or affecting the work. Do not proceed until unsuitable conditions are corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install firestopping in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

B. Completely fill void space with firestopping materials regardless of geometric configuration, subject to tolerances established by firestopping manufacturer.

C. Apply firestopping materials at penetrations of pipes, conduits, and ducts prior to application of insulation.

1. Remove insulation already in place at penetration prior to application of firestopping materials.

a. Insulation which meets requirements for fire ratings are excepted from this requirement.


A. Inspection: Keep area of work available for inspection by Architect and applicable authorities before and after application of firestopping.

3.4 REPAIR AND CLEAN-UP

A. Repair damage caused by work of this section; clean exposed surfaces soiled by work and leave work ready to receive following work.

B. On completion of work, remove debris, excess materials, and equipment from site.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 07900 - 1 Joint Sealers

SECTION 07900

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide joint sealers, for interior and exterior joints not specified elsewhere, with backing rods and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Joint sealers include sealants and calking as indicated.


1. Section 07600: Flashing and sheet metal concealed sealants. 2. Section 08800: Glazing sealants. 3. Section 09260: Sealants used for acoustical treatment at gypsum board.


A. Performance Requirements:

1. Select materials for compatibility with joint surfaces and indicated exposures.

2. Where not indicated, select modulus of elasticity and hardness or grade recommended by manufacturer for each application indicated.

3. Comply with applicable limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's descriptive literature.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of each type of exposed joint sealer in required colors.

C. Certifications:

1. Furnish manufacturer's certification joint sealers comply with Contract Documents and are suitable for Project applications.

2. Furnish certification indicating installers are trained in proper use of specified products, qualified, and familiar with proper installation techniques.


A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience on projects of similar type and size, using specified products.

1. Installers shall be familiar with proper application procedures to ensure maximum joint sealer expansion and contraction capabilities.




A. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, cure time, and mixing instructions.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under unfavorable weather conditions.

B. Install elastomeric sealants when temperature is in lower third of temperature range recommended by manufacturer.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Repair or replace joint sealers which fail to perform as intended, because of leaking, crumbling, hardening, shrinkage, bleeding, sagging, staining, loss of adhesion, and loss of cohesion.


2.1 MATERIALS

A. Elastomeric Sealants:

1. Single Component Low Modulus Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920 Type S, Class 25, Grade NS; minimum 50% expansion and compaction capability.

a. Provide at exterior locations not exposed to traffic.

b. Manufacturers:

1) General Electric Co./Silpruf, Silglaz or GESIL. 2) Dow Corning Corp./790 or 795. 3) Pecora Corp./864 Architectural Silicone. 4) Tremco/Spectrum 3. 5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Multi-Component Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, self-leveling; minimum 25% expansion and compaction capability.

a. Provide at traffic bearing locations.

b. Manufacturers:

1) Pecora Corp./NR-200 Urexpan. 2) Tremco/Vulkem 245. 3) Sonneborn Division of ChemRex /SL 2 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.



3. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Rubber Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, compounded with fungicide, specifically for mildew resistance and recommended for interior joints in wet areas.

a. Provide at interior joints in wet areas.

b. Manufacturers:

1) General Electric Co./SCS 1702 Sanitary Sealant. 2) Dow Corning Corp./786 Bathtub Caulk. 3) Pecora Corp./898 Sanitary Mildew Resistant Sealant. 4) Tremco/Tremsil 200. 5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

B. Non-Elastomeric Sealants:

1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: ASTM C834 acrylic or latex-rubber-modified acrylic sealant, permanently flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding; recommended for general interior exposure; compatible with paints specified in Section 09900.

a. Provide at general interior applications.

b. Manufacturers:

1) Pecora Corp./AC-20. 2) Sonneborn Division of ChemRex/Sonolac. 3) Tremco/Ultrem 1500 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

C. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Primers/Sealers: Non-staining types recommended by joint sealer manufacturer for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.

2. Joint Cleaners: Non-corrosive types recommended by joint sealer manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

3. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of joint sealer.

4. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible polyethylene foam rod or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer for compatibility with joint sealer.

a. Oversize backer rod minimum 30% to 50% of joint opening.

D. Colors: Provide colors indicated or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare joint surfaces in accordance with ASTM C1193 and as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer.

B. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of joint sealer; remove dirt, insecure materials, moisture and other substances which could interfere with bond of joint sealer.

C. Prime or seal joint surfaces where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer; do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.

D. Ensure protective coatings on surfaces in contact with joint sealers have been completely stripped.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM C1193, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.

B. Set sealant backer rods at proper depth or position in joint to coordinate with other work, including installation of bond breakers and sealant; do not leave voids or gaps between ends of backer rods.

1. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear backer rods.

C. Install bond breaker tape as required to avoid three-sided bond of sealant to substrate and where required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure joint sealers will perform properly.

D. Size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.

E. Employ installation techniques that will ensure joint sealers are deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of bond surfaces equally on opposite sides.

F. Joint Configuration: Fill sealant joint to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture or dirt.

H. Install joint sealers to depths recommended by joint sealer manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at center (thin) section of bead.

1. Horizontal Joints: 75% width with minimum depth of 3/8". 2. Elastomeric Joints: 50% width with minimum depth of 1/4". 3. Non-Elastomeric Joints: 75% to 125% of joint width.



I. Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces.

1. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage.

J. Cure joint sealers in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

K. Maintain finished joints free of embedded matter, ridges and sags.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08110 - 1 Steel Doors and Frames

SECTION 08110

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide full flush steel doors and pressed steel frames, including anchors and silencers.

1. Pressed steel frames include both door and window framing.


1. Section 08700: Hardware for doors. 2. Section 08800: Glass and glazing. 3. Section 10210: Metal louvers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Steel Door Institute (SDI): SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI A250.8) - Recommended Specifications - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Hollow Metal Manual.

C. Underwriters Laboratories: Standards as applicable to fire rated doors and frames.

1. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are acceptable upon approval of authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, configuration, jointing methods, reinforcements, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and locations of cut-outs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. The Ceco Corporation.

B. Curries.

C. Amweld Building Products Inc.

D. Pioneer Industries Division, Core Industries, Inc.




2.2 MATERIALS

A. Doors: Hollow metal flush steel door, 1-3/4" thick.

1. Typical: Full flush with steel channel or welded edge with edge seams ground smooth (locate seams at corners); close top with flush end closer treatment, bottom optional flush or recessed channel; steel stiffened core, insulated at exterior doors.

2. Interior Doors: Minimum 18 gage.

3. Exterior Doors: Minimum 16 gage.

4. Glazed and Louver Doors: Provide systems as indicated on Drawings.

B. Frames:

1. Exterior Frames: Welded (pre-assembled) type.

2. Interior Frames: Knockdown (field-assembled) type.

3. Gage: Minimum 16 gage.

4. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type; removable for replacement.

5. Mortar Guard Boxes: Minimum 22 gage mortar guard boxes welded in place; provide where frames may be grouted.

C. Glazing Stops: Full flush type with glass centered in opening, unsecured side integral with unit, secured side fastened with flush, countersunk Allen type fasteners; minimum 16 gage.

D. Fire Rated Units: Construct in accordance with requirements for fire rating, NFPA 252 or UL 10C, and NFPA 80.

1. Labels: Place fire rating labels where visible when doors and frames are in installed, opened position.

2. Fire Ratings: Refer to Drawings for fire rating requirements.

E. Door Louvers: Weatherproof Z-shaped blades with U-shaped frames; 1-3/8" thick; blades 1-1/2" on center; 16 gage welded construction.

1. Provide removable bird screens on interior faces, 1/2" by 1/2" bronze wire mesh.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Conform to requirements of SDI (ANSI A250 Series) or NAAMM.

B. Reinforce and prepare doors and frames to receive hardware.

1. Refer to Section 08700 for hardware requirements.

C. Frames:



1. Welded Frames: Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type frames; continuously weld on inside surfaces (fully welded); grind welded joints to smooth uniform finish.

2. Knocked Down Frames: Accurately form and miter interlocking joints of knocked down frames to maintain hairline alignment of parts when field assembled.

3. Head Reinforcement: Reinforce frames wider than 4'-0" with minimum 12 gage formed steel channels welded in place, flush with top of frames.

4. Doors at Glazed Panels: Reinforce jambs and heads of frames for doors which occur adjacent to glazed sidelights and partitions.

D. Door Silencers:

1. Place minimum three single bumpers on single door frames; space equally along strike jambs.

2. Place minimum of two single bumpers on double door frames; place on frame heads.

E. Provide jamb anchors per SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI 250.8) and NAAMM; weld floor jamb anchors in place.

F. Provide double doors tested and approved without astragals.

G. Edge Clearances:

1. Between Doors and Frames: Maximum 1/8" at head and jambs. 2. Door Sills (No Threshold): Maximum 3/8". 3. Door Sills (Threshold): Maximum 3/4" above finished floor. 4. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: Maximum 1/8". 5. Fire Rated Doors: As required for fire ratings.

H. Finish: Comply with requirements of Section 09900 for interior metal primer and Section 09960 for exterior metal, including application and compatibility with specified finishes.

1. Interior Units: Prime paint.

2. Exterior Exposed Units: Apply minimum A60 non-spangle galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653.

a. Surface treat after galvanizing to remove oils and prepare for painting and apply one coat of primer; comply with requirements in Section 09960 – High Performance Coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI A250.8) and ANSI/SDI A250.11 or NAAMM "Hollow Metal Manual" and with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.



1. Install fire rated units in conformance with fire label requirements and NFPA 80.

B. Install doors and frames plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16".

1. Coordinate hardware installation with requirements of Section 08700.

2. Coordinate glass installation with requirements of Section 08800.

3. Coordinate louver installation with requirements of Section 10210.

C. Remove and replace doors and frames damaged during delivery, storage, installation and construction.

1. Paste filler repair shall not be permitted.

D. After installation, touch-up scratched paint surfaces.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08210 - 1 Wood Doors

SECTION 08210

WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide flush face wood doors.

1. Contractor Option: Provide shop finished wood doors.

a. Coordinate with Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings.

B. Related Work

1. Section 08110: Pressed steel frames. 2. Section 08700: Door hardware. 3. Section 08800: Glass and glazing for wood doors.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Woodwork Institute (formerly Woodwork of California): Manual of Millwork.

B. Window and Door Manufacturer’s Association (WDMA): Guide Specifications.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory.

1. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are acceptable upon approval of authorities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, jointing methods, hardware locations, and locations of cut-outs.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of wood door corner section.

1. Submit shop finishes where doors are furnished shop finished.

D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer certification indicating compliance to applicable requirements of WDMA and Woodwork Institute Standards.

D.E. Provide photographs of all doors in factory prior to shipping to site for approval of veneer.


A. Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized in accordance with referenced standards requirements applicable to Project location.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for replacing, rehanging, and refinishing wood doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship including warp and delamination.


2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

B. Eggers Industries Architectural Door Division.

C. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

D. VT Industries.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Solid Core Flush Wood Doors: WI MoM/Premium Grade, 5 Ply Hot Press, 1-3/4" thick solid wood framed glued block construction or particleboard core five ply construction.

1. WDMA: In addition to WI MoM, conform to requirements of WDMA; where conflicts occur, comply with most restrictive requirement.

2. Face Veneers: WI MoM/Premium Grade Hard White Maple veneers for transparent/stained finish; nominal 1/40" thick before sanding, not less than 1/50” after sanding.

a. Veneers: Provide not less than 6” wide quartersawn flitches, bookmatched as approved by Architect. Flitches shall be uniform in color such that obvious banding does not occur.

3. Edges: Stile edges to match face veneer, minimum 1-1/8" thick after trim.

4. Core: Bond stiles and rails to core and sand prior to assembly of face veneers.

5. Bond Type: Type II Bond, interior.

B. Fire Rated Doors: 1-3/4" thick, match non-rated door appearance; comply with UBC Standard 7-2; UL or Warnock Hersey rated.

1. Labels: Place fire rating labels where visible when doors are installed, in opened position.

2. Fire Ratings: Refer to Drawings for fire rating requirements.

3. Core: Use wood core construction for 20 minute rated flush doors, mineral core permitted for longer ratings.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of specified standards.



1. Prefit wood doors.

2. Prepare doors to receive hardware in shop, refer to Section 08700 for hardware requirements and templates.

3. Factory machine doors for mortise hardware.

B. Bevel strike edge of single-acting doors, 1/8" in 2".

C. Fire Rated Doors: Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey International.

1. Provide fire rated doors with maximum allowable edge strips, of wood species to match face veneers.

2. Provide doors with blocking designed for addition of closers, even where doors are not indicated to receive closers.

3. Provide astragals and metal edge trim for double doors, in accordance with requirements for fire rated doors.

D. Make cut-outs and provide matching wood stops for glass; profiles as indicated, type as selected by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

1. Fire Rated Doors: Provide minimum 18 gage metal stops conforming to fire rating requirements.

E. Shop Finished Doors (Contractor Option): Conform to requirements specified in Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions, and reference standards, plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16".

1. Coordinate hardware installation with requirements of Section 08700 - Hardware.

2. Install fire rated wood doors in accordance with requirements for specified fire label and requirements of NFPA 80.

a. Field cutting of fire rated doors shall not be acceptable.

3. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing in wood doors with Section 08800 - Glazing.

B. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protection: Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure doors are without damage at time of substantial completion.



1. Shop Finished Doors: Refinish or replace damaged doors.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08310 - 1 Access Doors and Panels

SECTION 08310

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide access doors set in finished surfaces.

1. Provide access doors and panels as required for access to controls and valves behind finished surfaces.

2. Coordinate with various trades for controls and valves which may be concealed.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of access doors required but not indicated on Architectural Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Nystrom Building Products.

B. Milcor, Inc.

C. J.L. Industries.

D. Karp Associates, Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide access door assemblies consisting of an integral unit, complete and ready for installation.

1. Type: Flush panel access doors; provide type with frame flange concealed in finished construction.

B. Frames: Fabricate from minimum 16 gage steel.

C. Doors: Flush panel type, fabricate from minimum 14 gage steel.

1. Provide continuous piano type hinge.

2. Finish with manufacturer's factory-applied enamel prime coat applied over phosphate coating on steel.

D. Locking Devices: Provide flush, key-operated cylinder lock for each access door.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08310 - 2 Access Doors and Panels

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units that may vary slightly from sizes shown or scheduled.

B. Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction; grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

C. Provide attachment devices and fasteners of type required for specific job conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which access doors are to be installed.

1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected; installation signifies acceptance of conditions.

B. Obtain specific locations and sizes for access doors from trades requiring access to concealed equipment; coordinate installation with work of other trades.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for access doors.

B. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

C. Adjust hardware and doors after installation for proper operation.

D. Remove and replace doors or frames that are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08360 - 1 Sectional Overhead Doors

SECTION 08360

SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide glazed aluminum sectional overhead (fire station) door as shown on Drawings with frames, brackets, guides, tracks, counterbalance, hardware, electric operators and accessories for complete finished, operational installation.

1. Provide system to suit openings and allowable head room.

2. Provide electrical wiring from make-up box to electrical operator and control wiring to safety devices and control stations.


1. Section 05500: Angle and channel frames at door openings. 2. Section 07900: Perimeter sealants and back-up materials. 3. Section 08410: Aluminum entrances and storefronts. 4. Section 08725: Low energy door operators (pedestrian). 5. Section 08555: Aluminum clad wood windows. 6. Division 16: Electrical service to operators; conduit from controls to operators.


A. Design Requirements: Provide system by single manufacturer including door, hardware, accessories, mounting, and installation components, but not including glass or glazing materials.

1. Fire Station Application: Provide systems with not less than five years successful application for high use fire station operation with minimal maintenance requirements.

B. Wind Loads: Design and reinforce doors to withstand loads as required by California Building Code, but not less than 20 psf wind loads.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installation which are not fully detailed on manufacturer's data sheet.

1. Submit setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchorage devices.

C. Manufacturer Certificate: Submit manufacturer certification indicating doors comply with Contract Documents and applicable codes and have been used successfully for high use fire station doors similar to those required for Project.

D. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish, glass and glazing gasket.



D.E. Extra Door Panel Section for Emergency Repair: Provide 2 additional sets of replacement panel sections for the bottom 2 panels of the overhead door with specified color and panel configurations per drawings to match complete door for emergency repair. Include detailed information from manufacturer on color, finish and similar information sufficient for the City to easily order replacement panel sections in the future if needed.


A. California Title 24 CEC Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Energy Commission requirements regarding energy performance of sectional overhead doors.

1. Manufacturer shall be responsible for providing information required by authorities necessary to verify conformance.

2. Entire assembly, including glass and glazing, shall be certified by National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) and shall bear NFRC Label indicating energy performance technical information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Overhead Door Corporation.

B. Raynor Manufacturing Co.

C. Windsor Door, a United Dominion Company.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Door Sections: 1-3/4" thick, ASTM B221, 6063-T6 extruded aluminum, minimum 0.06" thick; configuration as indicated on Drawings.

1. Stiles and Rails: Manufacturer's standard sizes as recommended for door sizes indicated.

2. Solid Panels: Minimum 0.05" thick aluminum sheet finished to match stiles and rails.

3. Seals: Provide sections with between section seals for improved air infiltration properties.

4. Finish: TGIC powder coat or fluoropolymer system based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000.

5. Color: Custom color to match aluminum storefront color, specified as Kawneer/Permafluor “RedwoodDove Gray” color.

B. Track: Heavy duty 3” galvanized track for heavy duty fire station applications.

1. Tracks: Bracket mounted or continuous angle mounted and fully adjustable for sealing door to jamb; reinforce horizontal track with continuous angle.



C. Hardware: Heavy duty hinges and brackets made from galvanized steel; track rollers hardened steel balls of size suited to size of track.

D. Spring Counterbalance: Heavy duty oil tempered wire torsion springs on continuous ball bearing cross header shaft; galvanized aircraft type lifting cables, suitable for fire station applications with constant daily operation.

1. Spring counterbalance designed for not less than 50,000 operating cycles.

E. Weatherstripping:

1. Floor Seal: U-type vinyl seal and extruded aluminum retainer.

2. Header Seal: PVC seal held in place by fasteners to top section.

3. Jamb Seal: PVC, designed to seal side of door when closed; mounted between jamb and continuous angle mounting.

F. Glass: Provide minimum thicknesses specified, but no less than thicknesses required based on opening size and configuration and anticipated wind loading.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Viracon. b. Guardian Industries Corp. c. PPG Industries, Inc., Glass Group. d. Pilkington Glass, Ltd. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Glass: Preassembled insulated glass units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space with -20 degree F dew point.

a. Performance Classification: ASTM E774, Class A.

b. System: Manufacturer's standard dual seal system compatible with glazing system, and including spacers, desiccant, and standard corner construction.

c. Glass: Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered, ASTM C1048; nominal thickness 1/8"; safety glass.

1) Low Emissivity Coating: Provide high performance low e coating on Number 2 surface, 0.38 or better SHGC, visible light transmission 70%, winter night time U value 0.29, summer daytime U value 0.27, ultraviolet light transmittance 19%.

d. Total Unit Thickness: 1/2".

G. Glazing Accessories: Of type recommended by manufacturer to suit security locations and applications for dry glazing installation.

1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long by 3/8" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.



2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene or EDPM; 45-55 Shore A durometer hardness; 3" long by 3/32" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

3. Edge Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 60-70 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long with minimum two per jamb located at top and bottom edges of glass; ASTM C864.

4. Glazing Gaskets: Exterior neoprene or EDPM; interior neoprene, EPDM or vinyl; miter corner joints; ASTM C509 or C864.

H. Inserts and Anchorage: Provide complete anchorage system for doors; furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry for installation of units.

I. Electric Door Operators:

1. Furnish electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for heavy duty fire station type applications, sidemount trolley 1 HP version.

a. Provide complete with electric motor and factory-wired motor controls, gear reduction unit, DC disc type with selectable progressive operated brake, clutch, remote control stations, cycle counter, and control devices.

b. Provide adjustable friction clutch double shoe brake system actuated by independent full line voltage solenoid controlled by motor starter, fully enclosed positive gear driven limit switch.

c. Starter: Fully enclosed magnetic cross line reversing starter.

2. Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging sprocket chain operator and releasing brake for emergency chain drive manual override operation.

a. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency sprocket is engaged.

3. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment.

4. Inside Control Station: Provide continuous-contact, 3-button control station with push button controls labeled "open", "close" and "stop" in two separate locations identified in Drawings.

a. Coordinate control station placement with electrical work; flush mounted.

5. Outside Control Station: Provide key operated control station with labels for "open", "close" and "stop"; coordinate control station with electrical work; flush mounted, NEMA 4

a.b. Cylinders: Provided in Section 08700 – Hardware; coordinate control stations to accept cylinders.

6.5. Photo Electric Safety System: Provide complete photo electric safety system with 24 volt power supply under this section which meets UL 325 (2010) mounted at 6” along with additional two sets of crisscrossing photo cells for additional



protection mounted at 4’-0” and ladder height of fire engine (coordinate with Owner).

7.6. Safety Switches: Provide full width pneumatic type safety switches at bottom of doors; wire to reverse door upon striking object; neoprene covered to provide weather seal.

8.7. Timer to Close feature to automatically close door with selectable time delay.

9.8. Provide an advanced radio receiver system with Rolling Code technology transmitters, four each with two channel dual frequency transmitters or four each with four channel dual frequency transmitters. Prior to submittal coordinate detailed requirements with owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional door in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Install door, track and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing; hang horizontal track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers, welded and bolt-fastened in place.

C. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing and reinforcing as required for rigid installation of track and door operating equipment.

D. Upon completion of installation, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weather-tight for entire perimeter.

E. Remove and replace damaged glazing, including glazing with scratches.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08410 - 1 Aluminum Framed Storefronts

SECTION 08410

ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide aluminum framed storefront system, with stock non-automatic doors, anchorage, glazing, and accessories as required for complete installation.


1. Section 07900: Perimeter sealants and back-up materials. 1.2. Section 01352: Design-Build Procedures 2.3. Section 08360: Sectional overhead doors. 3.4. Section 08700: Door hardware including aluminum and glass door hardware. 4.5. Section 08725: Low energy door operators.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Metal Manufacturers (AAMA): Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Manual.

B. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual.

C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual.


A. General Design Requirements: Comply with recommendations of AAMA Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Manual, except where more stringent requirements are specified or required by applicable codes.

B. Design Criteria:

1. Strength: Design system to withstand wind loads acting normal to plane of wall as required by California Building Code:

a. Deflection: Maximum L/175, ASTM E330.

b. Safety Factor: Design for specified pressures with no glass breakage, no permanent damage to fasteners, and no permanent deformation of framing in excess of 0.2% of member clear span.

2. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration, ASTM E331, with no water on exposed interior components; static pressure differential of 20% of inward wind load, with minimum 6 psf load.

3. Air Leakage: Maximum 0.06 cfm/sf, ASTM E283, at differential static pressure of 6.24 psf at fixed glazing and not more than 0.3 cfm/sf at doors.

C. Safety Glass Standard: Conform to California Building Code and CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and locations, anchor methods and locations, hardware locations, and relevant details.

1. Show adjacent construction including waterproofing and finish layers.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish, glass and glazing gasket.

D. Structural Certificates: Submit certification by civil or structural engineer registered in California indicating system complies with Contract Documents and applicable codes.


A. California Title 24 CEC Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Energy Commission requirements regarding energy performance of aluminum framed storefronts.


2. Entire assembly, including glass and glazing, shall be certified by the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) and shall bear NFRC Label indicating energy performance technical information.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for correcting failures including wind damage and water penetration to interior surfaces, excessive deflections, and deterioration of finishes, weather-stripping and accessories.


2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Kawneer Company, Inc.

B. Vistawall Architectural Products.

C. Arcadia, Inc.




2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Entrance and Storefront System: Match Kawneer/TriFab 451 System with profiles as indicated on Drawings; provide extruded aluminum security type glass stops of profile to suit frame design.

1. Aluminum Type: As recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than extruded aluminum, ASTM B221, 6061 or 6063 alloy and T5 or T6 temper.

2. Finish: Fluoropolymer system based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000, and conforming to NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual and AAMA 605.2.

a. Color: Match Kawneer/Permafluor Redwood Dove Gray as approved by Architect.

B. Doors, Frames, and Hardware: Barrier-free doors meeting code requirements for providing access for people with physical disabilities; by entrance manufacturer.

1. Type: Medium stile with 10" bottom rail.

2. Metal and Finish: Match entrance system.

3. Hardware: Refer to Hardware Schedule in Section 08700; Coordinate with Section 08700 – Hardware.

C. Glass: Provide minimum thicknesses specified, but no less than thicknesses required based on window size and configuration and anticipated wind loading.

1. Manufacturers:





c. Glass:

1) Tempered Safety Glass (Typical): Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered, ASTM C1048; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass.

2) Float Glass (Where Permitted): Select glazing quality, clear float glass, ASTM C1036; nominal thickness 1/4".



3) Low Emissivity Coating: Provide high performance low e coating on Number 2 surface, 0.38 or better SHGC, visible light transmission 70%, winter night time U value 0.29, summer daytime U value 0.27, ultraviolet light transmittance 19%.

d. Total Unit Thickness: 1".

D. Glazing Accessories: Of type recommended by manufacturer to suit security locations and applications for dry glazing installation.

1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long by 3/8" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene or EDPM; 45-55 Shore A durometer hardness; 3" long by 3/32" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

3. Edge Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 60-70 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long with minimum two per jamb located at top and bottom edges of glass; ASTM C864.

4. Glazing Gaskets: Exterior neoprene or EDPM; interior neoprene, EPDM or vinyl; miter corner joints; ASTM C509 or C864.

E. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Fasteners: Aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel of type which will not cause electrolytic action or corrosion.

a. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for assembly or for application of hardware.

b. Indicate exposed fasteners on shop drawings for specific approval; exposed fasteners shall be Phillips flat-head screws or Allen screws with finish matching item fastened.

c. Provide concealed fasteners for glazing stops.

2. Steel Reinforcement and Brackets: Manufacturer's standard with minimum 2 oz. hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A123, applied after fabrication.

3. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied mastic, SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat.

4. Flashing: Provide sub-sill flashing members; minimum 22 gage sheet aluminum of sizes and shapes indicated and as required to drain water to exterior; match adjacent aluminum member finish.

5. Anchoring Devices: Corrosion resistant type capable of supporting entrance system and superimposed design loads; design to allow adjustments of system prior to being permanently fastened in place.



2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront system to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assemblies to enable installation; provide for thermal movement.

B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit entrance assemblies in place.

C. Non-Automatic Doors: Comply with California Building Code and Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines relating to access for persons with disabilities.

1. Clear Opening Width: Minimum 32" each door.

D. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof.

E. Provide structural reinforcing within framing members where required to maintain rigidity and as required to accommodate design loads.

F. Allow moisture entering joints and condensation occurring within frame construction to drain to exterior.

G. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, treatment, and application of coating.

H. Finishing: After fabrication, prepare surfaces for finishing in accordance with recommendations of aluminum producer and finish manufacturer.

I. Weld by methods recommended by metal manufacturer and AWS; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish; remove arises from cut edges and corners to a radius of approximately 1/64".

J. Fit and assemble work at shop to greatest extent possible; disassemble only as required for shipment and erection.

K. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements and for support.

1. Provide internal reinforcing for hardware.

L. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint or preformed separators which will prevent corrosion.

M. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other non-abrasive concealed inserts which permanently prevent "freeze-up" of joint.

N. Fabricate doors and apply hardware in shop. Disassemble only as required for transportation and installation.

O. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces to be in contact with cementitious and with dissimilar materials.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install aluminum framed storefront assemblies, including entrances, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to meet design requirements indicated, for weathertight installation.

B. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level and free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

1. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location: 1/8" in 12'-0", with maximum 1/2" variation in total length.

2. Maximum Offset Between Members: 1/16".

C. Use sufficient anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten assemblies to building.

D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates.

1. Install doors to operate freely and smoothly, with a maximum operating pressure of 5 pounds in accordance with California Building Code.

2. Coordinate installation of cylinders with Section 08700.

3. Install sill members and thresholds in bed of compound, joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight construction.

E. Glass Installation: Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and glazing manufacturer instructions.

1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of components, exercising care to avoid damage of finish.

B. Mark glass after installation by crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass; do not apply markers to surface of glass.

C. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after sealant cures; cure sealants for high early strength and durability.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08555 - 1 Aluminum Clad Wood Windows & Doors

SECTION 08555

ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide wood windows and doors with exterior components extruded aluminum or clad with extruded aluminum, interior components shop finished wood, with window and door hardware and glazing.

1. Provide accessories as required for complete weathertight installation.


1. Section 06200: Wood trim. 2. Section 07900: Perimeter joint sealers and back-up material. 3. Section 08410: Aluminum framed storefronts and entrances.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WMDA), AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S. 2, Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC), and Wood Window and Glass Doors.

B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual.

C. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual.

D. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with California Building Code, CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.


A. Design Requirements: Provide each type of window and door by single manufacturer, provide all windows and doors by single manufacturer where all types are available from approved manufacturer.

1. Standards: Conform to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2, C30 Commercial Grade or better.

B. Performance Requirements: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2 and applicable codes for each type of window specified, but no less than following.

1. Structural: Withstand code required wind loads on exterior and on interior when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, without breakage, failure, or malfunction of operation.



2. Air Infiltration: Construct and weatherseal in accordance with ASTM E283; air

infiltration shall not exceed 0.37 cfm/ft2 of overall frame area.

3. Water Resistance: Construct and weatherseal in accordance with ASTM E547 test; pressure as noted in AAMA 101; no uncontrolled water penetration.

4. Forced Entry: Provide systems conforming to ASTM F588 for windows, Performance Level 10 or AAMA 1302.5 where at ground floor and at areas accessible from decks and accessible rooftops.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show window types, typical and special details including glazing, weatherstripping hardware, and recessed for sealing joints.


C. Samples: Furnish section with each type of finish and glass.


A. California Title 24 CEC Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Energy Commission requirements regarding energy performance of windows.


2. Entire assembly, including glass and glazing, shall be certified by National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) and shall bear NFRC Label indicating energy performance technical information.


A. Deliver and handle units and accessories in manner to prevent damage; store units above grade, out of weather with non-staining separation between units.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for replacing windows and doors failing to be weathertight and failure of insulating glass that develops moisture on interior faces, except that due to glass breakage.

B. Special Warranty Period: Two years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Marvin Windows and Doors.

B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Windows and Doors: Manufacturer's standard aluminum clad wood windows, with screens, and aluminum clad wood doors with aluminum exterior surfaces and with premium quality interior wood members, shop finished.

1. Type: Marvin Windows/Marvin Clad Ultimate French Casement Windows and matching swinging clad doors.

a. Provide windows with factory applied jamb extensions as appropriate for wall thicknesses and details.

b. Provide Marvin/SillGuard three piece rigid sill pans.

2. Cladding (Windows and Doors): Either extruded aluminum or extruded aluminum cladding mechanically bonded to exterior wood sash and frame members.

a. Color: Marvin/Select Wineberry Cumulus Gray to match aluminum framed storefront color as approved by Architect.

b. Exterior Trim: Extruded aluminum or aluminum clad wood to match window cladding.

3. Interior Wood Components, Prime Painted for Field Applied Opaque Painted Finish (Windows and Doors): Solid stock wood; finger joints visible in finished windows will not be acceptable.

a. Field Painting: Specified in Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings.

B. Frames: Water-repellent preservative treated Western Pine or Douglas Fir with aluminum cladding on exterior surfaces, interior surfaces to match window interiors.

C. Sash: Western Pine or Douglas Fir, minimum 1-3/4" thick, water repellent preservative treated.

1. Sash corners mortised and tenoned, glued and nailed; sash cladding mitered and sealed.

D. Weatherstripping: Flexible polyvinyl chloride material in design standard with manufacturer, compressed between frame and sash for positive seal on all four sides.

E. Window Hardware: Worm-gear sash operator with hardened gears; provide locks for each unit.

1. Finish: Satin chrome.

F. Hardware: Refer to Hardware Schedule in Section 08700; Coordinate with Section 08700 – Hardware. Where Schedule refers to “Per Door Manuf.” provide standard aluminum clad door manufacturer hardware (hinges and thresholds).



G. Glass: Provide insulated glass with Low E II coating and with argon gas in insulating glass covaitycavity.

1. Manufacturers:





c. Glass:

1) Float Glass (Unless Safety Glass Required): Select glazing quality, clear float glass, ASTM C1036; nominal thickness 1/4".

2) Tempered Safety Glass (At Doors and Where Safety Glass is Required): Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered, ASTM C1048; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass.

3) Low E II Coating: Provide high performance low emissivity coating on Number 2 surface, 0.6 or better U factor, 0.38 or better SHGC.

a) Match Marvin/Low E 2 272 Argon.

b) Translucent Glass: Where indicated provide obscure “sandblasted” glass as approved by Architect; obscure surface to be No. 3 surface.

d. Total Unit Thickness: 1".

H. Glazing Materials: Manufacturer's standard system complying with GANA Glazing Manual.

I. Screens: Manufacturer's high visibility screen cloth and frame complete with necessary hardware; color as approved.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Assembly: Individual units furnished factory-assembled, finished, glazed and with sash installed in frame; designed for easy removal and reglazing.

B. Fabricate units to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter to enable installation.

C. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit units in place.



D. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof.

E. Interior Wood Finish: Provide manufacturer's premium quality shop finish for wood members.

F. Glass Installation: Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual and glass manufacturer instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces of openings and verify dimensions.

B. Installation of units constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2 and manufacturer's recommendations for installation of clad wood windows and doors, hardware, and accessories.

1. Coordinate aluminum clad wood door hardware installation with Section 08700.

B. Install units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack, straight, square, in proper elevation, plane, and location, and in proper alignment with other work.

C. Provide necessary support and anchor units securely in place using concealed fasteners.

D. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide smooth operation with weathertight closure; lubricate hardware and moving parts.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect windows, doors, and glazing until Substantial Completion.

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08625 - 1 Tube Skylights

SECTION 08625

TUBE SKYLIGHTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide tube type factory fabricated acrylic glazed unit skylights, with tube connecting exterior acrylic or polycarbonate dome, tubing, interior ceiling diffuser, flashing, and accessories for complete, weathertight installation.


A. Design Requirements: Fabricate and install skylights capable of withstanding code required loads acting on skylight without failure, leaks, or permanent distortion.

1. Loads: Conform to California Building Code requirements.

B. Performance Requirements: Fabricate and install components capable of withstanding thermal expansion and contraction movements for ambient temperatures from 20-110 degrees F. without failure, leaks, or noise.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Repair or replace skylights which leak or fail to comply with reference standard requirements.

1. Warranty Period: Two years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Solatube International, Inc. (800.966.7652)/Solatube.

B. Daylighting Technologies, Inc./Sun-Dome.

C. Sun-Tek Manufacturing, Inc./Tube Skylights.




2.2 MATERIALS

A. Tube Skylights: Match Solatube/Model S330DS-C, 21” diameter.

1. Construction: Manufacturer’s standard construction for tube type skylights.

2. Roof Flashing Base: Once Piece, seamless, leakproof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. Base Style: Type F4, Self-mounted, 4 inches high.

1.3. Lens: Type L1 Optiview Fresnel lens design to maximize light output and diffusion with extruded aluminum frame and EPDM foam seal to minimize condensation and bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent.

2.4. Accessories: Provide as indicated and as required for complete operational installation as indicated; comply with applicable UL listings and applicable codes.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, cadmium-plated steel or austenitic stainless steel.

1. Provide anodic corrosion isolation where required, and provide neoprene washer or gasket where fastener penetration is subject to water penetration.

C. Corrosion Isolation: Bitumastic paint of alkali-resistant type with minimum 15-mil dry-film thickness.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate skylights to profiles and dimensions indicated.

B. Fabricate skylights with integral flashing for mounting on substrates indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install tube skylights in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions for weathertight installation.

B. Set units plumb and true to line without warp or rack.

C. Anchor securely to building with manufacturer's recommended fasteners and with neoprene-gasket heads.

D. Provide heavy coat of bituminous paint on aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum and glazed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Glazing Plastic: Leave in scratch-free condition, inside and out, with labels removed.



B. Repair or replace damaged units, including those with excessive scratches on acrylic, as determined by Architect.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2011 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08700 - 1 Hardware

SECTION 08700

HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide hardware for hollow metal and wood doors.

1. Provide cylinders for doors fabricated with hardware.


1. Section 02824: Manual gate hardware. 2. Section 06400: Cabinet hardware. 3. Section 08110: Door silencers. 4. Section 08410: Aluminum and glass entry door hardware. 5. Section 08360: Sectional overhead doors. 6. Section 08555: Hardware for aluminum clad wood windows and doors. 7. Section 08725: Low energy door operators. 8. Review other sections for doors fabricated with hardware.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A115 and A115W Series: Door and Frame Preparation Standards.

B. ANSI A156.1 through A156.20: Standards for various hardware items.

C. National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows.

D. California Building Code: California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.

E. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).


A. Products: Provide each type of hardware (hinges, pivots, locksets, latchsets, closers, trim) from single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Schedule.

1. Provide products by manufacturers specified and manufacturers listed in Hardware Schedule, with references to catalog numbers and designations.

B. Fire Rated Doors: Comply with requirements of Uniform Building Code Standard 7-2, NFPA 80 and applicable codes for fire rated door hardware; provide hardware bearing Underwriters Laboratory (UL) labels.

1. Doors indicated in fire rated partitions and walls shall be positive latching and self closing, with smoke gaskets.

C. Access for Persons with Disabilities: Comply with California Building Code and Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit catalog cuts for each type of hardware.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of hardware.

1. Supply templates to door and frame manufacturers for proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut-outs for hardware.

C. Samples: Indicate required style and finish of exposed door hardware.

D. Keying Schedule: Coordinate directly with Owner's Representative.

E. Closeout Submittal: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and master key codes on Project Record Documents.


A. Supplier Qualifications: Recognized builder’s hardware supplier with minimum five year’s successful experience in scheduling and furnishing hardware.

1. Provide services of architectural hardware consultant to supervise hardware supply.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene pre-installation meeting prior to commencing work of this section. Include persons involved with installation of doors, frames, and hardware.


A. Deliver hardware in manufacturer's original packages, marked for intended opening and use.

B. Pack complete with necessary screws, bolts, keys, instructions, and installation template, if necessary, for spotting mortising tools.

C. Upon delivery, furnish complete list of hardware for checking, clearly marked to correspond with marking on each package.

1. Review list for completeness and accuracy.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Review Drawings for hardware group locations and door types; where not fully covered in Hardware Schedule, comply with following general requirements; inform Architect where conflicts occur.

1. Provide hardware items with accessories complete to function as intended.

B. Hinges and Butts: ANSI A156.1; comply with following unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hager Hinge Co. b. Lawrence Brothers Inc. c. McKinney Products Co., Division of Essex Industries. d. Stanley Hardware Division of Stanley Works. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Doors 1-3/4" Thick: 4-1/2" heavy weight, extra heavy weight ball or oilite bearing where over 40" wide.

a. Provide widths sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180 degrees.

3. Provide minimum 3 hinges to 90" high, 4 hinges to 120" high for each door leaf, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide nonferrous butts with non-removable pins at exterior and locked outswinging doors, non-rising at interior doors; stainless steel where labeled; steel butts at labeled interior doors.

5. Provide ball bearing or oilite bearing hinges at doors with closers.

6. Tips: Flat button tips with matching plug.

C. Locking Devices: Provide of metal matching specified finish; interior parts of steel and zinc-dichromate plating, to resist rusting and corrosion; do not supply plastic, die-cast or aluminum mechanisms.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Best Access Systems a Stanley Company. b. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2. Type:

a. Mortise Locksets: ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1, Mortise Type with 6 pin tumbler cylinders, except where otherwise indicated in Hardware Schedule.

b. Cylindrical Locksets: ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1, Bored Type (cylindrical) with 6 pin tumbler cylinders, except where otherwise indicated in Hardware Schedule.



3. Lockset and Latchset Design: Solid lever with rose, as selected by Architect.

4. Backset: 2-3/4".

5. Strikes: Furnish standard strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt; verify type of cutouts provided in metal frames.

D. Cylinders, Keys, and Keying: Hardware manufacturers shall provide for grand master, master key alike or key different keying as directed by Owner.

1. Manufacturer: Provide cylinders by lockset manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide cylinders of extruded brass bar material.

3. Provide construction cylinders for doors requiring locking during construction; construction cylinders shall be removed and replaced just prior to Owner occupancy.

4. Submit keys for final use to Owner; provide not less than two keys for each lockset, six of each type and level of masterkey, two grand master keys, and 5% extra blanks.

5. Hardware manufacturers shall key and register lock cylinders.

6. Key Control System: Provide complete key control system with identification and storage capacity suitable for Project.

E. Closers: ANSI A156.4, furnish products of one manufacturer; full rack and pinion type with steel spring and non-freezing hydraulic fluid.

1. Manufacturers:

a. LCN Closers Division Schlage Lock Co./4000 Series. b. Norton Division, Yale Security, Inc./7500 Series. c. Dorma Door Controls/8900 Series Full Cover. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Provide controls for regulating closing, latching, speeds and back check.

3. Arm types shall suit individual conditions, as approved; supply parallel-arm closers at reverse bevel doors and where doors swing full 180 degrees.

4. Mount closers on room side or pull side unless otherwise indicated.

5. Sizes: Adjustable to following maximum door operating pressures:

a. Typical Doors: 5 pounds. b. Fire Rated Doors: 15 pounds. c. Make labeled doors self-closing. d. Closers shall be adjusted by factory representative.

6. Design: ANSI Modern Type with Cover, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Thresholds, Stops, Trim, and Miscellaneous Hardware: Provide as indicated, as specified, as included in Hardware Schedule, and as required for complete installation.



1. Manufacturers:

a. Adams Rite. b. Builders Brass Works Corp. c. Glynn-Johnson Co. d. H.B. Ives. e. National Guard Products. f. Pemko Mfg. Co. g. Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc. h. Richard Wilcox. i. Rixson-Firemark Sub., Yale Security, Inc. j. Trimco, Triangle Brass Mfg. Co. k. Tydix Products. l. Zero International, Inc. m. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Weather-Stripping: Provide continuous weather-stripping at top and sides of exterior doors.

3. Fire Rated Gaskets: Provide continuous fire rated gaskets at top and sides of fire rated doors.

4. Kick Plates: Height indicated by 1" less than door width; minimum 0.050" thick.

5. Pulls: Provide with bolts to secure from opposite door face; provide with pull plates unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide complete hardware with accessories as required for doors and applications indicated.

B. Templates: Furnish templates or physical hardware items to manufacturers concerned sufficiently in advance to avoid delay in Work.

C. Reinforcing Units: Furnished by door manufacturer, coordinated by hardware manufacturer.

D. Fasteners: Furnish as recommended by manufacturer and as required to install secure hardware.

1. Finish: Match hardware.

2. Furnish screws for items applied on gypsum board sufficiently long to provide solid connection to framing or backing

E. Through Bolts: Through bolts and grommet nuts shall be avoided on door faces in highly visible areas, unless no alternative is possible, as directed and approved, and shall not be used for solid wood core doors.

F. Electrical and Mechanical: Make provisions and coordinate requirements for mechanical and electrical devices in connection with hardware.



2.3 FINISHES

A. Provide following finishes except where otherwise indicated.

B. Typical:

1. Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D), satin finished stainless steel. 2. Interior Doors: BHMA 626 (US26D), satin chromium plated.

C. Closers:

1. Wood Doors: Metal cover finished to match door operating hardware. 2. Metal Doors: BHMA 600 (USP) primed for painting.

D. Thresholds: BHMA 628 (US28), satin aluminum, clear anodized.

E. Other Items: Provide manufacturer's standard finishes matching similar hardware types on same door, and maintain acceptable finish considering anticipated use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install finish hardware specified under this section; coordinate with manufacturer and installation of doors and frames.

B. Fit hardware prior to painting. Remove for painting of doors and frames before final installation of hardware.

C. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. No extra cost will be allowed because of changes or corrections necessary to facilitate installation of hardware.

3.2 MOUNTING POSITIONS

A. Heights given are center line heights from finished floor.

1. Locks and Latches: 38" to center of lever.

2. Door Pulls: 42" to center of grip.

3. Push Plate: 42"; coordinate with pull location.

4. Push-Pull Bar: 42" to center of bar.

5. Top Hinge: To jamb manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 10" from head of frame to center line of hinge.

6. Bottom Hinge: To jamb manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 12-1/2" from floor to center line of hinge.

7. Intermediate Hinges: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinges and from each other.



8. Hinge Mortise on Door Leaf: 1/4" to 5/16" from stop side of door.

9. Dead Bolt: Not more than 44" from floor to operating lever.

B. Comply with recommendations of Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, subject to approval, for heights of items not indicated.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Qualified hardware supplier's or manufacturer's representatives shall inspect installation and make adjustments.

1. Adjust closers, locks, and critical operational hardware.

2. Deliver instructions for maintenance and future adjustments to Owner's Representative.

3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. The Hardware Schedule establishes a type and standard of quality.

B. Examine Drawings and Specifications and furnish proper hardware for door openings, whether listed or not.

C. Bring omissions to attention of Architect prior to bid opening for instructions; otherwise, list will be considered complete; no extras will be allowed.

D. Hardware Groups: Hardware Group No. 01

Provide each SGL door(s) or gate(s) or PR door(s) or gate(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr

1 EA SPECIALTY DOORS & GATES

BY MANUFACTURERS REF SPEC

Hardware Group No. 02

Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr

1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-10 689 VON 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 112HD 83" EPT 628 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE EL99NL-OP 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1E72-PATD 626 Best 1 EA OFFSET DOOR PULL 8190-0 630 IVE 1 EA AUTO. OPERATOR 95319542 REG RF 628 LCN 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS441 626 IVE 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY ALUM DOOR MFR BLK MIS 1 EA DR BOTTOM SWEEP BY ALUM DOOR MFR BLK MIS 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAILS AL NGP 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS873PS914-AO2RS GRY VON 1 EA KEYSWITCH 653-04-CYL 630 SCE 2 EA ACTUATOR, WALL

MOUNT 8310-3856WF LCN



1 EA Closer 4610 628 LCN Hardware Group No. 03


3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET 93K7L14CSTK 626 BEST 1 EA KICK PLATE (PUSH SIDE) 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA MOP PLATE (PULL SIDE) 8400 4" X 1" LDW 630 IVE

1 EA DOME STOP FS436 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

Hardware Group No. 04 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA HOTEL GUEST LOCK 93K7L14CSTK 626 BEST 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOME STOP FS436 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP



3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 93K7D14CSTK 626 BEST 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOME STOP FS436 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99EO 626 VON

1 EA PASSAGE SET 93K7N14CSTK 626 BEST 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOME STOP FS436 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 26NA AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAILS AL NGP



Hardware Group No. 07 Provide each PR door(s) with the following:

Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 1 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 626 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE 93K7AB14CSTK 626 BEST 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 35VA AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAILS AL NGP 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A AL NGP


Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STORE RM LOCK 93K7D14CSTK 626 BEST 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A AL NGP 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAILS AL NGP


Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr

6 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB457 626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 93K7D14CSTK 626 BEST 2 EA SECURITY FLOOR STOP FS18S BLK IVE 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP 2 EA DRIP CAP 16A AL NGP 2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 35VA AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAILS AL NGP


Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET 93K7N14CSTK 626 BEST 1 EA CLOSER 4041 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOME STOP FS436 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAILS AL NGP




Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 1 EA SLIDING TRACK SYSTEM JUNIOR 160B SERIES 626 HAF 1 EA ROLLING RUNNING GEARJUNIOR 160B SERIES 941.60.014 626 HAF 1 EA CARRIER PROFILE JUNIOR 160B SERIES 941.60.024 626 HAF 2 EA WALL BUFFER STOPS JUNIOR 160B SERIES 941.60.051 626 HAF 1 EA FLOOR MTD GUIDE JUNIOR 160B SERIES 941.60.031 626 HAF 2 EA TRACK STOPPER JUNIOR 160B SERIES 941.60.041 626 HAF 1 EA END CAPS JUNIOR 160B SERIES 941.80.029 626 HAF 2 EA ADA FLUSH PULLS BFP16 630 MCK 1 EA DOORFIX BAR BOLT

LOCK 946-21-100 GAF HAF

1 EA STRIKE PLATE 946-23-910 ALU HAF 1 EA STRIKE 946-23-920 HAF 1 EA ROSETTE 946-23-921 HAF 1 EA LOWER GUIDE CHANNEL 942-50-600 HAF


Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGES 52 1076 001 ZINC STA 1 EA RACK BF50-01 - STA 1 EA PIVOT BRACKETS BF50-11 - STA 1 EA SNUGGERS BF50-22 - STA 1 EA PIVOTS BF50-33 and BF50-34 - STA 1 EA HANGERS BF50-41 - STA 1 SET PULLS BF50-61 PLAS STA 1 EA FLOOR GUIDES BF125-71 TP STA 1 EA JAMB BRACKETS BF50-83 AL STA 1 EA FLOOR GUIDE TRACK BF125-91 AL STA


Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99L 996L-RV-17 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER IE 72-S2-RP3 626 BEST 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 689 IVE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10” X 2” LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOOR STOP FS436 626 NGP 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 26NA AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAILS AL NGP




Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfr

8 EA HINGE PER DOOR MANUF. 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 626 1 PR AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB41P US32 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA PATIO LOCK, KEYLESS 93K0P14CSTK 626 BEST 1 EA CLOSER 1460 STD LCN 2 EA SECURITY FLOOR STOP FS18S BLK IVE 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP 2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 216AV AL PEMKO1 EA THRESHOLD PER DOOR MANUF. STD SADDLE LOW

PROFILE

AL



2 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIFIED HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE EL99L-NL 996L-RV-17 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER IE 72-S2-RP3 626 BEST 1 EA AUTO OPERATOR 9542REG 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10” X 2” LDW 630 IVE 1 EA DOOR STOP FS436 626 NGP 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 26NA AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAILS AL NGP 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914-2RS VON

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08725 - 1 Low Energy Door Operators

SECTION 08725

LOW ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide low energy power operated door operators for swinging doors, with accessories as required for complete operational installation; system to open and close door upon receipt of an actuating signal.

1. Project requires both high and low push plates in accordance with most recent California Building Code requirements.


1. Section 08410: Aluminum framed storefront entrances, including standard hardware.

2. Division 16: Final electrical connections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A156.19: Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors Standard.


A. Performance Requirements: Provide operators complying with applicable portions of ANSI A156.19, designed for doors of types indicated to receive operators.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature and maintenance data.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, materials and finishes, component connections, anchorage methods and locations and hardware; indicate exposed fasteners for specific approval.

1. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams, and data necessary for proper installation of closers to fabricators of related work and coordinate.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each exposed finish.


A. Installer: Firm with minimum five years successful experience installing door operator units similar to type specified and acceptable to operator manufacturer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Low Energy Door Operators: Complete operator system including door operator, controls, and attachment system designed for type of doors indicated and complying with requirements of ANSI A156.19 for low energy power operated door operators.

1. Manufacturers:

a. LCN. b. Horton Automatics. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Type: Match LCN/9540 Series Senior Swing surface mounted operator.

B. Controls: As indicated and as required by California Building Code, types as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of flush wall mounted push-button control units where not otherwise indicated.

1. Provide controls for operation by wheelchair footrests and at standard height (high-low).

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication: Provide each automatic door operator as complete, shop fabricated unit.

1. Complete the fabrication, assembly, finishing, application of hardware and other work before shipment, to greatest extent possible.

2. Disassemble only to extent necessary of shipment and installation.

B. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning and finishing. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners to radius of approximately 1/64".

C. Conceal fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect.

D. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to structure.

E. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed separators to prevent corrosion; separate metal surfaces at moving joints with non-metallic separators to prevent "freeze-up" of joints.

F. Painted Finish: Fluorocarbon coating finish based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 polymer; Architect reserves right to reject material finishes with objectionable variations.

1. Color: White tTo match entrance door finish as specified in Section 08410 - Aluminum Framed Storefronts.

G. Special Features:

1. Safety release clutch for obstructed closing and with checking for both opening and closing cycles.

2. Interlocks: Electrical interlocks which prevent operation of doors when locked or latched.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which automatic doors are to be installed; do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate low energy door operators with shop drawings and installation of applicable doors.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions for installation of low energy door operators.

B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or doors; anchor securely in place.

1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

C. Install complete door operator system including controls, control wiring and power units.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. After operation of completed installation equivalent to three days use, readjust door operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety.

B. Lubricate operating equipment.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 08800 - 1 Glazing

SECTION 08800

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Provide glass and glazing for hollow metal doors, hollow metal frames, and wood doors including accessories as required for complete installation.


1. Section 08410: Aluminum framed storefront glazing. 2. Section 08360: Sectional overhead doors. 3. Section 08555: Aluminum window and door glazing. 4. Section 10810: Metal framed mirrors.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.


A. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with California Building Code, CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.

B. Fire Rated Glass: Provide glass identical to glass tested per ASTM E163, labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to applicable authorities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of glass other than clear glass, and each type of exposed glazing material.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of wired glass. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Clear Fire Rated, Impact Resistant Glass: Glazing quality, clear fire rated glass, polished both surfaces; nominal thickness 1/4”; UL listed clear fire rated glass; suitable for applications and fire ratings indicated on Drawings.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Technical Glass Products/Pilkington Pyrodur and Pyrostop. b. SAFTI First/SuperLite 20, SuperLite I XL, and SuperLite I XL IGU c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Glazing Materials: Type approved for use in applications indicated for required fire ratings; refer to fire label requirements.

3. Location: Provide at fire rated openings indicated to receive clear fire rated glass.



B. Wired Glass (Suitable for Impact Areas): Glazing quality, clear fire rated wired glass, polished both surfaces; square mesh, nominal thickness 1/4"; UL listed fire rated glass and suitable for applications and fire ratings indicated on Drawings.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Technical Glass Products/Pilkington WireLite NT and Pyroshield Plus. b. SAFTI First/SuperLite I-W. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Glazing Materials: Type approved for use in applications indicated for required fire ratings; refer to fire label requirements.

3. Location: Provide at fire rated openings indicated to receive wired glass.

C. Spacer Shims: Silicone compatible, 50 durometer hardness; 3" long by 3/32" thick by 1/4" high.

D. Setting Blocks: 70-90 durometer hardness; 4” long by 3/8” thick by 1/4” high standard setting blocks.

E. Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, elastomeric one-component silicone glazing sealants as recommended by sealant manufacturer for application involved.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Dow Corning Corp. b. General Electric Co. c. Pecora Corp. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and framing members to receive glass immediately before glazing; remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrate.

B. Apply primer to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual and glazing manufacturer instructions.

1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.

2. Comply with NFPA 80 for glass in fire rated openings.

B. Place setting blocks at quarter points in thin course of sealant.



C. Install removable stops with glass centered in space with spacer shims at 2'-0" intervals on both sides of glass, 1/4" below sightline.

D. Sealant Glazing: Fill gap between glass and stops with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass but not more than 3/8" below sightline.

1. Apply sealant to uniform and level line, flush with sightline; tool or wipe sealant surface for smooth appearance; at exterior locations tool sealant so water is carried away from glass.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Mark glass after installation by crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass; do not apply markers to surface of glass.

B. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after sealant cures; cure sealants for high early strength and durability.

C. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 09220 - 1 Portland Cement Plaster

SECTION 09220

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Provide three coat Portland cement plaster (stucco) with metal lath and accessories as required for complete finished system.

2. Provide two coat Portland cement plaster (scratch and brown coats) for exterior wall tile applications, with metal lath and accessories as required for complete system ready for tile application; tile is specified in Section 09300.


1. Section 07265: Building envelope underlayment. 2. Section 09300: Tile. 3. Section 09900: Painting of stucco.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C926: Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster.

B. ASTM C1063: Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Plaster.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information for each lathing material and accessory, and for plaster materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of control and expansion joints where not shown on Drawings.

C. Samples: Furnish 24” by 24” samples for each color and texture using materials and methods specified including lath.

1. Maintain on job site for Architect review.


A. Mock-Up: Provide mock-up of Portland cement plaster (stucco), minimum 100 sf.




A. Take precautionary measures to ensure plaster is not subjected to excessive sun and wind which could cause uneven and excessive evaporation, premature dehydration, or cracking.

B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not apply plaster unless minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees F has been and continues to be maintained for minimum 48 hours prior to application and until plaster is cured.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement Plaster: Provide either neat or ready-mixed (where applicable) materials, at Contractor's option, complying with ASTM C926.

1. Basecoat Materials: Provide factory prepared blend of Portland cement, sand, reinforcing fibers, and lime conforming to ASTM C926.

a. Manufacturers:

1) BMI Products/BMI 690. 2) LaHabra Stucco/BasiC926. 3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

b. Cement: Normal Type 1 or 1A Portland cement, ASTM C150. c. Hydrated Lime: Special finishing hydrated lime, Type S, ASTM C206. d. Aggregate: Natural sand, conforming to ASTM C897 or C144.

2. Brown Coat Water Acrylic Admix: Acrylic polymer specifically manufactured for use in Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) applications and which will not detrimentally affect finish.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Larsen Products Corp./Acrylic Admix 101. 2) Thoro System Products, Inc./Acryl 60. 3) Chem-Masters Corp./Cretelox. 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

3. Finishing Materials:

a. Primer: Match ParexLahabra, Inc./LaHabra Acrylic Primer, VOC compliant, 100 percent flat acrylic used to provide uniformly absorbent, color-matched surface for application of finish coat.

b. Finish Coat: Match ParexLahabra, Inc./LaHabra Acrylic Finish.

1) Texture: Match LaHabra 20/30 Float Finish type “sand finish”. 2) Color: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Water: Clean, fresh and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances.



B. Metal Components: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1063.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Unimast Inc. b. Phillips Manufacturing Co. (formerly National Gypsum). c. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. d. Western Metal Lath Co. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Exterior Components: Hot-dip galvanized finish; ASTM A924 and A653 minimum G90 for 18 gage and lighter formed metal products, ASTM A123 galvanized after fabrication for 16 gage and heavier products.

a. Exposed Exterior Components: Zinc accessories unless fully concealed in plaster.

3. Exterior Metal Lath: Expanded diamond mesh; minimum 2.5 lbs per square yard.

a. Backing: Building paper specified in Section 07265.

b. Self-Furring: Where over solid substrate, provide “V” groove type to hold lath approximately 1/4" from supporting base.

c. Tie Wire: ASTM A641, soft temper, Class 1 zinc coated; minimum 16 gage for tying metal lath to furring channels and metal lath to metal lath.

4. Inside Corner Mesh: Minimum 26 gage steel; perforated or expanded flanges or clips shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2" x 2" size.

C. Accessories: Provide as indicated, as recommended by referenced standards, and as required for complete installation.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Keene Products from Metalex, a Division of The Koller Group. b. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim. c. Lath manufacturers. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Casing Beads and Base Screeds: Minimum 26 gage, square edges at casing beads, drip type base screeds; provide with expanded flanges.

3. Expansion Joints: Two-piece slip type joints; commonly referred to as No. 40.

4. Control Joints: One piece metal joint designed to interlock with plaster similar to Keene/XJ15-3.



5. Aluminum Vent Strips and Channel Screeds: Extruded 6063 alloy, T5 or T6 temper aluminum, minimum 0.05" thick; with manufacturer's standard baked-on finish.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Fry Reglet Corp./Plaster Moldings. 2) MM Systems Corp./Dura-Trim. 3) Gordon Inc./Final Forms II. 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

b. Color: As selected by Architect.

6. Head Drip Screeds: Match CEMCO/#6 Head Drip Screed.

D. Anchorages: Tie wire, nails, screws and other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit application.

2.2 PLASTER MIXES

A. Provide plaster mixes in accordance with ASTM C926 as appropriate to the substrate indicated and the approved samples.

B. Mix only as much plaster as can be used in one hour.

C. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.

D. Protect mixes from frost, dust and evaporation.

E. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prior to application ensure mechanical and electrical services behind surfaces to receive cement plaster have been tested and approved.

B. Ensure framing has been properly installed and rigidly secured.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Erect furring and lath in accordance with ASTM C1063.

B. Install work true to lines and levels and to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction.

C. Isolation: Isolate lathing and metal support system where it abuts building structure horizontally, and where partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, to prevent transfer of building loads into plaster.

1. Install slip or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support.

D. Frame both sides of expansion joints independently unless otherwise indicated, do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories.



E. Fixture Support Framing: Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing where work is indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services and similar work requiring attachment and support.

F. Coordinate installation of anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind framing; allow such items to be installed after framing is complete.

G. Install expansion and control joints so plaster areas do not exceed 120 ft2, and with area sides having a maximum one to two and a half (1:2-1/2) ratio, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

H. Metal Lathing: Apply lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports; secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports; lap sides minimum 1-1/2"; secure with tie wires.

1. Continuously reinforce internal angles.

2. Place 6" wide x 12" long strips of metal lath diagonally at corners of openings; secure rigidly in place.

3. Place 6" wide strips of metal lath at junctions of dissimilar materials; place parallel with dissimilar materials; secure rigidly in place.

I. Installation of Metal Accessories:

1. Fasten in place true to line and in correct relation to adjacent materials and as required to prevent dislodging and misalignment by subsequent operations.

2. Fasten at both ends and at maximum 12" on center along sides.

3. Bring grounding edge of accessories to true lines, plumb, level, and straight.

4. Install accessories to provide required depth of plaster and to bring plaster surface to required plane.

5. Install continuous corner reinforcement for full length of external corners.

6. Install sill and drip screeds with paper sheathing and lath installed over attachment flange of screeds.

7. Beads: Use single length of metal beads wherever length of run does not exceed longest standard stock length available; miter or cope corners.

a. Provide casing beads where plaster abuts dissimilar construction and at perimeter of openings where edges of plaster will not be concealed by other work.

J. Portland Cement Plaster: Conform to ASTM C926.

1. Stucco: Apply three coat cement plaster system, scratch, brown, and finish coats.

2. Exterior Tile Base: Apply two coat cement plaster system, scratch and brown coats.



3. Apply first base coat (scratch coat) between 3/8” and 1/2” thickness, and second base coat (brown coat) to between 1/4” and 5/8", with total thickness measured from back face of lath 7/8” typical, minimum.

a. Allow each coat to moist cure for minimum period of 48 hours; b. Moist cure first base coat (scratch coat) during 48 hour period.

4. Apply scratch and brown coats by hand.

a. Apply scratch coat with sufficient material to embed and fill spaces of lath and to form keys through metal lath.

b. Allow scratch coat to set slightly, then score surface using corrosion resistant stainless steel scratching tool with teeth 1” apart.

c. Score surfaces in direction perpendicular to direction of supporting framing.

d. Apply brown coat to scratch coat, brining out to grounds, flat to true surface.

e. Reconsolidate brown coat by floating or brushing to eliminate “slick spots” and assure good mechanical bond.

5. Allow base coats to cure for minimum 7 days prior to application of finish.

6. Maintain surface flatness, with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

7. Avoid excessive working of surface, delay trowelling as long as possible to avoid drawing excess fines to surface.

K. Finish Coat: Apply in accordance with ASTM C926, manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, and specified requirements to achieve finish to match approved sample panel.

1. Prior to application correct surface irregularities in base coat such as trowel marks, board lines, and reinforcing mesh laps.

2. Do not apply finish until Portland cement base coats have been allowed to cure.

3. Minimum Thickness: 1/8”.

4. Apply primer to properly prepared and cured base in continuous coat as recommended by primer manufacturer.

5. Apply finish coat over dried primer by hand using stainless steel trowel to achieve approved appearance and texture. Maintain wet edge to obtain uniform appearance.

6. Applicators shall use same tools, equipment and techniques to achieve uniformity of finish.

7. Finish coat shall be applied and textured continually over wall surface. Work to corners or joints, and do not allow material to set up within a distinct wall area.

8. Employ sufficient staging and workers to accomplish uniform appearance.



9. Cure proprietary finish in accordance with manufacture instructions.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, patch, point, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections.

B. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing, check cracking, dry-outs, efflorescence, sweat-outs, and similar defects.

C. Finish cutting and patching to match undamaged plaster; patching shall not be visible in finished installation.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Promptly remove plaster from surfaces not indicated to be plastered.

B. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 09260 - 1 Gypsum Board Assemblies

SECTION 09260

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide gypsum board systems including gypsum board, joint treatment, acoustical accessories, resilient channels, and general accessories for complete installation.

1. Provide suspension system for gypsum board ceilings.


1. Section 07210: Building thermal batt insulation and vapor barriers. 2. Section 07840: Firestopping. 3. Section 09300: Cementitious backer unit tile substrates.


A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Listed by Underwriter's Laboratory, Gypsum Association (GA) File No's in GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual or other listing approved by applicable authorities.

B. Suspended Ceiling Performance Requirements: Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 and ASTM C840 unless otherwise specified.

1. Loads: Comply with California Building Code requirements for design of metal framing for gypsum board systems.

a. Deflection: Maximum L/240.

2. Seismic Requirements: Comply with code requirements for seismic bracing.

C. Systems Responsibility: Provide products manufactured by or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board to maintain single-source responsibility for system.

D. Openings: Obtain dimensions and locations from other trades and provide openings and enclosures for accessories, specialties, equipment, and ductwork.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C840: Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

B. ASTM C754: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for gypsum board, suspension system, and acoustical accessories.

B. Manufacturer’s Certification: Furnish manufacturer's certification indicating products comply with Contract Documents and applicable codes.


A. Do not begin installation of interior gypsum board until space is enclosed, space is not exposed to other sources of water, and space is free of standing water.

B. Maintain areas to receive gypsum board at minimum 50 degree F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after application until drying of joint compound is complete; comply with ASTM C840.

C. Immediately remove from site gypsum board for interior use exposed to water, including gypsum board with water stains, with signs of mold, and gypsum board with mildew.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. National Gypsum Co.

B. Georgia-Pacific Corp.

C. United States Gypsum Co., USG Corp.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C840; maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut, tapered edges on boards to be finished.

1. Typical: ASTM C1396, Type X, fire rated gypsum board, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Tile Substrates: Cementitious backer units specified in Section 09300 - Tile.

B. Gypsum Board Accessories: Comply with ASTM C840.

1. Provide protective coated steel corner beads and edge trim; type designed to be concealed in finished construction by tape and joint compound.

2. Corner Beads: Manufacturer's standard metal beads.

3. Edge Trim: “J”, "L", "LK", or "LC" casing beads.



4. Reinforcing Tape, Joint Compound, Adhesive, Water, Fasteners: Types recommended by system manufacturer and conforming to ASTM C475.

a. Typical Joint Compound: Chemical hardening type for bedding and filling, ready-mixed or powder vinyl type for topping.

5. Control Joints: Back to back casing beads.

a. Back control joints with 4 mil thick polyethylene air seal.

C. Suspension System: Comply with ASTM C754, provide gages as recommended by manufacturer for spans and loads indicated and as required by applicable codes.

1. Hangers: ASTM A641, Class 1 wire not less than sizes in Table No. 5 of ASTM C754 and as required by applicable codes; hanger rods, flat hangers, and angle-type hangers as required.

2. Suspension System: ASTM C635, suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members interlocking to form supporting network; recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer.

3. Fasteners and Anchorages: As recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer.

D. Acoustical Accessories:

1. Resilient Channels: Provide resilient channels where indicated and where required to provide required sound transmission classifications.

a. Fasteners and Anchorages: As recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer for maximum STC and NRC ratings.

2. Acoustical Insulation: Preformed mineral fiber, ASTM C665, Type I; friction fit type without integral vapor barrier; as required to meet STC ratings indicated, or of thickness indicated.

3. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C919, type recommended for use in conjunction with gypsum board.

a. Type: Paintable, non-shrinking and non-cracking where exposed, nondrying, nonskinning, nonstaining, and nonbleeding where concealed.

4. Electrical Box Pads: Provide at outlet, switch and telephone boxes in walls with acoustical insulation.

a. Manufacturers for Non-Fire Rated Partitions:

1) Harry A. Lowry & Associates (800.772.2521)/Lowry's Electrical Box Pads. 2) Tremco Sheet Caulking (650.572.1656). 3) Hevi-Duty Nelson (800.331.7325)/Putty Pads. 4) Specified Technologies, Inc. (800.992.1180)/Putty Pads. 5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Ceiling Framing Installation: Erect in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Coordinate location of hangers with other work; provide trapeze supports and steel bracing as required to support ceiling.

2. Install ceiling furring independent of walls, columns, and above-ceiling work.

3. Space main carrying channels at maximum 48" on center, not more than 6" from perimeter walls.

a. Lap splices minimum 12" and secure together 2" from each end of splice.

4. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at maximum 24" on center and not more than 2" from perimeter walls.

5. Lap splices minimum 8" and secure together 2" from each end of splice.

6. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing; extend bracing minimum 24" past each end of openings.

7. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

B. Gypsum Board Installation: Install in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to furring and to framing.

2. Erect gypsum board with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

3. For fire rated systems comply with requirements for fire ratings.

4. Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces and as directed by Architect.

a. Provide where system abuts structural elements. b. Provide at dissimilar materials. c. Lengths exceeding 30'-0" in partitions. d. Ceiling areas exceeding 50'-0" or 2500 square feet. e. Wings of "L", "U" and "T" shaped ceilings.

5. Place corner beads at external corners; use longest practical lengths.

6. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

7. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, corners and openings to produce surface ready to receive finishes; feather coats onto adjoining surfaces.



8. Finishing: Comply with Gypsum Association (GA) “Levels of Gypsum Board Finish”.

a. GA Level 4, three coat finishing and sanding is required for surfaces indicated to be painted; provide flush, smooth joints and surfaces ready for applied paint finishes.

9. Remove and replace defective work.

C. Acoustical Accessories Installation:

1. Resilient Channel Erection: Erect in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for maximum acoustical ratings.

a. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction.

2. Place acoustical insulation tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

3. Place acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:

a. Metal Framing: One or two beads. b. Base layer and face layer. c. Penetrations of partitions.

4. Tolerance: Maximum 1/4" space between gypsum board at floor, ceiling, and penetrations.

5. Install electrical box pads with pads molded and pressed on back side of box, closing openings, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, for complete acoustical barrier.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 09300 - 1 Tile

SECTION 09300

TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide tile installations with accessories, as required for complete installation.

1. Project includes exterior application of wall tile over two coat plaster base. 2. Provide cementitious backer unit tile substrate.


1. Section 06200: Solid polymer shower walls including soap shelves. 2. Section 09220: Lath and plaster including two coat base for exterior tile.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A108.5: Installation of Tile with Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

B. ANSI A108.10: Installation of Grout in Tilework.

C. ANSI A108.11: Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.

D. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of material to be provided for Project.

B. Samples: Furnish each type of tile clearly indicating pattern, coloration and joints.

1. Color Charts: Submit actual tile sections showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of tile.

2. Prepare two 12" square sample panels of each selected type of tile and grout.


A. Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where ceramic tile work is being performed, so as to allow tile to properly set.

B. Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure excessive temperature changes do not occur.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Tile: Types as indicated; ceramic tile to comply with ANSI A137.1 Specifications for Ceramic Tile for types and grades of tiles; furnish tile complying with Standard Grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Olean Tile Company, Inc. b. Dal-Tile Corp. c. Butler Johnson Ceramics, BJCeramics, and Crossville. d. Summitville Tiles, Inc. e. Manufacturers listed on Finish Schedule. f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Color, Style and Pattern: As indicated on Finish Schedule and conforming to Architect approved samples.

3. Floor Tile: Provide non-slip units with minimum wet and dry value 0.60 coefficient of friction when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028.

4. Base and Trim: Provide matching trim pieces, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile as directed by Architect; types as indicated, as selected by Architect where not indicated.

B. Latex Thin Set: Thinset bond coat, consisting of latex-cementitious mortar conforming to ANSI A118.4.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Laticrete International Inc. b. Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment. c. Custom Building Products. d. Mapei Corp. e. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

C. Latex-Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7, latex-cementitious type, uniform in color, resistant to shrinkage.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Laticrete International Inc. b. Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment. c. Custom Building Products. d. Mapei Corp. e. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Color: Match tile unless otherwise indicated.



D. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 aggregated Portland cement with woven glass-fiber mesh on both faces; approximately 1/2" thick; UL fire rated as required to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.

1. Manufacturers:

a. USG Industries, Durabond Division/Durock. b. National Gypsum Co./PermaBase Cement Board. c. Custom Building Products/Wonderboard. d. James Hardie Building Products/Hardibacker. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Contractor Option: Georgia Pacific/DenShield Type X.

E. Cleaning and Sealing Materials: As recommended by tile and grout manufacturers, such as Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment CeramaSeal.

F. Special Tile Trim Pieces: Provide as indicated on Drawings.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Schluter Systems L.P. b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

G. Precast Shower Receptors: Match Florestone Products Co., Inc Acorn Engineering./Terrazzo-Ware Shower Base.Precast Shower Receptors.

1. TypicalApparatus Bay: Match Florestone/Model 200-Acorn Engineering/ Terrazzo-Ware Shower Base – Integral threshold series SBR-4836-3F, 36” by 48” with integral drain molded into receptor.

2. ADA Bathroom: Match FlorestoneAcorn Engineering/Model 400Terrazo-Ware Shower Base – “ADA” Series, 36” by 60” SBADA-6036-3F with integral drain molded into receptor.

3. Adaptable Bathroom: Match Acorn Engineering/Terrazo-Ware Shower Base – “ADA” Series, SBADA-6030-3F with integral drain molded into receptor.

2.4.

2.2 MIXES

A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site-made leveling coats, setting beds and grout as recommended by the TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

B. Mix and proportion pre-mixed setting beds and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prior to installing tile, ensure surfaces are level.

1. Tolerance: Maximum surface variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured.

C. Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper installation; apply latex leveling material where necessary to meet required tolerances.

D. Cementitious Backer Units: Install units in accordance with ANSI A108.11, manufacturer's recommendations, and as required to provide fire ratings indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install tile in accordance with referenced ANSI Standards and TCNA recommendations for type of substrate and indicated setting method.

1. Latex-Cement Thin Set Exterior Wall Tile: TCNA W201over lath and plaster base; lath and plaster base are provided in Section 09220 – Portland Cement Plaster.

2. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Concrete: TCNA F113.

3. Latex-Cement Thin Set Wall Tile over Cementitious Backer Units: TCNA W244.

B. Place tile in accordance with patterns indicated on Drawings or as directed by Architect; carefully plan tile layouts, ensure pattern is uninterrupted from one surface to the next and through doorways.

1. Apply latex thin set to back of tile where necessary to ensure 100% bond between bond coat and substrate; replace tiles which break due to voids between tile and substrate.

C. Neatly cut tile around fixtures and drains; accurately form corners, base, intersections and returns.

1. Base, Coves: Flush cove type with base grout joint on wall, cove tile on floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Corners and Edges: Bullnose tile unless otherwise indicated.

D. Locate expansion joints, control joints, contraction joints, and isolation joints where indicated; where not indicated, provide as recommended by TCNA Handbook and as approved by Architect.

1. Install special trim pieces as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, true to lines and levels indicated and in correct relationship with tile and adjacent materials.



E. Ensure tile joints are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in tile size; ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout.

F. Sound tile after setting, remove and replace hollow sounding units.

G. Allow tile to set for a minimum 48 hours prior to grouting.

H. Grout tile to comply with recommendations of TCNA and as specified.

I. Leave completed installation free of broken, damaged and faulty tile.

3.3 CLEANING AND SEALING

A. Clean tile surfaces free of foreign matter upon completion of grouting.

B. Seal tile and grout surfaces where recommended by manufacturer for materials and applications involved; comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 09620 - 1 Sports Flooring

SECTION 09620

SPORTS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide sheet type recycled rubber resilient sports flooring system for direct bonding to concrete substrate.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for premixed grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sheet flooring direction, border, and joints.

C. Samples: Submit samples indicating color of sports flooring and exposed accessories.


A. Slip Resistance: Provide materials tested under ASTM D2047, James Slip Test with minimum 0.6 rating for floors.

B. Mock-Up: Provide minimum 100 sq.ft. mock-up of play surface installation, with edge and corner conditions, as approved by Architect.

1. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into completed installation.


A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonizing and dusting.

C. Maintain minimum 70 degree F air temperature at flooring installation area for 3 days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.

D. Store flooring materials in area of application; allow three days for material to reach same temperature as area of application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Resilient Sports Flooring: Provide recycled rubber sports floor surface, nominal 9mm sheets.

1. Manufacturer:

a. ECORE Int./ECOsurfaces Recycled Rubber Flooring, ECONights for Sports. b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.



2. Colors: As indicated on Finish Schedule; as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors where not otherwise indicated.

3. Fire Resistance: Minimum 0.40 critical radiant flux, ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.

4. Surface Treatments: Provide system with fungistatic and bacteriostatic treatment incorporated throughout thickness of surface.

B. Adhesives: Nontoxic type as recommended by surface manufacturer for substrate indicated.

C. Accessories: Provide subsurface fillers and accessories as recommended by sports play surface manufacturer for complete installation as indicated.

1. Subfloor Filler: White premixed latex-cement paste designed for providing thin solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.

a. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without spalling.

2. Edge Strips: Homogeneous vinyl or rubber, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match sports flooring.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installing play surface, ensure surfaces are level.

1. Tolerances: Maximum surface variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured, and properly sloped to drain.

C. Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper installation; apply spot latex leveling material where necessary to meet required tolerances.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Conform to ASTM F710 and manufacturer's recommendations for preparation.

B. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps; fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and defects with subfloor filler.

C. Clean floor and apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surface; prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Sports Surface: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions for adhesive installation of sports surface.

1. Match approved mock-up installation; carefully plan layout, neatly cut where required for configurations indicated.



2. Lay sports flooring with minimum seams, with pattern parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern.

3. Terminate sports flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.

4. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges.

5. Scribe sports flooring to walls, columns, floor outlets and other appurtenances, to produce tight joints.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 09657 - 1 Resilient Base

SECTION 09657

RESILIENT BASE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide resilient base, including base for carpeted areas, and accessories as required for complete installation.


1. Section 09685: Carpet tile edge strips.


A. Performance Requirements: Provide materials tested under ASTM E648, Flooring

Radiant Panel Test, with results of 0.45 watts/cm2 or higher.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of each base color and type.


A. Maintain minimum 70 degree F air temperature at installation area for 3 days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.

B. Store materials in area of application; allow three days for material to reach same temperature as area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Roppe Rubber Corporation.

B. Burke-Mercer Flooring Products.

C. Flexco Co.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Resilient Base: Rubber base conforming to ASTM F1861, with premolded end stops and external corners; 1/8" gage; provide coved base at hard floor surfaces, straight base at carpet unless otherwise indicated.

1. Type: Match Roppe/Pinnacle Base.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 09657 - 2 Resilient Base

2. Height: 4" unless otherwise indicated.

3. Color: As indicated on Finish Schedule, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors where not otherwise indicated.

B. Primers and Adhesives: Water-resistant nontoxic types recommended by base manufacturer for specified material and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Apply to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

1. Fit base joints tight and vertical; maintain minimum measurement of 18" between joints.

B. Miter internal corners; use molded sections for external corners and exposed ends.

C. Install base on solid backing, adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces; fill voids along top edge of base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions.

E. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8" over 10'-0".

3.2 CLEAN-UP

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without causing damage.

B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 09685 - 1 Carpet Tile

SECTION 09685

CARPET TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide high traffic type carpet tile including edge strips where carpeting terminates at other floor finishes and accessories as required for complete finished installation.


1. Section 09657: Resilient base.


A. Performance Requirements:

1. Fire and Smoke: Carpet tiles shall have passed following fire and smoke tests.

a. DOC-FF-1-70: Pass b. NFPA 258 (Smoke Density): 450 or less. c. ASTM E648 (Flooring Radiant Panel Test): 0.45 or higher.

2. Static: Carpet tile shall develop less than 3.0 kilovolts of static at 70 degrees F and 20 percent relative humidity.

B. Indoor Air Quality Standards: Provide carpet materials that bear Carpet and Rug Institute “Green Label Plus”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Prior to final acceptance of carpet tile installation, submit manufacturer's detailed maintenance recommendations for care, cleaning and repair of carpet tiles installed.

1. Submit substrate moisture test results along with manufacturer recommendations.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate carpet tile layout, direction of carpet tiles, adhesive to be used, method of integrating edge strips with carpet tile, and installation procedures.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each carpet tile type and color, and of each color of edge strip.

D. Certificate of Compliance: Furnish manufacturer's certificate of compliance stating each material delivered conforms to Specifications.

E. Manufacturer Certification: Furnish manufacturer’s certification that carpet tiles furnished for Project are suitable for high traffic applications and are suitable for applications indicated.




A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience in carpet tile installation and approved by carpet tile manufacturer.

1. Upon request, submit letter from carpet manufacturer stating installer is acceptable.

B. Mock-Up: Provide minimum 12' by 12' mock-up of carpet tile for approval prior to beginning installation; approved mock-up may be incorporated into finished installation.


A. Do not commence carpet tile installation until painting and finishing work is complete and ceiling and other overhead work has been tested, approved and completed, unless specifically approved.

B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F for at least 24 hours prior to installation; relative humidity shall be approximately that at which area is to be maintained.

C. Schedule, receive and place carpet tile on floors indicated; protect from soiling and damage during transit, storage, and installation.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for promptly making good or replacing defective materials or workmanship.

1. Repairs shall take place within ten days of written notification.


1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Submit to Project Owner not less than 10% extra maintenance stock of carpet tiles; mark boxes indicating color and location installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. New Patcraft.

B. Designweave.

C. Interface Flooring Systems, Inc.

D. Milliken Contract Carpets.

E. Collins & Aikman.

F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Carpet Tile: High traffic type carpet tile as indicated on Finish Schedule; type as selected by Architect based on following criteria where not otherwise indicated on Finish Schedule.

1. Type: High traffic thermally bonded reinforced backed modular carpet tiles.

2. Yarn: Sixth or later generation continuous filament soil hiding nylon.

3. Face Weight: Minimum 30 oz. per square yard.

4. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Finish Schedule, as selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of colors and patterns, not limited to one type where not otherwise indicated..

B. Adhesive: Nontoxic type recommended by carpet tile manufacturer to suit application and expected service.

C. Edge Strips: Rubber; manufacturer's standard colors as selected.

D. Leveling Material: Latex-cement material designed for providing thin solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.

1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without spalling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10 feet.

B. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet tile; allow floors to thoroughly dry.

B. Use leveling and ramping material to patch cracks, small holes, leveling and for ramping to provide finished carpet tile within 1/2" of adjacent flooring materials.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install carpet tiles in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Adhere tiles to subfloor unless otherwise approved.



B. Prime substrate if required and as recommended by manufacturer. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure proper adhesion. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet tile before initial set.

C. Lay carpet tile with run of pile in direction of anticipated traffic; do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening.

1. Finished installation to provide monolithic carpet tile appearance as approved by Architect.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces.

E. Fit carpet tiles snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces, leaving no gaps.

F. Lay installation tight and flat to subfloor well fastened and uniform in appearance; ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area.

G. Install edging strips where carpet tile terminates at other floor coverings; use full length pieces only, butt tight to vertical surfaces; where splicing cannot be avoided. Butt ends tight and flush.

H. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpet tiled surfaces for not less than 24 hours or until adhesive is set.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of carpet tile installation in each area, visually inspect carpet tile installed in that area and immediately remove dirt, soil and foreign substance from exposed face.

B. Inspect adjacent surfaces and remove marks and stains caused by carpet tile installation.

C. Remove packaging materials, carpet tile scraps, and other debris from carpet tile installation.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 09900 - 1 Paints and Coatings

SECTION 09900

PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Provide painting and finishing of exposed items and surfaces.

a. Specified surface preparation, priming and coats of paint are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.

b. Painting and finishing includes field finishing of exterior and interior items not listed as "Surfaces not to be Painted" unless clearly indicated otherwise.

c. Painting and finishing includes field finishing of select shop finished items where indicated as required to match adjacent surfaces, such as mechanical grilles and registers.

d. Field paint exposed bare and covered pipes, ducts, and hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work in occupied spaces.

2. Wood Doors: Contractor option to factory finish or field finish, coordinate with Section 08210 - Wood Doors.

B. Related Sections: Shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various Specification sections.

1. Section 02577: Pavement marking. 2. Section 06400: Shop finishing of architectural woodwork. 3. Section 09911: Site painting. 4. Section 09960: High performance coating for exterior field painted metal.

C. Surfaces Not To Be Painted:

1. Finished items including finished metal surfaces.

2. Walls and ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas.

3. Moving parts of operating mechanical and electrical units.

4. Labels: Keep equipment identification and fire rating labels free of paint.

5. Plastic smoke stops and weather-stripping at doors.

6. Exterior Portland cement plaster.



1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material.

B. Samples: Submit samples for review of color and texture; provide list of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.

1. Brush-Outs: Submit samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions, on hardboard.

a. Submit 8" by 10" samples of wood finishes on actual wood surfaces; label and identify each as to location and application.

2. Field Samples: Duplicate painted finishes of approved samples on actual wall surfaces and components for approval prior to commencing work.

a. Size: Minimum 100 sf located where approved. b. Components: One full component as directed. c. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review.

C. Certificates: Furnish certificates from each manufacturer stating materials are top quality lines and suitable for intended use on this Project.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Furnish materials approved for use by applicable air quality management district for limitations of volatile organic compounds for architectural or special coatings as applicable.


A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, with:

1. Name of material, color and sheen. 2. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 4. Thinning and application instructions.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Apply water-base paints when temperature of surfaces and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 degrees F.

B. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified.

D. Provide additional temporary ventilation during interior application of paints to eliminate volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions from interior spaces as quickly as possible.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Kelly Moore Paint Co.

B. Benjamin Moore & Co.

C. Sherwin-Williams Co.

D. P.P.G. Industries, Inc., Coatings and Resins Division.

E. Dunn-Edwards Corp.

F. ICI Paints.

G. Vista Paint Co.

H. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Definition: "Paint" as used herein means coating systems including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.

B. Material Quality: Provide top line quality commercial grade (professional painter) paints; materials not bearing manufacturer's identification as a best-grade product shall not be acceptable.

1. Primers: Provide premium grade primers recommended by paint manufacturer for substrates indicated and for finish systems specified.

2. Undercoats and Barrier Coats: Provide undercoat paints produced by same manufacturer as finish coats; use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

3. Finish Coats: Provide finish coats capable of being washed with mild detergent without loss of color, sheen, or pigments.

a. Color pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated; no lead content permitted.

4. Finish Coat Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints, undercoats, and barrier coats used.

a. Review other Specification sections in which prime paints are provided; ensure compatibility of total coatings systems.

b. Upon request from other trades furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use.

c. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and prime as required.

d. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in use of specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.



C. Colors and Finishes: Prior to commencement of painting work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted.

1. Use of proprietary names in color selection is not intended to imply exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.

2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on site.

D. State and Local VOC Requirements: Comply with Bay Area Air Quality Management District requirements for volatile organic compound emissions.

1. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Select materials that generate least amount of pollution; consider pollution and volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions generated during manufacturing, transport, installation, use, and disposal.

2. Avoid materials that contain ozone depleting chemicals and that emit potentially harmful volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

3. Avoid materials that can leach harmful chemicals into ground water; do not allow potentially harmful chemicals to enter sewers nor storm drains.

4. Select materials that can be reused or recycled and materials with significant percentage of recycled content; set specific recycled content percentages for individual materials; avoid materials difficult to recycle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied.

1. Start of painting work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions of surfaces and conditions within any particular area.

2. Where exposed items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned in Schedules, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas.

3. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to a durable paint film.

B. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as specified for substrate condition.

C. Remove hardware, accessories, and items in place and not to be painted, or provide protection prior to surface preparation and painting; after painting reinstall removed items.

D. Clean surfaces before applying paint; remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning; program cleaning so contaminants from cleaning process do not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces.



E. Cementitious Materials: Prepare by removing efflorescence, chalk, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze.

1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted.

2. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, neutralize before application of paint.

3. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds manufacturer's printed directions.

4. Concrete Floors: Clean using a commercial solution of muriatic acid, or other etching cleaner prior to painting; flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid, and allow floor to dry before painting.

F. Wood: Clean wood surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances; sandpaper smooth surfaces exposed to view, and dust off.

1. Scrape and clean seasoned knots and apply thin coat of recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat.

2. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job; prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

3. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler; sandpaper smooth when dry.

G. Ferrous Metals: Touch up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged using same type of primer as applied in shop or barrier coat compatible with finish paint.

1. Bare Surfaces: Clean surfaces that are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants, using non-petroleum based solvent; primer and touch-up primer to be zinc-rich primer.

H. Mix painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

I. Store materials in tightly covered containers; maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

J. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application; do not stir surface film into material, if necessary, strain material before using.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Apply additional coats when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until paint is a uniform finish, color and appearance.



2. Provide extra attention to assure dry film thickness at corners and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces; paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment and furniture with prime coat only.

4. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.

5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

6. Finish doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as faces.

7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel coat and each varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation.

1. Allow time between successive coatings to permit proper drying.

2. Do not recoat until paint feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure.

C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended by coating manufacturer.

D. Prime Coats: Apply to items not previously primed; recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat.

E. Finish Coats: Provide even texture; leave no laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

1. Opaque Finishes: Provide opaque, uniform finish, color and coverage; cloudiness, spotting, holidays, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface imperfections are not acceptable.

2. Transparent and Stained Finishes: Produce glass smooth surface film of even luster; provide with no cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, and other surface imperfections.

F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage; remove, refinish or repaint work not accepted.

3.3 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Work: Provide following paint systems.

1. Metal: Refer to Section 09960 – High Performance Coating.



2. Opaque Finished Wood: Semigloss sheen.

a. 1st Coat: Primer undercoat. b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Exterior 100% acrylic enamel.

B. Interior Work: Provide following paint systems.

1. Gypsum Board Systems: Eggshell (satin) sheen at walls, flat sheen at ceilings, semigloss sheen at toilet rooms, kitchen, and laundry.

a. 1st Coat: Universal primer. b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Interior latex or acrylic latex emulsion.

2. Metal: Semigloss sheen.

a. 1st Coat: Touch-up primer, prime if none. b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: 100% acrylic enamel.

3. Opaque Finished Wood: Semigloss sheen.

a. 1st Coat: Primer undercoat. b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: 100% acrylic enamel.

4. Stained Wood: Satin rubbed sheen.

a. 1st Coat: Wood stain. b. 2nd Coat: Sanding sealer. c. 3rd and 4th Coat: Acrylic modified urethane. d. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before 2nd coat.

5. Transparent Finished Wood: Satin rubbed sheen.

a. 1st Coat: Bleached shellac. b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Acrylic modified urethane rubbing varnish. c. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before 1st coat.

6. Concrete Floors: Provide Aquaseal sealer finish; non-slip.

C. Sheens: Comply with ASTM D523, reflectance of paint.

1. Flat: 1-10. 2. Satin: 15-30. 3. Eggshell: 30-45. 4. Semigloss: 45-75. 5. Gloss: 75-100.

3.4 CLEAN-UP, PROTECTION, AND REPAIR

A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags from site at end of each work day.

1. Clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces immediately by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage finished surfaces.

B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not; correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.



1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly-painted finishes.

2. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.

C. Repair: At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged surfaces or defaced painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 09960 - 1 High Performance Coating

SECTION 09960

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide high performance coating system of urethane over epoxy primer as indicated, including surface preparation, priming and high performance coating application.

1. Provide high performance coating for site painted exterior metal surfaces including but not necessarily limited to railings, shelf angles, hollow metal doors and frames, and louvers.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 09900: Standard paint and coating systems. 2. Section 09911: Site painting.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, including coating label analysis and application instructions for each material.

1. Provide certificate from each manufacturer stating material is top quality line and suitable for intended use on this Project.

B. Samples: Submit samples for review of color and texture; provide list of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.

1. Provide samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide materials complying with applicable air quality management requirements for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions limitations.

1. Materials: Approved for use by applicable air quality management district for limitations of volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions for special coatings.

B. Mock-Up: Duplicate finish of approved samples in field at location as approved by Architect, one complete component for approval prior to commencing work.

1. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.




A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, with:

1. Name of material, color and sheen. 2. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 4. Thinning and application instructions.


A. Apply high performance coating when temperature of surfaces and surrounding air are between manufacturer recommended temperatures.

B. Do not apply high performance coating in rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for correcting failure of high performance coating including peeling, chipping, rusting of substrate, cracking, delamination, chalking, and loss of color and sheen.


2.1 MATERIALS

A. Special Coating: High build acrylic polyurethane or aliphatic polyurethane over compatible epoxy primer as recommended by coating manufacturer and suitable for applications indicated and based on quality of following products.

1. Manufacturers:

a. DuPont Co. Maintenance Finishes/Imron with 25P primer. b. Tnemec Company, Inc./Endura-Shield with Epoxoline primer. c. Ameron Protective Coatings Div./450 HS with Amerlock 400 primer. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Special Coating System: Provide specific primer and coating as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, conforming to specified requirements.

a. 1st Coat: Epoxy primer.

b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: High-build acrylic polyurethane or high-build polyurethane.

3. System Requirements:

a. Abrasion: ASTM D4060, CS-17 Wheel, 1,000 grams load, no more than 95 mg. loss after 1000 cycles.



b. Adhesion: ASTM D3359 Method B (Crosshatch Adhesion), coating applied to sandblasted steel and cured 30 days at 77° F, minimum rating of 5 on average of three tests.

c. Humidity: ASTM D4585, no blistering, cracking or delamination of film after 1000 hours exposure.

d. Salt Spray (Fog): ASTM B117, no blistering, rusting, cracking, or delamination of film; maximum 1/8" rust creepage at scribe after 1000 hours exposure.

e. UV: ASTM G154, no blistering, cracking or chalking, less than 35% gloss loss and less than 3.5 MacAdam unit color change after 1500 hours exposure.

4. Coordination: Provide special coating system compatible with prime paints, undercoats, and barrier coats used.

a. Review other Specification sections in which prime paints and zinc-rich touch-coatings up are provided; ensure compatibility of total coatings systems.

b. Upon request from other trades furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use.

c. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Reprime with zinc-rich primer where galvanized.

d. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in use of specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

B. Colors and Finishes:

1. Prior to commencement of coating work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated; custom colors may be required.

2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on site.

3. Color pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated; no lead content permitted.

4. Sheen: Gloss; comply with ASTM D523, reflectance of coating, 75-100.

C. Material Quality: Provide primers produced by same manufacturer as finish coats; use only thinners approved by coating manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which high performance coating work is to be applied.

1. Start of high performance coating work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions of surfaces and conditions within any particular area.

2. Do not apply coating over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to a durable coating.



B. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and as specified for substrate condition.

C. Remove items in place and not to be coated, or provide protection prior to application of high performance coating; after application of coating reinstall removed items.

D. Clean surfaces before applying high performance coating; remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning; program cleaning so contaminants from cleaning process do not fall onto wet, newly coated surfaces.

E. Metal Preparation: Comply with coating manufacturer recommendations, but not less than following requirements.

1. Bare Surfaces: Clean surfaces which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants, using non-petroleum based solvent.

3. Painted Surfaces: Clean surfaces of loose paint, dirt, and foreign substances by mechanical cleaning; feather edges of existing paint to provide smooth, even substrate for high performance coating.

F. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

G. Store materials in tightly covered containers; maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of coating in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

H. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application; do not stir surface film into material, if necessary, strain material before using.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply high performance coating in accordance with manufacturer's directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and coating material being applied.

1. Apply additional coats when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until coating is a uniform finish, color and appearance.

2. Provide extra attention to assure dry film thickness at corners and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

B. Scheduling: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or prepared for high performance coating as soon as practicable after preparation.

1. Allow time between successive coatings to permit proper drying.

2. Do not recoat until coating feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure.



C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended by coating manufacturer.

D. Prime Coats: Apply to items not previously primed; recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat.

E. Finish Coats: Provide even texture; leave no laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections; edges clean and sharp where work joins other materials and colors.

1. Provide opaque, uniform finish, color and coverage; cloudiness, spotting, holidays, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other surface imperfections are not acceptable.

F. Completed Work: Match approved samples and mock-up for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or recoat work not accepted.

3.3 CLEAN-UP, PROTECTION AND REPAIR

A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove discarded coating materials, rubbish, cans and rags from site at end of each work day.

1. Clean glass and coating-spattered surfaces immediately by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage finished surfaces.

B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not; correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and refinishing, as acceptable to Architect.

1. Provide "Wet Coating" or "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly-coated surfaces.

2. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of coating operations.

C. Repair: At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged surfaces and defaced coated surfaces.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10115 - 1 White Boards

SECTION 10115

WHITE BOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide framed porcelain steel white board type markerboard for liquid marker (liquid chalk) system with accessories as required for complete installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: Furnish samples of white board material and chalk tray.


A. Do not deliver materials to site until areas in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them.

B. Deliver materials to site in protective covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.

B. Greensteel Division, Information Display Technology, Inc.

C. Lemco, Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. White board: Minimum 24 gage steel sheet with fused-on porcelain-enamel finish suitable to be used as a writing surface with water-soluble felt-tip markers.

1. Color: White as approved by Architect.

2. Core: Minimum 3/8" thick plywood; manufacturer's standard core material where not less than core specified.

3. Backing: Balance porcelain writing surface with aluminum or sheet steel backing; aluminum foil is not acceptable.

4. Accessories: Provide chalk rail integral with frame.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10115 - 2 White Boards

B. Framed Units: Unless otherwise approved by Architect due to limitations of materials or access to location for installation, fabricate one piece white boards with factory applied extruded aluminum frames with chalk rail and molded end closures.

1. Finish: Clear anodized.

2. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concealed fastening system suitable for substrates indicated.

3. Multiple Width Units: Where sizes require multiple widths, provide concealed splice joints at locations approved in advance by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Securely mount white boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and true to line.

1. Multiple Width Units: Provide flush, butt, hairline joints to ensure smooth writing surface between white boards.

B. Cleaning: At completion of Work, clean surfaces and trim, leave ready for use.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10210 - 1 Wall Louvers

SECTION 10210

WALL LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide shop primed, formed metal louvers and frames, with insect screens, attachment hardware, and accessories as required for complete finished installation.


A. Performance Requirements: Where indicated, comply with specific performance requirements; unit performance ratings determined in compliance with Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500.

1. Free Area: Minimum 50% based on 48" by 48" louver.

2. Static Pressure Loss: Maximum 0.15" of water gage at airflow of 1000 fpm free air velocity.

3. Water Penetration: Maximum 0.05 oz/ft2 of free area at intake airflow of 1000 fpm free area velocity.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of louver including manufacturer’s descriptive data for louvers including standard drawings and free area.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate elevation of each required louver, profile of frame, details, relation to adjacent construction, flashing, blade configuration, screens, and percentage of free air opening.


2. Manufacturer’s standard drawings may be used if they accurately reflect installation conditions applicable to this Project.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing and with documented experience in manufacturing architectural louvers.


A. Take site dimensions affecting louvers prior to fabrication.



B. Ensure openings are properly prepared and flashings are correctly located to divert moisture to exterior.

C. Protect adjacent surfaces, finishes and materials from damage during installation of louvers.

D. Coordinate installation of louvers with installation of Portland cement plaster and flashings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Construction Specialties, Inc. (CSI).

B. The Airolite Corporation.

C. Ruskin Manufacturing Division, Philips Industries, Inc.

D. Air Louvers Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: Minimum 16 gage steel, ASTM A924 and A653 with G90 galvanized coating, mill phosphatized.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Louvers: Manufacturer's standard sheet metal louvers for configurations indicated on Drawings.

1. Thickness: 4” unless otherwise indicated. 2. Blade Angle: 45 degrees. 3. Blades and Frames: Manufacturer’s standard weatherproof design. 4. Sizes: As noted on Drawings.

B. Insect Screen for Exterior Louvers: Minimum 0.063" diameter wire, interwoven 18 x 16 size insect mesh.

1. Wire: Stainless steel. 2. Frame: Galvanized steel to match louver.

C. Fabricate units to maximum extent possible in shop and disassemble as needed for shipping and handling limitations; clearly mark units for reassembly and installation.

1. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to suit adjacent construction with tolerances for installation.

2. Fabricate sill extension, flashings, wall anchors, structural supplementary sub-framing, and accessories as required for complete system; use same materials as provided for louvers.



D. Join frame members and louver blades by welding; maintain equal blade spacing, including separation between blades and frame head and sill; maintain uniform appearance.

E. Finish: High performance organic finish, two coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PFDF resin by weight in color coat.

1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer written instructions.

2. Color: Match Kelley Moore/217 or Chadwick/LRV37 Color to match adjacent wall as approved by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings to assure dimensions conform to Drawings and approved shop drawings.

F. Ensure openings are fre of irregularities that could interfere with installation of louvers.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instruction, properly aligned and level.

B. Secure louver rigid with concealed fasteners of non-corrosive metals to suit materials being encountered and to resist anticipated loads.

C. Coordinate installation method with application of adjacent backing and structural elements, and mechanical work.

D. Set and tie into flashings to ensure diversion of moisture to exterior.

E. Hinge screens for access.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. After initial inspection remove labels, protective coating, and foreign materials from metal surfaces.

B. Clean metal of smears, spots, and markings.

C. Touch-up field abrasions and damage to factory applied finish quality and appearance; touch-up to be unnoticeable in completed installation.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10351 - 1 Fiberglass Flagpole

SECTION 10351

FIBERGLASS FLAGPOLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: All labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation of fiberglass flagpole work shown on the Landscape Drawings.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Consult all other Sections, determine the

extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete, finished and workmanlike installation.

1. Section 02515 – Concrete Surface Improvements 2. Flags supplied by Owner

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with the provisions of

these Specifications. Include all required details and design recommendations for the concrete foundation and fiberglass flagpole anchorage.

B. Structural Calculations: Contractor to submit two copies of signed structural calculations for the structural integrity of the flagpole and associated footing design.

C. Installation Methods: Accompanying the shop drawings, submit at least three copies of the manufacturer's current recommended methods of installation of the flagpoles and accessory items.


A. Qualifications of Installers: For actual installation of flagpoles, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills involved and who are completely familiar with the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation.

B. Design Criteria: Flagpole, base and anchorage devices shall be designed to

resist 90 mph wind velocity minimum, unflagged. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. Damaged products will be rejected.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIBERGLASS FLAGPOLE

A. Flagpole to be fabricated and supplied by L.PH. Bolander, 1355 Evans Avenue, San Francisco, California, 800.434.5611.

B. Material: Manufactured of fiberglass roving and polyester resin with axial tensile

strength exceeding 40,000 P.S.I.

C. Type: Entasis taper over total length.

D. Overall Dimensions:

1. Exposed Height: 25 feet - 0 inches. 2. Overall Length: 28 feet - 0 inches. 3. Base Diameter: 5.8 inches 4. Top Diameter: 3.0 inches

E. Finish: Hard, glossy smooth surface.

F. Color: White

2.2 HARDWARE

A. Concealed Halyard System: as manufactured and supplied by: L. Ph. Bollander and Sons, 1355 Evans Avenue, San Francisco, California 94124 (800) 434.5611

B. Ball: 6 inch diameter spun seamless Aluminum, silver color, anodized ball.

C. Truck: cast resin, non-fouling, with one nylon sheave on stainless steel pin.

D. Halyard: 5/16-inch diameter polyester with galvanized steel core, length as

required for proper tie off.

E. Halyard color: White

F. Snaps: Bronze 3/4-inch swivel eye

G. Cam Cleat: no maintenance, self-locking, constructed of all stainless steel and non-corrosive materials; mounted inside pole.

H. Fasteners: All miscellaneous metal screws and bolts to match hardware as

recommended by manufacturer. I. Ground sleeve: 8 inches inside diameter, 3 feet - 0 inches length, fiberglass. J. Flash collar: 16 inches diameter, fiberglass, white color.

2.3 FIBERGLASS FLAGPOLE ANCHORAGE AND CONCRETE FOUNDATION



A. Concrete Foundation: 2,500 psi at 28 days.

B. Rough Hardware: Hot dip galvanize bolts, nuts and washers; ASTM A123.


A. Inspection:

1. Examine the substrate under which flagpole is to be done. Notify the Architect, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2. Verify that flagpoles may be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and the approved shop drawings.

B. Discrepancies:

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such

discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 INSTALIATION

A. The vertical centerline of the flagpole shall be 90 degrees from the horizontal and shall be verified with a transit.

B. Fiberglass flagpole anchorage shall be fabricated in accordance with approved

shop drawings.

C. Provide all bolting and other fastenings required to complete the fiberglass flagpole construction shown on the drawings.

D. Bolt holes shall be 1/32-inch to 1/16-inch larger than bolts, and shall be accurately

located to permit proper alignment and easy driving of bolts. A standard cut washer, or the equivalent thereof, shall be installed between each bolt head and nut and wood and/or metal fasteners. Bolts shall be taken up snug and shall be retightened at the latest practicable time during the construction work.

END OF SECTION


Revise – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10440 - 1 Signage

SECTION 10440

SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide general signage as indicated complete with attachment devices and accessories as required for complete installation.


1. Section 02577: Pavement marking. 2. Section 10520: Fire extinguisher cabinet graphics.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature and indicate each sign type, style, color, and method of attachment.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish listing of sign types, lettering and locations, along with overall dimension of each sign.

1. Computerized Output: Furnish computerized samples of applied copy signs and graphics at full scale duplicating final appearance.

2. Dimensional Letter Signs: Furnish complete shop drawings regarding fabrication and method of attachment of dimension letter signs.

C. Samples: Furnish full size samples where requested.


A. Access for Persons with Disabilities: Provide signs for assuring access for persons with disabilities in accordance with state and federal regulations.

1. California Regulations: Comply with California Building Code.

2. Federal Regulations: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).


A. Package separately or in like groups of names, labeled as to names enclosed; include installation template, attachment system and installation instructions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. ASI Modulex.

B. Mohawk Sign Systems.

C. Vomar Products, Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Dimensional Letter Signage: Provide aluminum individual letter signs as indicated.

1. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard for individual letter signs, but not less than following.

a. Plate Stock: ASTM B209, 6061-T6. b. Castings: ASTM B26, 356.0-T6.

2. Finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, AAMA 607.1. Manufacturer standard painted finish to match Kawneer PermaFlour “Charcoal” color.

3. Fabrication: Fabricate dimensional letters as indicated on the drawings, of minimum 0.25" plate or casting with edges and corners smooth and finished to match adjacent metal finishes.

4. Attachment: Secure letters using connections concealed after installation; method subject to Architect approval. Make penetrations through water barriers watertight using methods recommended by water barrier manufacturers.

a. Take care back welding does not damage exposed sign surfaces.

B. California Toilet Room Signs: Provide colored plastic signs, conforming to California requirements for signs for toilet rooms, with inset symbols and with raised and Braille characters; concealed mounting system.

1. Total Thickness: 0.25".

2. Provide signs required by California Code of Regulations Title 24.

a. Unisex Toilet: 12" diameter circle with equilateral triangle, vertex pointing up, inscribed in circle; circle and triangle each 0.25" thick.

3. Colors: As selected to contrast with doors.

4. Symbols: As selected from manufacturer's standard symbols.

5. Adhesive: Type as recommended by sign manufacturer for type of substrate involved.



C. ADAAG Toilet Room Signs: Provide colored plastic signs, conforming with ADAAG requirements for signs for permanent rooms, with inset symbols and with raised and Braille characters; concealed mounting system.

1. Comply with ADAAG requirements for raised and Braille characters, pictorial symbols, finish, and contrasts requirements.

2. Colors: As selected by Architect.

D. Entry Decals: Provide minimum 6" square decals with international handicapped symbol white on blue background with white border, applied to glass at accessible entry doors.

E. Porcelain Signs at Parking: Provide porcelain enamel on steel sign with beaded text and symbols meeting requirements of California Building Code and with ADAAG.

1. At entry to parking provide state required sign indicating unauthorized vehicles parking in handicapped parking spaces may be towed at owner's expense.

2. Verify location and telephone number of place to be towed with Owner.

3. At parking spaces provide California required sign, minimum 70 sq. inches, with symbol indicating accessibility.

4. At van accessible parking spaces provide required "VAN PARKING" signs.

F. Braille Exit Door Signs: Provide colored plastic signs, conforming to ADAAG requirements for signs for permanent rooms, with raised and Braille characters; concealed mounting system.

1. Colors: As selected by Architect.

2. Size and Style: As indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, free from distortions and defects.

B. Dimensional Letter Signage: Locate dimensional letters with spacing based on full size computer generated installation drawings secured to structure as required to resist anticipated loads.

1. Final Location: As approved in field by Architect based on full size drawings.

C. California Toilet Room Signs: Install signs on doors after doors are painted and finished.

1. Location: Mount signs centered at 60" above finished floor.

2. Install centered and level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.



D. ADAAG Toilet Room Signs: Install signs on walls after surfaces on which they are to be mounted are painted and finished.

1. Location: Mount signs centered at 60" above finished floor on strike side of door.

2. Install level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and ADAAG requirements to allow a person to approach within 3" of signs without being within a door swing.


E. Entry Signs: Install in locations as approved by Architect.

F. Parking Signs: Provide mounting hardware, including painted posts, as needed; mount signs at heights required by state code.

1. Install parking entry sign at location as directed by Architect.

G. Braille Exit Door Signs: Install at doors with lighted “EXIT” signs; apply after walls are finished.

1. Location: Mount signs centered at 60" above finished floor on strike side of door.

2. Install level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and ADAAG requirements to allow a person to approach within 3" of signs without being within a door swing.


END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10500 - 1 Metal Lockers and Work Benches

SECTION 10500

METAL LOCKERS AND WORK BENCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide special fire station type heavy duty metal lockers with metal base, hardware, hooks, latches and attachment hardware, infill panels, and steel work benches as indicated and as required for complete finished installation.

1. Provide wall-mounted, open-mesh gear lockers at Apparatus Room. 2. Provide steel work benches.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker and bench types, sizes, configurations, details, layout of groups of lockers, accessories, color and finish, and numbering.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish.


A. Protect locker finishes and adjacent surfaces and materials from damage or marring during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Lyon Metal Products, Inc.

B. Mid-Minnesota Wire (Forest Lake, MN).

C. Republic Storage Systems Company.

D. Penco Products, Inc., Subsidiary of Vesper Corp.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Wire Storage Lockers: Match Mid-Minnesota Wire/GearGrid Turnout Gear Storage, wall mounted type; shipped knocked-down for field assembly and installation.

1. Size: 24” wide by 20” deep by 74-1/2” high jumbo wire lockers.



2. Construction:

a. Frame: Heavy duty 1-1/4” tubing. b. Side and Back Grids: High strength, 1/4” cold-rolled wire with 3” overall grid. c. Shelves: High strength 1/4” cold-rolled steel. d. Mounting Brackets: Minimum 11 gage cold-rolled steel.

3. Accessories: Provide following types of accessories for wire storage lockers.

a. Match Mid-Minnesota Wire/Geardryer coat/jacket drying hanger. b. Match Mid-Minnesota Wire/Helmet Holder. c. Match Mid-Minnesota Wire/Gearhanger hanging rod.

4. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard double powder coat.

5. Color: Red.

B. Custom Design Metal Work Benches: Match Lyon/Metal Products IncAdjustable Leg Work Bench Type 2610A, with flared leg. Custom design work benches, layout as indicated on drawings.

1. Size: 96” wide by 28” deep.

2. Height: 29” to 38” as indicated; final heights as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

3. Capacity: Not less than 1000 lbs.

4. Layout: Bench with stringer only.

5. Top: Not less than 12 gage steel.

6. Levelers: Provide with optional leg levelers.

1. (2) Steel tops 30”d x 1-3/4” t x 72” w – No. 251WSL72

2. (1) Bench Standard Modular Drawer Cabinet 30” w – No. 251350A

3. (1) Bench Standard Modular Swing Door Cabinet 30” w – No. 2513501006

4. (1) Bench Panel Leg – No. 251WPL350

7.5. Color: Match Lyon/DD Dove Gray.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Finish edges smooth without burrs.

B. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents and distortions.

C. Fabricate lockers for quiet operation with manufacturer's standard rattle-free latching mechanism and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact.



2.4 FINISHING

A. Clean, degrease, neutralize, and finish with manufacturer's standard process. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Take site dimensions affecting this work, ensure preparatory work is properly sized and located.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lockers as indicated on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, secure, plumb, level, square, and in line.

B. Assemble knocked-down lockers in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

C. Securely attach lockers to wall and floor to prevent overturning by seismic forces; apply fastenings through reinforcing plates or blocking sized for anticipated seismic loads as defined by California Building Code.

D. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.

E. Install metal bases, end panels, trim, tops, and filler panels to close off openings and as required for complete installation, with hairline joints against adjacent surfaces.

1. Install with concealed fasteners.

2. Do not expose bolt or rivet heads on fronts of lockers or frames.

3. Use sealant, in color acceptable to Architect, to close gaps between lockers and walls.

F. Secure locker room bench pedestals to floors where shown and secure benches to pedestals; comply with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Space pedestals maximum 72" on center.

G. Locate work benches where shown with flared legs secured to concrete slab with nonmagnetic corrosion resistant stainless steel expansion fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Adjust leg levelers to provide level top surface and stable bench.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding; verify integral devices are operating properly.



3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces; touch-up marred finishes and replace lockers which cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect lockers and benches from damage, abuse, dirt, and paint; do not allow lockers to be used during construction.

B. Touch-up marred finishes or replace as directed by Architect.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10520 - 1 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets

SECTION 10520

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide flush, semi-recessed and surface mounted trimless type fire extinguisher cabinets for portable fire extinguishers with accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Fire Extinguishers: Owner furnished and installed.


1. Division 15: Fire protection systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Trimless Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:

1. Manufacturers:

a. J.L. Industries/Embassy Series. b. Larsen's Mfg. Co./Occult Series. c. Potter-Roemer/Dana Series. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2. Cabinet Depth: Provide cabinets designed for space available in walls with fire extinguisher cabinets, and of sufficient depth to house 2A-10BC multi-purpose dry chemical type fire extinguisher.

a. Where space is not adequate for flush installation provide semi-recessed installation with trim pieces as required for finished installation; maximum 4” projection from wall.

b. Where indicated provide surface mounted installation with heavy duty construction.

3. Frame: Trimless, recessed, door frame flush with finish wall; semi-recessed type where wall thickness is not adequate for flush installation; flush mounted where indicated.

4. Metal Gages: Manufacturer's standard for series specified.

5. Box: Provide manufacturer's standard box with white baked enamel interior finish and baked enamel exterior finish.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10520 - 2 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets

6. Doors: Steel, full flush metal panel with window; provide thermosetting primer compatible with finish specified in Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings.

a. Color: Fire engine red as approved by Architect.

7. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard for fire extinguisher cabinets.

B. Fire Rated Wall Construction: Provide fire extinguisher cabinet manufacturer's materials as required to maintain integrity of fire rated partitions where cabinets are located in fire rated partitions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which fire extinguisher cabinets are to be installed.

B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install cabinets in locations and at mounting height to comply with requirements of governing authorities; prepare recesses in walls as required.

B. Securely fasten to structure, square and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Wherever exact location of units is not shown, locate as directed by Architect.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. After installation and finishing is completed, silkscreen or apply decal letters spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" as applicable.

B. Letter size, style and location as selected by Architect.

END OF SECTION

KIMLEY-HORN & ASSOCIATES, INC. TRACY FIRE STATION 92

Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 10 800 - 1 Traffic Signs

SECTION 10 800

TRAFFIC SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section covers the work related to traffic signs.

B. Where reference is made to Caltrans Standard Specifications (CTSS) or Caltrans Standard Plans (CTSP), the referenced publications are the May 2006 editions.

C. Where reference is made to the California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (CA MUTCD or MUTCD), the referenced publication is the January 2010 edition.

D. The work is to be performed at the following location in the City of Tracy: 1. Grant Line Road, approximately 1300’ east of Mac Arthur Drive within the

immediate roadway frontage of Fire Station No. 92.

1.2 PROCUREMENT OF SIGNS, AND NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDWARE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the W11-8, R3-18, R4-7, and R26(CA) signs and hardware required to mount the signs onto the Type 9B and Type 15-FBS poles shown on CTSP ES-7J and ES-7K, and 2” diameter galvanized steel pipe.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Submit product data or shop drawings for all products in this Section including but not limited to the following items:

1. W11-8 sign specification. 2. R3-18 sign specification. 3. R4-7 sign specification. 4. R26(CA) sign specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND HARDWARE

A. All traffic signs shall conform to the most recent Caltrans Uniform Sign Chart, and “Specifications for Reflective Sheeting Aluminum Signs,” and “Framing Details for Sheet Aluminum Signs.”

B. The Contractor shall supply and install all signs and necessary hardware.

C. Sign panels shall be sheet aluminum products of a commercial sign manufacturer. The aluminum panel shall not be less than 0.080-inch thick.

D. Signs shall consist of high quality reflective sheeting manufactured to meet Caltrans’ “Specifications for Reflective Sheeting Aluminum Signs.” Copies of Caltrans’ “Specifications for Reflective Sheeting Aluminum Signs” and “Framing Details for Sheet Aluminum Signs” may be obtained from Caltrans Office of Business Management, Material Operations Branch, 6002 Folsom Boulevard, and Sacramento, California 95819.


Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 10 800 - 2 Traffic Signs

E. Sign dimensions shall conform to Caltrans’ “Sign Specification Sheets.” Copies of the sign specification sheets may be purchased from Caltrans’ Central Publication Distribution Unit, also located at 6002 Folsom Boulevard, Sacramento, California 95819.

F. Hardware for signs to be banded on the Type 15-FBS poles shall be vandalproof hardware “Signfix” or approved equal.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Traffic signs shall be installed at the locations shown on the plans, as shown in CTSP ES-7J and ES-7K, and as directed by the Engineer, and shall conform to the applicable sections in Section 56-2, "Roadside Signs," of the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions. All new signs to be installed shall be of high-intensity material.

PART 4 - PAYMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. The cost of furnishing and installing traffic signs shall be included in the various other items of work.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10810 - 1 Toilet Accessories

SECTION 10810

TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide toilet accessories with attachment hardware and rough-in frames as required for complete, operational installation.


1. Section 10825 – Shower enclosures including towel bars mounted on shower enclosures.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data illustrating each accessory at large scale.


A. Access for Persons with Disabilities: Comply with California Building Code and Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).


A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building in.

B. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them.

C. Pack accessories individually, protect each item and its finish.


A. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces from damage during installation of work of this section.

B. Before starting work notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to installation or operation of units.

C. Verify with Architect exact location of accessories.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Replace mirrors which exhibit signs of desilvering or distortion.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

B. Bradley Corporation.

C. American Specialties, Inc.

D. Manufacturers listed on Toilet Accessory Schedule.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard materials and finishes for accessories listed; where more than one material or finish is available and not otherwise indicated provide as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard materials and finishes.

B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, commercial grade, Type 304, gages as standard with manufacturer of specified items.

C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, commercial grade, seamless welded.

D. Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, cold rolled stretcher leveled; minimum G90 galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653.

E. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement as recommended by accessory manufacturer.

F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.

G. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing and supply.

1. Provide minimum six keys to Owner representative.

2. Coin Operated Units: Provide locked coin box keyed separately from standard units, coin operated units keyed alike.

H. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, q1 mirror select clear float glass with full silver coating, copper coating and organic coating; minimum 1/4" thick.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.

B. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.

C. Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled; hang doors and access panels with continuous piano hinges; provide concealed anchorage where possible.



D. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes.

E. Form surfaces flat without distortion; maintain flat surfaces without scratches and without dents; finish exposed edges eased, free of sharp edges where potential exists for physical contact.

F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes, to prevent electrolysis.

G. Hot dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.

H. Assemble components in shop; package complete with anchors and fittings.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Exposed Finishes: Stainless steel, number 4, satin finish; satin chrome finish acceptable where stainless steel not available for accessory item listed or scheduled.

B. Concealed Surfaces: Treat and clean, spray-apply one coat primer and baked enamel finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions using fasteners appropriate to substrate.

B. Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

C. Use tamper-proof, security type fasteners.

D. Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify mechanisms function smoothly.

E. Replace damaged and defective items.

F. Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels.

3.3 ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Drawings.

END OF SECTION


Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 10 811 - 1 Thermoplastic Traffic Markings

SECTION 10 811

THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section covers the work related to thermoplastic traffic markings.


C. Where reference is made to the California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (CA MUTCD or MUTCD), the referenced publication is the January 2010 edition.

D. The work is to be performed at the following location in the City of Tracy:

1. Grant Line Road, approximately 1300’ east of Mac Arthur Drive within the immediate roadway frontage of Fire Station No. 92.

1.2 PROCUREMENT OF TRAFFIC MARKING MATERIAL

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the necessary thermoplastic pavement markings on Grant Line Road as shown on the Drawing TE-102. The applicable pavement markings words and limit line are shown on TE-102.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Thermoplastic marking material.

2. Glass beads.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All traffic Stripes and Pavement Markings shall be thermoplastic unless specifically called out on the plans as paint.

B. Traffic Stripes and Pavement Markings shall be applied at the locations identified on the plans and conform to Section 84 of the CTSS and the CA MUTCD. Traffic stripes and pavement markings include the various Caltrans striping details, 12” white, and pavement legends. Pavement markers that are included in the lane lines shall conform to Section 85 of the CTSS.

C. Glass beads shall conform to section 84-2.02 of the CTSS.



2.2 THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL

A. The thermoplastic material shall conform to either State Specification 8010-21C-21 or 8010-21C-19. Glass beads to be applied to the surface of the molten thermoplastic material shall conform to the requirements of State Specification 8010-11E-22 (Type II).


3.1 GENERAL

A. Temporary signs and striping to allow flow of traffic for the project during all phases of construction shall be provided. The cost of temporary signs and striping shall be included in the various other items of work.

B. Nothing in these Special Provisions shall relieve the Contractor from his responsibilities as provided in Section 7-1.09, "Public Safety", of the CTSS.

3.2 REMOVAL

A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all existing pavement markers and markings as required by the plans and as directed by the Engineer.

B. The method of pavement marker removal shall be approved by the Engineer and performed in such a manner as to leave the existing pavement undamaged. Should the removal process leave a divot of more than 1/4 inch deep, each divot shall be repaired with an approved bituminous adhesive.

C. Existing pavement markings and striping proposed to be removed shall be done by wet sandblasting or another approved method.

D. Drips, over spray, improper markings, and thermoplastic material tracked by traffic shall be immediately removed from the pavement surface. All such removal and restriping work shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

E. Before obliterating any pavement delineation that is to be replaced on the same alignment, the Contractor shall reference the existing pavement delineation with sufficient control points to reestablish the alignment with the new pavement delineation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Newly placed traffic stripes and pavement markings shall be protected from damage by public traffic or other causes until the thermoplastic material has sufficiently hardened.

B. The pavement surface to which thermoplastic material is applied shall be completely coated by the material and the voids of the pavement surface shall be filled.

C. Unless otherwise specified in the special provisions, thermoplastic shall be applied at a thickness of 0.100-inch to 0.150-inch. Glass beads shall be applied immediately to the surface of the molten thermoplastic material at a rate of not less than 8 pounds per 100 square feet.



D. The stencils for the pavement markings shall be of the dimensions from the U.S. customary units (English) version of the CTSP A24A - A24E.

E. The pavement markers shall be stored indoors and shall be protected from any source of moisture both during shipment to the job site and at the job site.

F. All layout, spotting, or cat tracking shall be performed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to placement of any permanent pavement markings or markers.

G. The pavement markers shall be cemented to the pavement with Rapid Set Type adhesive conforming to the provisions of the CTSS.

I. The portion of the street surface which will receive the pavement markers shall be free of dirt, oil, moisture, or any other material which would adversely affect the bonding of the adhesive.

PART 4 - PAYMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. The contract lump sum price paid for Striping, shall include full compensation for furnishing all the labor, materials, tools, equipment, incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in removing and placing the markers and thermoplastic strips and pavement markings, including referencing existing pavement markings, alignment and layout work, and painting of any temporary pavement markings, complete in place, all as specified in the CTSS, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer, and no additional compensation will be allowed.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10825 - 1 Shower Enclosures

SECTION 10825

SHOWER ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide metal framed glass shower enclosures with hardware and accessories, including towel bars mounted on outside of enclosure, as required for complete installation.


1. Section 07900: Perimeter joint sealers and back-up material.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual.


A. Glass: Conform to California Building Code and pass ANSI Z97.1 safety glazing test.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate elevations and details of construction.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Keystone and Marchand Divisions of KSD Industries.

B. Cardinal Shower Enclosure.

C. The Majestic Shower Co.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Doors and Frames: Manufacturer's standard products as matching conditions indicated on Drawings.

1. Finish: Satin aluminum.

B. Frames: Tubular frame; slope and weep sills for drainage; provide maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members.


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 10825 - 2 Shower Enclosures

C. Doors: Securely lock corner joints of stiles and rails; maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members.

D. Glass: Clear glazing quality, fully tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT; manufacturer's standard thickness.

E. Glazing Materials: Manufacturer standard type to suit locations and applications.

1. Installation: In accordance with GANA Glazing Manual; glass shall not touch metal.

F. Towel Bars: Either satin aluminum, satin chromium plated brass or bronze, or satin stainless steel towel bars mounted on exterior side of shower enclosure at locations indicated on Drawings, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

1. Size and location of towel bars to be designs such that they do not interfere with shower door operation.

G. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other material compatible with materials and meeting design requirements.

1. Conceal fasteners wherever possible; where exposed, use flat head countersunk fasteners, finished to match aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine surfaces of openings and verify dimensions.

B. Installation of frames signifies acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble and anchor various components to allow for expansion and contraction, maintaining watertight condition at joints.

B. Install door unit in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

C. Field assembly and joining shall conform to requirements specified for shop fabrication.

D. Install work plumb, straight, square, level and in their proper elevation, plane and location, and in proper alignment with other work.

E. Anchor securely in place, separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from corrosion and electrolytic action with other materials.

END OF SECTION


Issued for Permit 12/15/10 11452 - 1 Appliances & Miscellaneous Equipment

SECTION 11452

APPLIANCES AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide appliances and miscellaneous equipment with options and accessories as required for complete finished operational installation.


1. Section 06400: Cabinets and countertops. 2. Division 15: Plumbing connections. 3. Division 16: Electrical connections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for each type of appliance, including data indicating compliance with requirements and color selection.


A. Certification Labels: Provide appliances which bear appropriate labels as follows:

1. Energy Ratings: Provide energy guide labels with energy cost analysis (annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade Commission.

2. UL Standards: UL labels required.

3. ANSI Z-21: AGA seal of approval required for units with gas-burning appliances, uncluding duo fuel appliances.


A. Deliver appliances in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers, after spaces are ready to receive them.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. General Electric Co., Major Appliances Division.

B. Whirlpool Corp.

C. Maytag Corp., including Amana Appliances.

D. Kenmore.

E. Concept Housewares.

F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Appliances and Miscellaneous Equipment: Provide as indicated with accessories as required for complete operational installation.

1. Types (Base Bid):

a. Dish Washer: Match Maytag/Stainless Steel MDB4601AWX. b. Gas Range: Match Dacor/36” Epicure Model ER36G with 65000 btu. c. Range Hood: Match Dacor/36” Epicure Model EH3612. d. Microwave: Match Kenmore/Model 67903 Elite 22-7/8”, 1.5 cu.ft. convection

microwave oven; stainless steel with black. e. Refrigerator: Match Kenmore/Model 78093 stainless steel 19.7 cu.ft. bottom

freezer refrigerator; energy star appliance. f. Potrack: Match Concept Housewares/Modular Stainless Steel 36” by 18”.

2. Options: Where appliances are available with options and options are not specifically indicated provide best quality options offered with appliance number indicated unless otherwise directed by Architect.

3. Colors and Finishes: Provide colors and finishes as indicated for appliances.

a. Where not otherwise indicated provide finishes as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s full range of colors and finishes including stainless steel.

B. Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed Appliances: Refer to Section 01110 – Summary of Work.

1. Clothes washer. 2. Clothes dryer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which appliances are to be installed.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install appliances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical trades as necessary for proper service connections.

C. Ensure operating parts work freely and fit neatly.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts as necessary.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect appliances until Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or replace damaged parts, dents, buckles, abrasions, or other defects affecting appearance or serviceability, so appliances are undamaged at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS TRACY FIRE STATION

Issued for Permit 12/15/10 12494 - 1 Roll Down Shades

SECTION 12494

ROLL DOWN SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide manual chain operated roll down type solar window shades with brackets and accessories as required for complete finished operational installation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 701: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.

B. FS CCC-T-191b: Flame Retardancy of Textiles.


A. System: Provide manual shades as complete units produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets and fastenings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show hardware, clearances and operation of shades with specified system.

1. Layout of openings, partings and pulley positions subject to Architect approval where not clearly indicated.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each fabric indicating finishing of top, bottom and sides, and section of frame indicating finish.

D. Certificate of Flame Proofing or Flame Resistance: Submit certification, recommendations and instructions for laundering of specified fabrics and maintenance of entire installation.

1. Instructions: Specifically applicable to this installation.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Flame Retardant Materials: Approved by California State Fire Marshal's Office.

2. Fire Resistant Fabrics: Required to have passed one of following:

a. NFPA 701. b. FS CCC-T-191, test 5903.




A. Do not deliver shades until building is ready for installation.

B. Number and identify shades as to locations in Project.


A. Before installation, physically measure and inspect space after limiting conditions are established.

1. Note floor and ceiling may not be level. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Mecho Shade Corporation/Mecho Shade System.

B. Lutron Electronics Co./Manual Shading.

C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Shade Operating System: Manual type chain operated roller shade system with adjustable slip clutch.

B. Solar Shade Fabric: Manufacturer's standard fire resistant vinyl or glass cloth fabric.

1. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Accessories: Provide accessories, brackets, fittings and fastenings as necessary for proper operation and installation of shades; conceal fasteners or finish flush, painted to match exposed metal finish.

D. Exposed Metal Finish: Manufacturer's standard white painted finish as approved by Architect.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabric: Heat set to prevent edges from unraveling when knife cut.

1. Fabricate shades with threads square.

2. Allow sufficient overage to provide finished shades required from single run of fabric.

B. Cutting: Edge sealing hot knife system.

C. Sewing: Locked or blind stitch, done on power machines using tension and spacing as required to be permanent and to avoid pulling.

1. Thread: Match fabric color.



2. Seams: Flat double back or lock-over-lock, with hems and seams free from pucker.

3. Length: Finish length so bottom clearance is by 1", with 1/4" tolerance acceptable.

D. Bottom: Provide weighted hembar sealed within bottom hem.

E. Center Seams: Use single widths of fabric with no center seams for each shade.

F. Shade Mounting System: Allow for shade removal and replacement without disassembling hardware assembly.

G. Operating System: Provide upper and lower stop limits to prevent over-winding and unrolling.

1. Provide for left or right hand operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect site conditions prior to installation for conditions that could affect proper installation and operation of shades.

B. Beginning installation signifies acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Install shades level, plumb, secure, and at proper height; cooperate with other trades for securing shades to substrate and finished surfaces.

B. Hang shades to be straight and even, employing hand sewing of seams and hems as necessary for carefully matched installation with even, horizontal top and bottom hems, and quiet, smoothly operating system.

C. Fabricate and install shades so when open, closed or while operating shades will not be abraded by window frame, ceiling or sill.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Thirty days after hanging of shades, inspect installation for fabric shrinkage or expansion or other variations and rehang as necessary for conformance to specified tolerances.

END OF SECTION

FARD ENGINEERS, INC. TRACY FIRE STATION 92

G:\09712.00\Archive\CD\2012-0319 Tracy Station 92 - Addendum 1\MEP\Specifications\15050 - Mechanical General Requirements.DOC

15050 - 1 Mechanical General Requirements

SECTION 15050

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - MECHANICAL

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Requirements of General Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specifications Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The work in this Section applies to the work of this Division as specified in the following sections:

1. Section 15700, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 2. Section 15400, Plumbing 3. Section 15300, Automatic Sprinkler system. 4. Section 15650, Vehicle Exhaust System

B. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the providing of work as shown and

noted on the Drawings and specified herein. This Section describes the General requirements for the materials, equipment and installation applicable to all Sections of the work under this Division. The following summary is included to indicate some items common to work. It is not necessarily all inclusive.

1. Labor, material, equipment, tools, rigging, hoisting, temporary scaffolding,

transportation, supervision, inspections, services, insurance, fees and taxes. 2. Repair of damage done to premises or other property as a result of the work and

removal of debris left by those engaged in the work. 3. Preparation of submittal, Shop Drawings, Project Record Drawings. 4. Prime coat painting as specified including piping, ductwork, equipment and

related items. 5. Access doors and panels required for the work. 6. Identification of piping and equipment. 7. Service connection to items installed by other Contractors and Trades.

1.3 RELATED WORK A. Cast-in-place concrete work except as specifically called for herein: Refer to Section,

Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Flashing sheet metal materials and labor: Refer to Section, Sheet Metal And Trim. C. Finish painting of piping, ductwork and equipment: Refer to Section 09900, Painting. D. Electrical material and labor: Refer to Division 16, Electrical.





A. Work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules of the Administrative Code, State Fire Marshal, and Building Standards; the National Electric Code; the National Fire Codes, National Fire Protection Association; California Plumbing and Mechanical Codes, California Building code; and other applicable County ordinances, codes, laws and/or regulations.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Specified References

1. AGA: American national Gas Association 2. ANSI: American National Standards Institute 3. ASHRAE: American society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers. 4. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers 5. AABC: American Air Balance Council 6. OSHA: Occupational safety and health Administration 7. CISPI: Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 8. CS: Commercial Standards 9. IAPMO: International Association of Plumbing and Officials 10. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association 11. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractor's Association 12. UL: Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

B. Provide without extra charge, any additional material and labor required to comply

with the Regulations and Standards. 1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a complete list of materials and equipment. Submittals shall be approved before purchase. Refer to Architectural Section 01300.

B. Submit shop drawings to show installation of equipment piping & ductwork in greater

detail under provisions of 01300.


A. Refer to Architectural Section for General Requirements for material and equipment. 1.8 WARRANTY

A. Submit warranties or guarantees to the Architect for equipment as required. Refer to Section 01700, CLOSEOUT. Contractor shall guarantee material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance.





A. Access doors shall be Milcor, of sizes adequate for service intended (minimum

10-inch x 10-inch). Doors shall be compatible with wall and ceiling construction in which to be installed. Door panels shall be no lighter than 14 gauge steel. Doors shall be equipped with concealed spring hinges and flush, screwdriver operated locks, except that key operated locks shall be keyed alike.

B. Pipe hangers:

1. Super Strut with assemblies and component parts "Electro-Chromated" or

galvanized steel finish. 2. Individually suspended piping shall be supported by hangers complete with

all-threaded rod. Pipe hangers to be manufactured of 1-inch minimum width steel.

3. Trapeze Suspension, for three or more pipes in the same place, use Super Strut 1-5/8-inch width channel of a size suitable for load in deflection to exceed 1/180 of a span.

4. Trapeze Supporting rods shall be of a diameter sufficient to support the load with a safety factor of 5. Rods shall be securely anchored to the building structure.

5. Pipe strap, to attach pipe to channel, shall be compatible with pipe material. 6. Hanger Spacing horizontal piping shall be supported with hangers spaced at

maximum as listed below and at changes in direction. a. Copper tubing shall be supported as follows: 1-1/2-inch and smaller at 6

foot intervals, 2-inch and larger at 10 foot intervals. b. Cast iron pipes shall be supported every 5 feet and within 18 inches joint. c. Support screwed and welded steel pipes at 10 foot intervals.

7. Isolators, install pipe shields, Inc. isolators at hangers and clamps. 8. Attachments to roof structural members with brackets, rods and channels as

reviewed by the Architect.

C. Pipe Protection: Penetrations of rated assemblies shall be fire-stopped. Fire stopping shall be an approved material as specified and as prescribed in State Fire Marshall Standard. Pipe Shield, Inc. (PSI).

1. Insulated pipe shall be protected at the point of support by a 360-degree sheet

metal shield. Insert to be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. Shield length and minimum sheet metal gauges shall be as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Bare-Copper - Tube shall be protected at the point of support by a 360-degree sheet metal shield-minimum 26-gauge. Fiberglass media shall have maximum 15-percent compression after loading.

3. Fire wall and Outside Penetrations: a. Penetrating fire and outside walls shall be encased in sheet metal sleeves

minimum 24-gauge, sized for maximum 1-inch spacing between pipe insulation and sleeve. Spacing shall be packed with double neoprene coated silica fiber rope with positive fastening catch.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING AT RATED WALLS AND CEILINGS




A. Provide U.L. approved "Firestop-Seals" at all penetrations through Fire-rated ceilings or walls: 3M T & B, Appleton or approved equal. Fire stop material shall be a reusable, non-toxic, asbestos-free, expanding, putty type material with a 3-hour rating in accordance with UL 1479. Provide products indicated by the manufacturer to be suitable for type and size of penetration, as follows:

UL System # Penetrating Item

49 Steel pipe/conduit 63 Steel pipe/conduit 91 Steel pipe/conduit/insulated pipe 93 Steel pipe/conduit 94 Steel pipe in large opening 95 Steel pipe/conduit 147 Steel pipe/conduit (Gyp board wall) 169 Metal pipe/conduit

B. Provide U.L. listed "moldable putty" and/or caulking around outlets in rated walls or

ceilings, as required by code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Contractor is responsible for complete, properly installed system, Installation and material shall comply with all rules, codes and regulations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Offsets, bends, unions, special fittings and exact locations are not indicated.

B. Electrical work: Motors, electrical apparatus and wiring specified in this section shall

conform to the National Electrical Manufacturer's standards and the National Electrical Code and bear the Underwriters' label of approval.

C. Cutting and Patching: Sleeving, cutting and patching of rough construction for piping

and ductwork shall be a part of the work. No cutting shall be done without Architect's approval.

D. Cleaning and Closing: Piping, ductwork and equipment shall be inspected before

placing and the interior cleaned before closing. Piping and ductwork shall be closed at the end of each day's work.

E. Fabrication:

1. Manufacturers' Directions: follow Manufacturers' directions for equipment and devices installation.

F. Flashing: Pipes and ducts passing through roof shall be flashed and counterflashed.

Except where lead flashings are to be used, sheet metal material shall be 24-gauged




galvanized steel (minimum) zinc alloy. Such sheet metal work shall conform to the requirements of Division 7, Thermal and moisture protection.

3.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. Ductwork:

1. Work, materials and methods used shall conform to the Drawings, and to the "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems," SMACNA.

B. Piping:

1. Provide pipe bracing for piping suspended 12-inches or more from structure with

2 1/2" and larger diameter and gas piping 1” and larger diameter, per "SMACNA".

C. Equipment:

1. Equipment shall be accurately set and leveled; supports shall be neatly placed

and properly fastened. Equipment shall be fastened in place with bolts and seismic restraints.

3.4 EXCAVATION

A. Trenches: Dig straight and true to line and grade, bottom smoothed of any rock points. where rock is encountered, excavate 3-inches below grade of the pipe and fill with sand properly compacted. Pipe shall be supported for the entire length of undisturbed original earth or compacted sand. The bottom of trenches shall be shaped or compacted for the pipe, hubs and couplings, using templates to fit the outside periphery of the lower third of the piping. Compaction requirements shall conform to the site work section.

B. Shoring: Necessary shoring, sheeting and pumping shall be part of the work. C. Backfill: In accordance with soil report recommendations.

1. After piping has been installed, tested and approved, excavations shall be

backfilled, tamped and compacted to 95 percent by compressed air tampers. 2. Backfill to 6-inches above crown of pipe shall consist of unwashed sand, with

remainder of trench backfilled and mechanically tamped in 6-inches maximum layers of selected non-expansive structural fill (free of organic matter and rocks).

3. In any asphalt, concrete paved areas or slab floors backfill shall be made only to the subgrade level.

3.5 COORDINATION AND APPROVAL

A. Coordinate new work and existing conditions with other Contractors and Trades. If conflicts are discovered, a set of prints marked with red pencil showing recommended installation methods shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to installation of work in question.




3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification Markers shall be SEATON Nameplate Corp.

1. Piping: a. Piping which is accessible for maintenance shall be identified with

semi-rigid plastic identification markers as reviewed by the Architect. Use of tape is not permitted.

2. Identification of Equipment: a. Items of mechanical equipment such as control panels, air conditioning,

water heaters and fan units, shall be identified by approved nameplates. Nameplates shall be securely affixed to each individual piece of equipment.

3.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Provide and keep up to date a complete set of prints which shall be corrected regularly and shall show every change from the original contract drawings, including change orders and existing condition. Refer to Section 01700, CLOSEOUT.

3.8 ACCESS AND CLEARANCES

A. Equipment shall be placed and ductwork and connections made in such manner that all routine adjustments and maintenance operation may be performed without inconvenience and so that all code requirements for clearances are maintained. The following provisions are included:

1. Maintain 36" clear in front of electrical panels. 2. Allow space to replace air filers. 3. Allow space to operate sprinkler valves.

B. Provide access panels for all items requiring adjustments or maintenance.

3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Provide labor/test equipment, disconnect equipment from the system that can be damaged by pressure.

B. Thoroughly clean equipment, piping, and ducts, free from rust, scale, fillings, plaster

and dirt before and after covering and painting is done or systems are put in operation.

END OF SECTION


G:\09712.00\Archive\CD\2012-0319 Tracy Station 92 - Addendum 1\MEP\Specifications\15300 - Automatic Fire Sprinkler System.DOC 15300 -1 Automatic Fire Sprinkler System

SECTION 15300

AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Requirements of General Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification Section and Section 15050 apply to this Section

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide complete design-build Fire Protection system and stand pipes consisting of hydraulically calculated sprinkler system. In general, the work includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Complete fire sprinkler coverage for building including fire department hose

valves as required. 2. Removal of work installed without proper cooperation and coordination with

other crafts. 3. Stands, bases, hangers, bracing and supports. 4. Cutting, core drilling and patching of holes. 5. Removal of debris. 6. Repair of damages to the premises. 7. Cleanliness of equipment, piping and apparatus when the complete work is

accepted by the Owner. 8. Flashing and counterflashing of floor and wall penetrations. 9. Connection to the on-site fire main. 10. Complete working plans and hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA

#13, as required by local Fire Marshal. 11. Excavation, pumping and backfilling.

1.3 RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. All work and materials shall be in accordance with the latest rules, regulations and publications of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, State Fire Marshal, California Fire Code and California Building Code Chapter 38, Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety, the National Electrical Code, the (NFPA) National Fire Protection Association Standard #13 as required by local Fire Marshal and other applicable NFPA codes, City Fire Department Fire Prevention Bureau; Building Department, local Water Department, and all applicable local ordinances state laws or regulations. Nothing in these plans or specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes.

B. Whenever the indicated material, workmanship, arrangement or construction is of

higher quality or capacity than that required by the above rules and regulations, the specifications shall take precedence. Should there be any conflicts, the rules shall govern. All electrical materials shall bear the label of, or be listed by, the Underwriters'



Laboratories, unless the material is of a type for which label or listing service is not provided.

1.4 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Arrange and pay for all licenses and inspections necessary for the prosecution and completion of the work.

1.5 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS

A. Follow manufacturer's directions where these directions cover points not included on drawings or in the specifications.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit complete drawings and list of material and devices for review and approval. Provide a reproducible set of As-built drawing at the end of the job.

1.7 GUARANTEE

A. All labor and materials furnished or installed under this Section of the Specifications shall carry a written one (1) year guarantee by the Contractor to the Owner, covering materials and workmanship in full. Provide labor to replace defective parts or to make necessary adjustments of the system without change in contract cost during said guarantee period. Replace unsatisfactory or imperfect materials with those specified herein, and without change in contract cost. Secure with each piece of equipment the maximum guarantee or warranty available and pay necessary extra cost for same if required. Assemble certificates of warranty and fill in all necessary information complete, except purchase date, in favor of the Owner. Submit for approval.

1.8 DAMAGE BY LEAKS

A. Be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by leaks or breaks in pipe or equipment furnished or installed under this section of the work for a period of one (1) year after date of acceptance of the work.

1.9 MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Brand or trade names are used to establish standards of quality only. Products of other manufacturers, however, may be substituted only upon written approval of the Architect.

B. Within 30 days after award of the Contract, submit to the Architect six (6) copies of

complete information, including catalog cuts, describing all proposed substitutions and all equipment to be installed as specified. Requests for substitutions will not be considered if submitted later than 30 days after award of the contract, or if not accompanied by complete information.

C. Responsibility of conflicts due to space limitations is not relieved by approval of a

substitution. If revision of wiring, piping, or arrangement of other equipment is required by the substitution, prepare drawings showing such revisions, and after



approval furnish the Architect with six (6) corrected copies for file and future reference. Such revisions shall be accomplished at no change in contract cost.

D. Approval of a substitution does not authorize any deviation from the utility, size or

function of the specified item unless specifically pointed out and approval requested in the letter of submittal. Unless otherwise shown or specified, material shall be new, full weight, standard, the best quality of its kind and satisfactory to the Architect. Store and protect materials as necessary and/or as required by the Architect, and be entirely responsible for damage or loss from any cause.

1.10 ACCURACY OF DATA

A. Data given herein and on drawings are as exact as could be secured, but their accuracy is not guaranteed. Drawings and specifications are for assistance and guidance, and exact locations, distances, levels, etc., will be governed by the building and site. Take this Contract with this understanding.

1.11 DRAWINGS AND ARRANGEMENT

A. Install equipment and materials with all working parts readily accessible for inspection, repair and renewal. The right is reserved to make reasonable changes in locations of equipment shown on drawings prior to roughing-in without change in contract cost.

1.12 WORKING PLANS AND HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS

A. Prior to preparing working plans and calculations submit to the Architect a set of plans showing the proposed locations of all sprinkler heads for review.

B. Sprinkler systems shall be hydraulically calculated in accordance with NFPA #13.

Hazards, density and design area and hose stream allowances shall be as required by the City Fire Department Fire Prevention Bureau and owner’s insurance company.

C. Verify site flow rate and water pressure. Static pressure, residual pressure before any

work. Fire sprinkler system shall be calculated at not more than 90 percent of the water supply curve created by the test results.

D. The sprinkler riser assembly shall include supervised control valve, flow switch test

drain, and alarm bell. E. Submit plans and calculations to the local Fire Protection District Building Dept., and

Owner's insurance company for approval prior to submitting to the Architect. Sprinkler system shall be designed and calculated by a licensed sprinkler engineer and installed by a licensed sprinkler contractor.

F. Provide full coverage for entire building, including attic space, overhangs, walkways,

mechanical rooms, concealed spaces and closets. 1.13 QUALIFICATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor performing the work under this Specification shall have a current license in the State for Fire sprinkler work, shall have at least five years of experience,



and shall be regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA 13.

1.14 COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK

A. Become familiar with conditions at the job site, and with the specifications, and plan the installation of the fire sprinkling work to conform to the conditions shown and specified, so as to provide the best possible assembly of the combined work of all trades.

B. All "tight" conditions shall be worked out in advance with the General Contractor's

superintendent and the trades involved, and if found necessary, supplementary drawings shall be prepared by this contractor for the Architect's approval before work proceeds in these areas. No additional cost will be considered for work which must be relocated due to conflicts with the work of the trades.

C. Any differences or disputes concerning coordination, interference or extent of work

shall be decided by the Architect and his decision shall be considered final. Sprinkler piping shall run in concealed ceiling or walls as shown on drawings. No additional furred spaces will be allowed.

1.15 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. Examine the site and, compare with the drawings and specifications, and determine the conditions under which the work is to be performed. Examine all existing conditions and be responsible for all conditions which may affect the work. No allowance will subsequently be made for any extra expense due to failure or neglect to make such an examination or due to failure to discover conditions which affect this work.


A. Above ground and interior pipe and fittings:

1. All pipe and fittings shall be UL listed or FM approved for the service intended. 2. Pipe and fittings shall be rated for at least 175 psi non-shock cold water working

pressure. 3. All interior pipe (except as noted below) shall be Schedule 40 black steel per

ASTM A-120. All above grade exterior pipe shall be galvanized and shall be manufactured per ASTM A-120.

4. Schedule 10 pipe may be used for pipe 2" and larger (except pipe from the riser up through the water flow switch shall be Schedule 40). Schedule 10 to be manufactured per ASTM A-135. Schedule 10 pipe to be joined with grooved fittings only.

5. Grooved fittings shall be Victualic Style 75, victualic piping may be used in concealed areas only.

B. Pipe Joints:



1. Screwed joints: Joint compounds shall be graphite and oil, Teflon tape, or other compound suitable for the type of service and applied to male threads only. Wicking shall not be used.

2. Grooved joints: Use gaskets and lubrication in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.

3. Flanged joints: Cotton duck reinforced red rubber gaskets, suitable for the temperature and pressure of the service. Each gasket shall be stamped with the manufacturer's name. Joints shall be made up with bolts with heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts.

4. Welded connections: Use shop welded Weldolet; do not use field welded connections.

5. Plain end fittings are not acceptable; i.e., all pipe fittings shall be either threaded or grooved.

C. Valves

1. Control valves larger than 2" shall be OS&Y valves or indicating butterfly valves.

Valves shall be UL or FM approved, rated for 175 psi, non-shock, cold water working service.

2. Check valves shall be iron body, flanged, bronze mounted, full opening, rated 175 psi non-shock cold water working pressure, Stockham Model G-940. Alternately UL approved wafer style check valves may be used.

3. Gate valves 2" and smaller shall be screwed, bronze body, solid wedge, rising stem, pressure class 125, rated to 200 psi, non-shock, cold water working service.

D. Automatic sprinkler heads:

1. Sprinklers shall be 145-200 degree temperature rating, except where higher

temperature ratings are required by NFPA 13. Sprinklers shall be UL and FM approved, 1/2" orifice. All sprinklers less than 7'-0" above the floor shall be equipped with approved head guards. Sprinklers located in attics, mechanical rooms, concealed spaces, or under walkways or roof overhangs may be standard type. Sprinkler Heads exposed to the outside elements shall be lead coated.

a. Flush sprinkler: Central Royal Flush concealed model GB4-FR Quick

Response automatic sprinkler. Brass sprinkler with white flush cover plate. Use in all areas with finish ceiling.

b. Standard sprinkler: Upright or pendant Quick Response model QB-QR. c. A standard sprinkler cabinet with sprinklers, evenly divided among the

various types used, and a sprinkler wrench to fit each type of sprinkler, shall be provided and installed at a location designated by the Architect. Number of sprinklers to be per NFPA 13.

E. Flow Switches: Viking or equivalent, water flow indicators with built-in time delay with

two sets of contacts. Switches shall be compatible with the fire alarm system.

F. Pipe Hangers: U.L. listed, Grinnell Co. or equivalent. Acceptable type and spacing in accordance with NFPA 13.



G. Riser Clamps: Grinnell Co. FIG 261 or equivalent, provided for each pipe that stubs through more than one floor.

H. Escutcheons: Beaton Corbin, Grinnell Co., chrome plated, split type with set screws.

Provide at all wall, floor and ceiling penetrations. I. Riser manifold: Central riser manifold including flow switch, inspectors’ test valve and

trim valve. J. Sprinkler Alarm Check Valve: Shall be Viking, complete with pressure gauges, fire

department test valve and drain. K. Sprinkler Bell: Viking, Amseco, EXB Series 120V, 10" diameter with waterproof

backbox. L. Fiberglass Rope: Fiberfrax. M. Valve tamper switches: Shall be furnished and installed under the ELECTRICAL

Section of the work. N. Underground pipe and fittings: (4" and larger) from connection with outside fire

service to 6" inside building.

1. Pipe downstream from the connection with the on site fire main shall be as follows: (use standard transition piece as recommended by the pipe manufacturer). Pipe and fittings shall have a working pressure rating of 250 psi.

2. Underground pipe shall be Class 250 cast iron of the standardized mechanical joint type, centrifugally cast, conforming to American Standard A-21.11. Pipes shall be tar coated outside and cement lined inside. Pipe and joints shall be as manufactured by the United States Pipe & Foundry Company. Piping to within five (5) feet of building may use PVC C-900 and fittings.

3. Fittings shall be cast iron, rated for 250 psi working pressure, standardized mechanical joint compatible with pipe specified above, tar coated outside and cement lined inside, be manufactured by the same manufacturer, and be installed with a gasket and retaining gland that prevents the pipe from slipping from the fitting.

4. Tie rods shall be used at risers; retaining glands are not acceptable. 5. Provide “AMES in Building Riser” or equivalent.

O. Valves:

1. Gate valves shall be UL listed and be manufactured by Mueller. 2. Check valves shall be UL listed and be manufactured by Stockham. 3. Fire Department Hose Valves: Shall be Potter-Roemer #4065, 2 1/2" angle

type, cast brass with red iron hand wheel.

P. Sprinkler Cabinet:

1. Provide cabinet containing spare sprinkler heads and equipment of the following type and number on the wall at the main supply valve in an accessible location as directed by Owner.



a. (6) six bronze heads. b. (6) six chrome heads and canopies. c. (1) One Sprinkler wrench for each size and type of head and 1 pair of

sprinkler tongs. d. Cabinet distinctly labeled designating type and quantity of sprinkler

equipment it contains. e. All equipment and appurtenances shall be listed and approved by

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shown in current issue of "Fire Protection Equipment List"; all other materials shall be or an approved standard quality. All work shall be done in a through and workmanlike manner. All items of work and installation shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of all agencies having jurisdiction.

Q. Fire Extinguisher:

Provide one, 10-ABC rated extinguisher(s) in the following areas:

1. The equipment/compressor room(s). 2. In each cooking area. 3. Verify acceptability of the fire extinguisher finishes with local building department

prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install all piping so that a minimum of space is occupied and provide all fittings or offsets necessary. Sprinkler piping in areas with ceilings shall be concealed above the ceilings, unless otherwise noted. Coordinate location of heads with light fixtures and ceiling diffusers. Install piping clean, free of tool marks, plumb with building lines, and for expansion or contraction use special bends or swings where required. In making up joints, ream burrs and ridges and accurately cut all threads. Install all work in such a manner as to avoid conflict with structural members, lights, ducts, etc. Provide unions as required to facilitate convenient removal of valves and similar fittings. Where exposed pipes pass through walls, floors and ceilings, fit escutcheon plates fastened to the pipe with set screws. Seal annular space around pipes passing through floor slabs to provide watertight joint. Caulk with glass fiber rope the annular space around pipes that pass through fire separations. While work is in progress, plug and cap all openings in sprinkler work.

2. Drains and inspector's tests conforming to referenced standards shall be provided for every zone or control valve of the system. All drains shall discharge to approved locations. Discharge points shall be such that persons will not be subject to discharge and discharge shall be to an area away from architecturally sensitive areas. Submit location to Architect for approval. Provide an air gap at point of discharge.

B. Valves: Install where shown on the drawings, where specified, where required for the

proper functioning of the Fire Protection System. Valves shall be the same size as the pipe in which they are installed.



C. Flow Switch: Mount in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. A minimum of

18" is required between the indicator and any elbow or tee. D. Hangers and Brackets: Install sufficient hangers and mounting devices to support all

piping in perfect alignment without sagging or interference, to allow drainage, and so located and arranged to permit free expansion and contraction. Metal pipe supports, hangers, and all other accessories shall be UL listed or FM approved and located to comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 as a minimum. Earthquake sway bracing, flexible couplings and pipe clearances shall meet requirements of NFPA 13.

E. Equipment Identification and Operating Instructions: When placing order, instruct the

manufacturer to provide all materials (excepting nails, bolts, etc.) and each piece of equipment with an identification tag or nameplate which shall remain securely attached to the equipment until final acceptance of the system. Each tag shall contain all data required to properly identify quality and utility of the equipment; e.g., manufacturer, type, size, capacity and horsepower. Remove and reinstall as specified all equipment not furnished by the manufacturer with required tag or nameplate.

F. Valve Signs and Sprinkler System Operating Brochure:

1. All control, drain, test, and alarm valves shall be provided with identification

signs in accordance with NFPA 13. 2. Furnish the Owner with a brochure titled “Fire Sprinkling System” which shall

contain the following information typed and bound inside: a. An alphabetical list of sprinkler heads, valves and appurtenances, giving

the manufacturer, the catalog number, and the local distributing agent including address and telephone number.

b. Manufacturer's instructions for all items requiring maintenance. c. Submit three copies of the brochure to the Architect for approval, and

furnish the Owner with one corrected brochure.

G. Painting: Leave all exposed metal and insulated surfaces clean and ready to receive paint.

H. Trenching and Backfilling:

1. Provide excavation, trenching and backfilling in conformance with Division 2

Sitework, of these Specifications. 2. During excavation, materials suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly

manner at a sufficient distance from the trench to avoid damage to the trench. all trench and excavation spoils must be collected, loaded and disposed of off-site. The cost of such work must be included as part of this work.

3. Trenches shall not be backfilled until piping has been tested, inspected and approved.

I. Thrust Blocks: Concrete thrust blocks shall be installed at each direction change of

the underground fire main. Blocks shall be poured between fittings and undisturbed earth.

J. Testing and Backfill - Underground Piping:



1. After the installation has been completed the system should be flushed in accordance with NFPA 24. Waste water shall be disposed of as directed by the Architect.

2. After the pipe is laid, joints completed, thrust blocks set, trenches partially backfilled with joints exposed for examination, pipe shall be tested for not less than 2 hours at 200 psi. Tests shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Architect. Suitable means shall be provided for determining leakage during the test. Leakage shall not exceed 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints, pro rata. Operate all control valves under water pressure to insure proper operation. The contractor shall complete the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate and deliver 3 copies to the Architect. Notify Architect and local fire department at least 3 days in advance of test.

3. After successful completion of the test, the remainder of the trench shall be backfilled. Backfill shall be placed in six-inch maximum layers, moistened, tamped and compacted to 90% compaction until at least one foot of cover is placed above the pipe. Remainder of backfill shall be placed to avoid future settlement or shrinkage. In streets or traffic areas backfill shall be imported material, and consist of sand or fine gravel. Size to be such that 95% will pass a 1/2" screen and not more than 20% will pass a No. 200 screen. In walks or planted areas, backfill may be excavated material free of all rock, paving or organic matter.

K. Hydrostatic Tests - Above Ground Piping

1. Preliminary Hydrostatic Test: After the system has been installed, the new work

shall be subjected by the Contractor to a hydrostatic test per NFPA 13. The Contractor shall take precautions to detect and stop water leakage in order to minimize water damage. When the Contractor is satisfied that the system is in complete operating condition, he shall notify the Architect that he is ready for final inspection and shall transmit 6 copies of the test certificate per NFPA 13.

2. Final Hydrostatic Test and Inspection: Final inspection of the work shall be made by the Architect and local Fire Marshal, and these persons shall be notified at least 3 working days in advance of the tests. The installing foreman or other responsible representative of the Contractor shall be present to conduct operating tests of drains, inspector's test, and other tests requested by the Architect. Any faults found in the system or system components shall be corrected by the Contractor and the tests shall be repeated. Work that is damaged by the tests shall be restored to its original condition at no extra charge to the Owner. Upon completion of the tests the systems shall be placed in service.

END OF SECTION

FARD ENGINERS, INC. TRACY FIRE STATION 92

G:\09712.00\Archive\CD\2012-0319 Tracy Station 92 - Addendum 1\MEP\Specifications\15400 - Plumbing.doc

15400 - 1 Plumbing

SECTION 15400

PLUMBING


A. Requirements of General Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specifications Sections and Section 15050 apply to this section

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The work under this section includes everything necessary for or incidental to completing plumbing and piping work except as herein specifically excluded.

B. Principal items of work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Domestic water system from point of connection to outside utilities to all

plumbing fixtures and equipment requiring cold water. Connect service to site utility.

2. Sanitary drain, waste and vent systems and building sewers to point of connection to site sewer.

3. Cold water, hot water and piping systems. 4. Hot water heaters and trim. 5. Plumbing fixtures and trim. 6. Rough-in for and connections to equipment furnished under other sections. 7. Clothes washer connections in recessed wall box. 8. Roof jacks as specified in Section, Sheet Metal And Trim.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Includes:

1. Access doors: See Section 08305, Access Doors. 2. Laundry equipment: See Section 11452.

1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS, per Section 01700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pipe Fittings:

1. Soil waste and vent piping shall be no hub cast iron pipe and fittings with stainless steel neoprene sleeves 24 gauge stainless steel bands with worm drive clamps.

2. Hot water, cold water: Above ground shall be Type L copper pipe, underground shall be hard type "K". Tubing joints shall be made with Harris Brigit lead-free solder with matching flux.



15400 - 2 Plumbing

3. Gas piping: Above ground Schedule 40 black steel pipe; gas pipe below ground shall be Schedule 40 black steel with plastic coating. Gas piping 2" and smaller shall be threaded with screwed fittings; piping 4" and larger shall be welded. Fittings shall be tube turn, standard weight long radius pattern. Provide flanges at connection to valves. All welding shall be performed by a certified welder.

4. Condensate drain and Misc. piping: Copper tubing type "M" with DWV copper solder joint drainage fittings 50-50 lead-free solder.

5. Refer to corrosion report and drawings for pipe coatings and cathodic protection of buried steel, copper and ductile iron pipelines.

B. Valves: Nibco, Hammond.

1. Gate valves: 2" and smaller Nibco S-180, ring gate, or gate valve. 2-1/2" and 3"

Nibco T-113. 4" and larger T-619 iron body bronze trim. 2. Ball Valves: Nibco 580 series two piece bronze. At contractors option can be

used in lieu of gate valves for valves 1-1/2" and smaller. 3. Gas Cocks: For individual appliances: Crane #298; cocks for shut-offs in main

or branch lines, plug lubricated Nordstrom; 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch, Fig. 1018; 1-inch and larger, Fig. 143 flanged. Fill each lubricated type cock with the proper amount of Nordcoseal lubricant before final inspection. Gas regulators, fisher regulators, American Meter Company and Richards Industries first and second stage.

4. Trap Primers: E&S or Precision Plumbing Products trap primer valve. 5. Balancing Valves: Griswold isolator “Y” pressure independent flow control valve

with strainer, ball valves, SS cartridge and spring. 6. Gas seismic shut-off valve: Quake Master, Vanguard Valves Inc.

C. Dielectric protection: Provide insulated couplings and/or unions at points of

connection between copper, steel and brass piping, EPCO. D. Pipe Coating: All underground gas piping and steel piping including fire water shall be

coated with X-Tru-Coat, extruded plastic high density polyethylene coating. Field joints shall be made with Protecto Wrap No. 2002 tape, single layer with 50% overlap to make a double thickness of the tape throughout. Overlap factory wrapping by not less than 4". Clean all pipe and fittings and prime with protector Wrap #1170AP primer before applying tape.

E. Insulation: Insulate all hot water piping to runouts in walls with Fiberglass 25ASJ

2-piece heavy density pipe insulation 1" thick for piping up to 2"; 1-1/2" thick for piping 2-1/2" and larger; Apply insulation as per manufacturer's instructions; insulate fittings with Fiberglass insulating cement to thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Apply skim coat of insulating cement to provide smooth surface. Insulate cold water piping located in attic or exterior walls with 1/2” thick fiberglass insulation.

F. Fixtures and Trim:

1. Install all fixtures at locations shown on Architectural Drawings. Unless

otherwise noted. All fixtures to be white. a. Install chrome-plated two piece escutcheons plate on all pipes through

walls, ceilings or floor. Provide 17 ga. chrome plated brass P-traps and tail piece.



15400 - 3 Plumbing

2. Install stop valves on hot and cold water supplies to each fixture. 3. See drawings for plumbing fixture specifications.

G. Flashing: 26 gauge galvanized iron, typical; lead or zinc roof jacks as specified in

Section, Sheet Metal and Trim. H. Pipe Sleeves: Zurn Z-195 and/or fabricated sleeve. Sleeves shall have membrane

clamping rings and penetrations shall be sealed, water-proof sleeves.

I. Water Heaters: State. A.O. Smith, Bradford White.

1. Gas fired storage type, UL label, AGA approved, 150 psi working pressure, automatic controls, temperature/pressure relief valve. Model, size and capacity as listed on the drawings. Piping isolators shall be equal to the following: a. Hubbard Hold-Rite Silencer System b. Trisolator by Elmdor/Stoneman.

J. Sound Control: All water piping systems and drainage piping systems, including

supply, waste and drain shall be installed with vibration isolators and shall be isolated from any structural members, wall sections or other materials that could transmit sound to the occupied areas. All hangers, straps, brackets and supports shall have specially products single component line used in combination with felt pad, to isolate complete pipe contact area. Install all components as per manufacturer's instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES

A. Materials, methods and locations of service mains connecting the new construction to all new and existing services shall be in strict accordance with rules, regulations, codes and requirements of all agencies having jurisdiction over this installation. Check connections to existing work in order that the extension may be done as indicated on the drawings but before starting any other work. Locate and excavate all existing buried stubs to be connected to in this contract before excavation of trenches is started. Coordinate location of water and sewer connections with Site Utility Work. 1. Gas Services: Gas pressure measured at the meter outlet shall be 7" W.C.

Provide a lubricated gas shut off cock at gas service. 2. Sanitary Sewer: Connect to the on-site sewer connection points as shown on

civil engineering drawings. 3. Water Service: Connect to the on-site domestic water main connection points,

as shown on civil engineering drawings. 4. Storm sewer: Connect to the on site storm sewer connection points as shown

on civil engineering drawings 3.2 PIPE

A. Install all piping clean, free of tool marks, plumb with building lines and graded to drain and eliminate air pockets and to avoid conflict with structural members. Make ample provisions for expansion and contraction using special bends or swings where required. Provide unions as required to facilitate convenient removal of valves and



15400 - 4 Plumbing

similar fittings. Install valves where shown on the drawings and where required for the proper functioning of the plumbing system. All valves installed by this Section shall be of the same manufacture. Valves, strainers, cocks, etc., shall be the same size as the pipes in which they are installed, unless otherwise indicated. Provide chrome plated split ring escutcheon plates fastened to the pipe with set screws wherever a pipe enters the wall, floor or ceiling in finished portions of the building. Vent all traps and run separately or combine to a point 1-foot above the roof and leave open. Fixture vents may be connected to the main vent at a point 1-foot above the highest fixture and not less than 3'-6" above the floor. While work is in progress, plug or cap all openings in plumbing work. Provide sound control on all water piping not installed in the ground. Install dielectric couplings wherever a non-ferrous pipe connects to a ferrous pipe or piece of equipment. Sanitary and storm sewer piping shall run at minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot.

3.3 PIPE JOINTS

A. Copper and Brass Pipe and Tubing: Make up all joints below grade with silver brazing alloy, 1100oF melting point or greater, ASTM B-260; piping not buried in the ground make up with lead free solder. Joints above grade shall be made with lead free solder.

B. Make all other pipe joints and connections in accordance with IAPMO Installation

Standards. 3.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Install where required by ordinances, where shown on the drawings, and in the following locations: at the ends of house drains, at all changes in directions, in all straight runs at 50 foot intervals, where horizontal mains change size, and at all ends of all branch pipes which are 5' or over in length.

3.5 DISINFECTION

A. Disinfect all water lines used for domestic supply. The amount of chlorine applied shall be equal at least 50 parts per million for a period of eight (8) hours.

B. Open and close all valves several times during the disinfection period, flush out the

system until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 PPM. 3.6 TESTS

A. Pressure test entire hot and cold piping and drainage system from capped connections, to and including vents above roof.

1. Furnish the necessary materials, test pumps, gauges and labor required for

testing. 2. System shall be tested in accordance with the following schedule without

pressure loss nor visible leaks within four (4) hours duration:

System Tested Test Pressure PSIG Test With



15400 - 5 Plumbing

Sanitary Sewer, Fill system to top of Water Drain and Vent highest vent in the system.

Hot and Cold Water 150% of Line Pressure Water

Gas 50 lb. gauge Air

3. System test results and test verification shall be submitted with as-built

drawings. 3.7 OPERATION

A. After completion, operate the different systems and equipment under their normal working conditions.

B. Should any piece of apparatus or any material or work fail in any of these tests,

immediately remove and replace with new materials and test the portion of the work replaced.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 15650 - 1 Vehicle Exhaust System

SECTION 15650

VEHICLE EXHAUST SYSTEM


A. Requirements of General Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specifications Sections apply to the work of this section the same as if set forth in full herein.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work Included: The work under this section is design build and includes all labor and material necessary for the installation of complete and satisfactorily operable systems of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning, including work shown on the drawings and/or described by this section of the specifications. In general, the work includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Furnish complete Emergency Vehicle Auto-Disconnect Exhaust System of the

Sliding Balancer track type with Pneumatic Grabber Nozzle, as provided by PlyMovent Corporation, 375 Raritan Center Parkway, Edison, NJ 08837, (732) 417-0808, no substitution.

2. A system of controls shall be furnished and installed complete as hereinafter described. All wiring and electrical cable complete with electrical accessories and materials as required for the installation of the control system shall be furnished under the Section of the Contract, but shall conform to the Specification requirements as set forth under Division 16.

3. Sliding Balancer Track 4. Grabber Nozzle 5. Spring Coil Balancer 6. Flexible Hose 7. Weatherproof, direct drive, spark resistant exhaust fan withTEFC motor and

discharge muffler. 8. All Supports 9. Control panel, UL listed to include motor starter. 10. Vibration Isolators.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. The following work is included in other Sections. Where coordination is necessary, it shall be provided by this subcontractor.

1. Mechanical General Requirements – Section 15050. 2. Plumbing Systems – Section 15400 3. Vehicle Exhaust System – Section 15650 4. Electrical – Division 16000.




A. All work and material shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of the State of California Building Code, California Plumbing Code, California Mechanical Code, National Electrical Code, the California Energy Conservation Standard, the National Fire Protection Association, and any applicable State laws or regulations of local utility companies. Nothing in the plans or specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to these rules and regulations.

B. Should there by any direct conflict between the drawings and/or specifications and the

above rules and regulations, the rules and regulations shall take precedence. However, when the indicated material, workmanship, arrangement or construction is of a superior quality of capacity to that required by the above rules and regulation, the drawings and/or specifications shall precedence. Rulings and interpretation of enforcing agencies shall be considered a part of the regulations.

C. All electrical materials shall bear the label of, or be listed by, the U.L. unless the

material is of a type for which label or listing is not provided. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Section. B. Product data: Submit 6 copies of the following to the Architect for approval prior to

acquisition:

1. Materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this Section including, but not limited to, all equipment and mountings, flexible noses and accessories, duct specialties, flexible connections, controls, piping and accessories.

2. Manufacturer’s specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. All pieces of equipment shall be clearly identified on corresponding manufacturer’s literature being submitted.

3. Shop drawings must be accompanied with a basic representative drawing showing, in plain view, the overall system layout.

4. All submittals for entire Project shall be submitted at the same time or all may be rejected until all are included in one submittal package.

5. All submittals shall be bound together in a three hole folder or a three ring binder.

6. OSHA: Occupational safety and health Administration 1.6 DESIGN CHANGES CAUSED BY PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Contractor shall pay costs of design and installation for changes resulting from substitution of alternate products.

B. Acceptance of alternate products by Architect does not change this requirement.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING



A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLIDING BALANCER TRACK

A. Track shall be one piece continuous extruded aircraft aluminum type AA-06063 in a minimum length of 20 feet. Construction profile shall be a boxloc Type profile which adheres to the following dimensional data. Track height 3’8”, Track wide 1-1/2”, Track Thickness 1/8”.

B. Telescopic vertical support mounting legs to be adjustable from 4 ft. to 7.5 ft. in 1”

increments. C. If telescopic vertical supports exceed 2’, horizontal side bracing is necessary.

Horizontal side bracing to be 45 tubular steel, 2 ft. Long by 1” in diameter. Braces will be chrome-plated finish.

D. Traveling trolley to be .25” electrogalvanized steel plate with four steel ball bearing

rollers. E. Trolley stops to be .25” electrogalvanized steel plate with adjustable threaded bolt.

Trolley stops to be provided for each end of horizontal track. F. Flexible vehicle exhaust hose to be 4” diameter, consisting of 4-ply black high

temperature composite impregnated fabric laminated over a spring wire helix bound with a protective yellow wear strip to allow for high visibility of hanging hose by personnel. Flame retardant to U.L. 94 V.0.

G. Pneumatic low pressure air regulator to have easy to read pressure needle gauge and

adjustable regulating knob with locking set screw. H. Manual inflation/deflation (MFD) valve to be push-button and provided with automatic

deflation switching and exhaust port for bleeding of pneumatic nozzle. Provided with this valve shall be automatic safety break-away feature for pneumatic nozzle. Provided with this valve shall be automatic safety beak-away feature for pneumatic air line which supplies pneumatic nozzle.

I. Uncoupling valve shall be mounted to an easily moveable adjustable mounting

bracket to accommodate the varying exist speed of the fire and will automatically activate the exhaust port of the manual fill and deflations valve described in 1-H.

J. High temperature supply and blow-down pneumatic lines must be installed within 4”

diameter exhaust hose, and fed through close tolerance eyelets at fill valve to protect and eliminate tangling or fouling of pneumatic lines on apparatus.

K. System must release both ways if bay is drive through.

2.2 PNEUMATIC GRABBER NOZZLE



A. To be made of molded high temperature polymer composite and constructed of a multi-layer dual air bag lined and reinforced with Kevlar synthetic cord. Nozzle to have four panel inflation pattern capable of internally expanding to accommodate tail pipes from 1” thru 6” in diameter. Nozzle and reducing elbow will not exceed 5 lbs. Nozzle’s grabbing strength to be 10 thru 15 psi under normal use and shall have a maximum bursting pressure of 100 psi. Nozzle to have grabber lock seal connection between nozzle and 1 piece 45 degree reducing elbow.

2.3 SPRING COIL BALANCER

A. To be totally enclosed cast aluminum with adjustable weight and cable return control feature. Balancer must have a lifting capacity of 31 lbs. and a cable length of 8 ft. and be made of high grade stainless steel aircraft terminated with a stainless steel one way safety link.

2.4 SUSPENSION HALTER (SADDLE)

A. To be made from a heavy duty molded rubber cushion that is attached to the hose by way of a stainless steel hose clamp and D ring fastener.

2.5 SAFETY DISCONNECT COUPLING

A. To be made up of two spun aluminum collars. The two collars will be held together by a reusable rubber mating band. The reusable breakaway mating band will have a maximum release tension not to exceed 50 lbs. One collar must have an expanded metal debris screen to keep foreign material out of exhaust system and blower.

2.6 EXHAUST FANS

A. Fan housing shall be spark resistant aluminum cast construction and be manufactured as a two-piece split housing with silicon seal for easy maintenance.

B. Fan impeller shall be radial blade type and be constructed of cast aluminum spark

resistant material. Fan wheels shall be both statistically and dynamically balanced. C. Fan shall be high pressure blower and have a minimum CFM and static pressure

gauge capacity as scheduled on the drawings. D. Fan shall be direct drive motor mounted steel or aluminum mounting base E. Fan housing shall be provided with Teflon shaft seal to prevent motor shaft sparking,

interrupting turbulence and drying of motor bearings. F. Fan shall be properly supported and structurally braced to prevent excess vibration

and/or movement. G. Fan shall be provided as arrangement for upblast discharge with muffler.

H. All fans shall be tested in accordance with AMCA Standard #210 in an AMCA

approved test facility.



I. Fan shall be AMCA Type A construction.

2.7 MOTORS

A. All motors shall be supplied as Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC). B. Motor shall be three-phase. C. Motor shall comply with UMC Chapter 1103 (A).

2.8 PRODUCT CONVEYING AIR DUCTS

A. Round duct to be galvanized steel spiral pipe and have positive airtight sales. B. 90 and 45 elbows shall be 1.5 diameter radius, one piece airtight welding, die

stamped or welded gore construction. C. Tapers, laterals, and fittings to be airtight. D. The following UMC Codes shall apply: Chapter 6 and Appendix A; 6-1 and 6-2. E. Minimum Conveying Velocities shall be 3500 feet per minute.

2.9 FAN STARTER

A. Controller Logic: Shall be designed to sense the output pressure which is normally generated by any internal combustion engine designed to propel any motor vehicle. The operating logic shall be designed to complete this cycle, at any point in time, when a collection device is connected to a motor vehicle's exhaust tail pipe and at which time the vehicle is manually or automatically energized and at which time the vehicle is manually or automatically energized by the operator. This controller shall in turn automatically sense the engine's output pressure and in turn energize the electrical contractors which will provide proper full load amperage to the exhaust system motor. The controller through the use of a three minute fixed timer shall keep the contactors energized for the three minute minimum fixed time. If the responding vehicle does not disconnect from the exhaust ventilation system in less than the prescribed three minute setting, a temperature override switch shall override the fixed timer delay relay to ensure continuous system operation for as long as the exhaust gas temperature being transported through the duct exhaust gas temperature being transported through the duct system is in the excess of 130 degrees Fahrenheit. At no time during this cycle shall the controller allow the exhaust ventilation fan to short cycle by stopping and staring anywhere during the period of time that the vehicle is connected to and operating on the ventilation system.

B. Certification/Approvals-electricaI controller offered to the department shall be

approved by Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) as a complete electrical system for enclosed industrial control panels.



C. U.L. Rating-Electrical controller shall be U.L. listed/approved and manufactured in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories standard LTL-508 enclosed industrial control panels. The electrical trolley shall include a limited energy control circuit.

D. Electrical Enclosure: Shall be NEMA 12 rated and UL listed as Type 12 E. Enclosure Keylock: Shall be provided and mounted in electrical enclosure to

restrict access to internal components of controller by only authorized entry. F. Control Transformer: To be UL listed industrial control circuit transformer with

primary and secondary fuse -blocks. Transformer shall be provided with multitap primary 208V through 48OV, AC, and 24V through 120V secondary.

G. Electrical Timer: Shall be solid state, 3 minute fixed timer. Operating logic shall

complete this cycle. Input voltage is applied to the timer at all times. Upon closure of a normally open isolated start switch, the load energizes and remains energized as long as the switch is closed. When the start switch opens, the load de-energizes and the timer is ready for a new timing cycle. Timer shall be UL Recognized component under file number E65038

H. Engine Start Switch: Shall be engine pressure type capable of recognizing the

output pressure of any type of motor vehicle. Electrical contact shall be dry type or not exceed 24V.

I. Temperature Override Switch: to be closed on rise type to enable continuous

system operation after the fix time delay relay has completed its timing cycle. J. Push To Stop Button: Shall be Allan Bradley illuminated amber contact push

button. This device shall meet U.L. Type 4X rating. Indicator light/start button shall be mounted on the enclosure cover and be identified by engraved ledger plate.

K. Wiring.- Shall be run in wire channel to allow for easier identification of wiring

circuit and appearance. All wiring circuitry shall meet UL listed for proper bending radiuses and terminations.

L. Terminal Block: Shall be 60OV, UL rated, recognized and shall provide individual

connection points for remote controls, power and motor connections. M. Wiring Identification: Shall be computer generated and identify all terminals, fuses,

contactors, and both supply and termination points. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR TRAINING

A. Contractor/installer(s) must 'complete manufacturer's training course and must obtain certificate of completion from manufacturer prior to start of installation.

3.2 SURFACE CONDITIONS



A. Examine the areas on conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are correct.

3.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the Work of those trades for interface with the Work of this Section.

3.4 PREPARATION

A. Flashing

1. Where items of this Section penetrate the roof, outer walls, or waterproofing of any kind, provide under this Section all base flashing and counter flashing required at such penetration.

3.5 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Mount piping, ductwork, and equipment in spaces provided unless specifically shown otherwise. If spaces are inadequate, notify Architect in time to avoid unnecessary Work. Do not cut or notch structural members without specific approval of the Architect.

B. Follow manufacturer's instructions on items not specifically covered in drawings

and specifications. Report discrepancies to Architect for clarification before starting Work

3.6 EQUIPMENT INTERFACE

A. For electrically operated equipment, verify the electrical characteristics actually available for the Work of this Section and provide equipment meeting those characteristics.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be delivered to the Project site with all surfaces clean and free of loose dirt and rust. Special care shall be exercised by the Contractor to store the equipment in a clean area to prevent the accumulation of dirt prior to installation. If possible, the Contractor should arrange to deliver equipment to the project site and store on the floor of the area in which it is to be installed.

B. Before installation of all equipment, the Contractor shall inspect each piece and

wipe all internal and external surfaces clean. At the end of each Work period, or when ends of hoses are left open, the open ends shall be tightly closed off with a plastic sheet and taped securely to the open end of the hose.

3.8 CONTROL INSTALLATION



A. Install wiring and tubing parallel to walls and floors and securely clipped to structure or mechanical system components. Group parallel runs for neat appearance.

B. Upon completion of the installation calibrate all equipment and adjust controls for

proper operation.

3.9 OPERATION OF SYSTEM

A. Upon the vehicle's return to the apparatus room of the firehouse, a four inch flexible hose equipped with Pneumatic Grabber Nozzle is attached to the tailpipe of the vehicle, and is inflated by a manual fill valve located on the flex hose. The vehicle can then be moved into the firehouse and parked in its designated position.

B. As the vehicle leaves the apparatus room, the flexible hose with the grabber nozzle

travels along the Sliding Balancer Track configured with a spring coil balancer. The balancer is used to keep excess hose slack from the floor and away from the apparatus. At the end of the travel of the Sliding Balancer rail, the uncoupling valve releases the compressed air from the grabber nozzle, allowing for smooth uncoupling of the exhaust system.

C. Exhaust nozzles must be Pneumatic Grabber Type with a positive seal connection to

the vehicle tailpipe.

D. The system must allow for drive through-type apparatus room bays.

E. Contractor must provide apparatus exhaust modification estimates, if required for system functionality.

END OF SECTION


G:\09712.00\Archive\CD\2012-0319 Tracy Station 92 - Addendum 1\MEP\Specifications\15700 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.doc

15700 - 1 Heating, Ventilating And Air Conditioning

SECTION 15700

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING


A. Requirements of General Provisions, Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 and Section 15050 "General Requirements" apply to the work of this section the same as if set forth in full herein.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work Included: The work under this section includes all labor and material necessary for the installation of complete and satisfactorily operable systems of heating, ventilating and air conditioning, including work shown on the drawings and/or described by this section of the specifications. In general, the work includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Furnace and condensing units, DX coil, vent piping, filters, and piping. 2. Supply, return and exhaust fans. 3. Air terminals, diffusers, registers, fire dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers.. 4. Supply and return ductwork and insulation, meet or exceed Title 24 energy

requirement. 5. Flashing and counterflashing of all roof and wall penetrations. 6. Supports and foundations for all equipment furnished under this section. 7. Completely automatic temperature controls for the entire system installed under this

section. 8. Coordination of HVAC work with other sections, including openings in structural

beams. 9. Permanent identification of all equipment installed under this section. 10. Provide "As-Built" drawings as hereinbefore specified. 11. Furnish, install and connect all temperature control and interlock wiring for

mechanical equipment for all voltages. 12. Testing of equipment and systems.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. The following work is included in other Sections. Where coordination is necessary, it shall be provided by this Subcontractor.

1. Mechanical General Requirements - Section 15050 2. Plumbing Systems - Section 15400 3. Electrical - Division 16000 4. Fire Protection – Section 15300





A. Should there be any direct conflict between the drawings and/or specifications and the above rules and regulations, the rules and regulations shall take precedence. However, when the indicated material, workmanship, arrangement or construction is of a superior quality or capacity to that required by the above rules and regulations, the drawings and/or specifications shall take precedence. Rulings and interpretation of enforcing agencies shall be considered a part of the regulations.

B. All electrical materials shall bear the label of or be listed by the U.L. unless the material is

of a type for which label or listing service is not provided. 1.5 ENERGY CONSERVATION COMPLIANCE

A. All work shall comply with "ENERGY EFFICIENCY STANDARDS FOR RESIDENTIAL AND NONRESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS". California Code of Energy Regulations.

B. Equipment: All equipment shall be certified by the California Energy Commission by the

manufacturer to comply with the efficiency standards for such appliances. C. Insulation: All insulation material shall be certified by the California Energy Commission.

1.6 MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Brand or trade names are used to establish minimum standards of quality and performance only. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted only with written approval of the Architect. Substitute products shall have performance and material characteristics equal to or greater than those specified and/or scheduled.

B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all material shall be new, full weight, standard, of the

best quality of its kind, and satisfactory to the Architect. C. The following items to be submitted for approval:

1. Furnaces and condensing units. 2. Diffusers and grilles. 3. Duct Construction. 4. Duct Insulation. 5. Round flexible duct. 6. Vibration isolators. 7. Refrigerant piping. 8. Exhaust fans. 9. Temperature control system.

1.7 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors and motor control equipment shall conform to the standards of the National

Electrical manufacturers Association. B. Motors and motor control equipment shall be as specified below.




C. The work under this section shall include:

1. Furnish and install all motors, motor starters, and control devices. 2. Furnish and install conduit and line voltage interlock wiring. Installation of wire

includes the connection of devices. 3. Furnish and install conduit and low voltage (24 volts or less) wiring. Installation of

wire includes the connection of devices.

D. Conduit shall be concealed in building construction. E. Except as noted above, disconnect switches, power circuits from electrical panelboard to

disconnect switch, to starters, to motors and to pushbuttons and/or other motor controls shall be furnished and installed under the Electrical Section of the specifications.

F. Each motor shall conform to NEMA standards and shall be Century, General Electrical.

1. Verify the electrical characteristics furnished for motors and equipment and order

units to suit actual on-site voltage characteristics.

G. Relays shall be Westinghouse Type 15-825, Square D Class 8501

H. All wiring shall be installed in conduit

1. Wire for low voltage shall be Type TW No. 16, color coded. 2. Conduit and line voltage wiring shall be the same as specified under the Electrical

Section of the specifications.

I. Devices shall be mounted in NEMA enclosures of the type required for the application of the device.

1.8 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

A. See also ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS specified above. B. Provide a complete electrical system of controls. The entire temperature control system

shall be installed by this Section, and be responsible for the entire installation, including packaged equipment controls and power wiring.

C. Include with the submission of detail drawings and specifications a detailed description of

the system function. Drawings, specifications and description shall include packaged equipment controls and all electrical interlock and power wiring.

D. All low voltage wiring and line voltage interlock wiring shall be furnished and installed

under this Section. E. All control apparatus not otherwise provided with packaged equipment shall be furnished

and installed by the controls manufacturer.




F. Thermostats shall have blank covers and shall comply with all requirements of the "California Energy Standard".

1.9 PAINTING

A. Leave all exposed metal and insulated surfaces clean and ready to receive paint.

1.10 BALANCING AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

A. Testing and balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation.

B. Four copies of the complete test report shall be submitted to the Architect prior to final

acceptance of the project. C. Make allowance for air filter resistance at the time of the tests. The main air supplies shall

be at design air quantities and at an air resistance across the filter bank midway between the design specifications for clean and dirty filters.

D. Verify control sequence, setting and operation of automatically controlled dampers. Final

position of manual dampers shall be plainly marked after balancing is complete. E. Air terminal reading shall be performed in accordance with the recommendations of the air

device manufacturer. F. Notify the Owner immediately and discontinue all balancing work if it is found that any part

of the system cannot be balanced to design specifications. Submit a written report to the Owner as necessary, describing the component, i.e., fan drive, damper, pump, valve, etc., that does not function properly to permit proper balancing to be performed.

G. Set speed tab for furnaces and fans as specified. H. Adjust fan rpm (change pulley if necessary) to deliver specified cfm. Mark final setting

with felt pen. Use replacement plugs in test holes. I. Balance air flow to match drawings within minus 0% to plus 10% for both the supply and

return systems. This shall be done with the doors closed. J. The balance report shall include: Nameplate data for all motors, running amps and

voltage at all motors, AK factors for all diffusers, air quantities at all diffusers, entering and leaving air temperatures during heating and cooling at the A.C. units and appropriate pressure readings across the fan, and a key plan numbering all outlets.

1.11 CLEANING

A. Completely cover motor and other moving machinery to protect from dirt and water during

construction. Cap all openings into ducts and pipes to protect from foreign matter while under construction.




B. Thoroughly clean inside of ductwork before installing grilles. C. During the process of work, premises shall be kept reasonably free of all debris, cuttings

and waste material resulting from work under this heading. All debris, rubbish, leftover materials, tools and equipment shall be removed from the site prior to final acceptance.

D. Thoroughly clean all parts of apparatus and equipment. Exposed parts which will be

painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials. All grease or oil spots shall be removed with carbon tetrachloride. Such surfaces shall be carefully brushed down with a wire brush to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean.

E. Damaged factory applied finishes shall be "touched up". "Touch up" shall be

accomplished with preparation, prime and finish coats applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.12 TESTING

A. After work is completed, the system including all items of equipment, shall be operated and tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer as a condition of final acceptance.

B. The Mechanical Engineer will verify Contractor's testing report and balancing at the job

site, and prepare punch lists. C. Acceptance of all phases of the job including balance reports and punch list items shall be

a condition of final payment. 1.13 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Furnish the Owner with a hard bound brochure titled "Mechanical System" which shall contain the following information typed, indexed, tabbed and bound inside:

1. An alphabetical list of all equipment excepting pipe and fittings; the manufacturer;

the catalog number; and the local distributing agent, including his address and telephone number.

2. Manufacturer's instructions for all items requiring maintenance. This shall include, but not be limited to, all motor driven equipment, controls, pressure regulating devices, packaged equipment, etc. Where manufacturer's directions are not clear, are incomplete or do not exist, develop information necessary to service, clean, adjust, etc., all items. Delete all information in manufacturer's literature which is not applicable. identify all equipment in the manual. List the time intervals that all maintenance tasks should be performed.

B. Submit three (3) copies of the brochure to the Architect for approval and furnish the

Owner with at least two (2) corrected brochures. C. Provide for and fasten to each piece of equipment a permanent identification tag

fabricated of engraved laminated plastic, white between black lamination, indicating the identifying mark.




1.14 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Furnish "As-Built" drawings per Division 1. 1.15 GUARANTEE

A. Furnish for all mechanical materials per Division 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SPLIT HVAC SYSTEM

A. Split System, Gas Fired Furnace:

1. Gas Fired Furnace. 4-way multipurpose gas-fired condensing furnace for use with natural gas. Unit shall be designed, tested and constructed to the current ANSI Z 21.47/CSA 2.3 design standard for gas-fired central furnaces. Unit efficiency testing will be performed per the current DOE test procedure as listed in the Federal Register. Unit will be certified for capacity and efficiency and listed in the latest GAMA Consumer's Directory of Certified Efficiency Ratings. Unit will carry the current Federal Trade Commission Energy Guide efficiency label.

a. Warranty. 20 years limited warranty on heat exchanger. 5 years limited warranty on entire unit.

b. Components shall include: Slow-opening gas valve, regulate gas flow, with electric switch gas shut-off; flame proving sensor, hot surface igniter, pressure switch assembly verified inducer operation; flame rollout switch, drain tubing and installed condensate drain trap, blower and inducer assembly, 40va transformer, low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat.

c. Blower Wheel and Blower Motor. Galvanized blower wheel shall be centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced. Blower motor shall be permanently lubricated with sealed bearings, and shall be multiple-speed direct drive. Blower motor shall be soft mounted to the blower scroll to reduce vibration transmission.

d. Filters. Furnace shall have reusable or throw-away type filters. e. Casing. Casing shall be of .030 in. thickness minimum, pre-pained

galvanized steel. f. Indoor Motor: Inducer motor shall be soft mounted to reduce vibration

transmission. g. Primary Heat Exchangers: Primary heat exchangers shall be 3-Pass 20

gauge corrosion resistant aluminized steel of fold-and-crimp sectional design, which operates under negative pressure.

h. Secondary Heat Exchangers. Secondary heat exchangers shall be of a flow-through design having a patented interior laminate coating of polypropylene for greater corrosion resistance with fold-and-crimp design, which operates under negative pressure.

i. Controls. Controls shall include a microprocessor based integrated electronic control board with troubleshooting codes displayed via diagnostic




flashing LED light on the control. Multiple operation al settings available including separate blower speeds. Cooling airflow will be selectable between 350 or 400 CFM per ton of air conditioning.

2. Condenser Unit. Outdoor-mounted, air-cooled, split-system air conditioner unit

suitable for ground or rooftop installation. Unit consists of a hermetic compressor, an air-cooled coil, propeller-type condenser fan, and a control box. Unit will be used in a refrigerator circuit to match up to a packaged fan coil or coil unit. a. Quality Assurance. Unit will be rated in accordance with the latest edition

of ARI Standard 210. Unit will be certified for capacity and efficiency, and listed in the lasted ARI directory. Unit construction will comply with latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE and with NEC. Unit will be constructed in accordance with UL standards and will carry the UL label of approval. Unit will have c-UL approval. Unit cabinet will be capable of withstanding Federal Test. Method Standard No. 141 (Method 6061) 500-hr salt spray test. Air-cooled condenser coils will be leak tested at 150 psig and pressure tested at 450 psig. Unit constructed in ISO9001 approved facility.

b. Warranty. 5 years limited compressor warranty. 5 years limited part warranty.

c. Factory assembled, single piece, air-cooled air conditioner unit. Contained within the unit enclosure are all factory wiring, piping, controls, compressor, refrigerant charge Puron® (R-410A), and special features required prior to field start-up.

d. Unit Cabinet. Unit cabinet will be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized, and coated with a powder coat paint.

e. Fans: Condenser fan will be direct-drive propeller type, discharging air upward. Condenser fan motors will be totally enclosed, 1-phase type with class B insulation and permanently lubricated bearings. Shafts will be corrosion resistant. Fan blades will be statically and dynamically balanced. Condenser fan openings will be equipped with coated steel wire safety guards.

f. Compressor. Compressor will be hermetically sealed. Compressor will be mounted on rubber vibration isolators.

g. Condenser Coil. Condenser coil will be air cooled. Coil will be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes which are then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed.

h. Refrigeration Components. Refrigeration circuit components will include liquid-line shutoff valve with seat connections, vapor-line shutoff valve with seat connections, system charge of Puron® (R-410A) refrigerant, and compressor oil. Unit will be equipped with high-pressure switch, low pressure switch and filter drier for Puron refrigerant. Provide long line accessories where refrigerant line set length exceeds 80'. Size refrigerant piping to minimize cooling capacity loss.

2.2 EXHAUST FANS

A. Ceiling exhaust fan: Greenheck, Panasonic, Broan ceiling fan. Fan housing shall be constructed of phosphatized steel, lined with 1/2" thick insulation. The motor shall be




internally mounted on resilient elastic grommets. The fan shall have a forward curved steel centrifugal wheel. All fans shall bear the AMCA seal for air and sound performance, and U.L. label. Provided backdraft damper. The motor disconnect shall be internal and of plug in type.

B. In-line fans shall be of the centrifugal belt driven in-line type. The fan housing shall be

constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. Fan construction shall include two removable access panels. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air performance. Fan shall be U.L. listed with motor cover.

C. Utility fan: Utility fans with forward curved wheels as manufactured by Greenheck, Penn,

Loren Cook. Fan performance shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 test code for air moving devices. Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for air performance.

2.3 VENT

A. Provide each gas burning appliance with a double wall galvanized steel flue, Metalbestos, Duravent, U.L., type B flue. The flue shall be complete with all fittings required for an approved installation, including drip cap, tee, couplings, flashing coupling, and flue cap. Flash and counterflash the flue where it passes through the roof with 22 gauge galvanized steel. Securely fasten the flue to the building construction at each joint. Provide a Briedert, Metalbestos, Air-X-Hauster Flue Cap. Condensing furnaces shall have combustion air and vent piping provided and installed as recommended by manufacturer.

2.4 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS

A. General: Furnish in finish coat of paint of color selected by the Architect. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be Titus, Baily. Type of flange shall match the type of ceiling.

2.5 DUCT WORK

A. Low pressure ducts and plenums shall be galvanized steel constructed in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standard for 2" S.P. Class.

B. Aluminum flex duct can be used for concealed supply and return ducts only.

2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPES

A. Refrigerant Pipes shall be Type K Hard Drawn Copper. Provide "Long Line" accessories for pipe exceeds Mfgr's recommended limit.

2.7 DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES

A. Air Extractor: Titus, Baily, Model TV, Barber-Colman, Deflectrol.




B. Manual operating quadrant shall be Ventlock Duravent No. 64 with No. 609 end bearing, Elgen. Operators shall be marked "OPEN" and "CLOSED".

C. Turning Vanes: Tuttle & Bailey Ducturn, Aero/Dyne Company, H.E.P., turning vanes. D. Duct Flexible Connection: Ventfab 3002 neoprene coated Fiberglass fabric, Elgen

SDN-4. E. Duct Access Door: Air Balance, Inc., Karpp, Model FSA-100, American Warming &

Ventilating, Inc. Model 385.

F. Round Flexible Duct: Genflex, Delta-flex, Thermaflex; SLS-181 low pressure flexible duct, 3' long section with compression fitting. Flexible duct shall be insulated and acoustically rated with a porous fabric inner liner equal to the following: a. Casco Silent-Flex II b. Flexmaster Type 6

Acoustical flexible duct installed at each register shall be a minimum of three feet long. Where flexible duct is installed, the following restrictions apply: c. Maximum turn angle of 90 degrees. d. Minimum inside radius of one duct diameter. e. Limit of two bends per flexible duct. Internal Acoustical duct lining shall be as follows: a. Internal duct liner: minimum one-inch thick equal to the following:

1) ToughGard duct liner by Certainteed. 2) Permacote Linacoustic by Johns Manville..

b. Internal plenum liner board minimum one-inch thick equal to the following: 1) ToughGard rigid liner board by Certainteed 2) Linacoustic R-300 liner board by Johns Mansville.

2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. All isolators shall be in accordance with the following specifications and/or as detailed on the drawings, and shall be manufactured by Mason, kinetics. The isolation manufacturer shall include in the submittal the following information: Type of isolator, deflection, free or unloaded height, loaded height, all physical characteristics of springs used, size of structural members, and any other pertinent information to make the submittal complete.

B. Spring vibration isolators shall be laterally stable steel springs, Type SSLFH, and shall

have a horizontal spring stiffness equal to or greater than 1.0 times the rated vertical spring stiffness. To assure the stability the outside spring diameter shall be a minimum of 0.8 times the rated vertical operating height. Springs shall be selected to provide a 50% overload capacity before reaching a solid state. Isolators shall have earthquake motion restrained spring mounts and shall incorporate a single spring vibration isolator, built into a welded steel mount assembled, designed and engineered to limit movement of support equipment during an earthquake without degrading the vibration isolation of the spring during normal equipment operating conditions. Mounts shall incorporate a welded steel angle and plate motion limit assembly , and steel spring isolator, engineered as a system




to accept a force in any direction equal to a minimum of 1.3 times the rated load of failure, and shall limit movement for point of level bolt connection to supported equipment to 0.75" in any direction relative to any fixed point on the mount assembly, while limit assembly shall be welded to a steel base plate having a 1/4" thick ribbed neoprene noise stop pad, and drilled holes for bolting to supporting structures. A spring isolator, drilled and tapped load plate and leveling bolt assembly shall be positioned by weld studs on the base plate, and shall carry all normal equipment operating loads.

C. Vibration isolator shall be manufactured by Mason industries, Kinetics.

2.9 WALL LOUVER:

A. Ruskin or equal, stationary louver, roll form steel, Model ELF811, 0.1" static pressure at 700 FPM thru free area.

2.10 GRAVITY VENTILATOR:

A. Greenheck, Penn Model GRS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT WORK

A. The method of construction, metal gauge, hanging and supporting of all ductwork shall be in accordance with the recommendation of the "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association" (SMACNA) HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

B. All transverse joints shall be substantially air tight and taped. All joints shall be taped with

Hardcast Duct Tape. C. Cross break each duct section on four (4) sides. Beading may be used in lieu of cross

breaking.

D. Air extractors shall be installed in each case where ducts or terminals branch out without split take-off and where shown on drawings.

E. Multi-blade dampers shall be used for all manual dampers installed in ducts with a

perimeter greater than 80". F. All volume dampers shall be equipped with locking quadrants and end bearings. G. Fire dampers shall be installed where shown on the drawings and where required by

regulations of the State Fire Marshal. H. Flexible connections at fans. I. Duct construction, installation and insulation shall meet the requirements of CMC.

3.2 INSULATION




A. All insulation shall meet California Energy Commission quality standard and shall be

tested in accordance with the procedures set forth in NFPA 90A and 90B, by Underwriters' Laboratories test UL-723, and not to exceed:

1. Flame spread 25 2. Fuel contributed 50 3. Smoke developed 50

B. Ducts: All supply and return ductwork enclosed in furred areas or attic shall be covered

with 1 1/2" thick, 1 lb. density Fiberglass, Johns-Manville, Owens Corning, faced with a flame retardant foil faced draft paper to form a vapor barrier.

C. Where indicated on plans, supply and return ducts shall be internally lined with 1" thick 2

lb. density of Fiberglass duct liner with black neoprene coating. All air plenums shall be lined with 1-1/2" thick 3 lb. density duct liner board with black neoprene coating. Installation shall be as shown on SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standard".

D. Insulate all refrigerant pipes with 1" foam insulation. Seal all seams water tight.

3.3 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS

A. Wherever volume dampers, valves, fans, fire dampers, controls or other items or parts of the installation which require periodic inspection, balance, or adjustment are concealed by permanent non-removable construction, access doors shall be provided. The access door type and fire rating shall be approved and as appropriate for the surface and construction in which it is installed. Verify all locations with the Architect.

3.4 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A. All HVAC equipment and machinery shall be anchored to withstand forces generated by earthquake motions. As a minimum, equipment and equipment frames shall be designed to withstand a force of 100% of the weight of the equipment and frame acting at its center of gravity. Anchorage of the equipment and/or frame to the structure shall be for a force of 100% gravity also acting at the center of gravity.

B. Piping and ductwork shall be seismically braced per SMACNA manual "Seismic Restraint

of Mechanical System and Piping System." C. For substituted equipment all seismic calculations shall be the responsibility of the

Contractor.

END OF SECTION


G:\09712.00\Archive\CD\2012-0319 Tracy Station 92 - Addendum 1\MEP\Specifications\15800 - Commissioning of HVAC.doc

15800 - 1 Commissioning of HVAC

SECTION 15800

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the HVAC system and its subsystems and equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements specified in Division Section "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. See Division Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general requirements for commissioning processes that apply to this Section.

C. LEED Certification.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Architect: Includes Architect identified in the Contract for Construction between Owner and Contractor, plus consultant/design professionals responsible for design of HVAC, electrical, communications, controls for HVAC systems, and other related systems.

B. BoD: Basis of Design.

C. BoD-HVAC: HVAC systems basis of design.

D. CxA: Commissioning Authority.

E. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements.

F. Systems, Subsystems, and Equipment: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, and equipment.

G. TAB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The following responsibilities are in addition to those specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Contractor:

1. Attend procedures meeting for TAB Work. 2. Certify that TAB Work is complete.

C. Mechanical Subcontractor:

1. Attend TAB verification testing. 2. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and data

acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period.




D. HVAC Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor: With the CxA, review control designs for compliance with the OPR and BoD, controllability with respect to actual equipment to be installed, and recommend adjustments to control designs and sequence of operation descriptions.

E. TAB Subcontractor:

1. Contract Documents Review: With the CxA, review the Contract Documents before developing TAB procedures. a. Verify the following:

1) Accessibility of equipment and components required for TAB Work. 2) Adequate number and placement of duct balancing dampers to allow

proper balancing while minimizing sound levels in occupied spaces. 3) Adequate number and placement of test ports and test instrumentation

to allow reading and compilation of system and equipment performance data needed to conduct both TAB and commissioning testing.

4) Air rates have been specified and compared to central equipment output capacities.

b. Identify discontinuities and omissions in the Contract Documents. c. This review of the Contract Documents by the TAB Subcontractor satisfies

requirements for a design review report as specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

d. Additional Responsibilities: Participate in tests specified in Division 15 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."

F. Electrical Subcontractor:

1. With the Mechanical Subcontractor, coordinate installations and connections between and among electrical and HVAC systems.

2. Attend TAB verification testing.

1.4 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

A. The following are in addition to documentation specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements." This program is for fundamental commissioning of the building energy system.

B. BoD HVAC: Owner will provide BoD-HVAC documents, prepared by Architect and approved by Owner, to the CxA and each Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation and maintenance training plan.

C. Test Checklists: CxA, with assistance of Architect, shall develop test checklists for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment, including interfaces and interlocks with other systems. CxA shall prepare separate checklists for each mode of operation and provide space to indicate whether the mode under test responded as required. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements," checklists shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Calibration of sensors and sensor function.




2. Testing conditions under which test was conducted, including (as applicable) ambient conditions, set points, override conditions, and status and operating conditions that impact the results of test.

3. Control sequences for HVAC systems. 4. Strength of control signal for each set point at specified conditions. 5. Responses to control signals at specified conditions. 6. Sequence of response(s) to control signals at specified conditions. 7. Electrical demand or power input at specified conditions. 8. Power quality and related measurements. 9. Expected performance of systems, subsystems, and equipment at each step of

test. 10. Narrative description of observed performance of systems, subsystems, and

equipment. Notation to indicate whether the observed performance at each step meets the expected results.

11. Interaction of auxiliary equipment. 12. Issues log.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. The following submittals are in addition to those specified in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Testing Procedures: CxA shall submit detailed testing plan, procedures, and checklists for each series of tests. Submittals shall include samples of data reporting sheets that will be part of the reports.

C. Certificate of Readiness: CxA shall compile certificates of readiness from each Contractor certifying that systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.

D. Certificate of Completion of Installation, Prestart, and Startup: CxA shall certify that installation, prestart, and startup activities have been completed. Certification shall include completed checklists provided by TAB Subcontractor as specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

E. Test and Inspection Reports: CxA shall compile and submit test and inspection reports and certificates, and shall include them in systems manual and commissioning report.

F. Corrective Action Documents: CxA shall submit corrective action documents.

G. Certified TAB Reports: CxA shall submit verified, certified TAB reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING PREPARATION

A. Prerequisites for Testing:




1. Certify that HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment have been completed, calibrated, and started; are operating according to the OPR, BoD, and Contract Documents; and that Certificates of Readiness are signed and submitted.

2. Certify that HVAC instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated; are operating according to the OPR, BoD, and Contract Documents; and that pretest set points have been recorded.

3. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed, and that TAB reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

4. Test systems and intersystem performance after approval of test checklists for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

5. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shut down, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

6. Verify each operating cycle after it has been running for a specified period and is operating in a steady-state condition.

7. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists. Sign off each item as acceptable, or failed. Repeat this test for each operating cycle that applies to system being tested.

8. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation.

9. Annotate checklist or data sheet when a deficiency is observed. 10. Verify equipment interface with monitoring and control system and TAB criteria;

include the following: a. Supply and return flow rates for constant volume systems in each

operational mode. b. Operation of terminal units in both heating and cooling cycles. c. Minimum outdoor-air intake in each operational mode and at minimum and

maximum airflows. d. Building pressurization. e. Total exhaust airflow and total outdoor-air intake. f. Operation of indoor-air-quality monitoring systems.

11. Verify proper responses of monitoring and control system controllers and sensors to include the following: a. For each controller or sensor, record the indicated monitoring and control

system reading and the test instrument reading. If initial test indicates that the test reading is outside of the control range of the installed device, check calibration of the installed device and adjust as required. Retest malfunctioning devices and record results on checklist or data sheet.

b. Report deficiencies and prepare an issues log entry. 12. Verify that HVAC equipment field quality-control testing has been completed and

approved. CxA shall direct, witness, and document field quality-control tests, inspections, and startup specified in individual Division 15 Sections.

B. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data for the required test period. Instrumentation shall monitor and record full range of operating conditions and shall allow for calculation of total capacity of system for each mode of operation. For individual room cooling tests, provide temporary




heaters to impose a cooling load indicated in BoD. Operational modes include the following:

1. Occupied. 2. Warm up and cool down. 3. Temporary upset of system operation. 4. Partial occupancy conditions.

3.2 TAB VERIFICATION

A. TAB Subcontractor shall coordinate with CxA for work required in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." TAB Subcontractor shall copy CxA with required reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates.

B. HVAC Subcontractor, and CxA shall witness TAB Work.

C. TAB Preparation:

1. TAB Subcontractor shall provide CxA with data required for "Pre-Field TAB Engineering Reports" specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." a. CxA shall use this data to certify that prestart and startup activities have

been completed for systems, subsystems, and equipment installation.

D. Verification of Final TAB Report:

1. CxA shall select, at random, 10 percent of report for field verification. 2. CxA shall notify TAB Subcontractor 10 days in advance of the date of field

verification; however, notice shall not include data points to be verified. The TAB Subcontractor shall use the same instruments by model and serial number that were used when original data were collected.

3. Failure of an item is defined as follows: a. For all readings other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent.

1) For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB. (Note: Variations in background noise must be considered.)

4. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final TAB report.

E. If deficiencies are identified during verification testing, CxA shall notify the HVAC Subcontractor and Architect, and shall take action to remedy the deficiency. Architect shall review final tabulated checklists and data sheets to determine if verification is complete and that system is operating according to the Contract Documents.

F. CxA shall certify that TAB Work has been successfully completed.

3.3 TESTING

A. Test systems and intersystem performance after test checklists for systems, subsystems, and equipment have been approved.

B. Perform tests using design conditions whenever possible.




1. Simulate conditions by imposing an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions and when written approval for simulated conditions is received from CxA. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Set and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.

2. Alter set points when simulating conditions is not practical and when written approval is received from CxA.

3. Alter sensor values with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical. Do not use sensor to act as signal generator to simulate conditions or override values.

C. Scope of HVAC Subcontractor Testing:

1. Testing scope shall include entire HVAC installation, from central equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space. It shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.

2. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.

D. Detailed Testing Procedures: CxA, with HVAC Subcontractor, TAB Subcontractor, and HVAC Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor, shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.

E. HVAC Instrumentation and Control System Testing:

1. Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 15700 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls." The CxA, HVAC Subcontractor, and the HVAC Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor shall collaborate to prepare testing plans.

2. CxA shall convene a meeting of appropriate entities to review test report of HVAC instrumentation and control systems.

3. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in system testing plan.

4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been tested.

F. Refrigeration System Testing: HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare a testing plan to verify performance of condensers, heat pumps, and other refrigeration systems. Plan shall include the following:

1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each item of equipment and section of pipe to be tested, identified by identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings showing the physical location of each item of equipment and pipe test section. Drawings shall be formatted to allow each item of equipment




and section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in the system testing plan.


G. HVAC Distribution System Testing: HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare a testing plan to verify performance of air distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems. Include HVAC terminal equipment and unitary equipment. Plan shall include the following:

1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each item of equipment and section of pipe to be tested, identified by identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings showing the physical location of each item of equipment and pipe test section. Drawings shall be formatted to allow each item of equipment and section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in the system testing plan.


H. Vibration and Sound Tests: HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare testing plans to verify performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls. CxA shall witness and certify tests and inspections.

I. Deferred Testing:

1. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC system, the deficiency shall be documented and reported to Owner. Deficiencies shall be resolved and corrected by appropriate parties and test rescheduled.

2. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, appropriate initial performance tests shall be completed and documented and additional tests scheduled.

J. Testing Reports:

1. Reports shall include measured data, data sheets, and a comprehensive summary describing the operation of systems at the time of testing.

2. Include data sheets for each controller to verify proper operation of the control system, the system it serves, the service it provides, and its location. For each controller, provide space for recording its readout, the reading at the controller's sensor(s), plus comments. Provide space for testing personnel to sign off on each data sheet.

3. Prepare a preliminary test report. Deficiencies will be evaluated by Architect to determine corrective action. Deficiencies shall be corrected and test repeated.

K. If it is determined that the system is constructed according to the Contract Documents, Owner will decide whether modifications required to bring the performance of the system to the OPR and BoD documents shall be implemented or if tests will be accepted as submitted. If corrective Work is performed, Owner will decide if tests shall be repeated and a revised report submitted.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 16000 - 1 Electrical General Requirements

SECTION 16000

ELECTRICAL – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements, Division 1, are a part of and to apply to all works of this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The work is this section applies to works specified in all sections of Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Other sections of Division 16– Electrical:

1. Lighting - Section 16500 2. Standby Generator – Section 16600 3 Fire Alarm System – Section 16700 4. Network-Telecommunications, CATV and Speaker System – Section 16300

C. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the providing of work as shown

and noted on the drawings and specified herein. The following summary is included to indicate some items common to work. It is not necessarily all inclusive.

1. Labor, material, equipment, tools, rigging, hoisting, temporary scaffolding,

temporary power, transportation, supervision inspection, services, insurance, fees and taxes required to furnish and install the electrical systems as shown on drawings and/or described in specification complete and including that which is reasonably inferred.

2. Carpentry, masonry, steel and concrete materials and labor required for construction of proper stands, bases and supports for electrical materials and equipment.

3. Cooperation and coordination with other crafts inputting the installation in place at a time when the space required for this installation is accessible. Work done without regard to other crafts shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense.

4. Coordination and Verification: When equipment requiring electrical connection is furnished by other Divisions, verify location, voltage, control method and other connection requirements prior to rough-in. If connection requirements are in conflict with what is shown on drawings or specification, promptly inform the Architect for resolution. Verify exact location of electrical devices (receptacle, switches, etc.), lighting fixtures and equipment which their location may have esthetical impact, with the Architect prior to rough-in.

5. Cutting and patching of holes required by this installation (including provision for holes in concrete before concrete is poured), flashing and counterflashing of roof and wall penetrations.



6. Excavating, pumping, trenching, backfill and conduit for all site lighting, power and signal as shown on drawings and as required for this installation.

7. Work required by Utility Companies (power, telephone, cable TV) for establishing new services, including, conduits, trench and backfill, grounding, connections, concrete pad, pull boxes, etc., excluding utility fees and work outside property line.

8. Fire caulking/sealing of all penetrations. 9. Repair of damage to the premises resulting from activities in connection with

installation of this section of the work, and during process of work removal of debris left by those engaged in this installation.

10. Identification of equipment and raceways. 11. Cleanliness of fixtures, equipment and apparatus when the complete work is

accepted by the Owner. Cleaning of electrical materials and installation that will remain.

12. Provide testing as specified and as may be required by authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to Part 3 of each section for testing requirements.

13. Preparation of submittal, shop drawings and project record drawings.

1.3 RELATED WORK:

A. Related requirements specified elsewhere to include:

1. Earthwork - Section 02200. 2. Fire Stopping – Section 07270. 3. Joint Sealing - Section 07900. 4. Painting - Section 09900. 5. Equipment - Division 11. 6. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050. 7. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning - Section 15500. 8. Plumbing - Section 15400. 9. Automatic Sprinkler System - Section 15300.


A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the Local Building Department and Fire Marshal, the 2001 California Electrical Code, 2001 Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations, and other applicable local and State laws or regulations. Nothing in these plans or specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. The latest requirements of the following publications and regulations shall also be complied with:

1. American Disabilities Act. 2. Applicable codes of the National Fire Protection Association. 3. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Standard. 4. Applicable regulations and rules of the local utility companies. 5. Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution

Equipment and Systems, International Electrical Testing Association (NETA).



B. All materials shall be new, packed in original containers, installed and turned over free of rust, corrosion or defects. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product.

C. All materials shall bear the label of, or be listed by, Underwriter’s Laboratories

(U.L.). If listing is not offered by U.L., labeling and listing by other organizations, such as ETL Testing Laboratories, may be accepted if approved by authority having jurisdiction.

D. Whenever the indicated material, workmanship, arrangement or construction is of

higher quality or capacity than that required by the above rules and regulations, the drawings and/or specifications shall take precedence. Should there be any direct conflict between rules and regulations and drawings and/or specifications, the rules shall govern.

E. Furnish, without extra charge to the Owner, all additional material and labor when

and where required to comply with these codes, rules and regulations, though the work may have not been mentioned in these specifications or shown on the plans.

1.5 Utility Company Requirements:

1. Perform all work for electric power, telephone and cable TV services in accordance with requirements of the respective serving utility companies.

2. Verify service and transformer vault locations and all other service requirements prior to starting work. Except for work specifically excluded from contract or under another section of work, provide all work required by the Utility Company to render utility services to the project, including, but not limited to, trenches, conduits, cable, pullboxes, concrete encasements, terminal cabinets, electrical transformer vault, backboards and grounding.

3. Work beyond property line is excluded, however, if applicable, contractor shall coordinate his work with the work of subcontractor which extends the conduits to manhole or hand hole beyond property line.

4. Utility fees, normally, charged to the Owner for establishing service is excluded.

1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS

A. Licenses, Permits, Fees and Charges: Obtain and pay for all licenses and permits and pay for fees and changes connected with the work of this Section.

B. Inspections, Tests and Certificates: Arrange and pay for all inspections, tests and

certificates required for completion and approval of the work. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS, MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Submit complete shop drawing submittals, including catalog cuts on specified items and proposed substitutions as per requirements of Division 1. Shop drawing shall be provided for the following items: (Refer to other sections for items requiring submittal, related to those sections).

1. Main Switchboard.



2. Panelboards 3. Devices and Plates. 4. Plenum Rated Cables and Signal System Cables.

B. Requests for approval of a substitution will not be considered unless accompanied

by complete data to prove full equality to the specified item, and unless submitted within 35 days. Contractor shall pay for tests of substitute materials required by the Architect. Only one substitution proposal will be considered; if the proposal is rejected, provide the specified material. Tests shall be made by a laboratory satisfactory to the Architect.

C. Responsibility for conflicts due to space limitations is not relieved by approval of a

substitution. If revision of wiring, piping, or arrangement of other equipment is required by substitution, prepare drawings showing such revisions, and after approval furnish the Architect with six (6) copies for file and future reference. Approval of a substitution does not authorize any deviation from the utility, size or function of the specified item unless specifically pointed out and approval requested in the letter of submittal.

D. Unless otherwise shown or specified, material shall be new, full weight, standard,

the best quality of its kind and satisfactory to the Architect. Unless otherwise shown or specified, major equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer who has, for a period of not less than five years, been in successful manufacture of the equipment, and who has a nationally distributed catalog covering ratings and specifications of said equipment.

E. Material shall be stored and protected as necessary and/or as required by the

Architect, and the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for damage or loss. Protect materials from dust, corrosion, water or construction operations.

F. LEED Certification Points: Submit information and certifications necessary to

achieve maximum points for LEED certification; coordinate and cooperate with Owner and Architect in providing information necessary for required LEED rating.

1. Electronic (LEED On-Line) submittals are required for Project LEED

certification.

1.8 CUTTING OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Unless specifically detailed on the structural drawings, cutting of joists, mullions, studs, grade beams, and similar structural members is prohibited. Refer to structural drawings for limitations for installing conduit in Floor Slabs and other structural members.

1.9 WORKMANSHIP

A. Keep a competent foreman in charge of the work and give personal supervision at the site and/or shop when necessary. Workmanship quality shall match or exceed that of industry standard for similar construction.



B. Perform all labor using qualified craftsmen, who have had experience on similar projects. Ensure that all equipment and materials fit property. Perform any required work to correct improperly fit installations at no additional expense to the Owner.

1.10 DRAWINGS AND ARRANGEMENTS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic, and they indicate general arrangement and locations of equipment and materials; this arrangement shall be followed as nearly as possible. Should it be necessary to deviate from the arrangement indicated in order to meet structural conditions, such deviations shall be made without expense to the Owner. Where there appears to be a discrepancy in drawings and/or specifications, the bidder shall secure written instructions from the Architect.

B. Working parts shall be readily accessible for inspection, repair and renewal. The

right is reserved to make reasonable changes in location of equipment shown on drawings prior to roughing in without additional expense to the Owner. Field verify scaled dimensions on drawings.

1.11 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS

A. Follow manufacturer's directions where these directions cover points not included on drawings or in specifications.

1.12 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE

A. The Contractor shall be held to have visited the site and satisfied himself as to the conditions under which the work is to be performed. He shall check existing conditions which may affect his work. No allowance shall subsequently be made in his behalf for any extra expense to which he may be put due to failure or neglect to discover conditions affecting his work.

1.13 CLOSING IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK

A. Work under this section shall not be enclosed or covered up until it has been inspected, tested, and approved by the Owner or authorized representative and governmental authorities having jurisdiction over the work. If any of the work is enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test, it shall be uncovered, inspected, tested, and all necessary repairs made with matching materials to restore the work to its original condition. All costs for the above work will be the expense of the Contractor.

1.14 ACCURACY OF DATA

A. Data given herein and on drawings are as exact as could be secured, but their extreme accuracy is not guaranteed. Drawings and specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, levels, etc., will be governed by the building and site. Contractor shall take the contract with this understanding.



1.15 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE

A. Employ manufacturers' representatives for each "Signal System", to demonstrate and instruct the Owner's representatives in the operation and maintenance of all respective equipment. Schedule the demonstration with Architect for coordination with the Owner.

1.16 COMPLETE WORKING INSTALLATION

A. A complete working installation shall be furnished with all equipment called for on drawings or specifications in operating condition. Drawings and specifications do not undertake to list every item that is to be installed. When an item is necessary for the operation of the equipment drawn or specified, furnish a suitable item that will allow the system to function properly at no extra charge to the Owner.

1.17 SHORT CIRCUIT RATING

A. Equipment and devices, for which short circuit rating has been specified or shown on drawing, shall have the required rating independent of other devices. Series short circuit ratings are not allowed.

1.18 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Furnish As-Built drawings per Division 1. 1.19 WARRANTY

A. All work and materials under this contract shall be warranted to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of minimum 1 year, from the date of Owner acceptance.

B. Submit manufacturer product warrantees to the Owner upon final acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS: (See Part 3 for type used)

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel (GRS): Hot dip galvanized conforming to ANSI C80-1, U.L. 6. Type of fittings shall be as follows:

1. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings and elbows shall be

malleable iron or steel. Use bonding type locknuts. 2. Three-Piece Couplings: O.Z./Gedney 4-50 series or equal. 3. Insulated Bushings: Threaded insulated bushing shall be PVC, rated 150

degree C minimum. 4. Metallic Bushing: Threaded cast malleable iron with insulated busing T&B

1222 series or equal. Insulated grounding bushing shall have ground lug with compression screw, T&B 3870 series or equal.



B. Coated Rigid Steel: Hot dip galvanized conforming to NEMA RN1, with factory applied PVC coating, 40 mil thick. Fittings shall be as specified for GRS, but with PVC coating equivalent of that for the conduit.

C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Hot dip galvanized conforming to U.L. 1242.

Fitting same as described for GRS. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Galvanized steel conforming with ANSI C80.3,

U.L. 797, fitting shall be as follows:

1. Set Screw Type: Electroplated, steel or cast malleable O.Z./Gedney 5000 series for couplings and 4000 series for connectors with insulated bushings.

2. Compression Rain Tight: Electroplated steel or cast malleable U.L. listed rain tight, using gland and ring compression type construction, as made by T&B.

E. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (PVC Schedule 40): PVC conduit, Schedule 40

conforming to NEMA TC2 and U.L. 652, suitable for 90 degrees C conductor insulation, as made by Carlon, or equal. Fittings shall be molded PVC, slip on, solvent weld type as furnished by conduit manufacturer.

F. Flexible Metal Conduit: Galvanized steel strip, spirally wound and formed to

provide interlocking design, conforming to U.L.1. Fitting shall be single screw clamp with steel or cast malleable iron body and threaded male hubs with insulated throat.

G. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanized steel tubing covered with PVC

liquid tight jacket conforming to U.L. 360, Anaconda type UA, or equal. Connectors shall be electro plated steel or cast malleable iron, seal tight O.Z.-Gedney type 4Q or approved equal.

H. Flexible Conduits, if used for hazardous locations, shall have U.L. listing for

applicable NEC Division and Class. I. Expansion and Deflection Couplings: Shall be as per U.L. standard 514B,

O.Z./Gedney type Dx, or equal.

2.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Concrete Fasteners: Expansion type anchor by Philips “Read-Head”, or equal. Powder-driven concrete fasteners, low velocity type by Remington.

B. Conduit Straps: Hot-dip galvanized cast malleable iron, one hole type strap with

cast clamp-backs and spaces are required. O.Z./Gedney #14-50G strap and #141G spacer, Efcor #231 strap and #131 spacer, or approved equal.

C. Construction Channel: 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch 12 gauge galvanized steel channel

with 17/32 inch diameter bolt holes, 1-1/2 inches on center, in the base of the channel: Kindorf 905 series, Unistrut P-1000-HS or approved equal.



D. Fasteners (General): Wood screws for fastening to wood. Machine screws for fastening to steel. Toggle bolts for fastening to hollow concrete block, gypsum board or plaster walls. Steel beam clamps for attachment to beams.

E. Fixture Support Wires: No. 12 galvanized steel. F. Threaded Rod: ¼-inch diameter minimum. Hot-dip galvanized. G. All supports and attachments for panels, terminal cabinets, pull boxes. luminaries,

and other equipment shall be designed for seismic load as per CBC-Title 24.

2.3 FIRE STOPPING AT RATED WALLS, FLOORS AND CEILINGS

A. Provide U.L. approved “Firestop-Seals” at all penetrations through fire-rated ceilings, floors or walls: 3M type CP-25, Nelson type CLK, or approved equal. Fire stop material shall be a reusable non-toxic, asbestos-free, non-shrinking, putty type material with a 3-hour rating in accordance with U.L. 1479. Provide products indicated by the manufacturer to be suitable for type and size of penetration and apply as per manufacturer’s instruction.

B. Provide U.L. listed “moldable putty” 3M type MPP-1 and MPS-2, or equal, and caulk

around outlets and cable penetrations in rated walls or ceilings as required by code. C. Back-to-back outlet boxes in fire rated walls shall be spaced 24 inches apart as per

UBC requirement. Contractor may reduce spacing by using fire stop protecting moldable “putty pad” 3M type “MPP 4S Plus” around the box, as per manufacturer’s direction (1-hour and 2-hour rated walls).

2.4 BOXES

A. Standard Boxes:

1. Steel Boxes: Comply with ANSI/NEMA OS1, as manufactured by Raco, Steel City, Appleton or equal. One piece galvanized, knock-out type, size as required by code, minimum size 4” square, 1-1/2” deep.

2. Cast Metal Boxes: Die cast steel or aluminum with threaded hub, with neoprene gaskets and die cast covers, as made by Appleton FD series with wet location cover, or equal.

3. Boxes for explosion-proof installation shall comply with NEC associated classification, as made by appropriate model made by Appleton, or equal.

B. Floor Boxes:

1. Cast metal or stamped steel suitable for installation in cast-in-place concrete

floor, it should be fully adjustable with provision for adjusting before and after concrete is poured.

2. Walker type “OMNIBOX” or Steel City 664 series, shallow type for floors of 3-inch concrete thickness.

3. Provide with hinged brass cover plate and carpet flange, unless polycarbonate cover plates allowed by the Architect.



C. Steel Pull and Splice Boxes:

1. Code gauge, galvanized of required size. Cover shall be secured with cadmium plated machine screw, 6” on center. Exterior pull boxes shall be finished with one coat of Di-chromate primer and two coats of baked enamel. Product as made by Circle AW Products, Hoffman, or approved equal.

2. Flush mounted pull boxes shall have overlapping covers with flush-head cover retaining screw.

3. Size as per NEC Article 370, unless larger size shown on plans.

D. Underground Precast Concrete Pull Boxes (Hand Holes):

1. As manufactured by Christy, Brooks, or equal. 2. Precast concrete, with heavy duty steel reinforcing, pulling eyes, precast duct

entrance knock outs with all required collars and exteriors, and bolt-down lid. 3. Minimum size as required by NEC Article 370, unless larger size shown on

plan. Boxes used in the area subject to vehicular traffic shall have H-20 rating (box and cover). Typical floor boxes are as follows:

Nominal Size

Christy Model – Non-Vehicular Traffic Rated

Christy Model – H20 Traffic Rated

Round 9” Diameter F8 Ground Rod Box Concrete Lid

F8 Ground Rod Box Concrete Lid

2’ X 3’ N40 with Concrete or Steel Checkered Plate Cover

Model 2436 with Steel Checkered Plate Cover

2’-6” X 4’ N48 with Concrete or Steel Checkered Plate Cover

Model 3048 with Steel Checkered Plate Cover

2’-6” X 5’ N52 with Concrete or Steel Checkered Plate Cover

Model R17 Pit with Steel Checkered Plate Cover

2.5 CONDUCTORS

A. Manufacturer: General Cable, Essex, Rome, or equal. B. General building wires (single conductor) used for feeders, branch circuits and line

voltage control.

1. Solid copper THHN/THWN or XHW, minimum size #14 AWG, unless otherwise noted.

2. Conductors #8 AWG or larger shall be standard, Class B. 3. All conductors shall be color coded and shall have 600 volt insulation. 4. Conductors inside fixture shall be type UL, Type SF-2 (200 degree C).

C. Multi Conductor Cables: (See Part 3 for allowed application and color coding.)

1. Multi Conductor Cables for Signaling System: Type shall be as per signal

manufacturer’s recommendations and shall comply with applicable codes and NEC Classification (NEC – Article 725).



D. Wire/Cable in Plenum Spaces: Where wire or cables are run in ducts, plenum space or other spaces used for environmental air, they shall be in conduit or shall be a type listed as being resistant to spread of fire and low smoke producing, as per NEC Articles 300-22 and 725-71.

2.6 SPLICING AND TERMINATION MATERIALS

A. Spring Wire Connector: As made by 3M “Scotchlock” or Ideal, product as recommended for wire sizes.

B. Bolted Pressure Connectors: Cast bronze compression bolts, as made by Burndy

“Hilug”. C. Compression Type Termination Lug: T&B color-keyed one hole lugs (two hole lugs

for size 4/0 or larger, or where equipment connection lug has double holes), type to suit application.

D. Insulating Tape: 3M “Super 33 + Scotch” vinyl tape or equal conforming to U.L.

510. Three layers half-lapped minimum. E. Underground where subjected to moisture (in junction boxes, exterior post lights,

etc.): 3M “Scotch Cast” or equal U.L. approved “cast-resin”, completely watertight type.

2.7 GROUNDING

A. General: The complete electrical installation, including neutral conductor, metallic conduits and raceways, boxes, cabinets, cable tray, equipment and machinery shall be completely and effectively grounded in accordance with all code requirements, whether or not such connections are specifically shown or specified.

B. Ground Rods (Driven):

1. Provide copper clad steel, minimum ¾”, 10 feet long ground rod, type as

made by Weaver, Cadweld or equal. 2. Ground Rod Box: Precast concrete, 9-½” diameter or with traffic cover as

made by Christy Model F8.

C. Ground Conductors:

1. Buried ground conductors shall be bare copper, minimum #2/0 AWG, unless otherwise noted.

2. Equipment ground conductors shall be type THW/THWN, insulated copper, green in color.

D. Ground Connections:

1. Provide connection between cables, cable to ground rod or cable to structural

steel using exothermic welds (as manufactured by Cadweld), or high pressure connectors as manufactured by Thomas & Betts #5300 series, or



approved equal. High pressure connection where buried shall be coated by electrical joint compound.

2.8 WIRING DEVICES

A. All products shall be as made by Hubbell, Pass & Seymour (P&S), or Leviton, specification grade, color shall be white, unless otherwise selected by the Architect. Model for switches is for single pole switches. Double pole, three-way and four-way switches shall be of same type series as single pole switches.

B. General Use Switches:

1. Wall switch, 20 ampere, toggle handle, quiet type: Hubbell 122I, P&S 20AC1-I.

2. Wall switch with pilot light (red light on when load on): Hubbell 1221 PL, P&S 20AC1-PRL.

3. Momentary contact switch (center off) 20 ampere: Hubbell 15571. 4. Lock type wall switch, 20 ampere: Hubbell 1221L, P&S 20AC1-L. 5. Security wall switch (with removable key): P&S 372010-I. 6. Locking attachment (to lock access to switches): Hubbell 96061DCH.

C. General Use Receptacle:

1. Duplex: 20 ampere, NEMA 5-20R. Regular: Hubbell 5362I, P&S 5362-AI.

Isolated ground: Hubbell IG 5362, P&S IG 6300I. Ground fault: Hubbell GF 5362I.

2. QUAD (4 plex receptacles): 15 ampere, NEMA 5-15R. Regular: Hubbell 4151I, P&S 1254I. Isolated ground: Hubbell IG4415, P&S IG 1254-I.

D. Special Purpose Receptacle: NEMA type and configuration shall match requirement

of equipment served.

2.9 DEVICE PLATES

A. General:

1. As made by Hubbell, Pass & Seymour or Leviton, comply with NEMA WD1, U.L. 514.

2. Provide gang type plates where two or more devices are mounted on same location.

3. Provide plate of one design throughout the project. Cover plates shall be made by same manufacturer as device, to suit device covered.

4. Color shall be White as approved by the Architect. B. Non-Metallic: Used in interior for recessed box, shall be nylon, smooth finish with

contoured edges.

C. Weatherproof Plates: Cast metal gasketed and corrosion resistant. Cover plates shall have weatherproof, spring loaded, vertically self-closing covers. Cover for receptacles shall comply with NEC 410-57.



2.10 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

1. Manufacturer: General Electric, Square D, Cutler Hammer or Siemens, to conform with NEMA KS1.

2. Heavy duty quick make, quick break, horse power rated load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle, interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, handle shall be lockable in OFF position.

3. Where fusible disconnect switches are called out, they shall be equipped with fuse clips to accommodate Class RK-1 fuses for switches up to 600 amperes and Class “L” fuses for 800 amperes and larger. Provide fuses, size as required to protect equipment served.

4. Enclosures shall be suitable for location used. 2.11 MOTOR CONTROLS

A. Shall be made by Square D, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, Allen Bradley or equal, conforming to NEMA 1C2.

B. Manual Motor Starters: For single phase motors of less than one horse power, shall be A.C. general-purpose manually operated toggle with thermal overload. Enclosure shall be suitable for location installed.

C. Magnetic Motor Starter:

1. Non-Reversing, full voltage, with 120 volt coil, overload protection (on each

phase) and automatic reset and hand-off-auto switch with pilot light. 2. Control power shall be fused 120 volt, derived from either secondary of

control power transformer or phase and neutral in 120/208 volt power systems.

3. NEMA size shall be as indicated on drawings. Minimum NEMA size shall be size 0. Starter unit shall be enclosed in enclosure suitable for location. Where multiple starters are located in same cabinet, the cabinet shall have sufficient room for wires as per NEC and shall have lockable hinged door.

4. Provide starters with minimum of two auxiliary contacts (NO/NC). 5. Provide interlock wiring between starters where called out in the drawings.

D. Combination Motor Starter Unit: Starter unit shall have same features as magnetic

motor starter, but shall have disconnect switch and motor control protectors (for short circuit protection) as part of integral unit.

2.12 SWITCHBOARD

A. Shall be manufactured by Siemens, Cutler Hammer or General Electric in compliance with applicable portion of NEMA PB2 and U.L. 891.

B. Refer to plans for voltage, current rating and quantity/size of protective devices.

Switchboard shall be fully rated and braced for a minimum of 65 KAIC, unless higher rating is called for on the drawings. For service entrance switchboard, the short circuit rating shall be verified with serving power company. Rating shall not be less than available fault current as verified. Service entrance and metering



section shall comply with serving power company requirement and meet their approval.

C. Construction shall be of the universal frame type using die-formed members bolted

and braced with self-tapping bolts. All plates shall be fabricated from 12 gauge steel and shall have die-formed edges all around. Line and load shall be all accessible from front. Enclosure shall be NEMA type suitable for interior or exterior as applicable (see drawings).

D. Busing shall be copper or tin-plated aluminum, supported with high impact, non-

tracking insulation material, and braced to withstand short circuit rating as indicated above. Continuous current density of buses shall not exceed 1,000 amperes per square inch for copper and 750 amperes per square inch for aluminum. Neutral bus shall be fully rated.

E. Ground bus shall be copper, sized per U.L. 891 and shall extend length of

switchboard. Provide ground to neutral bus disconnecting link on service entrance switchboards.

F. Where space is indicated, cross connectors and mounting hardware shall be

installed to match the frame size ampere rating noted on the drawings, ready for installation of circuit breaker or fused switches at a future time.

G. Finish: All surfaces shall be chemically cleaned and treated before applying rust

inhibiting dichromate primer, then shall be painted by one coat of baked-on enamel finish, ANSI 61 (light gray).

2.13 PANELBOARDS

A. Manufactured by Siemens, Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Industrial Electric, or approval equal to comply with provisions of U.L. 50 and 77 and NEMA PB-1 and shall be Class CTL.

B. Refer to panel schedule for rating and circuit arrangement. In all cases, panels

shall be bolt on, circuit breaker type. Panels fed from a transformer shall have a main breaker sized to provide full capacity of the transformer rating. Minimum short circuit rating shall be 10,000 AIC for 208 and 240 volt applications).

C. Enclosure shall be code gauged galvanized steel, minimum 20 inches wide, hinged

door (concealed hinges) with keyed alike corrosion-proof lock latch. Enclosure type shall be as indicated on panel schedule and shall suit location used. Trim shall be suitable for flush or surface installation as indicated and shall have ANSI-61 light gray finish.

D. Bus shall be bolted copper with taps arranged for distributed phase connection to

branch breakers. Neutral bus shall be minimum same capacity as phase buses. Provide full size ground bus with lugs for each outgoing branch circuit. Termination lug shall be suitable for aluminum/copper conductors.



E. Circuit directory shall be minimum 6” x 8” frame and card with clear plastic covering provided in inner panel door. Starting at top, indicate odd numbered circuits, in sequence, down the left hand side and even numbers down the right hand side.

F. Where “SPACE” is indicated in the panelboard schedule, install cross connectors

and mounting hardware to match frame size ampere rating noted. Provide blocking clips “Lock on Device” on breakers serving security and alarm circuits.

G. Panelboard used as service entrance shall have U.L. listing for service entrance.

2.14 CABINETS

A. As manufactured by Hoffman, or approved equal.

B. Surface mount or flush mount, as shown on plan, provide NEMA 1 enclosure for interior and NEMA 3R for exterior, size as indicated on plans, or, if not, as recommended by manufacturer to contain equipment installed in the cabinet (minimum 4” deep).

C. Shall be code gauge steel (#16 gauge minimum), with concealed continuous hinged

door and flush latch/lock, key alike with panelboards. D. Provide ¾” fire retardant plywood mounting backboard. Provide barriers to

separate compartments operating at low voltage (less than 50 volts) from high voltages.

E. Finish shall be manufacturer’s standard gray.

2.15 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. General:

1. Devices shall be U.L. listed and meet NEMA standards AB1, 2 and 3 and U.L. standards 486A, 486B, 489, 1066 and 1087, as applicable to specific device. Devices may be installed in switchboards, panelboards, motor control center, fusible switches and individual enclosures.

2. Manufacturer: Circuit breakers and switches shall be manufactured by General Electric, Siemens, Square D or Cutler Hammer. Fuses shall be made by Bussmann, Gould, Siemens or Littlefuse.

3. Short circuit rating of overcurrent protective devices shall match or exceed the fault rating of the panel, switchboard or equipment in which the device is installed. Series rated devices are not allowed.

4. Provide accessories as noted on Drawings (shunt trip, auxiliary contacts, under voltage trip, alarm switch, etc.). All terminals shall be rated for aluminum or copper wire. Devices’ current rating shall be clearly visible after installation, or engraved nameplates shall be provided and mounted next to device, stating the rating.

B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:



1. Thermal magnetic, bolt-on type (except that circuit breakers used for single phase load centers may be plug-in type). Breakers 100 Amp. and smaller shall be of the 1” per pole type.

2. Circuit breakers shall have toggle, quick-make and quick-break operating mechanism with trip-free feature to prevent contacts being held closed against overcurrent condition.

3. When frame size and trip setting (AF/AT) is indicated next to circuit breaker symbol on plans (refer to Single Line Diagram) and for all circuit breakers rated 800 ampere and higher, it shall be equipped with electronic trip unit (similar to Cutler Hammer Digi Trip series). Sensors on electronic trip units shall sense current RMS and provide adjustable setting for short delay protection, instantaneous protection and ground fault protection. To establish breaker continuous current rating, interchangeable rating plugs shall be provided.

4. Provide 100% rated circuit breaker, where called for on the plans. All branch circuit breakers (up to 60 ampere) feeding HVAC equipment shall be HACR rated.

5. Provide ground fault circuit breakers (GFCI), where required by code or called for. The breakers shall be designed to detect phase to ground current of 4 – 6 mili ampere and to automatically disconnect the circuit upon detection.

6. Molded Case Switches (non-automatic circuit breaker): Shall comply with U.L. 1087. The device shall be used as main disconnect in panelboards (where called for in plans) and shall have no thermal protection, except for having a self-protecting high magnetic trip. Current rating and short circuit rating as indicated on plans.

7. Enclosed Circuit Breakers. U.L. listed to include molded case circuit breakers, factory installed in NEMA 1 (for interior), flush or surface mount, or NEMA 3R (for exterior), as applicable. The breaker handle shall be front operable and pad-lockable.

C. Fuses:

1. All power fuses shall be silver link, current limiting type, unless otherwise

noted on the Drawings. Types of fuses shall be as follows: 2. 0-600 amperes: U.L. Class RK-1 dual element, time delay type fuse,

Bussmann Low-Peak LPN-RK (250 VAC), LPS-RK (600 VAC) or approved equal.

3. Motor branch circuit fuses (0-600 amperes): U.L. Class RK-1 dual element, time delay type fuse, Bussmann Low-Peak LPN-RK (250 VAC), LPS-RK (600 VAC). Motor branch circuit fuses shall be sized for back-up motor overload protection and shall be coordinated with motor starter overload relay heaters.

4. Control and instrument fuses shall be suitable for installing in blocks or fuseholders. Exact type and rating shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment being protected.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION – GENERAL



A. Work shall be performed only by competent and experienced workmen in a manner satisfactory to the Architect.

B. Local Codes: Prior to any work, the Contractor shall review the job with local electrical

inspector and bring any special requirement to the attention of the Architect. Special requirements of local codes shall be included as part of this work

C. Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate the electrical work with the work of

other trades. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for any work installed but not usable due to improper coordination of work.

1. Mechanical Equipment: The Contractor shall check with the mechanical

contractor for space requirements and electrical requirements of mechanical equipment. Change in electrical requirements due to the substitution of mechanical equipment shall be brought to the Engineer's attention prior to installing any work.

2. Architectural Drawings: The Contractor shall check the architectural drawings for the exact location of outlets installed over counters, in cabinets adjacent to mirrors, etc. Before rough-in, contractor shall review with the Architect at the site the exact location of all outlets, fixtures, routing, excavations, and exposed conduits. Minor modification as to location of these items shall be done without increase in the contract price.

3. Ceiling Diffusers: Prior to installing any work, the Contractor shall check with the mechanical contractor for the exact location of heating and ventilating ceiling diffusers and maintain clearances between lighting fixtures and ceiling diffusers.

4. Ensure that all equipment and materials fit properly in their installation. 5. Materials: Prior to placing orders for materials, the Contractor shall check

equipment ratings, equipment catalog numbers, and equipment dimensions as to applicability and correctness for installation.

6. Piping Systems: Prior to installing lighting fixtures in a building, the Contractor shall check with the mechanical contractor for the exact location of piping system, overhead doors, etc.. Lighting fixtures shall not be installed directly over pipes, piping systems, etc., and the lighting shall not be impaired by pipes, piping systems, etc.

3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL

A. Provide seismic restraint and anchorage for equipment in compliance with latest California Building Code (CBC) for seismic Zone 4.

B. Anchor all equipment weighing more than 500 lbs. C. Contractor shall be responsible for design and acquiring of approval for anchoring

equipment which varies from the design. Where anchorage detail is not shown on specified, the field installation shall meet approval of the building inspector.

D. Lighting Fixture Supports: Provide independent seismic support system for all fixtures

not directly anchored to concrete wall or concrete ceilings. 3.3 RACEWAYS



A. All raceways shall be concealed, except in electrical and mechanical rooms and

where exposed conduits are permitted by the Architect. B. Installation Schedule:

Location of Use Raceway Permitted

Exterior exposed up to 7 feet from grade. Rigid steel or IMC.

Interior exposed or exterior exposed where above 7 feet from grade.

Rigid steel, IMC or EMT (electrical metallic tubing).

Concealed lighting and power. IMC, EMT or MC cable (except where prohibited by code).

Concealed control, tel/data and other signal systems.

IMC, EMT, ENT

Flexible connection – interior. Liquid tight flexible conduit or galvanized flex conduit.

Flexible connection – exterior and damp or wet locations.

Liquid tight flexible conduit.

Concrete slab or below grade. Coated rigid steel or PVC Schedule 40.

Explosion-proof area. Rigid steel conduit, and listed explosion-proof flexible conduits.

Note: EMT conduit, where used outdoors, shall have weatherproof “compression- gland” fittings; otherwise, set-screw fittings are allowed.

C. Raceway size, where not indicated on the plans, shall be in compliance with the

National Electrical Code. Minimum conduit size shall be ½ inch for lighting and control and ¾” for power. All conduits underground on in concrete slab shall be ¾” minimum.

D. Penetrations:

1. Seal the interior of all raceways entering the structures at point of entrance

and at handholes, manholes or pull boxes with listed expandable plastic compound to prevent liquid, gases and rodents from entering the structure.

2. Dry pack with non-shrink grout around raceways, penetrating concrete walls, floors, manholes, handholes and pullboxes.

3. Where an underground raceway enters a structure through non-waterproofed wall, install schedule 40 sleeve. Fill the space between sleeve and conduit with expandable plastic compound on each side of the wall.

4. Penetrations through fire rated wall, floor, ceiling shall be caulked with approved fire rated material to maintain wall, floor, ceiling fire rating.

5. Terminate in approved sealing type fittings when leaving refrigerator or freezer, or when leaving hazardous area.

6. Run conduits through roof openings for piping and ductwork to avoid penetration. Where opening is not available or too far from penetration point, use suitable roof jack with pitched pocket.

7. Seal around signal cables penetrating gyp board walls (thermostat, etc.).



E. All conduits shall be installed with code radius bends with not more than three bends

per run. Where more than four bends are required in a particular run, pullboxes shall be installed. Signal system conduits (Tel/Data, CATV, etc.) conduits require pullbox so that no conduit run is longer than 100’ or contain more than two 90 degree bends. Use factory made elbows for all bends 30 degrees or larger where using PVC conduits.

F. Underground Installation:

1. Coordinate installation of underground raceways with other construction

work. Where other utility piping systems are encountered or being installed along a raceway route, maintain 12-inch minimum separation between electrical and other piping system unless otherwise shown. Do not backfill until work is inspected by building inspector.

2. Conduit embedded in concrete slab shall be installed between grids of reinforcing steel. Multiple conduits shall be spaced minimum 3 conduit diameters apart. Running conduits in slab, where conduit is 1-inch diameter or larger shall meet structural engineer’s approval. Installation of conduits below slab is not allowed, unless encased in concrete integrated with slab. Do not run conduits under pads serving fans, pumps, boilers, or other machinery.

3. Where rigid steel conduits are installed under floor slabs or underground, they shall be double wrapped with 3M Scotchwrap tape. Wrapping shall extend 12 inches above ground slab. Where PVC conduit is installed, raceway joints in concrete or underground shall be waterproof. Where extended above grade, install adapter fittings on non-metallic section and attach rigid steel galvanized conduit elbow thereto, wrapped with 3M Scotchwrap. (Conduit extension above grade shall be rigid steel.)

4. Underground conduits shall be installed minimum 24” below grade. In streets and parking area, subject to vehicular traffic (and any other location indicated on plans), provide 3” minimum thickness red-colored concrete cap, with top of concrete not less than 24” from grade. Slope underground raceways to provide drainage, toward manholes and/or handholes. Bury warning tapes approximately 12” above all conduit runs and duct banks. Align parallel to and within 12 inches of the center line of runs.

G. Conduit terminations at cabinets and boxes shall be rigidly secured with two locknuts.

All conduit ends shall be reamed after cutting and, if not secured to boxes or cabinets, shall be capped and protected during construction. All conduits containing phase or neutral conductor size 4 or larger shall have insulated bushing at termination.

H. Spare or empty conduits shall be permanently capped at each end of each conduit.

Empty conduits shall have a 350-lb. nylon pullwire installed. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each spare or empty conduit.

I. Flexible conduit shall be used for connection of recessed lighting fixtures, motors,

heating, and ventilating and plumbing equipment, transformers, and any other equipment subject to vibration, or locations where it is not practical to use rigid conduit or electrical metallic tubing.



J. Exposed conduit shall be run parallel to, or at right angles to, building lines and center lines of beams and columns. Exposed conduit work shall be neat, of good appearance and free from irregularities and damage.

K. Conduit Support:

1. Support single runs of conduit using galvanized pipe clamps. In damp or wet

locations, install clamp-backs to space conduit off surface. Support conduits at distances and intervals not exceeding NEC requirements for the type of conduit used.

2. Support multiple conduit run using trapeze hangers (approved construction channel), mounted to 3/8-inch diameter threaded steel rods secured to building structure. Install conduit runs so as not to interfere with operations of valves or any other equipment, and keep at least 6” clear from any pipe which may operate at more than 100 F.

3. Conduits shall not be supported from T-bar ceiling suspension wires.

L. Bond metallic raceways, pull boxes, panel enclosures and other non-current-carrying metal parts to the grounding conductor with approved bonding bushings and fittings. Raceways entering service switchboard or panel, or raceways containing circuits over 250 volt to ground (480/277 volt systems) shall be bonded to enclosure with approved bonding bushings as required by NEC Article 250.

M. When expansion joints are crossed (whether conduit is concealed, embedded or

exposed), provide appropriate expansion fitting and bonding jumpers. N. Make raceways free from obstructions, remove burrs and clean raceway interior

before pulling wires. Immediately after installation of conduits seal ends, dust-tight, until the time when wires are pulled.

O. All conduits in explosion-proof area shall be rigid steel and shall be terminated and

sealed according to NEC Article 500. P. All conduits installed for utility incoming services shall comply with respected utility

company requirements. 3.4 OUTLET BOXES AND PULL BOXES

A. Outlet, Junction and Floor Boxes:

1. Provide flush mounted boxes in interior area, except where surface mounting installation is allowed. Boxes for exterior surface mount shall be cast metallic, NEMA type 4. Floor boxes in slabs on grade shall be cast metal and stamped steel elsewhere.

2. Accurately place, securely fasten, and set front edge of outlet box flush with finished surface of construction. Install plaster rings on outlets in plaster or finished dry-wall construction surfaces. Where installed behind splashbacks, or cabinet work, equip outlets with box-extension rings deep enough to bring front edge of box flush with finished cabinet surface. Attach outlets with wood screws, toggle bolts, expansion bolts or equivalent devices to building structure independent of conduits entering or exiting the boxes. Check



approximate location of outlets as marked on drawings and consult with the Architect as to exact location so boxes will center properly with interior trim, beams, paneling, etc. Make outlet boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes accessible; and install access plates over boxes that are furred in. Set covers of floor outlets perfectly flush with finished floor surfaces, and provide carpet rings for outlets in carpeted areas. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices with each other.

3. Offset back to back outlets at least 24 inches in fire rated walls as required by UBC Code. Offset back to back outlets at least 12 Inches on “party walls” to avoid sound transmission; additionally, provide acoustical pads (1/8” high density mastic) and sealant around boxes in “party walls”. As an alternative to 24” spacing for fire rated walls, the spacing may be reduced to 6” if approved listed fire retardant pad is wrapped and sealed around the outlets as per manufacturer’s direction, and if such alternative meets with approved of local Fire Marshal.

B. Pull Boxes:

1. Install pull boxes where shown on drawings and provide additional boxes

where required to facilitate pulling of wires and cables. Locate pull boxes where they are readily accessible. Pull boxes shall be built of code gauge galvanized sheet steel in dry locations, and cast metal in moist locations. All pull boxes shall have removable screw-on covers, and shall be of dimensions indicated on the drawings or, if now shown, as required by NEC Article 370 to accommodate wiring without crowding and to suit location. Pull boxes shall be provided with conduit knockouts or hubs as required. All exterior surfaces shall be given one prime coat, for “finish coat” by others.

3.5 CONDUCTORS

A. Install all conductors in raceway system; pull all conductors into raceway at same time. Parallel circuit conductors and terminations shall be identical and equal in length. Minimum conductor size is #12 for power and lighting and #14 for control (except conductors in site underground installation, which shall be minimum #10.)

B. Conductors shall not be installed in conduit until all work of any nature that may

cause injury is completed. Care shall be taken in pulling conductors that insulation is not damaged. All wires and cables shall be hand-pulled with exception of cables of size #1/0 AWG and larger, which may be pulled by mechanical means. Prior to the pulling of conductors in raceways, the raceway shall be thoroughly swabbed. Use U.L. listed, non-petroleum based and insulating type pulling compound for lubrication. Conductors, where run in vertical runs, shall be supported per NEC-300-19.

C. Splicing and Terminating:

1. Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes,

manholes or handholes. No splicing is allowed inside raceways. Splices for signal systems, conductors and cables is not allowed in below grade or slab and underground pull boxes, where subject to water submerge.



2. Provide U.L. listed, factory fabricated, solderless metal connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type and class of applications and for services indicated. Connector temperature ratings shall be equal or greater than the wires being terminated.

3. All aspects of splicing and terminating shall be in accordance with cable manufacturer's published procedures. All splices in outlet boxes with connectors as specified herein shall be made up with separate tails of correct color. At least 6" of tails packed in box after splice is made up shall be provided. Bolted assembly for terminations shall be torqued as per manufacturer’s recommendation.

4. Joints in wires in dry locations, copper conductors: a. No.8 AWG and smaller: wires shall be twisted and secured with cap or

twist-on, expandable spring type solderless connectors. b. No.6 AWG and larger: wire shall be joined with solderless gutter tap

compression type connectors with rounded edges, two-bolt type for sizes No.6 AWG to 350 MCM and four-bolt type of 500 MCM and larger wire. Joints shall be insulated with half-lapped layers of vinyl plastic, 7 mil thick, electric tape, or factory-supplied insulating device.

5. Joints in wires in moist locations, copper conductors: a. No.8 AWG and smaller: wire shall be securely joined as specified above,

then encapsulated in epoxy (Scotchcast or approved equal). No.6 AWG and larger shall be joined with solderless connection as specified above, or taped and painted with Scotchkote or approved equal.

b. Signal: Conductors shall be joined by approved connectors and waterproofing materials.

D. Color Coding:

1. Color Coding: Provide color coding for all circuit conductors. Insulation color

shall be white for neutrals and green for grounding conductors. An isolated ground conductor shall be identified with an orange tracer in the green body. Ungrounded conductor colors shall be as follows: a. 120/208 Volt, 3 Phase: Red, black and blue.

E. All wire and cables in panels, equipment enclosures and pull boxes shall be

bundled and clamped. Neatly train and tie cables in individual circuits. In panels, bundle incoming wire and cables, No. 6 AWG and smaller, lace at intervals not greater than 6 inches, neatly spread into trees and connect to their respective terminals. Allow sufficient slack in cables for alterations in terminal connections. Perform lacing with plastic cable ties or linen lacing twine. Where plastic panel wiring duct is provided for cable runs, lacing is not necessary when the cable is properly installed in the duct.

F. Identification:

1. Identify all conducts in outlets and junction boxes (where more than two (2)

ungrounded conductors), pull boxes, panelboard and handholes, using vinyl wrap-around wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have same number. Identify branch circuits with panel and designated circuit number. Identify other circuits, noting purpose of each.



2. In manholes and handholes, provide tags of the embossed brass type, and also show the cable type and voltage rating. Attach the tags to the cables with slip-free plastic cable lacing units.

3.6 PANELBOARD AND SWITCHBOARD

A. Set panels and load centers plumb and symmetrical with building lines. Furnish all construction support and anchoring as per CBC seismic requirements. Mount panels such that top of the box is 6’-6” above floor with highest breaker operating handle no more than 6’ above floor.

B. Mount switchboard on 3-inch concrete housekeeping pad and anchor as detailed

on drawings. Doors shall open and close freely. C. In damp and wet locations, surface mount panels shall be mounted on channels

with minimum 1” air space between cabinet and wall. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard and load

center to reflect actual circuiting. Provide locking devices on handles of branch circuits which supply power to time switches, alarm, signal and security circuits and controls.

F. Check and tighten all bolts and connections with torque wrench, using

manufacturer’s recommended values. G. Repair all damage to enclosures and components, and touch up paint and marks.

Thoroughly clean enclosures of all construction debris.

3.7 DISCONNECT SWITCHES, MOTOR CONTROLS, AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

1. Coordinate location of switches and equipment in the field to provide code

clearance in front of switches and ensure switches are “in-sight” from controller as required by NEC Article 430.

2. Select and adjust overcurrent elements in motor starters to match installed motor characteristics.

3. Install overcurrent protective devices and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

4. Where fuse is used as protective device (in fuse disconnects or fusible switches), locate spare fuse cabinet in main electrical room. They shall be keyed to match fusible devices and have appropriate fuse schedules mounted in a frame inside the cabinet. Three spare fuses of each size and type, or a minimum of 10% of the number installed, whichever is greater, shall be provided.

3.8 WIRING DEVICES

A. Install devices with the vertical center line plumb and with all edges of the devices flush against the adjacent wall surfaces.



B. Mounting height shall be as noted on drawings. For devices which are to serve

equipment and mounting height is not indicated, verify with Architect for mounting height.

C. Coordinate exact location of devices with Architect prior to rough-in, specifically for

counter tops, sinks and furniture arrangement. D. All devices mounted in exterior or damp/wet areas shall be suitable for application

with gasketed cover plates. E. Install switches with off position down.

F. Except for devices on isolated ground circuit, connect grounding terminal to

equipment ground and outlet box with bonding jumper.

3.9 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection. Verify equipment manufacturer’s requirements, and promptly inform the Architect if any conflict exists between the requirements and circuiting shown on plans, for resolution.

B. Connection to equipment shall be flexible conduit, run between connection outlet

box and equipment connection terminal box. Use liquid tight flexible conduits for connectors in damp or wet locations. Install connections neatly and inconspicuously.

C. Where connection with attachment plug is indicated, provide cord and cap as per

manufacturer’s requirements. D. Make connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperature

encountered in heat producing equipment. E. Motors are furnished under other sections, but disconnect and motor controllers

shall be provided under electrical work unless otherwise indicated or furnished integral as part of the equipment. All exterior mounted disconnect and motor controllers shall be NEMA type 3R or NEMA type 4.

3.10 CABINETS

A. Set cabinets plumb and symmetrical with building lines. Furnish all construction support and anchoring to comply with anchoring and bracing required by Title 24-CBC seismic requirements.

B. Terminate wiring on terminal strips and identify strips with heat shrink tags. C. All exterior mounted or wet location cabinets shall be NEMA type 3R or 4 unless

higher rating is called for. 3.11 SUPPORTING DEVICES



A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, outlet and junction boxes to building structure using precast inserts, expansion anchors, preset inserts or beam clamps.

B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster or gypsum

board partitions and walls. C. Use expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls. D. Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces. E. Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood

construction. F. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. G. Do not drill structural steel members unless first approved in writing by the

Architect. H. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to

present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.

I. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.

Provide additional support backing in stud walls prior to sheet rocking as required to adequately support cabinets and panels.

J. Bridge studs top to bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and

panelboards in stud walls. 3.12 GROUNDING

A. General:

1. The complete electrical installation, including the neutral conductor, metallic conduits and raceways, boxes, cabinets, equipment and devices shall be permanently and effectively grounded in accordance with NEC Article 250 requirements, whether or not such connections are specifically shown or specified.

2. System neutral grounded by connection to ground bus at one point only at main switchboard. At all other locations, system neutral shall be isolated from other conductors.

3. Provide copper equipment ground conductor, size as shown on plans (if not shown, provide as per NEC 250), in all feeders, flexible and non-metallic raceway, all device branch circuits and branch circuits serving motors and equipment, and circuits with voltage over 250 volt to ground.

4. Where isolated ground wire is called for, it shall be connected to the isolated ground terminal of the equipment or device which it serves and shall be insulated and isolated from both equipment grounding wire and neutral, except at the main switchboard, where it shall be bonded to the ground lug. If circuit is originated from step down transformer (separately driven system), the isolated ground shall be bonded to the transformer ground..



5. Provide building reference ground bus in the main electrical room (location of main service board) where called for; otherwise, ground bus in main service switchboard or panel shall be building reference ground. Connect all grounding electrodes, equipment grounds and building structural steel or metal enclosure (metal framed buildings) to the referenced ground.

B. Grounding Electrodes:

1. All ground connections shall be accessible for inspection and shall be sized

per NEC. 2. Metal Water Pipe: Connect main cold water pipe to building reference

ground bus, as close as possible to service entry. 3. Provide “ufer” ground consisting of 20 feet minimum #3/0 AWG bare copper

conductor encased along the bottom of concrete foundation or footing, in direct contact with earth. The conductor shall be extended horizontally and shall emerge from ground in non-metallic sleeve, extended to building reference ground.

4. Where shown on drawings, provide driven ground rods installed in precast concrete ground pull box. Interconnect ground rods using minimum #4 bare copper conductor. Ground rods shall be spaced minimum of 8’ from each other.

5. Provide bonding between building structural steel and metal enclosure (for metal buildings) and building ground reference bus.

6. Additional Ground Rod: Provide additional ground rods wherever minimum ground resistance (5 OHM) can not be obtained, with other grounding electrodes described. Bond equipment grounds as required to achieve minimum required resistance.

C. Equipment and Raceway Bonding/Grounding:

1. All switchboards, panelboards and motor control centers shall have separate

ground bus. All other enclosures and equipment shall have ground connection point. Bond all ground bus and ground points as per NEC Article 250.

2. Conduits terminating in concentric, eccentric or oversized knock out at service switchboard and panels or serving systems over 250 volts to ground shall be terminated with ground bushing and jumper as required by NEC Article 250-E.

D. Tel/Data Equipment Terminal:

1. Run #6 copper ground in ¾” conduit from communication closets terminal

backboard to building reference ground bus.

3.13 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:

A. Trenching shall be performed and stabilized in accordance with local, state, and OSHA standards. Trench backfill material shall not contain rocks over 4-inches in greatest dimension nor soil lumps larger that 2-inches.



B. Adjustments to accommodate existing underground facilities shall be made as required and as approved by the Architect. Excavate a sufficient distance in advance of installing conduit or pipe to uncover such facilities and to permit checking and adjustments in alignment.

C. Excavate trenches to the required line and grade and scarify and compact bottom in

accordance with requirements for excavation and structural filling as described above. Compacted bottom of trenches shall provide uniform bearing throughout entire length of conduit or pipe.

D. Conduit or pipe shall be bedded in sand at least 6-inches around the outside

diameter. Bedding and back fill shall be installed and compacted in accordance with requirements for filling as described above. Backfill and compact trenches in maximum 8-inch thick layers where trench is under structures. Restore trenches to original surface.

E. Trenches for utility shall be made per utility company requirements.

3.14 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A. Provide manholes and handholes complete with accessories as indicated. Provide additional handholes as needed so that spacing between handholes does not exceed 300’.

B. Installation of Cable in Manholes and Handholes: Do not install cables utilizing the

shortest route, but route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths. Form all cables to closely parallel walls, not to interfere with duct entrances, and support on brackets and cable insulators at a maximum of 18 inches. In existing manholes, handholes and vaults where new ducts are to be terminated or where new cables are to be installed, provide cable supports and grounding as required for a neat and workmanlike installation with all cables properly arranged and supported. Support cables splices in underground structures by racks, leaving top space open for future cables, except as otherwise indicated for existing installations. Provide one spare three-insulator rack arm for each cable rack in each underground structure. Provide additional cable racks in each existing underground structure through which new cable in run.

3.15 IDENTIFICATION.

A. Nameplate: Provide engraved nameplates on switchboard and metering boards, panelboards, transformers, terminal cabinets, externally operated safety-switches, time-switches, relays, pushbuttons, and similar equipment, to properly identify each item. Nameplate material shall be laminated phenolic, 1/16-inch thick, with white core (pressure sensitive “stamped-tape” is not acceptable) with letters machine engraved through black facing to white core. Attach nameplates to equipment with machine screws or “pop rivets”. Engrave nameplates with minimum ⅜” high lettering for panelboard, transformer and other large equipment and ¼” lettering for small equipment.

B. Panel Directory:



Provide 6” x 8” minimum circuit directory frame and cord with clear plastic covering, mount inside panel door with circuit numbering starting on top, odd numbered circuits in sequence down the left hand side and even numbered circuits down to the right side.

C. Wire and Terminal Markers:

Provide self-adhering, machine printouts or write-on, self-laminating vinyl wrap around strips, as made by Thomas and Betts or Brady. Install on all conductors in panels, cabinets, pull boxes, J boxes, outlets (which contain more than 2 ungrounded conductors) and terminations. Identify conductors with circuit number (for conductors serving equipment, indicate equipment name).

D. Underground Conduit Markers:

Provide yellow polyethylene tape with black imprinting “Caution-Buried Electric Line Below” as made by T&B or Tera-Tape and install over all underground conduit installation, 12” below grade.

E. Grounding Electrodes:

At main ground reference bus, identify each ground electrode connection with laminated tag indicating type (example, “ufer ground”, “ground rod”, “cold water”, etc.).

F. Emergency Operating Sign:

Provide engraved laminated signs with white letters on red background with minimum 3/8” high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer and other emergency operations.

3.16 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTS

A. General:

1. Certified test report shall be submitted at the completion of project. Tests shall be carried under supervision and certified by a technician who is currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in Electrical Testing. Pay all costs of performing the inspections and tests as specified herein.

2. The contractor shall follow recognized safety procedures and techniques during energizing and de-energizing of all equipment to ensure employee safety and protect the work.

B. Inspection and Testing of Main Distribution System and Equipment:

1. Perform tests in accordance with applicable procedure as described in

International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Publication “Acceptance Testing Specification for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and System”, referred to as NETA herein for the following: a. Feeders (600 volt maximum): Section 7.3.1: (As indicated, insulation

test shall be performed on each conductor with resistance to ground and adjacent conductors, applying 1000 volt DC potential for one minimum. The insulation values shall be less than 50 megohms.)



b. Switchboard: Section 7.1 c. Circuit Breakers: Section 7.6.1.

d. Grounding Systems and Ground Fault Protection” Section 7.13 and 7.14. e. Motor Controls and Starters: Section 7.16. Check motor phasing connection

(3 phase motors) to ensure proper rotation prior to the test.

C. Branch Circuit Wiring: Provide insulation test for all branch circuits, after installation and before connection to equipment and fixtures. Test phase to phase and phase to ground for each branch circuit with 600 volt DC megger, insulation value shall be 20 megohms or higher, when tested for 10 seconds. Test for continuity of circuits.

D. Signal Cables and Conductors (less than 300 volts): Test cabling for continuity,

ground and insulation as per signal cable manufacturer recommendation. E. Receptacle and Devices: Verify that each receptacle device is energized and has

proper polarity. Test each GFI receptacle device for proper operation. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

F. Voltage Adjustment: Make voltage reading and adjust taps on step down

transformers to give proper voltage (118-122 volts; for 120 volt nominal systems) prior to building occupancy.

G. When testing results are not acceptable, the deficiencies shall be rectified and

system shall be retested until satisfactory results are obtained. H. Report: Signed test report shall be submitted at the completion of the project and

shall include summary of visual inspection, test description, test results, and name and certification of individual or company conducting the test.

3.17 ACCEPTANCE

A. Upon completion of work, arrange for inspection of electrical system to be witnessed by the Owner’s representative. Inspection conducted at the expense of and by contractor at the mutually agreed times. Give ample time, but not less than five (5) days’ notice to arrange for inspection.

B. Demonstrate that circuit and equipment have been properly installed and adjusted

and are ready for fulltime service. Demonstrate that all equipment operates satisfactorily and as specified.

END OF SECTION


G:\09712.00\Archive\CD\2012-0319 Tracy Station 92 - Addendum 1\MEP\Specifications\16300 - Networking-Telecommunications, CATV and Speaker Systems.doc

Networking- Telecommunications, 16300 - 1 CATV and Speaker Systems

SECTION 16300

NETWORKING – TELECOMMUNICATIONS, CATV AND SPEAKER SYSTEMS


A. Furnish and install complete operational Networking – Telecommunications systems and audio speaker system as described herein and as shown on the drawings. Provide MDF, and associated equipment.

B. Related Documents

1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2. Requirements of Division 16 Sections apply to this Section: General Electrical Requirements.

C. City of Tracy reserves the right to terminate any contract. Category 6

Specifications are not adhered to upon final inspection. If at any point within the contracted installation the Category 6 Standard cannot be upheld, written notice must be submitted to and City of Tracy Representative for signature approval.

D. The installation of the copper station cable shall meet the transmission

performance specified later in this exhibit:

1. Test all patch panels, cables, and patch cables as a full channel for compliance with the transmission parameters in this exhibit.

2. Randomly test all materials in this document for assurance of quality and adherence to specification.

3. Allow only virgin materials in the products specified and not allow splices in the cable.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Contractor Qualifications

1. Contractor must have three years experience in the installation of Category 6 and LAN equipment. Contractor/Subcontractor will submit copies of the certification of the company and names of staff that will be performing the installation and termination of the installation to provide proof of compliance of this spec. At least 30 percent of the installation and termination crew must be BICSI Certified Technicians.

2. Contractor must have successfully completed five similar projects. 3. Contractor must provide satisfactory evidence of financial stability.




4. Contractor must be licensed in the state of California as a low voltage contractor (C7 designation).

5. Contractor Certifications by the manufacturer of the proposed equipment, A Company certifications must exist with each manufacturer used in this section that the Contractor is a certified installer.

6. List of five references that required similar materials and labor.

B. Installation

1. Contractor shall maintain a clean work place. All equipment that is to be stored shall be coordinated with the City and must be approved prior to storing. The City is not responsible for Contractors equipment on its premises. The City must be notified of any shipments or equipment prior to delivery. The City is not responsible for any materials delivered that have not been signed for by an authorized City representative.

2. Damage caused by the contractor during installation and testing process must be replaced or repaired by the contractor at no cost and to the satisfaction of the City.

3. After the contract has been awarded, but before the contractor orders the cables and equipment components, the contractor shall submit to the City samples and part numbers of the cables for approval before they are ordered- For composite cables, samples of each section of the composite cable are adequate.

4. The contractor shall obtain all manufacturers instructions, including current bulletins, for the installation of the cable and cabling system components provided by the contractor. Copies of these documents and all manufacturers warranty documents shall be sent via the general contact to the City when the installation of the cabling system begins.

5. The contractor shall provide the necessary protection to safeguard its own work, as well as the work of the other trades, from damage. The contractor must take care not to damage ceiling tiles.

6. The contractor shall provide all necessary tools, hardware, and test equipment needed by its laborers to install, label, test, document and certify the cabling system.

7. The installation of the voice and data communications system by the contractor will not be considered complete until all cables and components described in this specification are installed, labeled, tested, certified and documentation delivered according to the EIA/TIA specification. Furthermore, the cabling system will also not be considered to be complete until there has been a successful inspection by the City without any corrections required by the contractor.

8. Provide Category 6 cables from each data and/or voice outlet inside building to MDF as shown on drawings. Install cables on “J” hooks in accessible ceiling areas. Provide conduit in all non-accessible ceiling areas, in walls and between buildings.

9. All cable products, conduits, and passive equipment shall be rated for the environment they are installed in.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK




A. Install, label and test Voice, Data outlets and cabling as shown on drawings. B. Install, label and test Voice, Data copper patch panels, punch down blocks, racks

and wire management as shown on drawings and as necessary to implement a complete working system.

C. Install, label and test all Category 6 twisted pair, 24 AWG wire in the locations

specified in the attached floor plans. 1. Provide home run cables as indicated on plans from each data outlet location

marked on the floor plan provided and on the attachment to a data patch panel located in the MDF cable rack.

2. Provide 50 pair telephone cable from main telephone terminal board to 66 block and patch panel.

3. Provide 24 port patch panel in MDF and patch cables between 66 block and patch panel.

4. Provide a home run cable from each voice outlet location indicated on plans and terminate at voice patch panel at MDF.

5. Install speakers and speaker cables. D. Install new MDF rack, copper patch panels, punch down blocks, and wire

management as identified on drawings. E. All work will be done according to Category Six (6) Specifications as published in

EIA/TIA Standards 568-B, 568-A, 569, 570,606, and 607. Additions are listed in TSB 31, 36 and 40. In addition, all installation will be compliant with ISDN SRI (ISO 8877). Cable connectors shall meet the IEEE 802.3 (100 Base X and 10 Base F) and IEEE 802.31 (10 Base T) specifications. Where there is a gray area concerning this specification, these guidelines will be the principal deciding factors.

1.4 CONDUIT AND CABLE BENDS

A. All conduit diameters must comply with the following cable quantity limitations as per the table below

Conduit Diameter Trade Size

Cable Outside Diameter

Number of Cables

.18 .22 .24 .31 .37

½ 1 0 0 0 0

¾ 5 4 3 2 1

1 8 7 6 3 2

1 1/4 14 12 10 4 3

1 1/2 18 16 15 6 4

2 26 22 20 12 7

2 1/2 40 36 30 13 12

3 60 50 40 20 17

3 1/2 - - - 22




B. In the case that wall mount raceway is used, 50% of the raceway should be left empty. It is to be expected that some conduits will be filled up to 75% capacity due to the limited diameters of certain pathways.

C. All conduit bend radii must comply with the following table:

D. Neatness in cabling, ensuring that all cables are "hidden" from open view of run in

wall-mounted raceway, is mandatory. Cables will not be stapled to wall, abutments, supports, or any other objects. Concurrent data cable runs will be bundled together neatly and loosely.

E. Cable entrance paths (that is, conduit runs) will be recorded electronically and that

information will be provided to the client in a tab delimited spreadsheet. F. Where wall-mount raceway runs horizontally, it will be refastened mechanically as

per the manufacturer's specification and the connection joints to be centered between the vertical standard brackets.

G. All wall-mount raceway will be run parallel to the floor and will be mounted at the

minimum acceptable distance from the floor. 1.5 WIRING DESCRIPTION FOR CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL CABLING

A. All cables with a run length of 295 feet or under shall consist of 24 AWG thermoplastic insulated conductors formed into four twisted pairs and enclosed by a thermoplastic jacket. All copper cables shall be rated by the manufacturer to be Category 6.

B. The Wire O.D. of the UTP copper cable shall be not greater than .24". C. The pair assembly shall meet the color code according to EIA/TIA 568B. D. All wires must not be bent tightly or kinked at the jack (or elsewhere). Copper

cables must not be bent greater than 4x the cable, fiber 10x. E. Once installed, all cables will be tested by the contractor and shall perform better

than the minimum requirements as outlined in EIA/TIA 568B, section 10 for UTP copper. A soft copy download of the test files will be provided to City of Tracy.

F. After the soft copy download has been provided, a qualified technician hired by the

City of Tracy may perform spot checks. G. If any cable fails to meet the specified requirements during testing measurements

by the City of Tracy hired technician (a third party) or conflict with the contractor’s

Scenario Bend Radius <2 inches 6x internal diameter of conduit > 1.99 inches 10x internal diameter of conduit Fiber Pull 10x internal diameter of conduit




test results, the cable will be completely rerun at the installer's expense. This includes time and material to correct the problem(s).

1.6 ELECTRICAL CONSIDERATIONS

A. All wires must run per the following table:

Condition <2kVA >5kVA

Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open or nonmetal pathways

5 inches 12 inches 24 inches

Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to grounded metal conduit pathway

2.5 inches 6 inches 12 inches

Power lines enclosed in a grounded metal conduit (or equivalent shielding) in proximity to a grounded metal conduit pathway.

3 inches 6 inches

B. All wires must run at least 6.6 feet from electromagnetic fields, such as those

generated by electrical motors, converters and inverters. C. All wires must run at least 6 inches from fluorescent lights. D. All wires must run at least 1 foot from FAX machines, refrigerators, microwaves,

and copiers. E. All concurrent wiring runs paired with electronic cabling must not exceed three feet

in length. 1.7 DISTRIBUTION RACK SPECIFICATIONS

A. Equipment Racks

1. Rack shall be allocated with no more than 200 terminations. 2. Racks should have at least 36 inches front, and 22 inches side clearance for

access and cable dressing space.

B. Grounding and Bonding

1. Cross-connect hardware for cabling should be mounted on frames that will accommodate a grounding conductor that will provide a path of low DC resistance to ground. The grounding conductor shall be bonded to the same grounding system that is employed by the power service for the floor serving the same floor as the cross-connect equipment.

2. The grounding conductor shall be no less than 6 AWG.

C. Patch Panels (Connecting Hardware)




1. The transmission properties of internally wired connecting devices must meet

or exceed the transmission performance requirements specified in EIA/TIA 568, section 12.2.6.2, interfaces included and the connector specification for Category 6.

2. Standard telecommunications interface jacks and plugs must meet the requirements of EIA/TIA-TSB 31, REF Bl.37.

3. Telecommunications interface jacks must be eight pin jacks with pin/pair assignments according to the T568B pinout designation with applicable color-coded combinations. These pin/pair assignments are compatible with ISDN BRI (ISO 8877). Ref B1.24.

4. 24 Port, 19" rack mountable, all metal Category 6 patch panels utilizing modular snap-in, 8 position/8 conductor data jacks for interfacing with switches and station cable terminations. Furnish with Category 6 UTP patch cords, as specified.

D. Jumper Cables

1. Cross connect jumpers and patch cords must meet or exceed the minimum performance requirements specified in EIA/TIA 568, sections 10.2-1.2.2 through 10.2.1.2.8 as well as section 10.2-1.2.1.

2. The use of flat, non-twisted cords is strictly prohibited. 3. The cables shall be Manufacturer-terminated on both ends with a Category 6,

8-pin/8-position modular plug to be pinned as per TIA/EIA T568A. All cables shall be UL listed.

4. These cables must meet the impedance, attenuation and NEXT requirements for Category 6 Horizontal Cable in parameters of the CAT 6 CABLE TIA/EIA-568B and CAT 6 PERMANENT LINK TIA/EIA-568B Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard (“Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 Ω Category 6 Cabling”).

1.8 WIRING LABELS AND WIRE MANAGEMENT

A. Labeling all wall jacks, cables, patch cables and patch panel jacks is mandatory. The method for applying labels will be left to the discretion of each bidder but they will supply City of Tracy with a sample for approval.

B. All label printing shall be labeled in compliance with TIA/EIA-606 labeling

specifications using permanent machine printed labels. C. Cable conduit entrance paths will be marked on the floor plans and following

completion of the work, a floorplan will be provided to City of Tracy depicting all locations and label IDs of each jack and patch panel.

1.9 EXECUTION

A. New Building

1. Install new hardware and cabling for IDF.




2. Install new floor mounted rack with copper patch panels, wire management, grounding, and power strips. a. Install vertical and horizontal wire management for all copper and fiber

patch panels. b. Install vertical and horizontal wire management for an equal number of

customer supplied LAN switches. c. Install a minimum #6 AWG Green Ground Cable between TGB and

floor rack. 3. Install ¾” plywood backboards treated with white fire retardant paint, new

TGB ground bus bar and 66 Block for voice cross connects. 4. Install new CAT 6 cabling for voice and data as shown on drawings.

a. Terminate voice cabling on new Category 6 patch panel and voice outlets as shown on drawing. Extend voice cabling from main telephone terminal board to MDF location using a new 50 Pair backbone cable.

b. Terminate data cabling on new 24 Port CAT 6 patch panels and data outlets as shown on drawings. Provide 25% spare capacity on new data patch panels.

5. Install new Speaker cabling and terminate at IDF. Owner will extend cabling to radio equipment.

1.10 TESTING

A. All cable testing shall be performed once by the installation vendor, and at the discretion of the City of Tracy, a second time by a qualified technician hired by City of Tracy (a third party firm).

B. All copper cable shall be tested by a certified, calibrated Level III Microtest

OMNIScanner II, Fluke DSP 4000. C. All tests shall be saved in memory within the tester until a member of City of Tracy

staff can download them to a tab-delimited test file. No test measurements shall be accepted which are not downloaded directly from the Level III tester by a staff member from City of Tracy. Tests performed by the installation vendor shall be matched against test performed by the third party testing authority. (See above.)

D. Any test in question shall be run again at no additional expense to the City of

Tracy, in the presence of a staff member from City of Tracy, the installation vendor, and the third party testing authority. The installation vendor will record a final test and the results accordingly.

E. Any cable runs that fail to meet specifications and fail the Level III scanner test

shall be completely re-run at the full expense of the installation vendor. F. Further testing expenses shall be paid by City of Tracy to the testing authority. G. All cables that are re-run will be tested for compliance as if they were run initially.

The results of these tests shall be dealt with the same as a first test scenario described above.




1.11 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

A. Rules, Codes and Regulations

1. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules, codes, and/or regulations as follows: California Building Code (CBC); NFPA Bulletins; California Electrical Code (CEC); Utility rules and regulations; and all other applicable regulatory documents.

2. Nothing on the Drawings or in the Specifications shall be construed to allow work not in conformance with these rules, codes and regulations.

3. The Drawings and/or Specifications shall take precedence where work and material described therein exceeds that required by rules, codes, or regulations.

B. Authority of City of Tracy

1. The authority of the City of Tracy shall be absolute with respect to all

performance under this Specification. In case of dispute, the decision of City of Tracy shall be final.

C. Inspections

1. City of Tracy and the contractor shall arrange for inspections. Provide City of Tracy with a schedule of inspections, where applicable, and submit all Certificates of Inspection to the City of Tracy representative.

1.12 PRODUCTS

A. All materials shall be new, packed in original containers, installed and turned over free of rust, corrosion or defects. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product where so provided.

B. All materials shall bear the label of, or be listed by, Underwriter’s Laboratories

(U.L.). If listing is not offered by U.L., labeling and listing by other organizations, such as ETL Testing Laboratories, may be accepted if approved by authority having jurisdiction.

C. Furnish without extra charge to the City all additional material and labor when and

where required to comply with these codes, rules and regulations, though the work may have not been mentioned in these specifications or shown on the plans.

D. Provide shop drawings to Architect’s representative when work required in this

specification conflict with actual field conditions or for coordination with other trades. Architect’s representative will be the ultimate authority on resolving issues.

1.13 CABLE




A. 4-pair, bonded pairs, non-plenum, 23 AWG, enhanced performance Category 6 Berk-Tek 10032455. Color shall be blue.

B. 4-pair, gel-flooded for wet-location use, 24 AWG, Category 6: CommScope 6NF4.

Provide with gel-crimps each end. Clean all gel from the cable before it is terminated.

C. PE89 25 pair, 50 pair, or 100 pair underground listed cabling as shown on the

drawings: Superior Essex 09-097-02, 09-100-02, 09-104-02.

1.14 TERMINATION HARDWARE

A. Patch panel. 24-port panel designed for mounting in equipment rack. Panel to meet or exceed Category 6 performance specifications. Panel to be wired to T568-B standard. Panduit DP24688TP or Systimax 1100GS3-24.

B. Voice termination hardware. Voice termination hardware: 100-pair 66-block type

termination block. Wall mountable, compact type UTP pair terminating blocks complete with mounting hardware, connecting blocks, retainers, wire guides, designation strips, etc. shall be utilized for the termination of 4-pair voice station cables in the IDF. Must be UL listed.

C. Minimum performance specifications: Must be UL XP7 Certified and must meet

parameters of the CAT 6 CABLE TIA/EIA-568B and CAT 6 PERMANENT LINK TIA/EIA-568B Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard (“Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 Ω Category 6 Cabling”).

D. Data modular connectors. 4-pair connector compatible with specified faceplate.

Connectors to meet or exceed Category 6 performance specifications. Top two jacks shall be blue color, and bottom two shall be black. Panduit CJD688TPIW or Systimax MGS400-262.

E. Voice modular connectors. 4-pair connector compatible with specified faceplate.

Connectors to meet or exceed Category 6 performance specifications. Color shall be as selected by City. Panduit CJD688TGBU or Systimax MGS400-318.

F. TGB – Telecommunications Ground Busbar. BICSI Pattern Telecommunications

Ground Bar Kit - Harger Lightning & Grounding TGBI14212TGBKT 1/4" x 2" x 12" Electro Tin Plated

1.15 CABLE MANAGEMENT

A. Backboards. For voice termination hardware. Color: blue. Compatible with specified voice termination hardware.

B. Distribution spool assembly. Assembly consisting of distribution spools and

distribution rings designed for managing cross connect wire.




C. Horizontal cable manager. Designed to manage copper and fiber patch cords between patch panels and active equipment in the same equipment rack. Nominal dimensions to be 3”x3”x17.5” (DxHxL). Panduit NCMHF3.

D. Vertical cable manager. Designed to manage copper and fiber patch cords

between patch panels and active equipment in the same equipment rack. Nominal dimensions to be 4”x5”x83” (WxDxH). Panduit WMPV45.

E. Cable spools. Cable routing spool with screw. Hubbell HPW66SPLB, Siemon S20B

or equal. F. Open distribution rings. CPI 12035-001. G. Cable runway. Tubular steel, 12” wide cable runway with stringers on 9” centers.

Color: Gray. CPI 12250-112 or equal. H. Cable Runway Radius Drop. Compatible with specified cable runway. CPI 12100-

112. I. Mounting hardware. 1. Wall angle support kit. Designed for supporting the end of a section of cable

runway to the wall. Compatible with specified cable runway. CPI 11421-112. J. Rack-to-Runway mounting plate. Designed for mounting cable runway to top of

equipment rack. Compatible with specified cable runway. CPI 12121-112. K. Anchors. For securing equipment rack to concrete slab. CPI 40604-001. L. Junction splice kit. U.L. Classified. Compatible with specified cable runway. CPI

16302-001. M. Mounting screws. Package of 50. #12-24. CPI 40605-001.

1.16 RACKS AND CABINETS

A. Equipment rack. Free standing equipment rack. 19”x84”. Double-sided, drilled for #12-24 EIA universal mounting hole spacing. With 25 mounting screws. Steel or aluminum. Panduit CMR19X84(S) or CPI 545053-503.

1.17 CABLE ASSEMBLIES

A. Data patch cords. 4-pair, meeting or exceeding Category 6 performance specifications. Length: 50% 7’& 50% 10’. Color: Yellow. Panduit UTPSP(7)YL or Systimax CPC3312-09F00(7).

B. Teleco interface cords. 2, 3, or 6 conductor silver satin cable with RJ11 or RJ12

modular connectors. Length: 8”. Suttle SE-453 or equal.

1.18 LABELS




A. Station cable labels. LaserJet or InkJet self-laminating label with white print-on

area. Size: .19”x1.38”. Panduit PLL-46-Y2-1 or equal. B. Intrabuilding cable labels. LaserJet or InkJet self-laminating “flag-style” label with

white print-on area. Size: 1”x2”. Panduit L3PL3CL or equal. 1.19 FACEPLATES

A. 4-position wall outlet. Single gang. Color: White. Panduit CFPL4WH or Systimax M14LE-262.

B. 3-position wall outlet. Single gang. Color: White. Panduit CFPL3WH or Systimax

M13LE-262. C. 2-position wall outlet. Single gang. Color: White. Panduit CFPL2WH or Systimax

M12LE-262. D. 1-position wall phone outlet. Single gang. Stainless steel with 8-position jack. Allen

Tel AT630B or Panduit KWP5E with KJ5E88TBL jack. (Include Suttle 625M5 [or equal] surface mount box for installation of wall phones in Wiremold.)

E. 1-position outlet (wall). Panduit CFP1WH or Systimax M10LE-262.

1.20 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Anchors. For use with threaded rods or stud bolts in concrete or masonry. CPI 06001-004

B. Stud bolts. 5/8-11. Zinc plated. CPI 08001-002 C. Runway radius drop. Cross member design. CPI 12100-112 D. Mounting screws. Combination pan head, pilot point, mounting screws. #12-24

threads. Zinc plated. Package of 50. CPI 40605-001. 1.21 INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

A. The installation guidelines are simple, Category 6 for voice & data. You should refer especially to the EIA/TIA standards 569, 568-A,606,536,540,570 and the 607. There are also several TSB's as noted.

B. There are times when the standards from the EIA/TIA come into conflict with the

standards that support other structures such as sprinkler systems, electrical systems, etc. The project managers will decide which standard will be upheld in each instance.

1.22 THE DRAWINGS




A. These drawings are to serve as a reference for identifying drop locations. The installer will be responsible for pathway installation. It is expected that a pull cord be left in the conduits used after the job.

1.23 PROVISIONS FOR RADIO ADDRESS SYSTEM

A. Furnish and install all Speaker conduit and cable as indicated on the drawings. B. Install one WESTPENN 295 cable from Speaker to MDF. Cables between MDF

and radio rack will be furnished and installed by the District.

1. All cables used shall indicate the NEC rating for their application as specified in Section 820 of the National Electric code.

C. Speakers

1. 4" station speaker Soundlier No. FC-104-T47 with backbox and grille. 2. 8" station speaker Soundlier No. C803A-T47 with backbox and grille. 3. Weatherproof speakers Bogen No. FMH15T with BB5M6 box and grille.

D. Install one RG-6 cable from each television outlet to main television terminal board

located in electrical room. All work shall comply with utility company requirements.

1.24 PROVISIONS FOR CABLE TV SYSTEM

A. Install all television cables, connectors, etc., inside the building.

B. Provide raceways of the size shown on the drawings. Install terminal cabinets of the size shown on the drawings, securely fastened to the building structure, primed and painted with two coats of white paint. All materials and work shall conform to Comcast requirements. Provide all material not furnished by the utility company.

END OF SECTION


Revised – Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 16500 - 1 Lighting And Lighting Controls

SECTION 16500

LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section.

B. SECTION 16000 – ELECTRICAL - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND BASIC

MATERIALS AND METHODS

1.2 SUMMARY SCOPE:

A. Provide lighting fixtures and lighting equipment in the project as listed in fixture schedule, including connection of fixtures and equipment to the electric wiring in each building.

B. Completely lamp each lighting fixture installed per type and wattage given in fixture

schedule.

1.3 INCORPORATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or governmental organizations apply to work of this Section where cited by abbreviations noted below.

1. (CEC) -California Electrical Code - 2001. 2. (AEIC)-Association of Edison Illuminating Companies. 3. (ANSI)-American National Standards Institute. 4. (CBM)- Certified Ballast Manufacturers. 5. (ETL)- Electrical Testing Laboratories. 6. (IES)- Illuminating Engineering Society. 7. (RLM) -Reflectors & Lighting Equipment Manufacturers Standards Institute, Inc. 8. (UL) - Underwriters' Laboratories.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Fixtures finish shall be as standard by manufacturer. Finishing materials shall be applied in a manner that will produce a durable finish. Metallic finishes, except chromium, shall be given an even coat of high grade lacquer, baked on. Exposed surfaces of aluminum parts, such as frames, shall be given an anodic treatment when required by drawings and/or specifications.

B. Design Criteria:



1. Lighting fixtures conform to the detail drawings, NEC 410, and UL 57,

"Electric Lighting Fixtures". 2. Control systems shall meet California Title 24 requirements.

C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Manufacturing and installation workmanship of the best quality and conform

to Code requirements and accepted practices of the electrical industry. 1.5 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawings for Lighting Fixtures:

1. Lighting fixture submittal for each fixture type includes: a. Requirements in Division I – Submittals and Section 16000 Electrical-

General Requirements and Basic Materials and Methods. b. Manufacturer's data, specifications, installation instructions, and catalog

cuts showing construction details, mounting details and photometric data of fixture, unless otherwise specified. Where data is incomplete, supplement with shop drawings.

c. Lighting fixtures submitted for review shall state that fixture bears UL label of approval and/or acceptable independent testing laboratory for the application in which the fixture is intended to be used.

d. Initial submittal must cover every lighting fixture type required on this project. (No partial submittals will be reviewed.) Partial submittals will be returned rejected.

2. Lighting fixtures submittal presentation shall be in the following from:

a. Total submittal placed in a hard-bound notebook. b. Within notebook in alphabetical order, place each fixture type by letter

under separate tab in corresponding order with Fixture Schedule on drawings.

c. The first page of notebook includes a summary of each fixture type with its manufacturers name and complete catalog number.

d. Submit legible reading material. Catalog pages must be clearly marked as to the precise piece of equipment being furnished, listing all information to be reviewed.

e. Each sheet of submittal must clearly indicate project name and individual fixture type and be date stamped by the Contractor.

f. Submit each lamp by: Manufacture and Catalog number. g. LEED Certification Points: Submit information and certifications

necessary to achieve maximum points for LEED certification; coordinate and cooperate with Owner and Architect in providing information necessary for required LEED rating. 1) Electronic (LEED On-Line) submittals are required for Project

LEED certification.

B. Lighting Control Submittals:



1. Provide complete manufacturer’s catalog data for occupancy sensors, lighting control systems and dimming systems.

C. Samples: Shop inspection when requested by Architect shall consist of

examination of a representative sampling of fixture and fixture parts required for the building project. Any action taken as a result of shop inspection must not be construed as final acceptance of fixtures, which must fully meet all contract requirements after installation in project and at time of final action.

D. Substitutions:

1. Alternate: Fixture schedule and details on drawings generally call out under

each fixture type acceptable Manufacturers and catalog number. Submit sufficient information, including sample fixture if required by Architect, when a substitution of fixture is to be considered.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Ordering lighting fixtures for the project shall not commence until unqualified

acceptance of submitted lighting fixtures has been received. B. Shipping cartons shall have sufficient strength to prevent damage or scratching

during transportation and storage at the job site. Blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory fixtures shall be removed and replaced in a manner satisfactory to the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. Lamps

1. Fluorescent Lamps: a. Lamps shall be 3500K, rapid-start type in all areas except where

indicated otherwise on drawings. b. 48 inches long T-8, Sylvania F032/835/XPS/SP35-899 unless otherwise

noted. 2. Compact Fluorescent Lamps:

a. 4 PIN, 3500K color index unless otherwise noted. 3. High-Intensity-Discharge (H.I.D.) Lamps:

a. Exterior - high pressure sodium lamps clear, horizontal only- General Electric Lucalox.

b. Metal Halide – General Electric or Osram with safety shield.

2.2 LAMP SOCKETS:

A. Fluorescent lamp sockets biting-edge type or phosphomus-bronze with silver flash contact surface type, and confirm to applicable requirements of UL-542 and ANSI-C81. 48" rapid start lamp socket - medium BI -PIN turn-type Leviton 13053 series with silver contacts.



B. Compact Fluorescents – 4 PIN.

C. High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.) Lamp sockets:

1. Interior: Lamp sockets porcelain enclosures and conform to applicable

requirements of ANSI-C81. 2. Exterior: Lamp sockets locking rAx porcelain enclosures and conform to

applicable requirements of ASNI-C8 1.

D. Incandescent lamp sockets shall have porcelain enclosure and shall conform to applicable requirements of UL-496 and ANSI-C81.

E. Lamp sockets rigidly and securely attached to fixture enclosure.

2.3 BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES:

A. Ballasts for Fluorescent Fixtures:

1. T8 Lamps: Electronic Type: Sylvania QTP2X32T8 PSN. 2. Dimmer Ballasts: Sylvania QTP2X32T8/UNV-DIM-TCL 3. UL, Class "P" with automatic-resetting, internal thermal protection, energy

efficient. 4. Conform to ETL-CBM label requirements. 5. Sound ratings "A" except for ballast sizes which are not available with "A"

ratings, as standard products from any manufacturer. For ballasts which are not available with "A" ratings, then the quietest ratings available.

6. Ballasts for lighting fixtures controlled by dimming devices conform to recommendations of manufacture of the associated dimming devices to insure satisfactory operation of lighting systems, and product of one manufacturer.

7. Ballasts serving straight type lamps nominal three feet (socket to socket) or longer in tube length mounted by two non-turning studs or captive bolts firmly against fixture body (or wireway) to maximize dissipation of heat and minimize noise. Nuts and lockwashers, or locking type nuts employed.

8. Ballasts serviceable while fixture is in its normally installed position and not be mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers unless so specified.

9. Each basic fluorescent fixture equipped with necessary number and type of ballasts to operate only the lamps within the particular basic unit single lamp fixtures contain one single-lamp ballast; two-lamp fixtures contain one two-lamp ballast; and four-lamp fixtures contain two two-lamp ballasts. Basic fluorescent fixtures containing three or four lamps initially wired to have the two outer lamps operated by a common ballast and the center lamp or lamps operated by the remaining ballast Slave/Master requirements.

10. Ballasts for use with compact fluorescent lamps shall be electronic as made by Advance, and shall be high power factor.

B. Ballasts for high-Intensity-Discharge (H.I.D) Fixtures: Individual over-current

protection sized in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.



1. Constant wattage, high power factor type or the reactor, high power factory type.

2. No less than "B" sound ratings for interior fixtures, where available. For ballasts which are not available with "B" rating, they shall be of the next standard rating.

2.4 LIGHT TRANSMITTING COMPONENTS FOR FLUORESCENT FIXTURES:

A. Lens material, except as otherwise noted, manufactured from clear 100 percent virgin acrylic, high-molecular-weight, low-brightness, domestic original, having a maximum melt-flow rate of 2.2 grams per ten minutes as defined in ASTM D 123 8, Condition 1, and a minimum flow temperature of, 315 degrees F. as defined in ASTM D59. Lens KSH-12, and be destatisized and free from defects.

B. Lenses and diffusers not less dm 1/8 inch of average thickness. Average thickness

determined by adding the maximum thickness to the minimum unpenetrated thickness and divided the sum by two.

C. Diffuser and lens panels framed in a manner that will permit replacement of panels

in frame without use of tools other than screwdriver or pliers. Panels held in fires in a neat, workmanlike, rattle-free manner that will provide proper tolerance for normal expansion and contraction without damage to panels.

2.5 POLE MOUNTED AND GRADE MOUNTED SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES:

A. Pole mounted and grade mount site lighting fixtures:

1. Luminaries: Shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall be weather proof and bear U.L. label for wet locations. Lens shall be securely attached to a hinged lens frame for security during maintenance and re-lamping. Fixture shall be attached to post as specified by the manufacturer.

2. Pole: a. Poles shall be of material, shape and height as indicated on the

drawings and shall be complete with handhole and gasketed cover, anchor-bolt with tamper resistant locking screws, base cover, and grounding connection.

b. Aluminum pole shall be anodized in factory, color as specified. Steel poles shall be galvanized and field primed and painted after erection. Paint color as approved by Architect.

3. Base: a. Concrete base shall be cast-in place reinforced concrete as shown on

drawings, and anchor bolt and conduit entries as indicated. Concrete shall be at least 3,000 psi compressive strength at the end of 28 days. Maximum aggregate size shall be 1-inch. All formed surface shall be repaired by patching honeycombed or otherwise defective area with cement mortar. Provide concrete base as shown on plan, (where not shown, follow fixture manufacturer directions).

4. Direct building and sign flood lights and landscape accent light toward the features intended to be accented, (sign, building facade, trees, etc.). Adjustment and direction of the lights shall be performed to provide satisfactory results, as confirmed by the Architect.



5. All pole mount and post mount fixtures where close to buildings shall have “House” shield to cut off light spill and glare toward apartments.

2.6 FABRICATION AND FINISHES:

A. Metal parts possess sufficient mechanical strength and rigidity to eliminate the possibility of damage or distortion from normal wear-and-tear in use, weight of fixtures, or moderate misalignment of supporting structure. Formed metal parts suitable treated by phospatization or surface passivation to prevent growth of corrosion and to insure a permanent bonding with priming material.

B. Sheet metal formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing trim and lens frame

true and straight (unless intentionally curved), and parallel to each other as designed. Wireways and fittings free of burrs and sharp edges and accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to wiring. Hinged door closure frames operate smoothly without binding when fixture is in installed position. Latches function easily by finger action without use of tools and the positive spring loaded latch type.

C. Housing with trim designed to prevent extraneous light leakage and rattling of door

or lens. Surface treatment. done after forming and punching or drilling. Prime coating consists of a heavy full-bodied application of the color, surface application of a suitable permanently compatible priming or undercoating and priming media to all surfaces. Finish coating as designated and shall consist of heavy, full-bodied application of the color, surface, and type of material specified. Visible metal surfaces finished with a matte or prime finish suitable for final finish after installation when not otherwise specified.

D. Finishing coating comply with applicable color, media, and texture requirements of

the ASA and ASTM Standards, including approved methods of application. Indoor type of lighting fixtures, as a minimum, successfully withstand 250 hours of ASTM B 117 Salt Spray Test and 3000 hours of ASTM D609 Humidity Test, without appreciable deterioration of finish, or growth or a penetration test scratch. Finished surfaces of outdoor exposed lighting fixtures suitable for application and environment Interior light reflecting finishes white with not less than 85 percent reflectance except where indicated otherwise on drawings.

E. Reflectors and reflecting surfaces treated as described under individual fixtures.

Alzak treatment Type I of the color required or stated.

F. Metal fastening devices corrosion-resistance plated. Visible plated surfaces have a brushed, polished or stain finish as stated or required. Plated or polished new metal surfaces properly and neatly touched up.

G. Where aluminum members are to be fastened to dissimilar metal parts, other than

steel, the aluminum separated from such parts by a coat of zinc chromate, aluminum, or bituminous paint applied to contact surfaces of metals and allowed to dry thoroughly before assembling. Surfaces of aluminum coatings or aluminum sheet placed in contact with brick, plaster, gypsum, concrete, or similar masonry construction, as in the case of recessed housing, etc., back painted with zinc



chromate, aluminum or bituminous paint and allowed to dry thoroughly before installation.

H. Wiring: Lighting fixtures completely premiered and ready for connection to branch

circuits, except as stated otherwise herein. Factory prewiring as stated under individual fixture description and consist of wiring to an attached junction box, wiring into an approved wireway, or finishing fixtures with two 4-foot length of conductor with AF insulation as required by codes. Holding clips or other devices to hold wiring in place provided as necessary.

2.7 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. Photo Cells:

1. Provide Tork No. 2104 Photo-Cell, or equivalent by Paragon, G.E., or

approved equal. B. Integrated Lighting Control System:

1. Lighting control panels shall be digital “soft wire” system as manufactured by

G.E., Watt Stopper, Douglas, Lithonia or approved equal. The unit shall include digital time clock, photo cell input, remote shut-off of selected zones, and adequate number of relays (120 volt/277 volt contacts) plus 20% spare to provide control functions as required.

C. Relays:

1. Provide ASCO or equivalent, G.E., Square D or approved equal, 30 amp

relays for general use, as shown on the drawings. Install “Lord” shock mounts in NEMA 1 enclosures.

D. Time Switches:

1. Provide Tork No. DZ-200, or approved equal.

2.8 DIMMING SYSTEM AND DIMMING WALL SWITCHES

A. Dimming System, when specified on drawings, shall be as made by Lutron, Strand, Century, or Lightolier.

B. Wall Mount Dimmers : Refer to “Wiring Devices” in specification Section 16000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION/COORDINATION:

A. Lighting fixture of the types, sizes, etc., shown in fixture schedule and notes referenced herein: Drawings show fixture type by means of fixture tag. Where no tag is shown, fixture type indicated for a similar area shall be installed.



1. Location of fixture on drawings is generalized. Carefully verify locations of fixtures with Architectural reflected ceiling plans or other reference data for final location in advance of installation, including headroom clearances and interference with ceiling components, ducts, or openings.

B. Coordinate between electrical and ceiling trades to see that accepted lighting

fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices(hangers, clips, trim firmness, flanges, etc.) to match ceiling system being installed.

3.2 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/ERECTION

A. Align, mount, and level lighting fixtures uniformly. Final decision is reserved by the Architect as to adequacy of alignment and leveling.

B. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment. Where indicated

locations for lighting fixtures conflict with locations for equipment, change locations for lighting fixtures by the minimum distances necessary as accepted by the Architect

C. Pendant or surface-mounted fixtures furnished and installed with required

mounting devices and accessories, and include hickeys, stud extensions, ball-aligners, canopies and stems. Ball-aligners swivel devices at the ceiling shall permit fixture to swing at least 15 degrees in all directions. Mounting stems of pendant fixtures of the correct length to uniformly maintain fixture, heights shown on drawings. Allowable variations in tolerance of mounting shown on drawings. Suspension length of ceiling-mounted suspended types of lighting fixtures (fluorescent and HD) as listed in fixture schedule the overall length from ceiling to lowest point of fixture body, reflector, or glassware in its hanging position.

D. Lighting Fixture Supports:

1. Supports: Provide support for all fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of ceiling construction, to structural slab or to structural members within a partition or above a suspended ceiling.

2. Supports maintain fixture positions after cleaning and relamping. 3. Support lighting fixtures without causing ceiling or partition to deflect. 4. Hardware for surface-mounting fluorescent fixtures to suspended ceilings as

follows: a. In addition to being secured to any required outlet, fixtures shall be lag

screwed to ceiling structural members at four points spaced near corners of each fixture.

5. Hardware for recessed fluorescent fixtures: a. Where suspended ceiling system is supported at four corners of fixture

opening, hardware devices shall clamp fixture to ceiling. For projects under jurisdiction of DSA, installation shall comply with DSA-IRM-3 requirements.

b. System structural members or plaster frame at not less than four points in such a manner as to resist spreading of support member and safely lock fixture into ceiling system. Where suspended ceiling system is not



supported at four comers of fixture opening, hardware devices shall independently support fixture from building structure at four points.

c. Plaster frames or mounting clips for recessed fixture and required mounting accessories for dry gypboard ceilings.

d. Recessed lighting fixtures supported from building base structure and/or suspended ceilings in a manner satisfactory to State requirements of seismic design criteria.

e. All lighting fixtures seismically supported to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction.

E. In areas having no demountable or accessible ceiling system, provide junction box

for access to circuit wiring, or provide exposed box feeding groups of fixtures. F. Wiring: Lighting fixtures must be correctly wired for proper operation in accordance

with design circuit and test free from short circuits and improper grounds.

1. Wiring between fluorescent lampholders and associated operating and starting equipment of sizes not smaller than sizes of leads furnished with approved types of ballasts and insulating and heat resisting characteristics. All other wiring within fluorescent lighting fixtures or from fixture to splice with building wiring conform to requirements of latest issue of NEC. Unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings, wiring in conjunction with incandescent fixtures also conform to requirements of latest issue of NEC and shall not be less than No. 16 gauge. Wiring protected with tape or tubing at all points where admission is liable to occur. Wiring concealed within fixture construction, except where fixture design or mounting dictates otherwise.

2. Connection of wires to terminals of lampholders and other accessories must be made in a neat and workmanlike manner and electrically and mechanically secure with no loose strands protruding. Number of wires extending to or from terminals of a lampholder or other accessory shall not exceed the number which the accessory is designed to accommodate.

3. Joints in wiring within lighting fixtures shall be so spliced that they will be mechanically and electrically secure and insulated to provide insulation, equal to that of the conductors being joined. Approved types of adequately insulated solderless pressure crimped type connectors or Scothlock preinsulated “wire nut” type connectors shall be furnished provided sizes used, method of applications, and tools employed are in accordance with the particular manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. No splice or tape will be permitted within an arm or stem. Wiring shall be continuous from splice in outlet box on building wiring system to lampholder of an incandescent fixture or to wireway or space provided in a fluorescent lighting fixture for necessary splices between ballast and other accessories and lampholders.

5. Multiple section fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be internally wired and connected to accomplish the switching arrangement required by electrical drawings. Wiring shall conform to requirements of latest issue of NEC.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:



A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures and lighting equipment, it must be in first class operating order, in perfect condition as to finish and free from defects. At time of final inspection, all fixtures and equipment must be completely lamped and be complete with required glassware, reflectors, side panels, louvers or other components necessary to complete fixtures. 1. Replace burnt out lamps during construction and up to date of final

acceptance of project by Architect. 2. Upon completion of installation of all recessed lighting fixtures, contractor to

inspect each fixture from above in attic area and verify that ceiling insulation has been spaced away from each fixture housing as required by code.

B. Upon completion of installation, test each occupancy sensor operation and

operation of lighting control and dimming system in presence of Architect and Owner’s representative to demonstrate that systems are operating as intended. Set On-Off scheduling on lighting control time clock as desired by the Owner.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Fixtures and equipment clean are free from dust, plaster or print spots. Any reflector, glassware, side panels or parts broken prior to final inspection must be replaced by Contractor.

3.5 SCHEDULES:

A. Furnishing and installation of lighting fixtures or heating equipment must be executed in a manner that will insure completion coincident with completion of construction of project, unless otherwise required by contract specifications. Lighting fixtures shall not be installed on ceilings and walls scheduled to receive paint until such painting has been excepted.

END OF SECTION


G:\09712.00\Archive\CD\2012-0319 Tracy Station 92 - Addendum 1\MEP\Specifications\16600 - Standby Engine Generators - Automatic Transfer Switch.DOCStandby Engine Generat 16600 - 1 Automatic Transfer Switch

SECTION 16600

STANDBY ENGINE GENERATORS - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes packaged diesel-engine generator sets with the following features and accessories:

1. Air-intake silencer. 2. Battery charger. 3. Fuel transfer pump. 4. Engine generator set. 5. Muffler. 6. Exhaust piping external to set. 7. Outdoor enclosure. 8. Remote annunciator. 9. Starting battery. 10. Automatic transfer switch.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section 16000 – “Electrical”. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standby Rating: Power output rating equal to the power the generator set delivers continuously under normally varying load factors for the duration of a power outage.

B. Steady-State Voltage Modulation: The uniform cyclical variation of voltage within

the operational bandwidth, expressed in Hertz or cycles per second. 1.4 COMPLIANCE WITH AIR RESOURCES BOARD AND SAN JOAQUIN VALLEY AIR

POLLUTION CONTROL DISTRICT (SJVAPCD)

A. General. The engine generator specified for this project shall comply with all San Joaquin Valley Air Pollution Control District (SJVAPCD) requirements. [Note: engines less than 50 brake horsepower are exempt from SJVAPCD permitting requirements.]



B. BACT. The engine generator shall meet SJVAPCD's Best Available Control

Technology (BACT) emissions requirements. These emissions limits vary by engine size and type of fuel combusted.

C. Permitting. Contractor shall submit all permit application materials to SJVAPCD

necessary to obtain an operating permit for the engine. These materials include SJVAPCD forms and a detailed site map indicating the location of the engine and dimensions of surrounding buildings, and area map, and the manufacturer's operating specifications for the engine generator.

D. Schedule. Contractor shall obtain an Authority to Construct (ATC) from SJVAPCD

prior to purchasing the engine or performing any civil, mechanical, or electrical work associated with the engine's installation.

E. Fees. Initial permitting fees shall be paid by the Contractor. F. Other Requirements. Any additional SJVAPCD requirements not discussed in this

section that apply to the permitting of the engine shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. These requirements include but may not be limited to: installations that are close to schools or residences, or installations at SJVAPCD-permitted facilities with existing emissions limitations or other permit restrictions.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance. Include the following:

1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine generator set and

other components specified. 2. Motor starting curve for generator. 3. Time-current characteristics for generator protective device. 4. Complete data on transfer switch.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication details, dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Vibration Isolation Base and Seismic Restraints Details: Signed and sealed

by a qualified professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. Calculations shall be based on seismic Zone 4.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power and control connections and differentiate between factory-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article.

D. Field Test and Observation Reports: Indicate and interpret test results and

inspection records relative to compliance with performance requirements.



E. Factory Test Reports: For units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements.

F. Maintenance Data: For each packaged engine generator and accessories to

include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at the project

for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

2. Detail operating instructions for both normal and abnormal conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of emergency maintenance and repairs at the Project with eight hours’ maximum response time.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR

1910.7 or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generator and auxiliary components

specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Comply with NFPA 70 (NEC). F. Comply with NFPA 99. G. Comply with NFPA 100 requirements. H. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government

requirements. I. Comply with 2001 California Electrical Code.


A. Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in protective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is safe from such hazards.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.



B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair

or replace packaged engine generator and auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance: At Substantial Completion, begin 12 months’ full maintenance by skilled employees of the manufacturer’s designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper, starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventative maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Maintenance agreements shall include parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: One for every ten of each type and rating, but not less than one of

each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but not less than two

of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturer: Generator set shall be Kohler No. 80REOZJB, 80kW, 100kVA,

120/208V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 0.8PF, 278 Amp. 2.2 ENGINE GENERATOR SET

A. Furnish a coordinated assembly of compatible components. B. Output Connections: Single phase, three wire. C. Safety Standard: Comply with ASME B15.1.

D. Nameplates: Each major system component is equipped with a conspicuous

nameplate of component manufacturer. Nameplate identifies manufacturer of origin and address, and model and serial number of item.



E. Resistance to Seismic Forces: Supports for internal and external components, and

fastenings for batteries, wiring, and piping are designed and constructed to withstand static or anticipated seismic forces, or both, in any direction. For each item, use a minimum force value equal to weight of item.

F. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings, as indicated, with capacity as required to

operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing. G. Skid: Adequate strength and rigidity to maintain alignment of mounted

components without depending on a concrete foundation. Skid is free from sharp edges and corners. Lifting attachments are arranged to facilitate lifting with slings without damaging any components.

2.3 GENERATOR-SET PERFORMANCE

A. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 4 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

B. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent

step-load increase or decrease. Voltage recovers to remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

C. Steady-State Frequency: Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency

from no load to full load. D. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to

neutral does not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. The telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG1, shall not exceed 50.

E. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a single-phase, bolted short circuit at system

output terminals, the system will supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 20 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to any generator system component/

F. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

2.4 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Engine generator system withstands the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability.

1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg. C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 600 feet.

2.5 ENGINE

A. Comply with NFPA 37.



B. Fuel: Fuel oil, grade DF-2. C. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm. D. Lubrication System: Pressurized by a positive-displacement pump driven from

engine crankshaft. The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Controls flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit is capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps or siphons or special tools or appliances.

E. Engine Fuel System: Comply with NFPA 37. System includes the following:

F. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow

under starting and load conditions. It shall have sufficient power to transfer fuel from fuel storage tank approximately 5' from generator (see plans).

1. Relief/Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns

excess fuel to source.

G. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment.

2.6 GOVERNOR

A. Type: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing. 2.7 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

A. Description: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine

generator-set skid and integral engine-driven coolant pump. B. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent

water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. C. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant

flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2.8 FUEL OIL (DIESEL) STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION

A. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 37.

B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory-installed and piped with rupture basin (double containment), listed and labeled fuel oil tank. Features include the following:



1. Tank level indicator. 2. Capacity: Fuel for 72 hours’ continuous operation at 100 percent rated power

output. 3. Vandal-resistant fill cap. 4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 5. Alarm device for low fuel and spill. 6. Fuel tank vent pipe shall be extended to terminate at a minimum of 12 feet

above grade.

2.9 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM

A. Muffler: Super critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer. Measured sound level at a distance of 23 feet from exhaust discharge. Sound level distance from center of generator shall be no more than 72 dBA on 8 position average.

B. Connections from Engine to Exhaust System: Flexible section of corrugated

stainless-steel pipe. C. Exhaust Piping External to Engine: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded, black steel,

with welded joints and fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for basic piping installation and joint construction. Refer to Division 15 Section “Hydronic Piping” for materials and installation requirements for piping.

2.10 STARTING SYSTEM

A. Description: Electric, with negative ground and including the following items:

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in “Environmental Conditions” Paragraph in “Service Conditions” Article above.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Cranking Cycle: 60 seconds. 5. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified. 6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal and acid-resistant finish

and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater is arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified.

7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit complies with U.L. 1236 and includes the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A is initiated automatically

after battery has lost charge until and adequate equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit then automatically switches to a



lower float-charging mode and continues operating at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjusts float and equalizes voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintains output voltage constant regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters indicate charging rates.

e. Safety Functions: Include sensing of abnormally low battery voltage arranged to close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Also include sensing of high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition closes contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.

2.11 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Functional Description: When the mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic-transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of the generator set. When the mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, the generator set manually starts. The off position of the same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When the generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures of derangements automatically shut down the generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down the generator set.

B. Functional Description: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to

the on position starts the generator set. The off position of the same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When the generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down.

C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system

controls, and engine gauges are grouped on a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. System shall be capable of transmitting functions indicated below to a remove PC. Exact transport mode shall be as selected by District. Mounting method isolates the control panel from generator-set vibration.

D. Indicating and Protective Device and Controls: Include the following:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter.



8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Start-stop switch. 11. Overspeed shutdown device. 12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device. 13. Coolant low-level shutdown device. 14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device. 15. Fuel tank alarms (low level, rupture). 16. Generator overload.

E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, relays, and other devices, and

wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine, generator, or elsewhere as indicated. Where not indicated, locate to suit manufacture’s standard.

F. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. Labeled LEDs identify each

alarm event. Common audible signal sounds for alarm conditions. Silencing switch in face of panel silences signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated. The annunciator shall be mounted in the office (to be verified with Owner), in Administration Building.

2.12 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent

rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and U.L. 489.

1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. 3. Shunt-Trip: Connected to trip breaker with generator set is shut down by

other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

2.13 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and specified performance requirements. B. Drive: Generator shaft is directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter is rotated

integrally with generator rotor. C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Construction prevents mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,

overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

E. Excitation uses no slip collector rings, or brushes, and is arranged to sustain

generator output under short-circuit conditions as specified. F. Enclosure: Dripproof.



G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure. H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, provider performance

as specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel provides plus or minus 5 percent adjustments of output- voltage operating band.

2.14 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Vandal-resistant sound shield, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph. Multiple panels are lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels are removable by one person without tools. Instruments and controls are mounted within enclosure. Unit as made by the manufacturer for specified engine generator. The enclosure shall have sound attenuating construction to limit maximum average measure sound of 72 dBA (combined engine/muffler) when measure 23' from center of equipment.

B. Muffler Location: Within enclosure. C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Adequate to maintain temperature rise

of system components within required limits when unit operates at 100 percent of rated load for two hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

D. Louvers: Fixed-engine cooling air inlet and discharge. Louvers prevent entry of

rain and snow. E. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired. Arrange for external circuit supply.

2.15 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

A. General

1. 3 Pole (ampere, voltage and short circuit rating as indicated on plans). 2. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in U.L. 1008 for continuous

loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to U.L. 1008.

4. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings is plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg. C.

5. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE Cl62.41. Components meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

6. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.



7. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6; U.L. 508, unless otherwise indicated.

8. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

9. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer or full-rated current between active power sources: a. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. b. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching.

Conventional automatic transfer-switch units rated 225 A and greater have separate arcing contracts.

B. Automatic Transfer Switches Requirements:

1. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. 2. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or

intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources energized. Transfer time is the same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

4. Signal-before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

5. Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case Switch Components: Comply with NEMA AB 1, U.L. AB 1, U.L. 489, and U.L. 869A.

6. In-Phase-Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.

C. Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Senses low phase-

to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage is adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable form 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Time delay for override of normal-source voltage sensing delays transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevents premature transfer to generator set. Pickup voltage is adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency is adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes; factory set for 10 minutes. Provides automatic defeat of delay on



loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch,

normal and emergency-source sensing circuits. a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved

“Normal Source Available”. b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved

“Emergency Source Available”. 8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open single-pole , double-

throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at A240-V ac. 9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so

automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated, normally closed and one isolated, normally open, rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous. Indicates shutdown sequence at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

2.16 FINISHES

A. Indoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer’s standard enamel over

corrosion-resistant pre-treatment and compatible standard primer. B. Outdoor Enclosure: Manufacture’s standard enamel over corrosion-resistant

pretreatment and compatible standard primer.


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine generator performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

B. Examine roughing-in of electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine generator installation.

3.2 CONCRETE BASES

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” and Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.”

3.3 INSTALLATION



A. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers’ written installation and alignment instructions, and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance,

including removal of drivers and accessories. C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers

but not specified to be factory mounted.

1. Verify that electrical wiring is installed according to manufacturer’s submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Proceed with equipment startup only after wiring installation is satisfactory.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Electrical wiring and connections and specified in Division Sections. B. Ground equipment

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening valves. If manufacturer’s torque valves and not indicated, use those specified in U.L. 486A and U.L. 486B.

2. Do not bond neutral and ground conductors at generator, unless the generator is a separately drived System (as defined by NEC Article 250-3-d).


A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections, and to assist to testing. Report results in writing.

B. Testing: Include the following:

1. Tests recommended by manufacturer. 2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are

additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, the following: 3. Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available

battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of battery after discharge. Verify measurements are within manufacturer’s specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40 inches wg (120 kPa). Connect to exhaust line close to engine



exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer’s written allowable limits for the engine.

7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope

to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

C. Coordinate tests of generator with tests for transfer switches and run them

concurrently. D. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until

specified requirements are met.

3.6 TESTING OF AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

A. Testing: Test transfer-switch by operating them in all modes. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer under the supervision of manufacturer’s factory-authorized service representative. Correct deficiencies and report results in writing. Record adjustable relay settings.

B. General-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for

power delivery from both sources. C. Coordinate tests with test of generator and run them concurrently. D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings

and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect system components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Clean components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators as specified below:

1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals. 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days’

advance notice. 4. Minimum Instruction Period: Four hours.

END OF SECTION


G:\09712.00\Archive\CD\2012-0319 Tracy Station 92 - Addendum 1\MEP\Specifications\16700 - Fire Alarm System.doc – Jul ‘11 16700 - 1Fire Alarm System

SECTION 16700

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.2 SUMMARY SCOPE:

A. This section of the specification includes the design, furnishing, installation, connection and testing of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Submit for approval the COMPLETE ENGINEERED (Design/Build) system

configuration and layout showing all devices, wiring, conduit, and locations along with other required information as specified herein.

C. Design Components and Installation shall meet 2002 NFPA 72, 2001 California

Building Code and Fire Code (CEC, CFC), and meet local Fire Marshal approval. Work or additional devices, equipment or wiring not shown on Drawings but required to comply with State and local Fire Marshal’s requirements shall be included in contractor’s bid.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section. Reference to NFPA 72 indicates 2002 version. Reference to other codes indicates current version of codes adopted by local State Fire Marshal.


A. Provide fire alarm control panel and locate at watch room. Provide sufficient number of power supply modules in the complex to monitor all system initiating devices and notification devices, and control units. Unless otherwise required by Local Fire Marshal, alarm initiation shall activate all notification devices in Building.



Activation of any alarm or supervisory device at any location throughout the complex shall cause alarm or supervisory signal in main fire alarm control panel. Stand alone smoke detectors inside each bedroom, when activated, shall cause alarm at all stand alone detectors.

B. General: Noncoded, addressable-analog system with manual and automatic

alarm initiation; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.

C. Basic Performance

1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices

shall be encoded on NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).

2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style B) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit

3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.

4. Digitized electronic signals shall employ check digits or multiple polling.

5. A single ground fault or open circuit on the system Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm.

6. Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.

1.5 SUBMITTALS (Provide written narrative to describe proposed system including zoning

and alarm activation information with “DD” bid).

A. Final design documents shall be prepared in a professional manner by a licensed fire alarm contractor. Drawings shall be of the same size and format as the Architects’ drawings.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer product data for each type of product

indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: (Show details of graphic annunciator.)

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified.

2. Battery: Sizing calculations.

3. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations and routings of raceway connections.

4. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.

5. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system



inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

D. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the FACP.

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements. Comply with NFPA 72.

F. Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Comply with NFPA 72.

G. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution

requirements for Submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submission to authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review. (Additional devices on wiring as may be required shall be included in cost.)

H. Certificate of Completion: Comply with NFPA 72.

I. Software Modifications:

1. Provide the services of a factory trained, NECET fire alarm certified, and

authorized technician to perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes.

2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in manufacturing fire alarm system products and experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. All equipment and accessories shall be new and listed by U.L. and California State

Fire Marshal.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through one source from a single manufacturer.



D. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the FACP manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. It shall employ NECET (minimum level 2 Fire Alarm Technology) technicians on site to guide the final check-out.

E. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local

ordinances and regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Comply with NFPA 72 and California State Fire Marshal regulations.

1.7 GUARANTY

A. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least (1) year from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one-year period shall be included in the submittal bid.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Manufactures: Equipment shall be as manufactured by Notifier, Edwards, Pyrotronics, Firelite or approved equal. Notifier model numbers have been used to indicate accepted quality.

B. Provide the required fire alarm system products in the sizes and capacities

required or indicated, complying with the manufacturer’s published product information of standard materials and components, designed and constructed for the applications indicated.

2.2 SYSTEM OPERATION (Operation in each Building)

A. Activation of an “intelligent” smoke detector shall cause the following operations and indications

1. When an “intelligent” smoke detector senses an abnormal level of smoke,

the loop interface shall automatically initiate a “check” mode. Four consecutive samples shall be made of the prospective detector. Upon completion of four consecutive smoke trouble conditions, the detector is considered “checked” and the system goes directly into an alarm mode, unless the verification mode is activated for the detector.

2. Alarm verification shall be programmable by detector(s) to initiate a verification sequence after the “check” procedure and the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall wait a field-programmable delay period (0-50 seconds), and then proceed to resample the detector four more times for continued presence of smoke. If three or more samples verify an alarm condition still exists, the system will then initiate all alarm sequences specified herein. Less than three consecutive samples during the verification cycle with NOT result in a system alarm condition. The system shall incorporate the ability to log in



memory the number of verification events that have occurred for each selected device.

3. The system common alarm LED on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall flash. The internal audible trouble device shall sound. Acknowledging the alarm condition shall silence the audible trouble device and revert the flashing common alarm LED to a steady state.

4. An alphanumeric LCD Display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including: zone, device type, device location and time of alarm. Location and zoning messages shall be custom field-programmed to respective premises.

5. Appropriate status change message(s) shall be transmitted to a remote Central Station (Subscription to Central Station Monitoring Company to be provided by owner).

6. Activate all audible alarm zones.

7. Flash all visual alarm signal zones.

8. Shut down all air-handling units above 2,000 CFM.

B. Activation of any addressable manual pull station, sprinkler water flow switch or

“intelligent” heat detector shall cause the following operations and indications.

1. Cause all operations and indications described in Article 2.02, Paragraph A above to occur.

C. Closure of a supervised OS&Y valve sensed via a supervisory switch shall cause

the following operations and indications:

1. The system common alarm LED o the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall flash. The internal audible trouble device shall sound. Acknowledging the alarm condition shall silence the audible trouble device and revert the flashing common alarm LED to a steady state.

2. An alphanumeric LCD Display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including: zone, device type, device location, and time of alarm. Location and zoning messages shall be custom field-programmed to respective premises.

3. Appropriate status change message(s) shall be transmitted to Remote Central Station.

D. The presence of a ground condition or an open circuit on any alarm initiation circuit

or a ground condition, open circuit or short circuit on any alarm indicating circuit shall cause the following actions and indications: 1. The system common trouble LED on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall

flash. The internal audible trouble device shall sound. Acknowledging the trouble condition shall silence the audible trouble device and revert the flashing common trouble LED to a steady state.



2. An alphanumeric LCD Display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the trouble condition and its location. System trouble diagnostics shall assist in defining the trouble condition. Unacknowledged alarms/messages shall have priority over any trouble displays and take precedence on the LCD annunciator. Trouble conditions will be stored in memory for future recall/display.

3. Appropriate status change message(s) shall be transmitted to all Remote Annunciators and Remote Central Station.

E. All designated “nonsilenceable” auxiliary control functions shall remain in operation

(even upon silencing of audible alarms) until such time as the control panel is cleared and reset manually (i.e. central station interface elevator recall interface, etc.).

F. Provisions shall be included within the Fire Alarm Control Panel for the following

manual controls in addition to those previously mentioned:

1. Disconnect audible signaling while testing.

2. Temporary software bypass of selected alarm points.

3. Software assignment of selected alarm point to alarm verification function as a method of tacking alarms caused by environmental factors or maintenance requirements. Waterflow switches, smoke detectors, and valve supervisory switches shall be assigned to the verification group to eliminate nuisance alarms.

G. Any zone may be enabled or disabled remotely via a command using an RS232C

Port or other suitable means. 2.3 SYSTEM DEVICES

A. System devices shall be located as shown on the approved drawings. The Contractor shall refer to all the drawings to determine where devices are to be located. All system devices shall be numbered with a unique number. The numbering system shall include the building area, type of device, and device number. This numbering system shall be shown on each submitted floor plan drawing, fire alarm riser diagram and be tabulated. The tabulation shall be included in each O&M Manual submitted to the Owner.

2.4 SYSTEM ZONING

A. The system shall employ “intelligent” heat and smoke detectors and addressable interface devices capable of being recognized and annunciated at the main control panel on an individual basis. All devices shall be field-programmed into software zones for the purpose of general area identification and annunciation. However, each device shall also be annunciate identified on an individual basis including exact location and device type. All zoning/device location information shall be totally field-programmable to exact job requirements. Devices shall be zoned as follows:



1. Manual pull stations, area smoke and heat detectors and sprinkler water flow and pressure switches shall be zoned by device.

B. Alarm zones shall be provided as follows:

C. Initiating and monitored devices shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Manual pull stations.

2. Ceiling smoke detectors.

3. Addressable input devices.

4. Sprinkler flow and pressure switches.

5. Valve supervisory switches.

D. Output devices shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Alarm signals.

2. Alarm signals/integral ADA visual signals.

3. ADA visual alarm devices.

E. Addressable interface relays.

2.5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

A. System equipment shall include, but not be limited to an operator’s control/system control panel, battery back up, alarm indicating devices, and output relays and other devices required to provide a complete and working system.

B. The system shall be of the active multiplex/addressable type wherein each

initiating device shall be repetitively scanned, causing a signal to be transmitted to the control unit that indicates the individual initiating device circuit installation wires are intact. Loss of such a signal at the system control unit shall result in a trouble indication as specified hereinafter for the particular indicating device affected. All indicting devices in the system shall transmit their normal, trouble or actuated status signals in no less than 5 second intervals.

C. Each system-type smoke detector shall be of the analog type so that the system

can be used to read smoke levels on a real time basis from selected smoke detectors for maintenance and diagnostic purposes. All smoke detectors and other initiating devices shall be individually indicated at the main control panel when changing to an alarm or trouble state.

2.6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CENTRAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be Notifier Series AFC 600 or approved equal. The control panel shall be modular in design utilizing distributed solid state microprocessors and be capable of future expansion. The microprocessor-based CPU shall be completely field-programmable. CPU module



shall provide for programmable nonvolatile RAM memory utilizing integral lithium-based memory IC chips. Each panel module shall be independent employing its own microprocessor circuitry for reliability and independent operations in case of main CPU failure. The system control unit shall have capacity for the required active detection and output points with space for future use and expansion. The control unit shall be listed to the latest UL 864 Standard. All circuitry shall be UL-listed for power-limited application and use positive temperature coefficient devices for current limiting. The panel shall be provided with keylock hinged door to access system controls/switches. The panel door shall be provided with a transparent window for viewing all alarm, trouble indicators, and LCD annunciator. The control unit shall be designed for recess-mounting.

B. Central Processing Unit Module (CPU): The CPU shall communicate with monitor

and control all other modules in the panel via internal serial communications techniques.

1. Removal, disconnection, or failure of any control panel module shall be

detected and reported by the CPU.

2. The CPU shall contain and execute all custom control-by-event programs for specified events if a fire situation is detected in the system. Such programs shall be held in nonvolatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs.

3. The CPU module shall contain a real-time clock circuit to time/date stamp system events and execute custom time control programs. Time control program events shall be terminated in a fire condition.

C. Display Interface Board (DIA): The DIA shall provide all touchpad controls and indicators used by the system operator and may also be used to program all control panel and system parameters.

1. The DIA shall contain, and display, custom alphanumeric labels for all

intelligent detectors and addressable modules. Such label information shall be stored in field-programmable nonvolatile memory

2. The DIA shall provide an 80-character alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).

3. The DIA shall provide five Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) for ac power, system alarm, system trouble, display trouble, and disable.

4. The DIA shall provide a 25-key membrane keypad with control capability to command all system functions, status readouts, manual control action, and entry of any alphabetic or numeric information. The keypad shall include means to enter two different five digit passwords to prevent unauthorized manual control or programming.

D. Serial interface Board (SIB): The SIB shall provide the following interfaces:

1. Two ports for remote printer/CRT devices (RS-232c).

2. Two ports for future local printer (RS-232c).

3. One port for remote LED annunciators (RS-485).



4. One part for local LED annunciators (SCB).

E. Loop Interface Board (LIB): LIB’s shall be provided to monitor and control each

loop of intelligent detectors and addressable modules.

1. The LIB shall contain its own independent microprocessor control and shall be capable of alarm detection and automatic control action on its own loop even if a failure occurs in the system central processor unit, internal connections, or other modules.

2. The LIB shall communicate and provide power to all devices on its Style 4 loop over a single pair of wires. For dynamic Style 4 supervision the loop may be branch-circuited or “t-tap” connections may be made off of the loop. Loop wiring shall be twisted shielded pair of up to 10,000’ in length.

3. The LIB shall receive digital/analog information form all “intelligent” detectors and shall process this information to determine normal, alarm, trouble and sensitivity conditions. The analog information shall also be used for automatic test and determination of maintenance requirements.

4. The LIB module shall individually monitor all “intelligent” detectors for sensitivity variation initiating a trouble condition should detector sensitivity “drift” toward either threshold of false alarming or non-alarming conditions. In addition, the system shall have the capability to read each detector’s sensitivity, and if need be, electronically adjust the detector sensitivity as required for existing conditions with UL-recommended limits.

5. The LIB shall communicate continuously with each “intelligent” detector and addressable module on its loop and verify its proper function and individual status. Communication with up to 198 such devices per loop shall be performed every 6 seconds or less.

F. Control Switches: Provide the following control switches at the Fire Alarm Control

Panel.

1. Acknowledge switch.

2. Signal silence switch.

3. System reset switch.

4. System test switch.

5. Lamp test.

G. Nonlock Walk Test: The system shall include a special nonlock “walk test” mode

where each initiating device is manually placed in alarm. The control panel pulses the system audible devices on detection of each such alarm and automatically resets the panel, permitting a single serviceman to functionally test the entire system.

H. Automatic Detector Test: The system shall include a special automatic detector

test features which permits reading and adjustment of the sensitivity of all intelligent detectors from the main control panel. In addition, the automatic test



feature shall also permit the functional testing of any “intelligent” detector or addressable interface device individually or by zone from the main control panel. Results of the test are then indicated on the LCD display. A printout of all test data shall be capable via the system printer.

I. Special System Reports: The system shall have the ability to generate and print,

upon command, system and point status reports.

1. Selection of “system” read status provides the operator with global system programming information including: alarm verification, SLC loop styles, number of SLC loops, number of software zones, number of auxiliary power supplies, signal silence inhibit.

2. Selection of “point” read status provides the operator with selected individual point programming data including: point status (normal, alarm, trouble, disabled, etc.), address, type I.D., control by event custom alphanumeric label, verification status, alarm threshold level, sensitivity, silenceable/nonsilenceable, SLC loop number, and device number.

J. System Diagnostics: The system shall include special software to detect,

diagnose, and report failures and isolate such failures to a printed circuit board level.

1. Selection of “system” read status provides the operator with global system

programming information including: alarm verification, SLC loop styles, number of SLC loops, number of software zones, number of auxiliary power supplies, signal silence inhibit.

2. Selection of “point” read status provides the operator with selected individual point programming data including: point status (normal, alarm, trouble, disabled, etc.), address, type I.D., control by event, custom alphanumeric label, verification status, alarm threshold level, sensitivity, silenceable/nonsilenceable, SLC loop number, and device number.

K. Field Programming: The system shall be 100% field-programmable without the

need for external computers, or PROM programmers, and shall not require replacement of memory IC’s. Systems requiring factory-programming/reprogramming or replacement of memory IC chips shall NOT be acceptable.

1. All programming may be accomplished through the front control panel

indicators and switches or via a CRT display unit.

2. All programs shall be stored in nonvolatile RAM memory.

3. Programming shall be accomplished only after entering an appropriate and preselected five digit password security code.

4. All programming functions shall be initiated via special system “prompting” menus via the system main CPU. The system shall be capable of direct English language programming and prompting and not require complex digital equations or special formulations.

5. The system shall provide a means to “review” all programmed functions.



6. The system shall be capable of revising/changing programmed functions or system expansion at anytime subsequent to initialization as described herein without factory-modifications or factory-reprogramming.

7. Any addressable indicating circuit or auxiliary addressable relay shall be programmed to activate on alarm of a single initiating device or a combination of initiating devices.

L. Event History: The main fire alarm panel shall have the resident ability to store a

minimum of 400 system events in chronological order of occurrence.

1. Event history shall include all system alarms, troubles, operator actions (i.e. acknowledge, silence, reset, program entry, etc.), unverified alarms, circuit/point alterations, component failures.

2. Events shall be time and date stamped and be capable of being recorded and/or reviewed without purging the history file.

3. Events shall be stored on non-volatile buffer memory. Access to history buffer shall be secured via five digit password security code.

4. Event recording shall automatically overwrite the oldest event(s) in memory beyond the initial 400 events.

5. Systems not employing event history memory storage shall be required to furnish a printer/recorder for recording system events.

M. Power Supply: The power supply for the panel and all fire alarm peripherals shall

be integral to the control panel.

1. The power supply shall provide all control panel and peripheral power needs with filtered power as well as 3 amperes of unregulated 24 volt dc power for external audio/visual devices. The audio/visual power may be increased as needed by adding additional modular expansion power supplies.

2. All power supplies shall be designed to meet UL and NFPA requirements for power-limited operation on all external signaling lines, including initiating circuits and indicating circuits.

3. All circuitry shall be UL-listed for power-limited application and use positive temperature coefficient devices for current limiting. Fuses or other thermal overload type protection shall be unacceptable.

4. The system shall derive its primary operating power from a 120 volt ac, single phase, 60 Hz supply. There shall also be a 24 volt battery standby power source with internally supervised batteries and automatic charger, capable of operating the entire system for a minimum of 24 hours in the supervisory mode and then be capable of operating the alarm devices for a minimum of 20 minutes.

5. The power supply unit shall contain suitable overvoltage protection to prevent any malfunction or damage which might occur from line power surges (lightening).

6. Upon loss of main power, the power supply unit shall automatically revert to normal operation without requiring any manual restarting procedures.



7. When the ac power is restored, the control unit shall automatically revert to normal operation without requiring any manual restarting procedures.

8. The battery shall be automatically charged by a built-in short-circuit-proof charger.

9. The charging current shall be automatically controlled according to the battery’s ambient temperature.

10. After a full discharge, the system shall be able to recharge the batteries completely within 12 hours.

11. The connection to the battery shall be automatically switches off when the voltage drops below 19 volts to protect battery cells from damage to deep discharge.

12. Sealed lead acid batteries shall be used for emergency power source.

13. The entire power supply charger circuits including fuses shall be supervised both positive and negative ground fault supervision, battery/charger fail condition, ac power fail indicators. The power supply shall also provide supervision of modular expansion power supplies as may be required. Any malfunction, or blown or missing fuses shall result in a fault indication on the control unit.

2.7 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Intelligent “Ceiling-mounted” Photoelectric Smoke Sensors: Notifier Model SDX-551 or approved equal analog photoelectric smoke sensors shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings.

1. The intelligent photoelectric smoke sensors shall connect via two wires to

one of the intelligent control panel loops.

2. The sensors shall us the photoelectric principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density.

3. The sensor/control panel shall provide automatic sensitivity “drift” compensation to provide longer term stability and reliability. The sensor shall also provide a “maintenance alert” feature whereby the detector shall initiate a trouble condition should the unit’s sensitivity approach the outside limits of the normal sensitivity window.

4. The sensor shall be provided with extensive RF and EMF noise reduction circuitry.

5. The sensor shall employ sophisticated self-compensating solid state LED light source and photosensitive circuitry.

6. The sensors/control panel shall provide a calibrated test method whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself, by activating a magnetic test switch, or may be activated remotely on command from the control panel.



7. The sensors shall provide address-setting means on the sensor head using rotary decimal switches. No binary coding shall be required. The sensor shall also store an internal identification code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of sensor.

8. The sensors shall provide dual alarm and power/status LEDs. Status LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the sensor is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Both LEDs may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected and verified. An output connection shall be provided in the base for connecting an external remote alarm LED.

9. The sensor shall be semiflush ceiling-mounted and be provided with modular detector head with twist-lock base. Sensors shall also be suitable for surface-mounting below raised floors or above ceilings. Sensors shall be provided in smooth attractive white finish, and sealed against dirt, vermin, and back pressure. Sensors shall be provided with fine mesh insect/contaminate screen.

10. Sensors shall be UL-listed with respective control panel.

2.8 MANUAL STATIONS

A. Addressable Manual Stations: Notifier Model BGX-101L manual stations with an addressable interface module or approved equal shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings.

1. The manual station addressable module shall connect with two wires to one

of the intelligent control panel loops.

2. The module at the manual station shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual station switch.

3. The manual station addressable module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identification code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. No binary coding shall be required.

4. A LED shall be provided on the addressable module which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the manual station is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. The LED may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been initiated via the station.

2.9 INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

A. Sprinkler Waterflow and Pressure Switches: Switches shall be furnished and

installed under Division 16, with wiring and addressable input device interface by this Contractor.

B. Fire Protection OS&Y Valve Supervisory Switches: Switches shall be furnished

and installed under Division 16, with wiring and addressable input device interface by this Contractor. Switches shall activate a supervisory signal within two turns of the valve or more than 1/3 of the valve travel toward the closed position.



C. Provide addressable module at each residential smoke detector.

2.10 ALARM SIGNAL DEVICES

A. Horn/Strobes: Provide Notifier P24 Spectralert Series solid state electronic alarm device where indicated on the contract drawings. Electronic device shall not contain any vibrating electromechanical solenoids or contacts for reliability and performance. Electromechanical devices shall not be considered ad equal.

1. Units shall operate at 24 volts dc and be polarized supervised.

2. Preferred alarm signals shall be a slow whoop or fast warble tone producing a sound pressure level of 91 dBA.

3. Units shall be flush mounted and molded of high-impact beige thermo plastic.

4. Each alarm device shall be provided with an integral high intensity flashing xenon strobe tube. Visual strobe shall operate on the same voltage as the audible alarm device. Strobe shall produce a minimum of 15/75 candela and flash at a rate of two times/second. Strobe shall be xenon solid state type.

5. Provide candela ratings to comply with ADA spacing requirements.

B. Visual Signals: Visual alarm signals shall be installed where required.

1. Visual units shall be of the electronic flashing strobe type and operate on 24

volts dc.

2. Strobe signals shall be Notifier S234 Series or equal, flush wall mounted and utilize a high intensity solid state xenon strobe tube on a standard single device electrical outlet box.

3. Lights shall operate in unison with audible alarm signals and discontinue flashing upon silencing of alarm signals.

4. Strobe lights shall be on supervised circuits.

5. Wall coverplates shall have a beige color.

6. Provide candela ratings to comply with ADA spacing requirements.

2.11 BEDROOM UNIT 120VAC SINGLE STATION SMOKE/CARBON MONOXIDE

DETECTORS: Gentex model GN-503F. Residential Unit Station Smoke/Carbon Monoxide Detector shall be provided and installed by this contractor.

1. Bedroom unit shall consist of a 120vac Photoelectric UL217 Listed Smoke

Detector complete with integral sounder, auxiliary alarm contacts and 9vdc standby battery.

2.12 SYSTEM WIRING

A. The equipment supplier shall furnish to the installing contractor a complete detailed point-to-point wiring diagram showing the system equipment and required



number, type and sizes of conductors and conduit sizes. Where common devices which break the alarm circuit are installed on a common zone with shorting type device, the circuit breaking devices shall be wired electrically downstream of the shorting type devices.

B. All fire alarm system wiring which is exposed, concealed in inaccessible locations,

wired between floors or wired between building smoke compartments shall be installed in an approved raceway. Fire alarm wiring routed horizontally in concealed accessible locations may be installed without conduit, using approved plenum rated fire alarm cable, if allowed by Code and local Fire Marshal.

C. All fire alarm system wiring shall be multiconductor, UL-listed FLP for limited

energy (300 volt) and fire alarm applications, and NEC approved fire alarm cable. Wiring shall be installed in accordance with NEC, local codes, Article 210 of NFPA Standard 72, and manufacturer’s recommendations. All wiring shall be copper.

D. Fire alarm system wiring shall be color coded.

E. All fire alarm system junction boxes, including covers, shall be secured, painted

red and marked in white lettering.

F. Wire size shall be determined by calculated voltage drop and circuit loading. Minimum wire size shall be as follows:

1. #18 AWG twisted and shielded for data circuits.

2. #18 AWG for nondata and communications initiating and low voltage auxiliary control circuits.

3. #12 AWG twisted for alarm circuits.

4. #12 AWG for all power circuits.

G. Maximum voltage drop in notification circuit shall be 10% or as recommended by

manufacturer, whichever is smaller. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which the fire alarm system is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. General: The basic equipment and device locations have been shown on the contract drawings. Specific wiring between equipment/devices has not been shown. It is the contractor’s responsibility to submit for approval the COMPLETE ENGINEERED (Design/Build) system configuration and layout showing all



devices, wiring, conduit, and locations along with other required information as specified herein.

B. Design and Installation shall meet NFPA 72 and meet California State Fire

Marshal approval. Work or additional devices, equipment or wiring not shown on Drawings but required to comply with State Fire Marshal’s requirements shall be included in contractor’s bid.

3.3 PROGRAMMING

A. General: The manufacturer shall provide and install a menu driven software package, and shall provide all required programming of the system, including digitized voice alarms, graphic and action messages. Map and report formatting will be part of the software package. The software programming shall provide clear decision-making displays and text during critical alarm conditions that will allow the operator to make simple decisions during a crisis.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, roughing-in drawings, and details on the Drawings. Install electrical work and use electrical products complying with the requirements of the applicable Division 16 sections of these Specifications.

B. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with current NFPA 72, the National

Electrical Code, California Electrical Codes, and Article 760 of NFPA Standard 70. All wiring sizes shall conform to recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, and as indicated on the engineered shop drawings.

1. Install fire alarm system line voltage and low-voltage wiring in a suitable

raceway. Conceal fire alarm system conduit except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. Fasten flexible conductors, which bridge cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side and protect against abrasion. Tie and support the conductors neatly.

2. All wiring shall be run in a supervised fashion (i.e. no branch wring or dog-legged wiring) per NFPA requirements. Intelligent SLC loops may be T-tapped/branch wired due to inherent dynamic supervision.

3. Wiring splices shall be kept to a minimum with required splices to be made in designated terminal boxes or at field device junction boxes. Transposing or color code changes of wiring will not be permitted. End-of-line supervisory devices shall be installed with the last device on the respective circuit. Said device shall be appropriately marked designating it as the terminating device on the respective circuit.

4. No AC wiring or any other wiring shall be run on the same conduit as fire alarm wiring.

5. Number code and color code conductors appropriately and permanently for future identification and servicing of the system.

C. Conduit/Raceway: Refer to paragraph 2.15 (System Wiring) for allowed wiring.



1. Conduit and raceway system shall be installed as specified under Section

16000 Specification.

2. Minimum conduit size shall be ¾” EMT. Maximum conduit “fill” shall not exceed 40%.

3. Systems utilizing open wiring techniques with low smoke plenum cable shall provide conduit in all inaccessible locations, inside concealed walls, all mechanical/electrical rooms, or other areas where wiring might be exposed and subject to damage.

4. All vertical wiring and all main trunk/riser wiring shall be installed in a complete raceway/conduit system. All riser Boxes shall be adequately sized for the number of conductors transversing the respective box as well as the number of terminations required.

D. Checkout: Check wiring to ensure that wiring is in accordance with the system

manufacturer’s wiring diagrams and that the system is free of open circuits, short circuits, and grounds.

E. Identification: Refer to Section 16000 for additional requirements concerning

painting, nameplates and labeling. 3.5 COORDINATION

A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding installation of the fire alarm system with all trades. Adequate coordination shall be provided to ensure proper installation and interface to all peripheral items required to interact with the fire alarm to provide a complete and functional life safety system.

B. The installing contractor shall be fully responsible for coordinating all system and

device messages and system operation with the Owner’s Representatives and Operating Personnel.

3.6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TEST

A. All final control panel connections shall be made by a state licensed, factory-trained technical representative of the manufacturer and who shall supervise a System Checkout and Test to demonstrate and confirm to the Engineer, Owner’s Representative and the fire department, that the fire alarm system is 100% operational upon completion of the installation and certification of the system, and that it complies with all local code requirements and these specifications. It is intended that the System Checkout and Test be followed by a continuing program of inspection testing and maintenance.

B. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner a Maintenance, Inspection and

Quarterly Testing Contract in compliance with NFPA 72H, upon completion and system checkout.



C. The System Checkout and Test shall be performed within 30 days after the fire alarm installation and all peripheral systems are completed. The System Checkout and Test shall be performed by a minimum of two licensed fire alarm technicians , one of which is licensed by the State, and acceptable to the Engineer and the authority having jurisdiction. The test shall be performed in two parts and two-way radios for use by the test observers shall be provided. The first part shall be a full dry-run test with all subcontractors present, but without the Owner’s Representative or fire department present. After the dry-run test is successfully completed, then the final test with the Owner’s Representative and fire department present shall be performed.

D. The Contractor shall coordinate the test schedule with all necessary parties and

subcontractors required to be present for a complete and functional test.

E. The System Checkout and Test which is a comprehensive 100% inspection and test of all fire alarm system equipment and shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. Fire Alarm Control Equipment

a. A visual and functional test of all fire alarm control and auxiliary control equipment.

b. A visual inspection shall be conducted to establish that all electrical connections and equipment as required are properly installed and operating.

c. A remote functional fault simulation test shall be conducted on all relevant field wiring terminations to ensure that all wiring is property supervised as required.

d. All indicators shall be tested to ensure proper function and operation.

e. All device messages shall be verified to be correct, as installed.

f. Control panel supervisory and alarm current readings shall be taken to verify that the control panel has the appropriate power supplies and standby batteries to operate the system as required. A 3 minute general alarm stress test both under ac power and standby power shall be conducted to further ensure complete operation of the system.

g. The alarm signaling shall be visually and functionally tested to verify proper operation. Alarm device zoning shall be verified and automatic operation of the alarm signaling system shall be fully verified. Self-monitoring functions of the alarm signaling system shall be verified.

2. Fire Alarm Peripheral Devices: All fire alarm peripheral devices shall be functionally tested and the location and testing information recorded for each device.

3. Initiating Devices (Manual and Automatic)

a. All manual and automatic initiating devices shall be inspected to ensure proper placement and mounting as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated in these specifications.



b. All manual fire alarm stations and all automatic initiating devices (smoke detectors, waterflow switches, etc.) shall be functionally tested for alarm operation.

c. A minimum of 10% of initiating devices shall be functionally tested for proper wiring supervision. Failure of any tested device on any zone shall require that all devices in that zone shall be tested for supervision.

4. Alarm Signaling Devices:

a. All visual alarm indicators shall be functionally tested to ensure proper operation and that they are clearly visible.

b. Alarm signaling devices shall be field-checked and tested for proper operation and output.

c. Decibel reading shall be taken to ensure that the alarm signal level can be clearly heard in all areas of the facility, if required by the authority having jurisdiction. Additional devices may be required to provide adequate sound penetration (or as required by the local authority having jurisdiction). Contractor shall provide a unit price for such devices should they be required.

d. A minimum of 10% of the alarm signaling device shall be functionally tested for proper wiring supervision.

5. Reporting:

a. Upon completion of the 100% System Checkout and Test, four copies of the final report shall be documented, certified, and sent to the Engineer for distribution to the Owner to authorized Owner’s Representative indicating that all fire alarm equipment has been tested and is 100% operational.

b. The final report shall be generated by the equipment manufacturer’s headquarters or authorized representative to ensure integrity and uniformity of all testing information, stating the precise location and operational status of each and every peripheral device and shall include a Fire Alarm System Certification and Description Document per NFPA 72.

c. The 100% System Checkout and Test shall be performed by factory-trained representatives, and one of the individuals shall possess a state license for fire alarm installation supervision.

3.7 TRAINING

A. Upon completion of the installation, the equipment manufacturer shall furnish his services for a period of 8 hours of demonstration and training in the use of the system and its connected equipment. The 8 hour training period shall consist of operations and trouble shooting and technical trouble shooting of the fire alarm panel and system. All training shall be provided at the site.

3.8 AS-BUILT/RECORD DRAWINGS



A. Two sets of manuals and as-built drawings shall be provided by the Contactor. The as-built drawings shall include a reproducible drawing and two copies of each as-built drawing. The drawings and manuals shall be used in the training sessions. At this time, manuals describing the system equipment, as-built wiring diagrams, system keys, and certification of a 100% system audit will be delivered to the Owner. Record drawings shall include, but not be limited to:

1. As-built wiring and conduit layout diagrams incorporating wire color code

and/or label numbers and showing all interconnections in the system.

2. Actual locations of each input and output circuit termination, the identification marking of each circuit and the address of each device. Provide an input/output assignment chart. A unique identification number shall be assigned to each alarm initiating device. Identification should be by zone number and device number within the zone. This number shall be noted on the record drawing and also be permanently mounted adjacent to the device or its mounting base. Markings with felt-tip pens will not be acceptable.

3. As-built schematic wiring diagrams of all control panels, modules, and communications panels.

4. As-built smoke detector location drawings showing location dimension of each detector and alarm box.

5. Copies of the manufacturer’s technical literature on all major parts of the system including detectors, manual stations, signaling appliances, alarm panels, communication panels and equipment and power supplies.

6. Completed Fire Alarm System Certification and Description requirements.

3.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall instruct the Owner’s designated employees in the proper operation of the system and all required periodic maintenance. This instruction will include three copies of a written summary in booklet or binder form so employees can retain for future reference. Basic operating instructions for the system shall be framed and mounted at the main control unit. Refer to Section 16000 for additional requirements.

3.10 WARRANTY

A. The fire alarm and security systems shall be warranted against defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for a period of 1 year from the date of acceptance by the Owner. Any equipment shown to be defective shall be repaired, replaced or adjusted free of charge.

B. The warranty period shall begin after successful completion of the Owner’s

inspections and tests. In the event of any system malfunctions or nuisance alarms, the Contractor will take appropriate corrective action. This action may necessitate a repeat of the response test if the Owner so desires. Continued improper performance during warranty shall be cause to require the Contractor to remove the system.



END OF SECTION


Addendum 1, 03/19/2012 16 800 - 1 Flashing Beacons

SECTION 16 800

FLASHING BEACONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section covers the work related to the flashing beacons.


C. Flashing Beacons shall conform to Section 86-4.09, “Flashing Beacons,” of the CTSS, dated May 2006.

D. Where reference is made to the California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (CA MUTCD or MUTCD), the referenced publication is the January 2010 edition, Part 4, Highway Traffic Signals, Chapter 4K, Flashing Beacons, Section 4K.105 (CA), Flashing Beacons for Fire Stations.

E. The work is to be performed at the following location in the City of Tracy: 1. Grant Line Road, approximately 1300’ east of Mac Arthur Drive within the

immediate roadway frontage of Fire Station No. 92.

1.2 PROCUREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a flashing beacon system in accordance with Drawing TE-102 and the requirements specified herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Flashing Beacons 2. Type 9B pole 3. Type 15-FBS pole

1.4 CITY STANDARD PLANS

A. The City of Tracy Engineering Design & Construction Standards (December 2008), amendments thereto are by reference a part of the specifications for this project, and all materials and construction shall be in strict conformance with these except as modified herein. It is the Contractors responsibility to thoroughly review and understand all of the requirements stated and referenced. The following City Standard Plans are representative of those specifically referenced in these technical specifications and are provided for convenience to the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible to maintain and have available for reference by field and office personnel a complete set of all project specific and referenced plans and specifications.

1. 132 – Sidewalk Repair 2. 151 – Sign Post Installation 3. 151B – Overhead Street Name Sign 4. 151C – Notes for Traffic Signal-Arm Sign Mounting



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT

A. Conduit shall conform to the requirements in Section 86-2.05, “Conduit,” of the CTSS and the following provisions.

B. Conduit to be installed underground shall be rigid non-metallic type unless otherwise specified.

C. The conduit in a foundation and between a foundation and the nearest pullbox shall be the rigid steel type. All steel conduits in contact with ground shall be PVC coated steel conduit.

2.2 PULL BOXES

A. Pullbox shall be No. 5 unless specifically called out on the plans otherwise and conform to the requirements of the Section 86-2.07 “Traffic Pull Boxes” of the CTSS, ES-8 of the CTSP, and applicable sections of City of Tracy Standard Plan No. 140.

2.3 STANDARDS, STEEL PEDESTALS AND POSTS

A. Standards, steel pedestals and posts shall conform to Section 86-2.04, “Standards, Steel Pedestals and Posts”, of the State Standard Specifications.

B. The Type 15-FSB standards shall be modified from that shown on ES-7J as follows:

1. Slip base shall be omitted. 2. Sign light shall be omitted. 3. PEC shall be omitted. 4. Sign shall be a W11-8

2.4 CONDUCTORS AND WIRING

A. The Contractor shall furnish and supply Signal Cables as shown on the Plans and specified in these Special Provisions. Signal Cable shall conform to the Section 86-2.08, "Signal Cable", of the CTSS.

B. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance from the manufacturer in accordance with the provisions of Section 6-1.07, “Certificates of Compliance,” of the CTSS for all the conductors and cable furnished for the project.

2.5 VEHICLE FLASHERS

A. All materials for traffic flasher unit shall be Contractor furnished. Flasher section housing shall be metal type. Back plates shall be aluminum and shall be secured to the signal head in such a way as to prevent damage during high wind.

B. Traffic flashers faces on this project shall be twelve inch (12”) sections and shall utilize yellow light emitting diode (LED) signal modules. Each LED signal module shall consist of an assembly that utilized light emitting diodes as the light source in lieu of an incandescent lamp for use in traffic signal sections. The LED signal modules shall comply with the current California Department of Transportation Light Emitting Diode Specifications at the time of installation.

C. Traffic flashers shall be activated through a digital timer. The timer shall be capable



of programming a delay between the time that the push button is pressed and the time at which the flashers are activated. The timer shall be adjustable from a minimum of 10 seconds to a maximum of 4 minutes. The timer shall control the flashers directly or through a contactor switch to provide the correct voltage for proper operation of the flashers.

2.6 PRE-EMPTION PUSH BUTTON

A. The push button shall be a Polara Engineering, Inc., “Bulldog”, Model #BDLM2-G, vandal resistant, pedestrian push button in a State Type “A” push button housing, modified to fit flat against a wall. Red light on pushbutton housing shall be displayed during period that emitter is not activated. Green light shall be displayed during period that emitter is activated.

2.7 CABINET

A. Contract shall supply a small metal cabinet enclosure to be installed in the fire station garage. Cabinet shall house the transformer, fuse, timer and other appurtenances required to provided a fully functioning flashing beacon system and provide a pre-emption signal to the intersection at Grant Line Road and Mac Arthur Drive. Contractor shall submit cut sheets of the proposed cabinet and electronic components to the Architect for approval prior to purchase.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All Equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be guaranteed to the City, by the manufacturers, for a period of not less than one (1) year following the date of acceptance of the installation of such equipment unless specified otherwise. If any part (or parts) is found to be defective in materials or workmanship within the one year period and it is determined by the Engineer or by an authorized manufacturer’s representative that said part (or parts) cannot be repaired on the site, the manufacturer shall provide a replacement part (or parts) of equal kind and/or type during the repair period, and shall be responsible for the removal, handling, repair or replacement, and reinstallation of the part (or parts) until such time as the traffic signal and/or street lighting equipment is functioning as specified and as intended herein; the repair period shall be made upon notification.

B. The one (1) year guarantee on the repaired or replaced parts shall again commence with the date of acceptance by the City.

C. The work shall consist of: installation of new poles and foundation, flasher’s mast arm, “yellow” flashers, mast arm and pole mounted signs, cabinet enclosure, transformer, fuse, timer, and push button; abandonment of the interconnect conduit; and rewiring and incidentals at Grant Line Road and Mac Arthur Drive; and, installation of new conduit at Fire Station 96.

D. Furnishing, installing, and modifying flashing beacons shall conform to the provisions in Section 86, “Signals, Lighting and Electrical Systems,” of the CTSS, as shown on the Plans, described in these Special Provisions, and directed by the Engineer.

C. Traffic signal work affecting the operation of the existing signals shall be coordinated with the City Traffic Engineer, 48 hour notice required.



D. All systems shall be complete and in satisfactory operating conditions at the time of Contract acceptance.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LIST AND DRAWINGS

A. Where the Contractor installs electrical equipment as detailed on the plans, the submission of detailed drawings and diagrams will not be required.

3.3 SCHEDULING OF WORK

A. The Contractor will aim all traffic signal heads under the Engineer’s direction before placing either system in operation.

B. Flashing beacon system will not be placed in operation prior to the Engineer’s acceptance.

C. After the intersection is placed in operation, a five-day fully operational test period will begin. The Contractor shall correct any failures or malfunctions occurring in that five-day period. After such corrections are completed, a new five-day test will recommence.

3.4 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC

A. Maintenance of traffic shall conform to Section 7-1.08 “Public Convenience”, 7-1.09 “Public Safety”, 12-3.04 “Portable Delineators” of the CTSS, Manual of Traffic Controls for Construction and Maintenance Work Zones, and these special provisions.

B. The Contractor shall notify the local authorities of the Contractor’s intent to begin work at least five (5) days before work is begun. The Contractor shall cooperate with local authorities relative to handling traffic through the area and shall make his own arrangements relative to keeping the working area clear of parked vehicles.

C. Full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for doing all work involved in maintaining traffic, as specified in these Special Provisions, and as directed by the Engineer, shall be considered as included in the lump sum price paid for the flashing beacon system and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

3.5 CONSTRUCTION GENERAL.

A. Foundation construction shall conform to 86-2.03 “Foundations” of the CTSS. The Engineer shall approve the foundation before any concrete is poured.

B. Full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for doing all work involved in the installation of foundations for the flashing beacon system, as specified in herein, and as directed by the Engineer, shall be considered as included in the lump sum price paid for the flashing beacon system and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

3.6 PULL BOXES

A. Installation of pullbox shall conform to the requirements of Section 86-2.07 “Traffic Pull Boxes” of the CTSS, and applicable sections of City of Tracy Standard Plan No. 140.



B. Grout shall not be placed in bottom of pullboxes.

C. Pull boxes shall not be installed in any part of a driveway, curb ramp or other traveled way unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer.

1. All pull boxes shown on the plans shall be size No. 5 unless otherwise noted.

3.7 CONDUIT

A. Contractor shall use jacking and boring methods to install the conduit across travelways.

3.8 CONDUCTOR AND WIRING

A. Splices shall be insulated by “Method B.

3.9 BONDING AND GROUNDING

A. All metallic conduits, nonmetallic conduit grounding wire, standards, service equipment, controllers, and ballasts shall be made mechanically and electrically secured to form a continuous system and shall be effectively grounded.

B. Grounding of metallic conduit, service equipment and neutral conductor at service points shall be accomplished as required by the applicable code and the serving utility.

C. A bare No. 8 copper grounding wire shall be run continuously in ALL CONDUIT RUNS. The copper wire shall be grounded per Code.

3.10 PRE-EMPTION PUSH BUTTON

A. Contactor shall install push button sign as described in “Detail A” on the plans.

B. Contractor shall supply twelve (12) spare light bulbs for use in the pushbutton housing.

C. Push button shall be connected to the signal controller at Grant Line Road and Mac Arthur Drive. Two (2) number twelve (12) wires shall be run from the push button to a controller and connected to an Emergency Vehicle Preemption (EVP) card, channel “D”.

D. Push button shall activate a digital timer which in turn will activate vehicle flashers and preemption at Grant line Road and Mac Arthur Drive.

3.10 FOUNDATIONS

A. Portland cement concrete shall conform to Section 49, “Piling,” of the CTSS.

B. Exposed foundation anchor bolts shall be properly protected with either barricades or traffic cones until the standards are erected.

3.11 SERVICE CONNECTION

A. Contractor shall coordinate with architect and fire station electrician to provide 120V service with a separate 20A breaker.

PART 4 - PAYMENT



4.1 GENERAL

A. Station 96 Flashers and Preemption Design shall be paid for on a lump sum basis. The lump sum price paid for Station 92 Flashers and Preemption Design shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for doing all work involved in installing the new poles, mast arms, flasher, signs, pullboxes, and conduits, rewiring as required, and removing pullbox and conduit, as shown on the Plans, as specified in these Special Provisions, and as directed by the Engineer, including but not limited to sawcutting, splicing flasher conductors, installation of conduits, pullbox, restoring sidewalk, pavement and appurtenances damaged or destroyed during construction, coordinating with other trades and utilities, and making all required tests.

END OF SECTION

TRACY FIRE STATION 92SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS TRACY FIRE STATION 92 00005 - 6 Certifications Pages...

Documents

Transcript of TRACY FIRE STATION 92SHAH KAWASAKI ARCHITECTS TRACY FIRE STATION 92 00005 - 6 Certifications Pages...